RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSETJM EDITED BY THE CURATOR. Vol. VII. PRINTED BY ORDER OF THE TRUSTEES R ETHERIDGE, Junb., J.P , Curator. SYDNEY, 1908-1910. LIBRARY]^ CONTENTS. No. 1. Published 9th March, 1908. Page North Queensland Ethnography. Bulletin No. 10. Marriage Ceremonies ami Infant Life, By Walter E. Roth .. ... ... 1 An undescribed Australian Cystiphyllid — Mictocystis — from the Upper Silurian Rocks of the Mount Canoblas District. By R. Etheridge, Junr. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ._ 18 On an unusual Nesting-site of Sauloprocta melaleuca. By Alfred J. North 21 Ancient Stone Implements from the Yodda Valley Goldfield, North- East British New tiuinea. By R. Etheridge, Junr. .. ... 24 Un three apparently undescribed Birds from Henderson or Elizabeth Island, Paumotu Group. By Alfred J. North ... ... ... 29 Note on the Cephalochorda in the Australian Museum. By W. A. Haswell 33 Studies in Australian Fishes. No. 1. By Allan R. McCulloch ... 36 Studies in Australian Araneida?. No. 5. By \Y. J Rainbow ... 44 Studies in Australian Crustacea. No. 1, By Allan R. McCulloch ... 51 Mineralogical Notes. No. 6. Topaz, Beryl, Anglesite, Rutile, Atacamite. Pyrite. By Chas. Anderson 60 36 IV RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. No. 2. Published 11th September, 1908- Notes on Mimicry and Variation. By W. J. Rainbow 69 North Queensland Ethnography. Bulletin No. 11. Miscellaneous Papers. 1. Tabu and other forms of Restriction. 2. Countin and Enumeration. 3. Signals on the Road ; Gesture Language. 4. Progressive Koko-yimidir Exercises. By Walter E. Roth ... 74 Mollusca from one hundred fathoms, seven miles east of Cape Pillar, Tasmania. By C. Hedley and W. L, May 10S A New Genus and Species of Turtle, from North Australia. By Allan R. McCulloch 120 Miueralogical Notes. No. 7. Rhodonite. By Chas. Anderson ... 129 Occasional Note — No. 1.— Sepia braggi, Verco. A record for the State. By C. Hedley 134 No. 3. Published 15th January, 1909. Lower Cretaceous Fossils from the Sources of the Barcoo, Ward and Nive Rivers, South Central Qneensland. Part 2. — Cephalopoda. By R. Etheridge, Junr. 135 North Queensland Ethnography, Bulletin No. 12. On certain Initiation Ceremonies. By Walter E. Both 106 Notes on the Nesting-site of G'erygone per&onata, Gould. By Alfred J. North ' 18 CONTENTS. No. 4. Published 30th August, 1909. North Queensland Ethnography. Bulletin No. 13. Fighting Weapons. By Walter E. Both 189 Notes on the Architecture, Nesting Habits, and Life Histories of Australian Araneidffi, based on Specimens in the Australian Museum. Part 7. — Entelegyme (continued). By W. J. Rainbow ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 212 Lower Cretaceous Fossils from the Sources of the Barcoo, Ward and Nive Rivers, South Central Queensland. Part 2 (continued) — Cephalopoda. By R. Etheridge, Junr. .. ... ... ... 235 On a new Species of Aphrodita. By T. Harvey Johnston ... ... 241 On a Cestode from Dacelo gigas, Bodd. By T. Harvey Johnston ... 24(i An Australian Chittognath. By T. Harvey Johnston ... ... ... 2~>I On a New H;emoprotozoan. By T. Harvey Johnston ... ... ... 257 Descriptions of New and Notes on other Australian Polyplacophora. By C. Hedley and A. F. Basset Hull 200 The Results of Deep-sea Investigations in the Tasman Sea. I. — The Expedition of H.M.C.S. "Miner." No. 5.— The Polyzoa. By C. M. Maplestone ... 267 Mineralogical Notes: No. 8. — Topaz, Anglesite, and other Australian Minerals. By Chas. Anderson ... .. ... .., ... *J74 A Revised Census of the Terrestrial Mollusca of Tasmania. By W. F. Petterd and C. Hedley ' ... 283 Studies in Australian Crustacea. No. 2. By Allan R. McCulloch ... .SO") Studies ^Australian Fishes. No. 2. By Allan R. McCulloch ... 315 Description of the Female, with Nest and Eggs, of the Cinnamon- chested Ground Thrush (Cinclosoma marginatum, Sharpe). By Alfred J. North ... 322 Aboriginal Drawings in Rock Shelters at Bundanoon, New South Wales. By W. W. Thorpe 322 Notes on Australian Entozoa No. !. By T. Harvey Johnston 322 No. 5. Published 28th February, 1910. Title Page, Contents, and Index. LIST OF THE CONTRIBUTORS, With Reference to the Articles contributed by each. Anderson, Chas.— Page Mineralogical Notes, No. 6. — Topaz, Beryl, Anglesite, Rutile, Atacamite, Pyrite ... .. ... ... ... ... 60 No. 7. —Rhodonite 129 No. 8. — Topaz, Anglesite, and other Australian Minerals ... "274 Etheridge, R., Junr.— An Undescribed Australian Cystiphyllid — Mictocystis — from the Upper Silurian Rocks of the Mount Canoblas District ... IS Ancient Stone Implements from the Yodda Valley Goldfield, North-East British New Guinea ... ... ... ... 24 Lower Cretaceous Fossils f>-om the Sources of the Barcoo, Ward and Nive Rivers, South Central Queensland. Part 2. — Cephalopoda .. .., ... ... ... ... ... 135,235 Haswell, W A - Notes on the Cephalochorda in the Australian Museum ... ... 33 Hedley, Chas.— Sepia brag gi, Ver co. A Record for the State ... ... .. 134 Descriptions of New and Notes on other Australian Polyplaco- phora. By C. Hedley and A. F. Basset Hull 260 Mollusca from one hundred fathoms, seven miles east of Cape Pillar, Tasmania. By C. Hedley and \Y. L, May 108 A Revised Census of the Terrestrial Mollusca of Tasmania. By F. W. Petterd and 0. Hedley 283 Hull, A- F- Bassett- Description of New and Notes on Other Australian Polyplaco- phora. By C. Hedley and A. F. Bassett Hull ... 260 Johnston, T. Harvey— On a New Species of Aphrodite On a Cestode from Dacelo yigas, Bodd. An Australian Chajtognath On a new Hsemoprotozoan Notes on Australian Eutozoa. No. 1. 241 246 251 257 M2!> VIII LIST OF THE CONTRIBUTORS. McCulloch, Allan R. Studies in Australian Crustacea No. 1 51 No. 2 305 Studies in Australian Fishes, No. 1 36 No. 2 ... 315 A New Genus and Species of Turtle, from North Australia ... 126 Maplestone, C. M — The Results of Deep-Sea Investigations in the Tasman Sea. I. — The Expedition of H.M.C.S. " Miner." No. 5. -Polyzoa ... 267 May. W. L.~ Mollusca from one hundred fathoms, seven miles east of Cape Pillar, Tasmania. By C. Hedley and W. L. May 10S North, Alfred J.- On an unusual Nesting-site of Sauloprocta melalenca .. ... 21 On three apparently undescribed Birds from Henderson or Eliza- beth Island, Paumato Group ... ... ... ... ... 29 Notes on the Nesting-site of Geryqone perxonata, Gould ... .. 1S6 Description of the Female, with Nest and Eggs, of the Cinnamon- chested Ground Thrush (Cinchsoma marginatum, Sharpe) ... 322 Petterd, W. F- A Revised Census of the Terrestrial Mollusca of Tasmania. By \V. F. Petterd and C. Hedley 283 Rainbow, W- J- Studies in Australian Araneidse. No. 5 ... ... ... ... 44 Notes on Mimicry and Variation ... ... ... ... .. 09 Notes on the Architecture, Nesting Habits, and Life Histories of Australian Araneidae, based on Specimens in the Australian Museum. Part 7. — Entelegyna? (continued) ... ... ... 212 Roth, Walter E- — North Queensland Ethnography. Bulletin No. 10. Marriage Ceremonies and Infant Life ... ... ... ... ... 1 Bulletin No. 11. — Miscellaneous Papers : — 1. Tabu and other Forms of Restriction. 2. Counting and Enumeration. 3. Signals on the Road ; Gesture Language. 4. Progressive Koko-yimidir Exercises ... ... ... ... ... ... 74 Bulletin No. 12. On Certain Initiation Ceremonies 166 Bulletin No. 13. Fighting Weapons 189 Thorpe W> W.- Aboriginal Drawings in Rock Shelters at Bundanoon, New South Wales 325 LIST OF THE PLATES. PART I. Frontispiece — Mimicry and Variation. North Queens- land Butterflies. I. -III. North Queensland Aboriginal Customs — Marriage Ceremonies and Infant Life. IV. -V. Mictocystis endophylloides, Kth. Jil. VI. -VII. Ancient Stone Implements, New Guinea. VIII. IX. Henderson Island. X.-XI. Australian Fishes. XII. Australian Crustacea. XIII. Australian Minerals — Top.iz. XIV. ,, ,, Anglesite. XV. ,, ,, Anglesite. Rutile, Atacamite and Pyrite. XVI. ,, ,, Beryl and Anglesite. PART II. XVII. North Queensland Aboriginal Customs — Gesture Language. XX. ,, ,, — Winders and Whirler Charm. XXI ,, ,. — Painted Spear Heads and Charm. XXII. -XXIV. Tasmanian Mollusca. XX V. -XX VII. Turtle from North Australia. XX VIII. XXIX. Australian Miuerals— Rhodonite, LIST OF PLATES. PART III. XXX.-XLIX. Lower Cretaceous Fossils, from North Queensland. L.-LVI. North Queensland Aboriginal Customs — Initiation Ceremonies. LVII. Nest of Masked Bush -Warbler built in close proximity to a Wasp's Nest, PART IV. LVIII.-LXI. North Queensland Aboriginal Customs — Fighting Weapons. LXTL — LXIV. Australian Araneidaa. LXV. — LXVIII. Lower Cretaceous Fossils from North Queensland. LXIX. Aphrodita haswell, Jnstn. LXX. Cestode — Similuncinius dacelonis, Jnstn. LXXI. Australian Chretognath — Sagitta australis. Jnstn. LXXII. Hcemoprotozoan — Hmmogregarina amethyst in a, Jnstn. LXXIII.-LXXIV. Australian Polyplacophora. LXXV-LXXVIII. Polyzoa LXXIX. Australian Minerals — Topaz and Gypsum. LXXX. ,, ,, Anglesite and Azurite. LXXXI. ,, ,, Phosgenite, Monazite and Cerus- site. LX XXII. -LXXX VII. Tasn.auian Mollusca. LXXXVIII-LXXXIX. Australian Crustacea. XC.-XCI. Australian Fishes. XCII. Nest and Eggs of the Cinnamon-chested Ground Thrush. XCII1.-XCVI. Rock Shelter at Bundanoon. CORRECTIONS. Page 132, line 11— add "C." ,, line 22— delete " it." ,, 213, line 5— for " bullock?' read " bulloclcii." ,, 214, line 4 — for '* cemidce" read " cemula." , , 215, line 13 from the bottom — for "silk on stabilimentum" read " silk or stabilinu ntum." ,, 221, line 22— for " Belle View Hill" read " Belle Vue Hill." ,, 262 — Chiton torri, Hedley and Hull. As this name is preoccupy I by Mr. H. Suter (Proc. Malac. Roc, vii., 1907, p. 295) for a New Zealand species, the Australian shell may be known as Chiton torriana, Hedley and Hull. ,, 270, line 4 — for " avieircularia" read " avicularia. " ,, 285, line 3 — for Bothriembyron gunni" read " Bothriembryon gunnii." ,, 285, line 8 — for " Bulinus gunnii" read " Bulimus gunnii." ,, 285, line 14— after " Mt. Farrell" insert " Family Helicidre," ,, 330, under heading No. 5, line 3 — after "Adelaide" insert "Johnston." ,. 331, line 1— omit "S." ,. ,, line S-for"0" read "8." ,, ,, line 12— for " 10" read "9." ,, 335, line 11 — for "Australia" read "Australian human." ,, 336, under heading 23, line 2— omit the comma after " which." Plate xiii., explanation — lines 3 and 5 for " Inorthographic " read "Orthographic." ,, 1., explanation — for " Amboipo" read " Amboiba." ,, li. , explanation — for " Amboida" read " Amboiba." ,, liii., explanation — for "Amboida" read " Amboiba. "' ,, Ixiii., explanation — for " Gasteracantya" read " Gasteracantha.' „ Ixxii., explanation -for " fig. 28" read " fig. 23." ,, lxxxi. — transpose 2 and 3. By NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY. Bulletin No. 10. Marriage Ceremonies and Infant Life. Walter E. Roth Magistrate of the Pomeroon District, British Guiana; late Chief Protector of Aborigines, Queens- land ; Corresponding Member of the Anthropological Societies, Berlin and Florence, the Anthropological Institute, London, etc. (Plates i.-iii.). Contents. Sect 1. Essentials of Marriage : — PAGE Suitable Exogamous Group 1 2. Absence of Intimate Consanguinity 2 3. Suitable Social Status 3 4. Traces of Primitive Communal Marriage.. 3 5. Ceremonial Signs of Marriage 3 6. Marriage by : — Betrothal — Pennefather River 3 7. Princess Charlotte Bay 4 8. Cape Bedford ... 5 9. Upper Normanby River 5 10. Bloom field River 5 11. Cape Grafton 6 12. Tully River 6 13. Rockhampton District.. 6 14. X. W. Districts 7 15. Official Authority 7 16. Inheritance (Widows) 8 17. Mutual Attachment 9 IS. Capture 10 19. Exchange and Barter 11 20. Marital and First-night's Orgie ... 11 21. Divorce ... 11 22. Polygamy; Polyandry 12 23. Twins; triplets ... 12 24. Infanticide ... 13 25. Abortion ... 14 26. Management of Babies ... 14 27. Birth and Mortalitv Rates ... 15 1. Every marriage, independently of the basis upon which it is being contracted, whether by betrothal, authority, mutual attachment, inheritance or exchange, must at least be regulated 2 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. according to the primary exogamous groups of which the con- tracting parties are members. This is an essential before it can be publicly recognised, its breach constituting, according to the district where committed, a crime punishable by death (e.g., North- West Districts) down to a matter for ridicule and contempt (Tully River). Indeed, in those rare cases of what might be called irregular marriages, the rest of the community will assist another boy with more lawful claim, i.e., an individual of the suitable exogamous group, to get possession of the woman in question for himself. Furthermore, under such circumstances both parties are continually being ridiculed, nagged and sneered at by the other females, a course of action usually quite sufficient to cause a separation. 2. But because the two would-be contracting parties do actually belong to suitable exogamous groups, it does not necessarily follow that all impediments to the proposed marriage are removed. For instance, in the North- West generally, a man cannot marry his father's sister's daughter, his mother's brother's daughter, or his daughter's daughter, while a woman must carnally avoid her mother's brother's son, her father's sister's son, or her son's son, etc., notwithstanding the fact that these particular relationships are necessarily located in the same exogamous groups1 which otherwise would be allowed to join in permanent sexual part- nership. Similarly, on the Bloomtield River, where the social nomenclature has also been worked out, the same thing applies. The same holds true for other districts equally remote from one another, the commonly accepted view that the complicated systems of class-organisation met with amongst the different tribes act as a check on consanguinity requiring re-consideration. Indeed, ever since I suggested2 a probable interpretation of the class-systems, closer investigation has led me to believe in its reality, viz., that they have been devised, by a process of natural selection, to regulate the food supply. And so far as the food supply is concerned, the group-system certainly regulates marriage, but just as surely it does not check consanguinity. Even amongst types of black folk where the standard of morality is even for a primitive people comparatively low, and where but little attention from a marital point of view need necessarily be paid io the exogamous groups, e.g., on the Tully River, there is an absolute absence of familiarity between blood brother and si^t'-r. Whatever the general faults of the natives may be, incest 1 Roth — Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1897, Sect. 65, table. 2 Roth— Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1897, Sect. 71. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 3 is not included in them, and I am satisfied in my own mind that the idea which has prompted him to avoid as far as possible the intermarriage of blood relatives represents a gradual development of the moral sense. 3. A third essential for the marriage to be publicly recognised is that one (Princess Charlotte Bay, Tully River, etc.) or both (North-West Districts) of the contracting parties must be of suitable rank so far as initiation is concerned : where one is necessary it is that of the male, 4. A feature of more than ordinary interest is the right of marital relationship between a husband and his wife's blood- sisters on the Pennefather and Tully Rivers, and between a wife and her husband's blood brothers on the Tully River. Cases of this nature, coupled with the handing over of the widow to her late husband's brother, bear strong evidence of communal marriage in a very primitive condition, before the distinction had come to be made between blood- and group-members of the different class-s3rstems. The sexual orgie at the expense of the bride upon her initiation into womanhood is also significant from this point of view.3 5 The ceremonial sign of marriage is represented by the building of a hut and the lighting of a fire on the part of the girl (though this duty may be performed by her mother on the Upper Normanby River) and by the seizing of her wrist on the part of the husband. In the North-West District sign language, the ideagram for marriage by capture, is represented by a wrist- grasp. i There is no public celebration or rejoicing on the advent of a marriage, nor do the contracting parties don anything in the way of special ornaments or decorations. There would seem to be no special season of the year devoted to the celebration of marriage. In those districts where the burial ceremonies include the growth of the mourner's hair, no marriages take place till this is cut, at the same time that the widows are handed over. In cases where a man marries into a tribe foreign to him, his wife and children become members of his own. 6. On the Pennefather River betrothal is the usual form of giving in marriage, the old men usually getting the pick : even while yet in utero an infant is occasionally promised in this way on the chance of its being a girl. A present of some food, spears, etc., is usually sufficient, and the promise is invariably adhered 3 Roth— Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1897, Sect. 305. * Roth— Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1897, Fig. 197. 4 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. to. As a rule, the marriage is not consummated until the girl is at full puberty, but what with the advent of Europeans and the increasing competition for the possession of wives, she is now often taken possession of at an earlier age, indeed so soon as the convenient opportunity occurs. The public ceremonial of marriage consists in the bride building the bridegroom's hut and lighting the fire there. 7. In the hinterland of Princess Charlotte Bay, betrothal is left to chance, the arrangements for which are generally brought to a head by the boy's father's sister. When, before puberty, the boy's tooth is being knocked out, the names of various eligible girls are called, the one which happens to be called when the tooth is actually out being recognised as the betrothed ; needless to say, the name of the favourite is always kept to the very last. The Koko-warra speak of the girl betrothed by a special term ; if of the same tribe, she is generally chosen from a district different from that of her future husband's. After the young man has passed the first initiation ceremony, and the girl's parents, for family and other considerations, consider him old enough, he is brought to the girl's camp. It is the girl's father \\ ho brings him from the single men's quarters where he has been camping, and leads him during the course of the night into his future bride's hut, whence her mother has just previously taken her departure. The alleged object of this arrangement is for the girl to get accustomed to the presence of her future husband, her parents keeping strict watch at the hut entrance to see that no sexual liberties take place and to ensure the youth's return to his own quarters before day-break. This procedure continues perhaps for a few weeks, certainly for two or three, the girl and her parents being fed at the trouble, and mollified (by spears, necklaces, etc.) at the expense of the young man. When finally the mother-in-law builds a hut, lights a fire, and leaves her daughter there, the young man enters to take up his permanent abode, and consummate the marriage undisturbed, his parents- in-law, henceforth tabu to him, returning to their own camp. It will be noted that there is no restriction of age or social status at which the bride may be delivered up, and it is of no uncommon occurrence to see an individual carrying on his shoulder his little child-wife who is perhaps too tired to toddle any further ; the only essential is that the girl must always have an incisor knocked out previous to her having sexual connection with her lord and master. All that the wife's parents look to is that their son-in-law is of suitable age and rank and blessed with an abundance of worldly goods, e.g., spears, wommeras, necklaces, etc., which are invariably presented as a sort of solatium. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. O 8. At Cape Bedford a system of betrothal exists, though it does not appear to be carried out very strictly. It is more usual for the man to ask the parents' consent when the girl is of marriageable age. The parents "do not give her to him willingly or with kindly feelings. Both mother and father strike the young man's head first ; when he is covered with blood they give her to him. Once given to him, the wife builds the hut and lights the fire But the girl does not readily go to meet her husband ; her mother and father have to send her before she will go ; then she meets him. Furthermore, during the dajT-time, she will not sit alongside him in the shade. She is always with her mother. So much for the bride."5 She must, however, pass one whole night with him before the marriage ceremony, such as it is, can be publicly recognised. This -triking of the young man's head, the symbolism of which I have been informed represents the idea of the bridegroom having to fight the parents for her, is paralleled in the neighbourhood of Cape Grafton (see Sect. 11), where the future husband has to clash swords, etc., as in mimic warfare with certain of the girl's relatives before the marriage can be consummated. 9. At Boggy Creek, Upper Normanby River, there is a similar practice of asking the parent's consent, the fire being kindled and the hut built near the single men's quarters by the bride's mother, who carries the young man's belongings, spears, etc., to the new home; her father then comes and fetches the bridegroom. Or again, the wife may be given to her future husband by the wrist, the woman herself, in this case, kindling the fire. Of course in these cases where the parents' wishes have to be con- sulted, there is always a solatium in the way of presents. 10. On the Bloomfield River children are betrothed at birth. If already married, the husband will take charge of his betrothed wife when about four or five years old ; this is especially the case if he moves about a ^reat deal or lives some distance away from her tribe. If not already married, he has to wait until such time as she reaches puberty, though if close upon that age and he is about to leave for some other district, he will take her by the wrist in the presence of all the other natives — the ceremonial sign of marriage — tell her she is his, and warn her parents to look after her well and to report to him at once should anyone attempt to interfere with her. If ultimately the girl is too shy to go to her future husband's hut, her brother or father will accompany her ; if still recalcitrant, her husband will seize her 5 Roth— Bull. 2— Sect. 31l>. 6 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. wrist and pull her in. A man here is always supposed to make presents to his future mother-in-law. 11. At Cape Grafton betrothal may similarly take place in infancy, the boy being allowed to marry her after his passing the first initiation ceremony, and cases have been mentioned to me where the future husband has put his brand, in the shape of three vertical cuts, upon the girl's shoulder. 12. Amongst the Tully River natives betrothal is also recog- nised; a father can give his daughter, as infant or maid, to any man young or old so long as he has the two essential decorative scars indicative of his initiation. The individual to whom she is now given or betrothed can take her straight away with him there and then if he so chooses, but if very young he usually loans her tu some comparatively old man,6 necessarily belonging to the same exogamous group as himself, to sleep with and train for him ; this action on the part of the elder is deemed to make the little child's genitalia develop all the more speedily. 13. At Torilla and Pine Mountain, on the east central coast, the following procedure7 used to be observed in the " old days." When a little girl is about three years old some blackfellow wants her to be betrothed to him, but as it is not considered good form to ask her parents, he constantly makes them presents of tit-bits of food and honey, weapons, etc. Of course they understand what he is after, and provided they fancy him for a son- in-law will call together the uncles (the girl's mother's brothers) and consult with them. If these latter are agreeable, either the father or an uncle will ask the would-be bridegroom whether he would like to have the girl, offer to betroth her to him, and he accepts. The parents next paint the little girl, and stick into her hair a lot of feathers, which are mostly eagle-hawk. In the meantime the future husband sits quite still at his camp-fire, gazing intently on the ground, and on no pretext whatever will he look behind. The uncles next bring up the little baby girl so decorated and seat her at the back of, but not touching, her future lord and master. They then leisurely take the feathers one at a time from out of the child's hair and stick them successively into the man's. When the feathers are all fixed in the latter, he arises, and without once looking behind, leaves camp and does not return for a month or longer. After coming 6 It may be mentioned here that nothing is said (though it is of course impossible to learn how much may be thought) of any of the elder males, provided they belong to the proper groups, tampering with any young female children. 7 Reported to me by Mr. W. H. Flowers. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 7 back he continues to send the little girl various presents of food, etc., she being even allowed to go to his camp provided he happens to have anything particularly good to eat, and help him partake of it. On the other hand, he is not allowed to visit his betrothed's camp, or speak to her mother, always sending his presents through a third person, or giving them to her personally should he happen to meet her unaccompanied by her mother. When the girl's father and her mother's brothers consider her old enough for the marriage to be consummated, they tell the bridegroom so, but never a word to the girl. The future husband thereupon paints himself up, takes all4 his fighting weapons with him, and tells the news to the other men of his own exogamous group. He next watches his opportunity to find the girl away from her parents or out in the bush with the women, approaches her as silently as he can, and seizes her by the wrist. The other females will try and help her to get away, but he will call upon his group-mates for assistance to keep them off. Whether she approves or not, she will scream and exert her utmost to free herself, even biting his hand to make him let go, and provided she can release her wrist she has a chance of escape ; her endeavours, however, invariably prove futile : she is dragged by him to his camp and the marriage consummated, after which any of her husband's group-mates who have rendered assistance may claim the temporary loan of her. Being thus proclaimed his wife, she lives with him at his camp, although he will probably take her away from the neighbourhood of her parents for some little time to come. 14. In the North-West, though I cannot find any traces of the practice in the Boulia District, a form of betrothal takes place at the first male initiation ceremony on the Upper Georgina River, certainly among the Yaro-inga,8 and perhaps, indepen- dently of initiation, in the Leichhardt-Selwyn District among the Kalkadun. 15. Throughout the Boulia District, each male can have at least two wives, an official one supplied him as a member of the com- munity by the Camp-council, and an unofficial one of his own choice, whose love, such as it is, he finds reciprocated ; the former woman is known as the no-po, the latter as the pandira, though both share equal rights and responsibilities. Supposing that the Camp- council consider a man fit and suitable to have a wife, he has to take whomsoever is assigned to him thus: — The brothers, or mother's brothers, of the young woman talk among themselves 8 Eoth— Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1S97— Sect. 302. 8 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, concerning this particular individual being a bachelor, etc., and convene all the other males available of first-initiation rank and upwards to a Camp-council where the qualifications of the marriageable men are put under consideration ; during the deliberations, in which no women are allowed to take part, the person subjudice can be present to listen only, but more usually he will leave camp to go on some fishing or hunting expedition. If all is found to be proper and satisfactory,0 and the vote of the Camp-council must be unanimous, the woman's brothers, or mother's brothers, present the bridegroom elect some time during the day with a smouldering fire-stick. This stick has nothing whatever distinctive about it ; any small piece of wood, about five or six inches long, of any material or shape, is sulficient. The same intermediaries some time after sundown give a similar stick to the bride and direct her to her future husband's hut, whither it is obligatory on her part to go and remain. This ceremony is binding on both sides, and except by mutual agree- ment, the couple can only be parted by death. 16. The widow becomes the property of one of her late husband's brothers, the consummation of her re-marriage usually only taking place at Cape Bedford, the Bloomfield River, Cape Grafton, etc., when the mourner's hair which has been allowed to grow during the burial ceremonies is finally cut; on the Lower Tully, however, she can on occasion be re-married on the day following her late husband's decease, independently of all the complicated burial customs taking place there. At Cape Bedford the deceased's next younger blood- or group-brother, the former having the prior claim, has the first choice of the widow, who is not apparently forced to re-marry, though she generally thinks better of it and does. She is hammered on the head the day after her husband's decease, with a wommera, by all the old men round about, who excuse their conduct b}7 saying that from the very first she was jealous of some other girl and forbade her late husband to have her, and further that she used to eat his food, which otherwise they might have had and enjoyed.10 On the Bloomfield River the widow's own group- or blood-brother has the greatest say as to which one of her late spouse's brothers she has to be given to. There are often great disputes over arranging '' As to the suitable exogamous groups, both of them of at least first- initiation rank. 1(1 Roth — Bull. 2 — Sect. 31r>, where it will be noted that the hammering does not take place if the deceased was an old man. [It is not worth while avenging an old man whose infirm "spirit" could do the survivors no harm.— W.E.R.] NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 9 this matter. The finally chosen one stands up to have the spear thrown over him11 by the other brothers who have next claim, for until this is done he is aware that his assumed right is not generally admitted ; occasionally, if any dispute or unpleasant- ness occurs, he may have to fight for her, though finally she is handed over to him by the wrist, and everything is settled. On the Tully River the widow is claimed by whichever of her late husband's group- or blood-brothers is old enough and strong enough to hold his own ; consequently there is often a fight or two over the settlement. 17. Permanent sexual union based on the mutual attachment of the two contracting parties may have to be confirmed, so to speak, by certain official formalities, or may in itself constitute a marriage recognised and upheld by the community, a great deal depending upon whether the woman is a free agent or not, i.e., single, married, betrothed, etc. In the Boulia District, under those circumstances where a man is in love with a single woman who reciprocates, but the Camp-council, for some reason or other, refuses ratification, they will probably elope some night and after living together for a month or two return to camp. But when they do come back, both have to run the gauntlet of the outraged community, certain members of which will cripple them with knives by hacking into the shoulders and buttocks, will bruise or hammer them about the limbs and head with sticks and boomerangs, or puncture the fleshy parts of the thighs with spears. The perpetrators of the punishment take very good care that the injuries inflicted should not prove fatal, because were this contingency to occur they know full well that the death would be avenged by the victim's brothers, etc. Having under- gone the recognised chastisement for breaking the old-established rule, the couple is now recognised as husband and wife.1- Such a wife is the unofficially loved-one already referred to as the pandira ; if she is not already of third initiation rank she returns to her mother's hut every morning, and neither prepares nor cooks her husband's food ; only after the birth of her first child does she remain at her husband's apartment permanently.13 Amongst- the Lower Tully River natives, all that either contract- 11 Roth— Bull. 8— Sect. 13. 1 2 That is to say, provided the former still wishes it ; otherwise the latter is restored to her brother, etc. , as being no longer required. Of course the amorous pair must be of suitable exogamous groups, and both of first- initiation rank ; the sure penalty in this district for any breach of the former essential would be the death of both parties, with the tacit consent of the blood-relatives. 13 The same arrangement holds good with the official wife, or no-pq. 10 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. ing parties has to do is to build a fresh hut and fire, and beckon the other in. Thus a good orthodox method here is for the woman to make the advance. Supposing she wants a particular boy, and they are members of the suitable exogamous group, she will make a new hut and light a fire thereon his return from the day's chase ; she then beckons him to come, and if he accepts and comes over, they are henceforth recognised as man and wife. A man may unfortunately fall in love with a married woman who reciprocates his affections and elope with her.14 After a varying length of absence the couple will return, the seducer bringing her back to her original husband, who either forgives him15 and takes her unto himself again, in which case she will receive more or less chastisement, or tells her newly found lover to keep her, expecting, of course, a solatium in the way of spears, etc., or else fights, the victor being now the recognised husband. The particular behaviour of the injured husband will vary accord- ing as he is afraid or not to fight ; where the two men do come to blows they make no attempt at actual killing, for fear of retribution, and their quari'el is not joined in by any others. If the original husband, in the North-Western Districts, refuses to receive his erring spouse, the Camp-council sees that she becomes and is recognised as the wife of the man she ran away with. A man eloping with a woman only betrothed to another has to answer for his conduct to the latter in the same manner as if she were already married. 18. Marriage by capture includes those cases where, on the part of the male, the attachment is one-sided, the female not being a consenting party, with the result that more or less force and stratagem has to be brought into requisition, such as there is being usually dependent upon whether she is a tribeswoman or a stranger. Thus, on the Tully River a man may beckon a woman over to his freshly built hut and newly lighted fire, and if she refuses, will pull her in by the wrist ; were she to scream too much, to show fight, and bite, etc., he will just thrash and hammer her and compel submission. The woman is absolutely passive ; she may howl and try to get away, but no notice is taken, she being now his recognised wife. In most cases, how- ever, marriage by capture of a tribeswoman is a somewhat risky affair, in that the self-assertive husband has to answer for his conduct to her male relatives, etc. Matters, of course, are different where the captured wife is a stranger, with no friends 14 In the N.W. Districts, if he values his life, she must be of the proper exogamous group. .-. Roth— Bull. 8— Sect. 2. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY ROTH. 11 amongst her captors. Here the dusky Lothario will generally get certain of his mates to lend assistance and organise a regular wife-hunting expedition, for which purpose certain hip- and tail- ornaments are included in the accoutrements ; lives may be lust on both sides, but if successful those who have rendered help will be rewarded with a promiscuous sexual orgie at the expense of the captive bride. 19. A man in the North- West Districts can exchange his true blood-sister for the blood-sister of another individual, the brothers or mother's brothers leading the brides to their respective future homes the same night, two marriages being thus simultaneously consummated. This arrangement only holds good, however, provided the contracting parties are of first-initiation rank and of suitable exogamous groups, and that the unanimous vote of the Camp-council sanctions it. Otherwise, and in other districts, although the husband has the power so to do, the selling or bartering of wives, independently of course of their temporary loan for veneiy, but rarely takes place ; even in the Tully River District, where, on an aboriginal standard, morals are at a very low ebb, this practice is not in vogue. Indeed, in making a retrospect of the cases known to me, I am inclined to believe that on the whole the selling of a wife is a late innovation intro- duced by contamination with an undesirable class of European and Asiatic settler. 20. Throughout the North-West Districts, the female at her first-initiation ceremony, which is obligatory before her marriage can be legally recognised, is forced to undergo sexual connection with certain of the " bucks " preseut.1 '; In marriage by capture, the bride has to submit to a similar ordeal from the males who have lent assistance. And on the Pennefather River there is a sort of "first-fruit" arrangement,17 the husband having to allow his wife promiscuous intercourse with certain " bucks " of his own group before he is considered to possess full and sole rights. 21. Divorce is permitted to the man, but seldom to the woman. At Cape Bedford the process is very simple ; if the husband does not want his wife, he just tells her so and lets her go, there being no fighting with the man who next takes posses- sion of her, she of course being now free to marry again. Amongst the Bloomfield River natives, on the other hand, divorce is allowed to either party, although the weaker vessel does not usually resort to such a measure unless well backed by powerful relatives. If the husband wishes to free himself, he 16 Roth— Ethnol. Studies, etc , 1897— Sect. 305. 17 Rev. N. Hey, of Mapoon, drew my attention to this. 12 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. generally arranges the matter quietly with one of his group- or blood-brothers, gets him to take her, and holding her by the wrist, hands her over. In those portions of the North- West where the Camp-council ratifies the marriage of two adults, and elsewhere where the ceremony is based on mutual attachment, the two contracting parties may mutually agree to sever marital relations. 22. Polygamy, and within certain limits, polyandry, are practised and recognised throughout the North, the limits depending upon the suitable exogamous groups, acquiescence or absence of the original husband, etc. As a general rule, the older the man, other things equal, the larger is his number of wives, the favourite usually being the youngest in so far as the husband most often takes her with him on any hunting expedi- tion, etc., such favouritism, however, having its disabilities in that while in camp she suffers most at the hands of her fellow - wives, all of whom usually live together. On the Bloomfield River, it would seem that the wife obtained by betrothal is thought far more of than the ones acquired by capture or inheritance. So also in the Boulia District the unofficial wife is always in greater favour than the official one chosen by the Camp-council ; indeed the term signiticatory of the former, pandira, lias almost come to mean a settler's mistress in contradistinction to his lawfully wedded wife. Once married, the husband has marital rights over his wife's blood-sisters, and indeed, as on the Pennefather River, where there is a plurality of wives, these are often blood-sisters. There would seem to be differences as to when these rights can be claimed ; on the Pennefather River, for instance, the husband has to ask his step-parents for them as each arrives at marriageable age, whereas on the Tully River he may satisfy his desires by force if necessary, irrespective of any age, unless the girl is already married, when he can do so by getting her husband's permission For, according to his mood, a husband here may or may not object to his wife having intercourse with any of his group- or blood-brothers, she being certainly punished were she to suffer the embraces of a member of any other exogamous group ; on the other hand, during her husband's absence she can without fear of any consequences, regularly sleep with any of his blood- brothers. 23. The birth of twins, full blood, judging by the case> that come under notice, does not appear to be of such common occurrence as that of half-caste ones. Several are known on the Lower Tully River, but only one example on the Bloomtirld. ' a The difficulty 1K On the authority of Mr, K. Hislop, who was for the greater part of his life resident there. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY ROTH. 13 of obtaining reliable data is increased by the fact that either no notice is taken of such an event, as at Cape Bedford, whereas in other districts they may be destroyed, and the information when sought for may prove unreliable. The only example I have seen (July, 1900) was that of Mundy's gin at Nunnville, via Cooktown, who had boy-twins, over twenty-four hours inter- vening between the two births. On the other hand, during 1899, three cases of half-caste twins came under my personal notice in the neighbourhood of Cooktown alone. That of aboriginal Rosie19 was extremely interesting: — On July 15th at 10.15 p.m. the first half-caste daughter was born ; on July 18th at 5 a.m. a second one made her appearance, the two separate placental being removed the same morning at 10 a.m.; on July 22nd both infants were weighed, the elder turning the scales at 3 lbs. and the younger at 4 lbs. Considering the population, triplets cannot be rare on the Lower Tully River; the following four women have been reported to me20 as having proved themselves worth}' of receiving the Queen's bounty : — Chur-ngoi (twins on a previous occasion), Burakun, Ngunara, and Mau-uba. 24. On the Lower Tully River infanticide is fairly common; either sex is destroyed, and it is usually done by the mother. The two main reasons given for the practice here are that the child gave the mother too much pain and trouble in comins; into the world, and that the mother does not want to be bothered with it. In the case of twins, the mother will often keep one. and kill the other by choking ; so also will she often kill a child that is born with an}' deformity. Infanticide is not considered in the light of any crime or offence, provided that it is done within the first day or two of the child's existence. Further- more, a child may here be killed for a crime committed by its parents.-1 At Cape Grafton infanticide, irrespective of sex, is prevalent (I am only speaking up to 1898), and effected by just throwing the baby into the water and letting it drown, or else suffocating it by throttling, but though the practice is recognised it is usually done clandestinely. On the Bloom field River infanticide was never prevalent until the Europeans came and half-caste children appeared, the father doing it by stamping upon the child's chest (R. Hislop). At Cape Bedford the practice may be resorted to when the children appear too quickly one after the other. In the North-Western Districts infants may 19 Under the care of Dr. Kortum. 20 By Mr. E. Brooke. 21 Roth— Bull. S— Sect. 2. 14 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM be killed by the fathers with a blow from a stick, or allowed to starve. 25. In the North-Western Districts, on the east coast-line (Cape Grafton) and elsewhere, abortion does not appear to be an uncommon practice. It is performed by the fixation of a thick cord wound very tightly round and round the abdominal walls, combined with the punching by hand or stick upon the more palpable and apparently firmer portions of the unborn child. In many areas still-births are prevalent owing not only to the women fighting amongst themselves, but also on account of the way they are often knocked about by their husbands. 26. Immediately after birth, in the Bouliaand Upper Georgina Districts, baby is "washed" in ashes, mud, or sand, but usually in the last-mentioned, the head and face being alike cleaned. When the Kalkadun infant is taken out of the shallow excava- tion into which it is allowed to tumble, any sand that may chance to stick to its face and mouth is removed with leaves; otherwise it is neither washed nor cleaned. Subsequently, however, the baby is smeared from top to toe with "iguana"-fat which is renovated continuously during its early years of life, while, at intervals, some powdered ashes are rubbed on the head over the areas of the fontanels. The Cape Bedford baby, after birth, is rubbed clean with sand and then exposed to the sun ; indeed, to be left exposed like this during the day-time is a very common practice. In all districts the suckling of children continues up to a com- paratively advanced age. A mother may commonly be seen with two infants at the breast, and I have often come across children of three, four, and even five years of age running up for a suck. These women certainly do not continnue breast- feeding their children for these lengths on the chance of avoiding pregnancy,2- and yet several cases have been made known to me where they have been very determined on the matter; e.g., during the year 1897 Mrs. L. in attempting to wean a four or five year old youngster by taking its Keppel Island mother away on a three weeks' visit to the Yeppoon, discovered that the latter had during the whole period secretly got one of the other gins to suckle her breasts regularly so as to keep them full. As the babies become older, they are fed more and more on honey, kangaroo and opossum flesh, etc. Though no exact statistics are obtainable, the loss of infant life is very marked, especially 32 Amongst these folk I am very doubtful of there being any such physio- logical connection. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 15 during the wet season, when food is comparatively difficult to obtain, and in the cold weather. Throughout North Queensland a very common method of carrying a newly-born or comparatively young infant is in a sheet of bark slung up to the mother's side. This sheet of bark, derived from various timbers, is scorched on its inner surface so as to produce a curling-over inwards at the sides ; this is slung with twine, etc., over the mother's opposite shoulder and balanced pretty carefully with the hand to prevent the youngster (lying on an old net, some rags, or soft grass) from falling out at either end. Where koolamons2" are met with, these may take the place of the curled bark-sheets. In the Peninsula, and along the East Coast, a slightly older baby may be carried in a dilly- bag slung over the shoulders. As the child's age increases, it is carried on the shoulders (Plate ii., fig. 2 ; Plate iii., figs. 1-3) or flank, usually only on the former b}T the father, usually on the one or other by the mother (Plate iii., fig. 4) : in the one case it grasps its parent's forehead and neck with its little hands and legs respectively, while in the latter it sits upon its mother's hip supported in position by her protecting arm A mother never sings lullabies to her child, beyond a sort. of droning humming sound to send it to sleep. The only thing she does is to rock her baby in a basket dilh'-bag, bark trough, etc., resting on the ground, or else swing it suspended from the branch of a tree. She may slap it after the approved European fashion, and sometimes frighten it by making grimaces, a favourite one in the North-West Districts being produced by passing a string through the nasal septum and drawing the nose upwards. 27. I have not come across a single reliable example of the existence of more than three generations at one and the same time. Families may be large or small, or conspicuous by their absence, but on the whole it would appear that the largest number of children are born to those men with but one wife. At Cape Bedford it is not uncommon for women to have six or seven youngsters ; at the Bloomfield River five or six, one being known to have had nine. Amongst the natives in the unsettled districts it is naturally impossible to obtain reliable data as to the numbers of children born, not only on account of the difficulty of obtaining reliable interpreters, but also because of the general dislike to speaking of those of their kith and kin who have gone before. At any rate, amongst people living a natural existence in their own environments, it is impossible that the birth rate 83 Roth— Bull. 7— Sect. 62. 1G RECORDS OK THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. can be so low, and the death rate so high, as is met with amongst a native population living in more or less contact with the European. To show this the more forcibly, I propose giving two examples, one from Camooweal and the other from Mapoon, Batavia River, where the natives have succumbed to the encroachment and abuse of the pastoralist and pearl-sheller respectively. On 24th May, 1900, there happened to be twenty- five women in the native camp, all of them over puberty, i.e., marriageable or of fertile age ; taking young and old alike, I asked each one separately how many children, boys and girls, had been born to her, and how many of these, of either sex, were alive or dead. As will be seen from the following table, these twenty-five women had twenty -eight live children between them : — Boys. Girls. Case Number. Alive. Dead. Alive. Dead. 1 * t * 2 . . . 1 3 1 . . . 4 1 5 2 6 1 7 . . . 2 S 2 1 9 . . . ... 10 i 11 . . . ■ • < 2 12 1 (half-caste) 13 1 • . . ... 14 1 . ■ . 2 15 1 < . . 1G i i ... 17 1 . . ■ 3 18 1 2 19 1 . . . 1 20 ... ... 21 2 ... 22 1 23 1 (half-caste) 24 1 . . , 25 •• Total . . . 10 4 18 4 During the course of the preceding year I had made a similar investigation amongst the native women in the camp at Mapoon, making enquiry from the first one hundred women above puberty, NOKTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY ROTH. 17 young and old, whom I saw. From the particulars tabulated, I found that these one hundred women had but one hundred and nine live children between them. - T Al ve. Dead. Total Alive. ! )ead. Total Alive. Dead. Total No. No. No. B G B G B G 1 1 G B G B G ] 1 2 3 35 0 69 0 2 3 i 0 1 30 37 1 1 '.. 1 1 3 1 70 71 ... 2 2 0 4 2 2 i 2 7 38 . 2 .. 2 72 0 5 0 39 3 ] . 1 5 73 2 1 2 2 7 6 1 i 2 40 1 1 74 2 1 3 / 1 1 i i 4 41 o '.. 1 3 75 1 1 1 2 5 8 1 1 i 3 42 1 2 3 76 1 1 9 i 1 43 2 2 77 2 1 3 10 1 i 2 44 1 ! . 1 3 7s 1 1 11 2 1 ] 3 7 4.") o 7C 1 1 12 1 1 2 4(5 l" ... 1 80 2 2 13 1 i 1 3 47 2 1 1 4 81 1 2 1 4 14 1 1 1 3 48 1 • ] ... 4 82 1 1 15 1 i 2 49 1 1 2 83 1 1 16 0 50 1 ... • i 1 5 si 1 1 17 1 1 2 51 I 2 3 -' 1 2 2 5 18 2 1 3 .52 3 2 5 S6 1 1 19 1 1 53 1 ] 87 0 20 2 1 *> • > 54 3 1 ;; i 5 S8 2 1 3 21 0 55 I 1 i 4 89 0 22 i 1 56 1 '.. i 2 !)() 1 1 23 1 1 I 3 57 1 > i 4 9] 1 1 2 24 1 1 58 0 92 . . 0 25 1 2 3 59 1 . i 2 93 1 1 2 1 5 26 i 1 2 1 5 60 1 1 94 ... 1 1 2 27 1 1 ■_> 61 1 ... i 3 95 2 1 2 i" 6 28 •_> 1 1 1 62 i 1 . 2 96 1 i 2 29 1 1 63 ... ... 1 97 2 i 3 30 1 ] 64 ] 1 98 1 2 3 31 l ... 1 65 1 1 5 > 4 '!!) 0 32 33 i 1 l" 1 1 66 ■ ■ \. i 1 100j ! i" ... i'l 3 3 67 2 . 2 Grand total — 34 1 1 o OS °l 62 + 54 + 52 + 57 225 Numbers 45, 51, 72 were pregnant. Nos. 67 to 73 were the seven wives of one man, and had eleven children between them, though one woman alone contributed seven to this total. An UNDESCRIBED AUSTRALIAN CYSTIPHYLLID— MICTOCYSTIS—vkou the UPPER SILURIAN ROCKS of the MOUNT CANOBALAS DISTRICT. By R. Etheridge, June., Curator. (Plates iv.-v.) To Mr. C. A. Sussmilch, of the Technical College, Sydney, 1 am indebted for the loan of specimens, and presentation of others to the collection, of a very interesting Cystiphyllid coral from the Upper Silurian rocks in the neighbourhood of the Canobalas. So far as Australian literature is concerned, it is certainly undescribed. The essential feature of this coral consists of a mass of coarse blister-like vesicular tissue surrounding a series of cylindrical and parallel visceral chambers, apparently without mural invest- ment other than the convex oblique surfaces of the vesicles in question. On the upper or external surface of thecorallum these vesicles have a very marked blister-like appearance and are not traversed by radiating or geniculate septal costse at all. The visceral chambers are provided with numerous well- developed lamellar septa which proceed almost to the middle of each chamber, cutting through the horizontal tabulate centres ; these septa are confined to the visceral chambers, and do not in the least impinge on or pass over the blister-like vesicular tissue ; again they do not appear to quite reach the calicinal centre, nor can I distinguish any columelarian structures; indeed there seems to be a small free central tabulate area to each visceral chamber. The tabula? are on the whole complete, although here and there lenticular vesicles are formed. The affinities of this coral form a difficult problem. In the first place the vesicular tissue constituting the general mass is essentially that of the Cystiphyllidse, blister-like vessels closely superimposed on one another. Any further affinity with this family can only be traced to some extent through Actinocystis, Lindstrbm, and Mesophyllum, Schluter. In the former the centres of the corallites are septate, but the septal areas small, and I believe not tabulate ; the whole of the broad external zone- being entirely vesicular in the usual cystiphyllid manner. The \isceral chambers also appear to be formed in the same way as AN UNDESCRIBED AUSTRALIAN OYSTIPHYLLID ETHERIDGE. 19 in our present fossil — a longitudinal cavity without mural invest- ment enveloped in cyst-like tissue. The latter genus, Meso- phyllum, Schliiter ( = Spongophylloides, Meyer), is but an ampli- fication of Actinocystis, by increase of the septal area, correspond- ing decrease of the vesicular peripheral zone, and a modified pinnate arrangement of the septal lamelhe ; as in the former, tabulae are said to be absent. To sum up, my conception of this coral is that of a loosely constructed compound Actinocystis with tabulae. Were the question put to me, how does Mictocyslis differ from Endophyllum, as we understand the latter, I would answer, it is possibly very much a matter of degree, although there is more than one marked feature that will serve to distinguish them, thus — In Endophyllum the corallites are formed by a series of invaginated ob-cones, the free calicinal edges of which lie over and connect with those of contiguous corallites. To a certain extent, therefore, they possess a kind of spurious mural invest- ment, whilst in Mictocystis, as I have already explained, even that does not exist. Again, in Endophyllum the vesicular tissue lies between more or less horizontal laminae, the extensions of these invaginated cup-edges, instead of forming a mass of heaped-up cysts. Further, the septa at their distal or outer ends mingle, or are lost in the vesicular tissue, but in Mictocystis they seem to be absolutely free of any connection with the vesicular tissue. In fact the septal lamellae and tabulae of Mictocystis resemble a series of long plugs dropped into cylindrical holes in the tissue. Dr. C. Rominger desci'ibed a compound vesicular genus from the Niagara Group of Michigan, called Vesiczdaria,1 composed of a "superimposed series of calycinal cups, of coarsely blistered surface, which in vertical sections appear as a uniform succession of layers of large, unequal, vesiculose plates, perfectly resembling a vertical section through a Cystiphyllum." The blistered caly- cinal layers bear pseudo-costal radii, and the margins of the calyces are expanded and confluent without lines of demarcation. At a casual glance there is some resemblance to Mictocystis, principally in consequence of the blistered surface, but the invaginated form of the calyces and the lateral extension of the pseudo-costae at once distinguish the corals from one another. Furthermore, the name Vesicularia, Rom., does not stand, having been used as a genus of Polyzoa by Dr. J, V. Thompson between the years 1829-1834. 1 Vesicularia, Rominger, 1S76 (non Thompson, 1S29-34), Geol. Survey Michigan. Report Lower Peninsula, 1873-76, iii., 1S7G, pt. 2, p. 135. 20 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. The following is a description of the genus and species : — Genus Mictocystis,2 gen.nov. Gen. Char. — Corallum compound-cystiphylloid, coarse vesicular tissue enveloping disconnected cylindrical corallites, without proper walls. Septa lamellar, confined to visceral chambers, not impinging on the vesicular tissue. Tabulae usually complete. MlCTOCYSTIS ENDOPUYLLOIDES, Sp.UOV. Sj>. Char. — Corallum of large size, consisting of a mass of large lenticular vesicles enveloping unequally spaced-apart corallites; surface convex and slightly blistered. Corallites long, cylin- drical, with an average diameter of ten millimetres. Calices moderately deep, more or less crateriform at the surface; sides inclined, blistered. No evidence of proper walls or inner mural investment to the corallites (visceral chambers). The latter are surrounded by the vesicular tissue, which is highly developed and composed of large blister-like, arched, inwardly inclined vesich s of different shapes and unequal size, but the lenticular predomin- ating. Septa well developed in and confined to the visceral chambers as simple vertical lamella?, of one order, and to the number of about twenty-four, extending almost (if not quite) to calicinal centre, but without mingling or revolving, and neither passing over the surface blisters nor extending on to those forming the spurious walls of the visceral chambers. Tabula) horizontal, close, slightly bent downwards at their peripherics. Loc. — Junction of Spring and Cap Creeks, Portion 98, Parish Barton, County Ashburnham (C. A. Siissmilch — Colls. Australian Museum and Sus.smilch). //or. Upper Silurian, Halysites Limestone (Bed A of -Mr. Siissmilch's section3). 2fiiKTos = compound ; kv. 26 RECORDS OK THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEI M I have now to call attention to a very extraordinary figure lent to me by the well known Sydney collector Mr. P. G. Black, and of which T have been permitted to take a copy for the Museum collection. This animal figure (Plate vii., figs. 1 & 3) was dis- covered in a village towards the head-waters of the (iiriwo River, ;it from 3,000 to 4,000 feet above sea-level. Mr. Black informs me that the (Jiriwo River, which does not yet appear in any of our maps, is on the Buna Bay to Yodda Valley Road, and such being the case, it is evidently not a tributary of the Yodda River, but rises to the eastward in the same high country as that in which the northern tributaries of the Yodda rise; most probably the Giriwo River falls into Buua Bay. As to the figure, Mr. Black writes me thus : — "This image must evidently have come into the possession of the present race of natives by accident and probably some considerable time ago, for it clearly belongs to the same age as the discoveries made in the Yodda Valley. The natives evidently thought a good deal of it . . . . and it evidently belonged to the village, and to no one man in particular." The object represents a rude animal figure, fourteen and a half inches long by six inches wide, and weighs 17 lbs. The head, arms, and upper part of the body generally are tolerably well formed, the head thrust forward and inclined rather to one side; the fore-arms are also bent forward and the indistinct hands closed over what would be the abdomen, but is simply an obtuse obconical pivot-like termination. When viewed from the side the head is seen to be of a very low type, certainly not human, but possibly marsupial. The antero-posterior outline of the head in the middle line is nearly flat at the top but arched facially, and the nose flattened with small nostrils and mouth. There is no chin, the under surface being flat, with a central throat-lappet. The eyes are large and prominent, the ears small, depressed, and set far back, in fact represented simply by low prominences with central depressions; the neck behind is represented by a project- ing roll. When viewed from behind the shoulders are high and narrow, and the central or vertebral region raised and rounded, and terminating below in a short coxygeal projection; the arms in their great length are decidedly simian. The stone is a horn- blendic rock, and the tool marks are plainly visible. The use of this object is beyond speculation ; some have suggested it to be a pestle or pounder, although 1 hardly think it is of this nature. When seen from the front, back, or side in profile, there is no suggestiveness about it, except that the head presents a rude resemblance to that of the Spotted Cuscus (Phalanger maculatus, Geoff.). On the other hand, if laid hori- ANCIENT STONE IMPLEMENTS — ETHERIDGE. 27 zon tally on the back, the phallic nature is self-evident, and I think it much more likely to have been an emblem (priapus or lingam) of that nature. Although not found in the Yodda Valley, we have another stone of equal interest (Plate vi., hg. 3), but it would not surprise me to find it originally came from that area. Jt is a heavy slab of basalt bearing an excellent example of spiral incising. It is from Boianai, Goodenough Bay, North-east Coast of New Guinea, and was presented by Mr. F. de S. Buchanan, but whether dis- interred or found on the surface I am unable to say; the origin is said to be quite unknown to the present natives The object as a whole was called by the latter wakima Mrukiru mana, and the spiral design giripipina. The slab measures sixteen inches long, by eleven inches wide, and six deep, and weighs 62 lbs. The incised spiral, a very perfect one, is ten and a half inches in diameter and consists of six whorls. It is quite unnecessary to dilate here on the widespread occurrence of this form of petro- glyph in America and Europe, and even in Australia as rock- shelter pictographs and churinga ornamentation. Spiral motive does not appear to be common in New Guinea present day decorative art. It is found on some Trobriand lime spatulas and Buruburu drums and shields from the Papuan Gulf District. In 1905 Mr, P. J. Money, a member of the New Guinea Anglican Mission, presented us with a large quantity of pottery fragments and incised shell-pieces, found on digging into ancient village mounds at his station of Wanegela. The incised motive on this pottery is quite different to that on any of the existing New Guinea pottery, and to Mr. Money the present natives dis- claim all knowledge of it, and the fabricators. The interesting point, however, in connection with the present subject is the occurrence of shell-pieces (Cones) bearing beautiful examples of spiral incision-work! Referring to this find, Mr. Monckton says — "In some excavations carried out by the Mission and natives at Rainu, in Collingwood Bay, an interesting discovery was made of an old village site of a forgotten people and a quantity of broken and ancient pottery found, of curious and unique design and shapes. The pottery was much superior to any now made or in use, and there is no tradition or record of the people by whom it was made. Among human remains at a depth of 4 feet, two fragments of carved shell were found, placed, I think, originally in graves. The art of carving on hard shells is not now practised "4 This discovery of ancient pottery and Monckton -Loc. cit., p. 33. 28 RECORDS OK THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. carved shell work has been since described, and some examples figured by Dr. Rudolf Poch,6 of Vienna I think it may now fairly be conceded there is ample evidence of the existence of an extinct, or at any rate former population in Eastern New Guinea, of a highly interesting nature. Although the information to hand is not sufficient to prove the hypothesis, it is possible that this pottery and the buried works of art of the Yodda Valley Goldfield are the productions of one and the same people. Poch — Mittl. Anthrop. Gesellsch. Wein, xxxvii., 1907, p.67-71, f. 7 and 8. ON THREE APPARENTLY UN DESCRIBED BIRDS from HENDERSON or ELIZABETH ISLAND, PAUMOTU GROUP. By Alfred J. North, C.M.B.O.U., C.M.Z.S., Ornithologist, (Plates viii.-ix.) The Trustees have recently received from Mr. A. E. Stephen six birds, in spirits, collected by him on Henderson or Elizabeth Island, an outlier of the Paumotu Group or Low Archipelago, in the South Pacific, in September, 1907. They are referable to three species, which may be described as follows : — CALLIPTILUS (?) STEPHEN], Sp. n Adult. — General colour above green; lower back, rump, and upper tail-coverts yellowish-green, light green around their tips ; wings green, the inner webs and tips of primaries and the outer web of the first primary blackish-brown ; tail feathers yellow, washed with green, which is more distinct on their outer webs, the basal portion of the inner web of the lateral feathers red ; pileum green, with long and narrow paler green centres to the feathers ; lores, cheeks, throat, fore-neck and breast red ; on each side of the fore-neck is a patch of green which becomes narrower and extends downwards in a line towards the centre of the chest, where some of the feathers have a dull purplish wash ; abdomen and thighs purplish-red tinged with violet, which is more distinct on the latter ; under tail-coverts light green, their basal portion washed with yellow; under wing- coverts green, the inner ones red ; " bill reddish-orange ; legs, feet and iris reddish-orange " (Stephen). Total length, 8 inches ; wing, 4 -9 ; central tail feathers, 3-5 ; the outermost on either side 2-2; bill, 0-6; tarsus, 0-55. Type. — In the Australian Museum. Remarks. — The present species I have associated with the name of its discoverer, Mr. Alfred Ernest Stephen. Hitherto the genus Calliptilus has been represented by a single species, C. solitarius, inhabiting the Fiji Islands ; but in assigning the present species to that genus, I am by no means certain that I 30 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. am correct in doing so, for in the longer and graduated form of the tail, the central feathers much exceeding the lateral ones, it may be considered necessary to institute a sub-genus of Callip- tilua for its reception. A second specimen of C. stepheni, pro- bably a younger bird, has the green patcli on the side of the fore-neck larger and more irregularly defined, and the vent light green, shaded with yellow like the under tail-coverts. Ptilopus insularis, sp. nov. Adult. — General colour above, including the wings, dull bronze- green, the apical portion of the outermost primaries blackish brown, slightly glossed with bronze-green, the first primary much attenuated towards the tip, the remainder of the quills with veiy narrow whitish edges on their outer webs, the innermost secondaries externally margined and tipped with dull yellow ; tail bronze-green, approaching a coppery hue on the central pair of feathers, the inner webs of the remainder grey crossed with a subterminal blackish-brown band, which is succeeded by an apical band of light grey, both of these bands being almost obsolete on the outer webs of the feathers ; forehead and crown of the head deep rose-pink ; feathers above the eye and the occiput green, passing into a greyish-green on the hind-neck ; chin and centre of the throat white ; cheeks, sides of the neck, and under surface grey, the feathers on the fore-neck with indistinct whitish centres, those on the centre of the breast broadly tipped with olive-yellow, some of the feathers on the thighs indistinctly tipped with dull green ; vent white ; under tail-coverts white, the apical portion of the longer ones pale }7ellow ; under surface of tail grey, with a subterminal blackish- brown and an apical greyish-white band; under wing-covert- grey; "bill, legs and feet crimson-lake; iris rich yellow " (Stephen). Total length, 9-5 inches ; wing, 5-7 ; tail, 4-5 ; bill, 0*58 ; tarsus, 1. Type. — In the Australian Museum. Remarks. — Ptilopus insularis is undoubtedly very closely allied to P. coralensis, as described by Count Salvadbri1 in the " Catalogue of Birds in the British Museum," and to the "supposed type of Ptilopus coralensis," described by Count Salvadori on the following page under the name of Ptilopn- smithsonianus. From both, however the present species may be 'Salvadori— Cat. Bds. Brit. Mus., xxi., 1S93, p. 104. ON THREE APPARENTLY UNDESCRIBED BIRDS — NORTH. 31 distinguished by the deep rose-pink feathers of the crown of the head and forehead, extending right on to the culmen, and having no narrow intervening greenish band of feathers as found in the former of these species, nor greenish grey forehead as in P. smithsonianus ; moreover the chin, centre of throat, and vent are white, and the tail is longer. Another specimen, evidently an immature bird, judging by the feathers of the breast, has only an indication of the rose-pink hue on the forehead, and the olive- yellow patch on the centre of the breast is very much paler, and only the extreme tips of the longer under tail-coverts are yellow Win", 5-55 inches. 'CM POHZANA ATRA, Sp. 110V. Adult. — The entire plumage black, with a slight gloss on the upper parts ; " bill, black ; iris, ruby-red ; eyelid, orange-yellow ; legs and feet, orange-yellow " (Stephen). Total length, 7 inches wing, 3-1 ; tail, 1*6 ; bill, 0-75 ; tarsus, 1-12. Type. — In the Australian Museum. Remarks. — The existence of a Water Crake on the island is an important discovery, for Mr. Stephen informs me that no permanent fresh water is found there. The two specimens he procured are alike in plumage, and were obtained in thick scrub. These birds were never seen to fly, but could run with great rapidity, their legs and feet being comparatively thicker than the Australian members of this genus. They were very tame, and would approach near to the party while they were seated at lunch in the scrub. The Black Water Crakes were shot by Mr. Stephen with a revolver, as were also the other birds he obtained on the island. The sexual organs were too mutilated to satisfactorily identify the sex of the specimens. Mr. Stephen also showed me photographs of a young "Mutton Bird " ( Pvfjinus, sp. 1) and of the egg of Gygis Candida, laid on the limb of a tree. The eggs of this species were also found laid on the top of bare rocks on the highest part of the island. The following are Mr. Stephen's notes : — " The birds in spirits I presented to the Trustees of the Australian JMuseum were collected by me on the 10th September, 1907, during visit paid to Henderson Island by a party from the S.S. 'Tyrian, under charter to the Pacific Phosphate Co., Ltd. "Henderson Island (Plate viii.) is an elevated coral islet about six miles long and three miles broad, fifty feet above sea level. The tableland is flat and roughly strewn with dead coral fragments and pointed or knife-edged 32 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. weathered compact coralline limestone. The vegetation is ilense scrub, with vines and ferns (Plate ix.). Pandanus t rees were about the highest on the island, some quite thirty feet high. The soil is very scanty, and the vegetation most often thickest in slight depression areas where it is more abundant. No water or swampy places were found, drinking water having to be taken (in the various excursions. The island is uninhabited, and has rarely been visited by vessels, but the Pitcairn Islanders occasionally visit it for fishing purposes, since fish are very plentiful there. There are two cocoanut trees on the beach on the north end of the island, planted many years ago by some of the Pitcairn Islanders. " Henderson or Elizabeth Island belongs to Great Britain, and the British Consul at Tahiti has jurisdiction over it. ■• Animal life noticed during the short stay was as follows : — One variety of rat, very similar to the Pacific type; one slunk (very plentiful); one small butterfly; one paroquet not very plentiful — only seen on the high part of the island, and generally in pairs) ; one black crake (fairly plentiful in the interior of island, probably lives on tin}' land molusks, which abound in the scanty soil over the high land); one dove, pink-crested, found more or less in flocks of about 20 or more; 'mutton birds ' ( PaQinus, sp. '. ) were very plentiful, and laid their eggs on the ground among the scrub in more or less secluded places ill over the island; white terns were also plentiful; noddies were not so pleutiful ; frigate birds were numerous ; one species of small brown bird with white tail feathers, similar to one at Pitcairn." NOTE on the CEPHALOCHORDA in the AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. By Professor W. A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc, P.R.S., Trustee. (Figure 1.). Seven specimens of Amphioxns obtained in the dredge by Messrs. C. Hedley and A. R. McCulloch, at a depth of 5 to 8 fathoms at Murray Island, represent two of the sections into which the genus Brancliiostoma may be divided. Heteropleuron (Assmmetron) lucayanum, Andrews. The discovery of this species, originally found in the "West Indies, in such a distant locality as Torres Strait, would appear somewhat remarkable (though by no means without parallel) were it not that the species of Asymmetrou, obtained by Willey, in the Louisiade Archipelago, and named by that author A. caudatum, is now looked upon by him as not distinct specifi- cally from the original type form of the sub genus. As Murray Island is only about five or six hundred miles west of the Louisiades, there are many resemblances between the respective faunas, and it is not surprising to find a species of Amphioxus common to both. Heteropleuron hedleyi, sp. nov. The three specimens are of the same length — 2*8 cm. In each of the two complete specimens there are fifty-four myotomes and nineteen gonads. In the third specimen several myotomes and gonads have been destroyed. The opening of the oral hood is opposite the interval between the fifth and sixth segments ; the atriopore opposite the thirty- third, the anus opposite the forty-fourth, and behind the anus there are either ten or eleven myotomes. The myotome formula is 33.11.10 or 11. 34 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. The rostral fin is slightly expanded, not separated off from the dorsal. The dorsal tin is moderately developed, not more than one-seventh of the whole vertical diameter. The caudal fin is distinctly lancet-shaped. The notoehord is produced a little behind the last myotome. The ventral finis without rays. The dorsal is without rays behind about the fortieth myotome. There are twenty-five to thirty oral cirri, united at their bases by a web. The velar tentacles are ten to twelve. Fig. 1. — Heteropleuron hedleyi, Haswell. N.CH., anterior end of notoehortl ; R.F., rostral fin ; V.T., velar tentacles. When the Murray Island specimens of Heteropleuron are compared with Kirkaldy's description and figure of H. cultellum, and with my specimens of the latter species obtained in Torres Strait during the cruise of H.M.S. " Alert," a very marked difference is at once recognisable. Apart from the myotome formula and the number of gonads, the high dorsal fin quite definitely separates H. cultellum from all other species of Amphioxus. From II. bassanum the Murray Island form is also quite clearly separated by different and constant, though less striking, differences. H. bassanum has about seventy-five myo- tomes or more and twenty-six to thirty-one gonads ; it has paired fin-rays in the ventral fin, and it has the rostral fin separated off from the dorsal by a marked "dip." //. cinyalenxe, the only other described species of Heteropleuron, has sixty-one to sixty-four myotomes, with the formula 39 or 31 +17 or 16 + 6 or 8. The ventral fin has paired fin-rays and there are twenty-five gonads. Altogether six species of Amphioxus are now known to be in Australian seas. These are: — Heteropleuron bassanum, Gim- NOTE ON THE CEPI1AL0CII0RDA-KASWELL. 35 ther, which is very abundant in Port Phillip ; H. cultellum, Peters, and //. belcheri, Gray, the former known to occur in Torres Strait, and as far south on the Queensland coast as Moreton Bay, the latter known from Torres Strait (as well as from the coast of Borneo) ; //. hectori, Benham, from the east coast of the North Island of New Zealand ; and Asymmetron lucayanum, Andrews, from Murray Island, Torres Strait, as well as the Louisiade Archipelago and the Bahamas ; and Heteropleuron hedleyi from Murray Island. An Amphioxus has been dredged in Port Jackson by Dr. E. P. Ramsay, but the specimens obtained were never critically examined, and have been lost. The only specimens from the coast of New South Wales in the Australian Museum collection are two from Port Stephens. These are hardly in a condition for certain identification, but have, in all ascertainable points, the features of A. bassanum The myotonies are about ninety in each of them, as against a maximum of only seventy-eight in Kirkaldy's description. But the same holds good of my speci- mens from Port Phillip, many of which have from eighty to ninety. LITERATURE. Giinther, A. -Fishes, H.M.S. "Challenger." Giinther, A.— Fishes, H.M.S. "Alert," 1SS4. Kirkaldy, J. W.— A Revision of the Geneva and Species of the Dianelnos- tomidse. Quart. Journ. Micro. Sri., xxxvii.. 1895. Willey, A.— On a new Amphioxus from the Louisiade Archipelago. Quart. Journ. Micro. Sci., xxxix.. 1S96-7. Benham, W. B.— Heteropleuron hectori, the New Zealand Lancelet. Qtiart. Journ. Micro. Sri., xliv., 1901. Herdman, W. A.— Cephalochorda. Camb. Nat. Hist., vii. Andrews, —.—An TJndescribed Acraniate— Asymmt Iron lucaya Stud. Johns Hopkins University, v. STUDIES in AUSTRALIAN FISHES. No. 1. .By Allan E. McCulloch, Zoologist. (Plates x.-xi.) It is m}T intention to contribute under this heading a series of short papers dealing with material as it comes to hand. The present article contains an account of some species of the genera Clinus, Petraites and Cristiceps. The}' are an extremely variable group, and it is only by an examination of large series that the limits of the many species can be determined. The Australian Museum Collection, together with that of the late Sir William Macleay, affords such material, and I take the opportunity of figuring the eight species available, as well as giving a short comparative description of each. To Mr. George Masters, Curator of the Macleay Museum, my best thanks are due for enabling me to examine the specimens under his charge ; also to Messes. J. Gabriel, of Melbourne, and H. E. Finckh and Bassett Hull, Junr., of Sydney, for additional specimens. The species dealt with, including synonyms, are as follows : — Cristiceps aurantiacus, Cast. — Syn. C. pictus, Mac). ,, australis, Cuv. & Val. — Syn. C. macleayi, Cast.; C. howittii, Cast.; C.pallidus, Mack; C. splen- dens, Cast. ,, argyropleura, Kner. Petraites Iieptceolus, Ogilby. — Syn. Cristiceps wilsoni, Lucas. ,, roseus, Giinther. ,, fasciatus, Macl. — Syn. Clinus whiteleggii, Ogilby. „ phillipi, Lucas. Clinus perspicillatu8, Cuv. & Val. — Syn. Clinus despicilla/i Rich. Clinus, Cuvier. Clinus, Cuvier, Etegne Anim., ii., 1817, p. 251 (mustelarisj. This genus was proposed for Blennies in which the anterior rays of the dorsal fin, while widely spaced from those following, are nevertheless connected with them by membrane. STUDIES IX AUSTRALIAN FISHES— McCULLOCH. 3/ Cristiceps, Guv. & Vol. Cristiceps, Cuv. & Val., Hist. Nat. Poiss., xi., 1836, p. 402 (australis). This was erected to receive such species as had the first three rays entirely separated from those following. Beyond this there appears to be no other character to distinguish it from Clinus. It must be noted here, however, of the type. G. australis, that while many specimens have the membrane from the third ray ending a little way in front of the anterior spine of the second dorsal, in others it extends to, or even up its base. Petraites, Ogilby, Petraites, Ogilby, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, x., 1885, p. 226 (heptceolus). This is to accommodate the species " which oscillate between the two genera mentioned." Apart from the general appearance, there are no definite characters by which any one of these may be separated from the others, for while such species as Cristiceps aurantiacus and Clinus per spicillat us are readily divisible into two genera, they are connected by an unbroken series of intermediate species. The same must be said of several other genera not found in Australia. It is obvious that no good purpose can be subserved by unit- ing all these under the oldest name Clinus, and I therefore pro- pose that the above three be provisionally restricted as follows : — A. First dorsal spine placed over or in front of the eye. First and second dorsal fins entirely separated or con- nected by membrane Cristiceps. B. First dorsal spine placed behind the eye. C. Third spine connected to the basal portion only of the first spine of the second dorsal Petraites. D. Third spine connected to the middle or upper half of the first spine of the second dorsal Clinus. Key to the species examined : — Cristiceps. A. Anterior spine placed just before the front margin of the eye. Two dorsals separate aurantiacus. B. Anterior spine over the front half of the eye. Two dorsals connected argyropleura. C. Anterior spine over the hinder portion of the eye. First dorsal either distinct from, or joined to the base of the second austri 38 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. P< traites. D. Body deep. E. Dorsal spines of moderate length ; the rays though spaced, not distinctly divided into two parts roseus. EE. Dorsal spines short ; the rays divided into two parts by a transparent interspace heptceolw. DD. Body slender. F. Spines of first dorsal sub-equal fasciattis. FF. Third spine of first dorsal much shorter than the first phillipi. Clinus. G. First dorsal connected to the upper half of the anterior spine of the second ; spines sub-equal .. perspicillatu*. Cristiceps aurantiacus, Castelnau. (Plate x., fig. 1.) Cristiceps aurantiacus, Castelnau, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, iii., 1879, p. 386. Macleay, Cat. Austr. Fishes (Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, vi., 1881), p. 22. Stead, Fish. Austr., 1906, frontispiece. Cristiceps pictus, Macleay, loc. cit., p. 25. D. iii., xxviii.-xxx.; 4-5 + 2. A. ii.; 23-25. V. 3. First dorsal spine placed just before the front margin of the eye. The two dorsals not connected by membrane. Generally the two posterior rays of the second dorsal are separated from the others by an interspace. Caudal pedunde very long and slender, the membrane from the posterior dorsal ray reaching half-way along its length. A branched tentacle on the snout, and another long simple one over the eye. Vertebra? 14 + 32. This is a common species along the coast of New Smith Wales. An examination of the type of C. pictus, Macl., shows that it is identical with Castelnau's species. Specimens examined : — (a) 1 Port Jackson, New South Wales. — Type C. pictus, (b) 4 Port Jackson, New South Wales. (c) 3 New South Wales Coast. (d) 2 Lord Howe Island. (e) 7 without locality. STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN FISHE-S-McCULLOCII. 39 CRISTICEPS ARGVROPLEURA. KitT. (Plate x., fig. 2.) Cristiceps argyroplenra, Kner., Reise Novara, Zool. i., Fische, p. 199, pi. vii , fig. 4. Macleay, Cat. Austr. Fishes (Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, vi., 1881 ), \>. 25. Waite, Mem. Austr. Mus., iv., 1, 1899, p. 113, pi. xi., f. 3. D. iii.,xxvii.-xxix.; 5-7. A. ii.; 22-24. V. 3. The first dorsal spine is placed over the anterior part of the eye, and the third spine is more or less completely connected with the base of the second dorsal by membrane. Dorsal rays equidistant. The caudal peduncle is long and slender, the mem- brane from the last dorsal ray reaching about half way along its length. A branched tentacle on the snout, and a long simple one over the eye. Snout short. The' five specimens of this species I have seen appear to differ from the original description only in having two rays less in the anal tin. (a) 1 Off Jibbon, New South Wales.— Thetis Expedition. (b) 2 Port Jackson, New South Wales. (c) 2 without locality. Cristiceps australis, Cut. & Vol. (Plate x., fig. 3.) Cristiceps australis, Cuv. & Val., Hist. Nat. Poiss., xi., 1836. p. 402, pi. cccxxxvi. Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus.,iii., 1861, p. 275. Macleay, Cat. Austr. Fishes (Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, vi., 1881), p. 20. Waite, Rec. Austr. Mus., iii., 1900, p. 209 ; and loc. cit., v., 1904, p. 224. Lucas, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., (n.s.), iii., 1891, p. 10, pi. iii., f. 3. Cristiceps macleayi, Castelnau, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, iii., 1879, p. 385. Macleay, loc. cit., p. 21. Cristiceps howittii, Castelnau, Proc. Zool. Soc. Vict., ii., 1873, p. 48; and Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, iii., 1879, p. 385. Macleay, loc. cit., pp. 20, 21. Cristiceps pallidus, Macleay, loc. cit., p. 26. ? Cristiceps splendens, Castelnau, Proc. Zool. Soc. Vict.,ii., 1S73, p. 66. Macleay, loc. cit., p. 22. D. iii., xxvi.-xxix. ; 6-8. A. ii.; 24-26. V. 3. First dorsal spine situated rather behind the middle of the eye. The two dorsals either entirely separate, or the first just 40 RECORDS OP THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, connected to the base of the second by membrane. The dorsal rays equidistant. Caudal peduncle long and slender, the mem- brane from the last dorsal ray reaching from half to two-thirds along its length. A branched tentacle on the snout, and a long simple one over the e}Te. Snout sub-conical. Vertebrae 14 + 30. This is the commonest species of the genus in New South Wales, and is taken in the sea-grass Zostera, by net fishermen. Its general colour is green, with darker bands and silvery markings. Specimens examined : — (a) 11 Port Jackson, New South Wales. (b) 3 Port Phillip, Victoria. (c) 1 Western Port, Victoria. — Co-type C. hoioittii. (d) 4 Port Jackson, New South AVales. — Co-type C.macleayi. (e) 1 King George's Sound, Western Australia. — Type C. pallidus. (f) 1 King George's Sound, Western Australia. (g) 35 without locality. In the Museum collection there is a specimen labelled " Cristiceps splendens, Cast., Adelaide," which agrees well with the description of that species in all but having the interorbital space much less than the vertical diameter of the eye. Other specimens from South Australia, and Fremantle, Western Aus- tralia, and one from Jervis Bay, New South Wales, have the fin formulae as follows : — D. iii., xxvi.-xxviii.. 6-7. A. ii.; 22-24. V. 3. Beyond the reduced number of rays in the anal fin, I am unable to find any differences between these and C. australis, C. and V. (a) 1 Adelaide, South Australia. (b) 3 South Australia. (c) 2 Fremantle, Western Australia. (d) 1 Jervis Bay, New South Wales. Petraites roseus, G wither. (Plate x., tig. 4.) Cristiceps roseus, Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., iii., 1861, p. 274. Macleay, Cat. Austr. Fishes (Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, vi., 1881), p. 19. Ogilby, Mem. Anstr. .Mus., ii., 1889, p. 63. Petraites roseus, Waite, Rec. Austr. Mus., v., 3, 1904, pp. 181 and 221. D. iii., xxv.; 3-5. A. ii., 18-20. V. 3. STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN FISHES -McCULLOCH. 41 First dorsal spine placed between the eye and the preopercular margin. The membrane from the third spine extends to, rarely up, the base of the first spine of the second dorsal. The dorsal rays are widely spaced, the second and third slightly more so than the others. Caudal peduncle short and broad, the dorsal membrane reaching to the base of the caudal rays. A branched tentacle on the snout and a broad fringed one over the eye. Body deep. Vertebra? 14 + 26. All the fresh specimens I have seen were of a deep brown colour, with darker bands and silvery and transparent markings. Specimens long preserved in alcohol become yellowish with bright pink bands. Lives among weeds in pools along the New South Wales coast. (a) 4 Port Jackson, New South Wales. (b) 2 New South Wales coast. (c) 5 Lord Howe Island. ( '1 ) 2 without locality. Petraites hept.eolus, Ogilby. (Plate xi., fig. 1.) Petraites hepheolus, Ogilby, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, x., 1885, p. 225. Cristiceps wilsoni, Lucas, Proc. Koy. Soc. Vict., (n.s.), iii., 1891, p. 10, pi. iii., f. 1. D. iii., xxv.-xxvii.; 1 + 2. A. ii.; 17-20. V. 3. First dorsal spiue placed over the preopercular margin. The membrane from the third spine extends rarely to, generally a little up the base of the anterior one of the second dorsal. The two posterior rays separated by an interspace from the first. Caudal peduncle short and broad, the dorsal membrane reaching to the caudal rays. A branched tentacle on the snout, and a broad fringed one over the eye. Body deep. I have taken this species with P, roseus at Long Bay, to which it is nearest allied. It differs, however, by having much lower tins, the dorsal rays less numerous than is usual in that species, and the two last being separated from the first. Those of the anal are also generally distinct. There seems to me to be no doubt that Cristiceps wilsoni, Lucas, must be included under this heading, the only apparent difference lying in a greater range of variation in the number of spines and rays in the dorsal 42 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. and anal (I), iii., xxiv.-xxviii. ; 1+2. A. ii.; 17-21) of the Vic- torian species, than in any T have seen from New South Wales (a) 3 Long Bay, New South Wales. (b) I Port Jackson, New South Wales — Type/*, heptceolus. (c) 1 Port Jackson, New South Wales (d) 2 without locality. Petraites fasciatus, Macleay. (Plate xi., fig. 2.) Cristiceps fasciatus, Macleay, Cat. Austr. Fishes (Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, vi., 1881), p. 19. Clinus whiteleggii, Ogilhy, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, xix., 1894, p. 371. D. iii., xxviii.-xxxi.; 1 + 1. A. ii.; 18-22. V. 2, rarely 3. First dorsal spine placed above the hinder margin of the pre- opercle. The two dorsals connected by membrane. The last two rays are rather widely spaced. Caudal peduncle short and broad. A small branched tentacle on the snout, and a short, broad simple one over the eye. Rarely both are large and branched. This is the common species living among sea-weeds in pools along the coast. In colour it may be anything from dark green without markings to pale green with darker bands and silvery or transparent markings. Specimens living in the pink coraline sea-weed common on the coast are of a bright pink variegated with brown, throughout which, however, the typical bands and silver spots are maintained. Having examined Macleay's type of this species as well as Ogilby's C. tvhiteleggii, I am able to recognise the two as iden- tical, although a comparison of the two descriptions would not lead to such a conclusion. Macleay's specimen is in very bad condition, but is sutliciently good to show all the important features. Ogilby's type is malformed, some of the rays of. the various fins being distorted or absent. The above characters are therefore drawn up from a large series taken by myself at Long Bay, near Sydney. (a) 28 Long Bay, New South Wales. (b) 1 Jervis Ba}r, New South Wales. — Type C. whiteleggii. (c) 1 Port Jackson, New South Wales. — Type C./asci P 0 P

! 0 16 0 1 n(1) 140 23 33 89 55 25 19 )) 1 46 0 5 d 201 90 14 60 56 90 0 61 0 0 14 0 4 h 203 90 10 29 53 )i 31 2 0 10 1 9 f 021 0 1 43 37 0 0 43 39 0 1 0 2 y 041 0 1 62 20 !) 62 20 0 1 0 0 0 221 62 13 63 53 62 8 63 54 0 5 0 1 u 111 62 13 45 35 > > 45 35 0 5 0 0 i 223 62 6 34 14 >) 34 14 0 2 0 0 Stanthorpe, Queensland. (Plate xiii., figs. 3, 4.) At Stanthorpe, topaz is usually found as waterworn pebbles without crystalline facets, but in the collection of the National Museum, Melbourne, is a fine crystal which was kindly lent for description and is here figured. The specimen, which measures 3T x 3 x 2*3 cm., is of a beautiful deep blue colour, and is well and symmetrically developed. The large d faces are striated parallel to their intersection with o ; the dome /' shows mark- ings with a general direction parallel to the plane of the c and b axes ; the lower end is truncated by the basal cleavage. The crystal has a striking resemblance to the large waterworn crystals obtained at Oban, New South Wales.1 Pakenham, Victoria. (Plate xiii., figs. 5-7.) Some small crystals, obtained on loan from the National Museum, Melbourne, are of considerable interest. A crystal of about 4 mm. in greatest diameter is represented in Fig. 5 ; the 1 Anderson— Rec. Austr. Mus., vi., 2, 1905, p. So, pi. xviii., fig. 2. 62 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. faces are for the most part smooth and bright, but the prism faces are strongly striated vertically and sometimes give multiple images. Angles Forms. C b m M I 9 n d f y 0 to i 001 010 110 230 120 130 140 201 021 041 221 111 223 Measured. Calculated. Difference. 0 P

' 45 35 0 0 0 1 62 12 34 11 >) 34 14 0 4 0 3 The other figured crystal is a fragment of 1 x -7 x -4 cm., but it has what seems to be a new macrodome,/ (501) as a fairly large but somewhat rough (apparently etched) face, yielding only a patch of light in the telescope. It may possibly be an acci- dental plane, caused by contact with a neighbouring crystal, but, if so, it would be unlikely to fall in a zone as the measurement indicates. Measured. Calculated. 4> P P 89° 35' 77° 90° 77° 30' The presence of the rare prism U is indicated by a very narrow plane which, however, was measured in maximum illumination. BERYL. TORRINGTON, NEW SOUTH WALES. (Plate xvi., figs. 1, 2.) Some fine large prisms of beryl have recently been discovered Dear Torrington. The}' occur attached to crystals of quartz, MINERALOGICAL NOTES — ANDERSON. 63 which with masses of wolfram are found in a matrix of clay at Heffernan's Lease. The specimens were donated by Mr. Charles Bogerwieder, mining engineer, from whom particulars of the occurrence were obtained. Individual crystals measure up to 6 cm. in horizontal diameter by 5 cm. vertically ; the prisms are striated vertically and invariably broken across. The crystals are very simple, usually showing only the base and a hexagonal prism with an occasional face of a second prism. The Gulf, near Emmaville, New South Wales. (Plate xvi., figs. 4-8.) Here beryl occurs embedded in, or associated with, quartz ; the habit is long prismatic; terminated simply by c(0001); colour pale bluish-green. Broken crystals measure up to 5-5 x 2 cm. ANGLESITE. Broken Hill, New South Wales. (Plate xiv.; Plate xv., fig. 1 ; Plate xvi, fig. 3.) Mr.P. T.Hammond2 in 1895 figured some crystals of anglesite from the Consols Mine ; in the present paper anglesite from the Central, Block 14, and Proprietary Mines are described. From the Central nine crystals were measured, and two each from Block 14 and the Proprietary ; for any one mine the habit is fairly constant and the combinations similar. (1) From the Central come as a rule small crystals of about 2 to 3 mm. in diameter, which are seated on reticulated cerussite ; sometimes the latter projects as long slender prisms or thin plates amongst the anglesite, and, now and then, a minute, perfectly formed anglesite crystal is poised on the tip of a slender rod of cerussite. The crystals are transparent and colourless to opaque white, or sometimes have a slight yellowish tinge. Thirteen forms were determined, of which three are new ; in addition 0 is doubtfully present, and approximate measurements were obtained of what are most likely vicinal faces not deserving of crystallographic symbols. The new forms r(187), X(34T2), and v (598) give by no means satisfactory measurements, as the faces are either small or wavy and the signals distorted, hence the - Hammond— Rec. Geol. Surv. N. S. Wales, iv., 4, 1S95, p. 163. 64 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. angles vary between rather wide limits, and it is desirable that the forms be confirmed before they are finally accepted. New forms : — Forms. Measured. Calculated. Limits. No. of faces. 0 P 0 O / 9 3 43 41 35 17 p 0 P Y X V 187 3-412 598 9 7 43 28 35 16 56 19 30 31 60 26 56 10 30 4 3 60 38 C / O / 5 37 to 14 34 42 41 to 44 41 34 16 to 36 41 O 1 o / 54 11 to 58 58 29 53to31 22 59 10 to 62 36 9 4 16 Y and v form narrow planes between m and o, and m and y respectively; X is sometimes a fairly large face, but it does not give a sharp image. The general habit of the crystals is sufficiently indicated in Plate xiv., figs. 1-3. Angles : — Measured. Calculated. Difference. Forms. <£ P 0 P

3 1 0 011 0 0 52 10 0 0 52 12 0 2 I 104 89 59 22 20 90 0 22 19 1 1 d 102 89 59 39 20 >t 39 23 1 3 g 113 51 50 34 13 51 51 34 50 1 37 z 111 51 51 64 17 )> 64 24 0 7 y 122 32 29 56 46 32 29 56 48 0 2 p 124 32 35 37 4 >) 37 23 6 19 (2) The characteristic habit of Block 14 anglesite is shown in Plate xiv., fig. 4 ; the crystals are shortened vertically, and the prism zone may be entirely wanting as in one measured crystal which is a combination of ) 39 23 12 1 y 122 32 37 56 41 32 29 56 l> 8 r^ t (3) The Proprietary Mine furnishes very tine anglesite specimens, individual crystals sometimes reaching a size of 2*5 x 2 x 1*3 cm., and the crystalline development and symmetry are excellent. Plate xvi., tig. 3, is a photograph, natural size, of a beautiful group of crystals; the drawing (Plate xiv., fig. 5) illustrates the crystal habit. Here the faces v and Y are comparatively large but much corroded, and v oscillates with z. Angles : — Forms. C a m o I d z y 001 100 110 011 104 102 111 122 124 Measured. Calculated. Difference. «> P 9 ' P 9 P O / O / c / O 1 ' r 90 5 89 53 90 0 90 0 5 7 51 45 89 59 51 51 90 0 6 1 0 4 52 0 0 0 52 12 4 12 90 8 22 20 90 0 22 19 8 1 90 3 39 18 >) 39 23 3 5 51 42 64 38 51 51 64 24 9 14 32 31 56 41 32 29 56 48 2 7 32 26 37 14 >) 37 23 3 9 AS" £A & 66 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. R UTILE. Victor Harbour, South Australia. (Plate xv., fig. 2.) For the opportunity to figure these I am indebted to the Director of the National Museum, Melbourne, who courteously lent some crystals for study. The mineral occurs in felspar and in quartz.'5 Crystals are comparatively simple, the forms being a, m, k (?), e and s. Twinning on the common law e is frequent, and the figure represents a crystal in which this law is combined with the rarer twin law u(30l); I. in the conventional position (as measured) is twinned to II. on e, and to III. on v. Angles : — Measured. Calculated. Difference. Forms. P /> 0 P a 100 0 0 O ' 90 0 o r 0 0 o r 90 0 r 0 0 m 110 45 3 90 2 45 0 >) 3 2 e on 0 9 32 47 0 0 32 47 9 0 s 111 45 0 42 20 45 0 42 19 0 1 a2 010 0 3 24 12 0 0 23 39 3 33 e„ 011 0 8 81 21 0 0 80 52 8 29 H 101 38 28 60 31 38 16 60 58 12 27 Mouxt Gambier, South Australia. (Plate xv., tig. 3.) A small collection of crystals in the Mining and Geological Museum, Sydney, was examined, and one typical cr}-stal of 7x35 mm. measured. •Brown— Cat. 8. Australian Minerals, p. 27, Adelaide, 1893. M IN ERA LOGICAL NOTES— ANDERSON. 67 An gles : — Measured. Calculated. Difference. Forms.

0 1 k 340 36 50 90 0 36 52 >> o 0 e Oil 0 5 32 47 0 0 32 47 5 0 s 111 45 3 42 16 45 0 42 19 3 3 AT AC A MITE. DUGALD 1!., ClONCURRY. QUEENSLAND. (Plate xv., tig. 4.) A single specimen consisting of a large number of small, green, transparent crystals about 1*5 mm. in length, associated with massive cuprite is in our collection. Two crystals were measured, and yielded the forms enumerated below; in addition k (130) and I (230) are doubtfully present. Because of the striated nature of the prism faces accurate centering is difficult and the measurements are not good. Angles : — Forms. b m s e n 010 110 120 011 121 Measured. Calculated. Difference. P

) 0 19 3 39 46 89 43 37 5 )> 2 41 17 0 19 37 19 0 0 36 55 0 19 24 40 36 62 28 37 5 62 2 3 31 26 PYRITE. United Miners' Mine, Major's Creek, New South Wales. (Plate xv., fig. 5.) Splendid cubes of pyrite measuring up to 4 cm. along the edge are;'found at the United Miners' Mine, embedded in dolomitic 68 RKCOKDS OF THK AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. calcite.4 The cube corners are modified by small faces of n (211), 0(111), p (221). Angles obtained from two crystals : — Measured. Calculated. Difference. Forms.

j 54 44 19. 20 >{ 221 44 14 70 11 5) 70 31 46 20 122 27 24 47 48 26 34 48 11 50 23 4 Card— Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.Wales, viii., 2, 1905, p. 156. EXPLANATION OF PLATE I. Aboriginal Customs. Figs. 1 and 2. Assisting in confinement. Tully River. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate T- m m \ / . A EXPLANATION OF PLATE II. Aboriginal Customs. Fig. 1. Assisting in confinement. Tully Pviver. „ 2. Man and two women, the latter with children astride on their shoulders. REC. AUSTR. MUS. VOL VII. Plate II EXPLANATION OF PLATE III. Aboriginal Customs. Figs. 1, 2 & 4. Women carrying children astride on their shoulders. Bentinck Island. Fig. 3. Woman carrying child astride on her right hip. Glenormiston. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate III. riB M ••# %- EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV MlCTOCYSTIS ENDOPHYLLOIDES, Eth. fil. Fig. I. Highly weathered example seen from above, displaying the coarse, blister-like vesicular tissue, three corallites and portion of a fourth ; septa weathered out may be seen on the right-hand upper corallite, and a tabulate surface in the right-hand lower and central corallites. x \ ,,2. A similar specimen to that seen in Fig. 1, viewed longitudinally displaying a calice and portion of a visceral chamber with tabulae, etc. x \. ,, 3. Portion of a visceral chamber surrounded by cysts ; in the former septal lamella) and close-set tabulre. ,, 4. The same visceral chamber seen in Fig. 3, but viewed at a some- what different oblique angle. REC. A.USTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate IV. H. BARNES, Junr., photo. Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE V MlCTOCYSTIS ENDOPHYLLOIDES, Eth. fil. Portion of a highly weathered corallum seen longitudinally. The blister- like vesicular tissue is excellently shown, and in the centre is the faint outline of a corallite extending from top to bottom of the specimen. REC. AUSTR, MUS'., VOL. VII. Plate V. s H. BARNES. Junr., phut. Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE VI. Ancient Stone Implements, New Guinea. Fig. 1. Stone Mortar of mica schist, weighing 30 lbs. Yodda Valley Goldfield. 2. Dagger-shaped object of clay-stone, weighing 3 lbs. Yodda Valley Goldfield. 3. Slab of basalt weighing 62 lbs. from Boianai, Goodenough Bay, with spiral incised motive. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate VI. y ': H. BARNES, Junr., photo., Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE VII. Ancient Stone Implements, New Guinea. Fig. 1. Phallic animal figure of hornblende rock weighing 17 lbs., from the head waters of the Giriwo Kiver. ,, 2. Side view of the same figure. ,, 3. Back view of the same figure. REC. AUSTE. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate VII. *' if H. BARNES, Junr., photo. Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII. Henderson Island. General View of Island. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate VIII. EXPLANATION OF PLATE IX. Henderson Island. Dense Scrub in which birds breed. REC. AUSTR. MUS.. VOL. VII. fLATE IX. EXPLANATION OF PLATE X. Australian Fishes. Fig. 1. Cristiceps aurantiacus, Castelnau. ,,2. „ arf/yrop/eura, Kner. ,, 3- ii australis, Cuvier and Valenciennes. ,, 4. Petraites roseus, Giinther. All the figures are of the natural size. KEC. AUSTR, MU8., VOL. VII. Plate X. a. r. Mcculloch, jei., Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XI. >» >» Australian Fishes. Fig. 1. Petraites heptreolus, Ogilby. 2. ,, fasciatus, Macleay. 3. „ phillipi, Lucas. 4. Climi8 perspicillatus, Cuvier and Valenciennes. All the figures are of the natural size. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XI. r^3 MM ■ li ^^"^M •■ vmw . ■ ^ % a. r. Mcculloch, del., Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XII. Australian Crustacea. Fig. 1. Eucrate hamiltoni, McCulloeh. la- ,, ,, larger cheliped. 2. Hoplophrys ogilbyi, McCulloeh. 2». ,, ,, mouth parts, etc. 3. Triqonoplax uvguijormis, var. longlrostris, var. nov. 4. Gabrielia punctata, Haswell. 5. ,, hasive/li, Fulton & Grant. 5«- ,. ,, mouth parts, etc. Figs. 1, la- reduced, the others much enlarged. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XII. 5>'- a. r. Mcculloch, del., Aubtr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIII. Topaz. Fig. 1, 2. Cow Flat, near Torrington, N. S. Wales. ,, 3,4. Stanthorpe, Queensland. Inorthographic and clinographic pro- jection. ,, 5. Pakenham, Victoria. ,, 6, 7. Pakenham, Victoria. Inorthographic and clinographic pro- jection. Forms.— c (001), 6(010); m(U0), M(230), ^ (120), ^(130), n(140), *7(160); / (501), d (201), A (203),/ (021), y (041) ;o (221), « (111), i (223), x (243). REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XIII. C. ANDERSON, del Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIV. Anglesite. Broken Hill, N. S. Wales. Fig. 1, 2. Central Mine. Inorthographic and clinographic projection. ,, 3. Central Mine. ,, 4. Block 14 Mine. ,, 5. Proprietary Mine. Forms.— c (001), a(100); m(110); o(011), /(104), d (102); 8(111), g (113), y (122), M (121), Y (187), v (598), X (3-4-12). REC. AUSTR, MUS. VOL. VII. Platk XIV. C. ANDERSON, del., Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XV. Anglesite. Fig. 1. Broken Hill, N. S. Wales. Stereogram. (For indices see Explanation of Plate XIV.). Rutile. Fig. 2. Victor Harbour, S. Australia. Twinned on e(101) and on r(301). ,, 3. Mt. Gambier, S. Australia. Forms.— a (100), m (110), A (430), e(101), s (111). Atacamite. Fig. 4. Cloncurry, Queensland. Forms.— 6(010), m (110), 8(120), e(011), n (121). Pykite. Fig. 5. Major's Creek, Braidwood, N. S. Wales. (010 to front). Forms.- a (100), o (111), p (221), n(211). REC. AUSTK. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XV C. ANDERSON, del. Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVI. Beryl. Fig. 1, 2. Heffemans' Lease, Torrington, M. S. Wales. ,, 4-8. The Gulf, near Emmaville, N.S. Wales. Anglesite. Fig. 3. Proprietary Mine, Broken Hill, N. S. Wales. (All natural size). REG. AUSTR. MUS VOL. VTT. Plate XVI. *j&~ t H. BARNES, Junr., phut; Austr. Mus. REC. AUSTJl. M US., VOL. VII. Frontispiece. NOTES on MIMICRY AND VARIATION' By W. J. Rainbow, F.L S., Entomologist. (Frontispiece.) Recently there were added to the Australian Museum cabinets CORRECTIONS. Page 33, line 10, for ''Strait " read "Strail Pa*e 34, line 17, for "different " read '-definite." Page 34, line 26, for "in" read " inhabitants of." Page 34, bottom line, for "Australia" read "Australasian" (New Zealand being included). Plate ii., fig. 1. Figured in error as "Assisting in Confine- ment" This figure "has already been published in 'North Queensland Ethnography," Bull, v., fig. 28, as » Doctor using sucking string," c/. page 33, section 141, which is the correct explanation of the figure. ^vuuugu uuviuusij uisiauei, rrom one another, it would never- theless be an exceedingly difficult matter to differentiate between the two when on the wing and in flight. Our Australian Lepi- doptera, although presenting numerous instances of protective colouration, affords very little in the way of true mimicry. For this reason such an instance as the one referred to above is decidedly interesting. The genus Jlypolimnas, Hubn.( = Diadema,Bo'\sd.),h apparently, as pointed out by Wallace, of Austro-Malayan origin. Of the fifteen species and their numerous varieties all, with the excep- 6 NOTES on MIMICRY AND VARIATION' By W. J. Rainbow, F.L S., Entomologist. (Frontispiece.) Recently there were added to the Australian Museum cabinets specimens of Phcenicops porphyropis, Meyr. & Low., and Milionia queenslandica, Roths. All were obtained from Mr. F. P. Dodd. of Kuranda, N. Queensland. They are particularly interesting from the fact that the former is apparently a mimic of the latter. The Skipper, P. porphyropis (Front., fig. 1), has dark fuscous wings, suffused with iridescent purple ; on the forewing there is a moderately broad transverse bright yellow band, the edges of which are irregularly dentate, whilst on the hindwing, at the termen, and just below the apex, there is a rather narrow patch of yellow. Except in point of size there is no apparent difference between the male and female forms, the latter being somewhat the larger of the two. They are really beautiful insects, and although rare in collections, may nevertheless be fairly prevalent iu the deep recesses of the rich tropical jangle of Northern Queensland. The moth, M. queenslandica (Front., fig. 2), like the butterfly, has dark fuscous wings. The fore wings have each a broad, trans- verse, bright yellow band, the edges of which are uneven : the hinder angle has a somewhat dusky crimson bar, and this ter- minates in and suffuses the lower extremity of the transverse yellow bar. In some examples the crimson bar is much more vivid than in others. The lower wings are edged and dentated with yellow, and each is further ornamented with a large, irregu- larly-shaped concolourous spot. Although obviously distinct from one another, it would never- theless be an exceedingly difficult matter to differentiate between the two when on the wing and in flight. Our Australian Lepi- doptera, although presenting numerous instances of protective colouration, affords very little in the way of true mimicry. For this reason such an instance as the one referred to above is decidedly interesting. The genus Hypolimnas, Hiibn.( = Diade7na,Bo\sd.),h apparently, as pointed out by Wallace, of Austro-Malayan origin. Of the fifteen species and their numerous varieties all, with the excep- 6 70 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. tion of about five (African), occur within this area. Two, //. bolina, Linn., and //. misippus, Linn., have a wide range, the former occurring on every island in the Malayan Archipelago, as well as India, Australia, and the Pacific Islands, and the latter in Java, Borneo, Lombock, Timor, Celebes, India, Guiana, Aus- tralia, and Africa. " This genus," says Wallace,1 "and those which have been separated from it, furnish us with examples of almost all the anomalies of variation. Some species present an amount of variation perhaps greater than any to be found among butterflies; others scarcely vary at all. The sexes are, in some species, ahso- lutely without a feature of their colouration in common ; in others they are hardly distinguishable. In a large number of species there is the most wonderful mimicry of other groups, so that they have been mistaken for Danaidca and Acrtvidoi, and there is perhaps nothing more striking than the accurate manner in which some African species imitate the striped and spotted Acrcece, which inhabit the same districts. In the Eastern islands the protective mimicry has sometimes caused the usual sexual characters to be completely reversed, which has led to confusion in the determination of species." The mimicry of Danaus chrysippus, Linn., by Hypolimnas misippus, is not only a won- derful, but a well-known example. The common Danaus (Limnas) petilia, Stoll., is regarded as the Australian form of D. chrysippus. The last-named species occurs in India, Burmah, Malayan Archipelago, Africa, and even Europe. In respect of the Australian form of Hypolimnas bolina, Linn., the males are very constant in colouration and ornamentation, but the females present an almost unending series of variations, both in size, colour, and ornamentation. The chief feature of interest to the student is that the female is apparently, in a state of flux, the examination of many examples showing a tendency on the part of the insect to conform to the Danaid type. In our cabinets we have a number of varieties. One, collected some years ago by Mr. G. Masters atGayndah, Queensland(Front., fig. 3), measures, in expanse, four inches. If is dark olivaceous- brown, suffused with purple. The forewing has a few small sub-costal spots above the cell ; a transverse blue macular fascia beyond the end of the cell : a submarginal series of white spots placed between the nervules, the two uppermost of which are 1 Wallace.— Trans. Knt, Soc. Loncl., 1S69, p. 27S. NOTES ON MIMICRY AND VARIATION — RAINBOW 71 largest and separated from each other by a nervule ; beyond the series just described there is a subrnarginal and marginal series of waved bluish-grey spots, and these vary both in size and in intensity ; viewed in different angles the colour of these spots varies, a deep purple being sometimes noted ; fringe picked out with patches of white ; between the median and hist submedian nervules there is a small patch of orange. Hind wings have two subrnarginal rows of bluish-grey spots between the nervules, those of the inner row being much the smallest and placed singly, whilst those of the outer row are in pairs; a marginal row of more or less obscure concolorous markings lie close to the outer angle ; fringe as in forewings. On the underside the wings are of a greyish-brown colour. The forewing has the lower half suffused with ferruginous; the transverse fascia beyond the cell is obscurely greyish ; a narrow transverse bar of dark chocolate brown commences near the costal nervure and terminates at the distal extremity of the anal angle : between the costa and the costal nervure there are a number of scattered white scales, whilst just within the cell there are two large patches of white scales, each patch seated upon a dark brown back ground ; beyond the cell and just before the transverse grey fascia there is a third patch of white scales, and these are also seated upon a dark back ground ; the marginal and subrnarginal spots coincide in position to those on the upper surface ; those, nearest the posterior extremity of the anal angle are large and bluish-grey ; the inter- mediate ones are smaller and more or less obscure ; the apical pair of the innermost subrnarginal series are large and oval. On the lower wing there is a faint transverse bar of grey running across the centre of the wing, and this commences with a large roundish grey spot near the middle of the anterior angle ; there is a subrnarginal row of small bluish-<,'iey spots placed singly between the nervules ; below these again a row of large, conical greyish markings seated in pairs between the nervules, and below the latter series a waved greyish line interrupted and broken by nervules. All these spots and markings are promi- nent and distinct on the lower side, whilst on the upper they are obscure. The next example to which I desire to draw attention comes from the Clarence River, N.S. Wales (Front., fig. 4). It is as large as the preceding example, but is markedly distinct from it. In this form we can trace what appears to be a further step in the pro- cess of evolution towards the Danaid type. The blue macular fascia referred to as occurring on the upper wing of the former is in the present example a short but prominent, broken, trans- 72 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. verse bar consisting of four large elliptical white patches ; the orange-coloured patch is also more than twice the size of the one in the forewing of the first example ; the inner submarginal series of spots, except the apical pair, are very small and white ; mar- ginal rows of bluish spots only faintly discernible. On the lower wing, instead of a faint blue transverse fascia there is a large median white patch, the edges of which are suffused with blue ; marginal spots and markings obscure, bluish ; cilia of both wings alternately dark brown and white. On the underside the wings agree in general colour with those of the first example, but differ fiom them by the transverse macular fascia on the fore- wing being white, and again by a broad transverse white bar running obliquely across the hindwing ; the marginal and sub- marginal patches of white are also much heavier than are those of first example. A third example (Front., fig. 5) comes from Kensington Downs, Queensland, where with a number of others it was collected by Mr. A. J. Ewen. An examination of these shows a wide range of variation, both in colouration and size. In the form under con- sideration the upper wings are velvety black ; the transverse macular fascia is white, and each of the large spots comprising it is edged with blue ; each of the two large apical spots, and the series of small, submarginal spots that proceed from them are also white and faintly edged with blue ; the marginal and sub- marginal markings are distinct though fine; the orange-coloured patch on the lower half of the wing is much larger than that of the second example quoted (Front., fig. 4). The lower wing is velvety black at base, outer and anal angles very dark velvety brown, median area white edged and faintly suffused with blue, marginal markings indistinct ; cilia alternately black and white. On the underside the wings are much darker than in the second example, and this has the effect, naturally, of making the trans- verse marginal and submarginal white markings, as also the series of small bluish spot*, stand more prominently out. Other examples collected by Mr. Ewen show, in their variation, the same apparent tendency towards mimicry, and in some not only is there present the bright orange-red patch on the upper wing, but the lower wing also bears indications of a gradual evolutionary tendency towards the same colour. Taking the underwings of both sexes of this species into account, there appears to me to be little doubt, that when the insects are at rest, the colouration and markings must be protective, else, con- sidering that the species is decidedly edible to insectivorous animals it could scarcely be so common. We must not for«et that its earlier stages may have something to account for in this NOTES ON MIMICRY AND VARIATION — RAINBOW. 73 respect. The larvae are gregarious and " when first produced they are green, with black heads, and are thinly covered with hairs. After the first moult the body is covered with whorls of tuhercles, each emitting three or four hairs. The head bears two bristly spines. When full fed, the body becomes throughout of a rich velvety hlack, witli whorls of branched spines of a yellow colour, whilst the two on the head are black. ... In length the larvae attains to nearly three inches, and is of a full and plump form. It is extremely handsome in appearance, but of very offensive habits."2 Then, again, the pupa, with its abdominal segments armed with stout pointed tubercles, in addi- tion to its colour, which is purple-brown blotched with black on the wing-cases, must also be of advantage in aiding the species in the struggle for existence. In addition to the preceding forms we have other examples — one from this State and one from Thursday Island, for instance — which are so distinct that a tyro could scarcely be blamed for regarding them as separate. In the first place they are much smaller ; the one from New South Wales has an expanse of rather more than three inches, and the other of only two and three- quarters. In size and colour of the wings on their upper side, save for the splash of orange-red on the forewings, they more nearly conform to Danaus (Salatura) affinis, Fab., a species ranging from Clarence River, N. S. Wales, to Cape York and Port Darwin. The ground colour of the Danaid and Satyrid is dull brown, and each has on the forewing an oblique, transverse, white macular fascia, and white apical, marginal and subinar- ginal spots. But it is in the lower wings that the greatest resem- blance between the two species exists ; each are of the same chocolate-brown and each have a large patch of white. In the Danaid the latter extends right to the anal angle, but in the Satyrid it scarcely reaches it. On the under side the resemblance in colour and markings of H. bolina to D. affinis is less distinct, but the New South Wales example of the former, owing to its large median area of white, extending as it does to the anal angle, together with its large marginal and submarginal white markings, and its alternating white and brown cilia, is the closest example of the Satyrids to the Danaid insect. There can be little doubt that the Australian forms of H. bolina, like the Indian butterflies of that species, are affected by the seasons ; that we have in fact " wet" and "dry " season forms, but these seasonal changes have not yet been studied. - Rainbow — A Guide to the Study of Australian Butterflies, H>07, pp. SO and SI, fig.4S. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY. Bulletin No. 11. Miscellaneous Papei 3. 1. Tabu and other forms of Restriction. 2. Counting and Enumeration. .".. Signals on the Road ; Gesture Language. !. Progressive Ivoko-yimider Exercises. By Waltkk E. Rorii, Magistrate of the Pomeroon District, British Guiana ; late Chief Protector of Aborigines, Qr.< land; Corresponding Member of the Anthropological Societies, Berlin and Florence, the Anthropological Institute, London, etc. (Plates xvii.-xxi.. figs. 0-7.) Part I. Tabu, and other Forms of Restriction. (to accompany Bulletin 8). ( JONTENTS. Sect. 1. Local Names of Tabu •J Permanent Restrictions 3. Temporary ., 4. Tabu may be declared by women ... 5. Diets forbidden to all young people 6. ,, all women 7. ,, the exogamous group ... 8. ,, at certain occasions ... 9. ,, person's namesake 10. Localities forbidden ... 11. Names ,, 12. Relatives ,, 1. Certain prohibitions, varieties of "Tabu," are in force throughout the whole of North Queensland, and their disregard is either met by punishment at the instigation of the Council of Elders1, if discovered, or else by some form of disease, accident 1 Roth— Hull. S— Sect. I. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 75 or death, when not'-'. These restrictions, which deal with such varied subjects as dietaries, personal relations and property, localities, names, etc., ate known under different terms : — ji-anna on the Pennefather River, ta-mi on the Middle Palmer, tamanda by the Kundara Blacks of the Lower Gulf Coast, aln-ta to the Koko-warra Natives of the hinterland of Princess Charlotte Bay, chamolo and kamma on the Lower Tully River, tcha-bul on the Bloomfield River, and strange to say as ta-bul at Cape Bedford and on the Lower Endeavour River. 2. Some forms of the tabu are constant in that it can never be removed, in others it may be released by the elders, occasionally by one individual only (not necessarily an elder), but never by women, who sometimes have the power of declaring it. During her menstrual periods a female can never be freed from the tabu imposed upon her consequent upon her condition ; so also in connection with the final place of burial, etc., the prohibitions are inexorable. The tabu on certain dietaries is often relaxed by some of the very old men in favour of the young males when food happens to be extra scarce on the Bloom held (/.'. Hislop). Amongst the Tully River Blacks, who account for their food restrictions as having been in existence as long as they can remember, the only individual who can remove the tabu, and then only from the kamma variety (see further), is the one wh< business it is to wash the corpse's skin and rub its hair off during the course of the burial celebrations (A\ Brooke). At Cape Bedford the word indicative of the release from tabu is dai-tcheu. 3. Where the restriction is only temporary, it may be declared by reason of animosity and pure wantonness, for the protection of property, and sometimes as a recognised punishment. There may 1)" differences in the family circle ; the wife may have gone to all the trouble and labour of collecting and preparing the day's food for herself and family, when the husband will declare it tabu in favour of the children, which accordingly precludes her having even so much as a taste. A man will be going out of camp and leaving some weapons, food, etc., behind, if he urinates upon the former or in close proximity to the latter, they become " tami," and he will find everything intact upon his return (Middle Palmer River). On the Bloomfield, the Palmer, and elsewhere, a form of " roarer " hung up by a string (Pis. xx., xxi.) will make everything near or underneath it tabu; it is usually decorated with white stripes on a red background, and sometimes has a nick at its free 2 Roth -Bull. 5— Sect. 150. 76 RECORDS OP THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. extremity. Dilly-bags when used by the men are tabu, the prohibi- tion including everything therein contained; when used by women, nothing beyond the ordinary family possessions, nothing liable to tabu, is carried in them. Supposing a person break his promise and speak by name of his pi-wal, the individual who bores his nose at the initiation ceremony, he is punished by having certain of his property, or perhaps a dietary to which he has been accustomed, made tcha-bul in favour of the person mentioned (Bloomfield River). 4. Although tabu is thus generally declared by men, it can here and there be instituted by women, but then only in the male interests. The women, for instance, will be quarreling, perhaps over some alleged inequality in sharing the tood, when one of them will suddenly declare it all tabu in favour of her husband or any male belonging to the same exogamous group as herself (Bloomfield River), or to her son (Cape Bedford), when it cannot, of course, be eaten or touched by anyone else. 5. Certain dietaries are strictly forbidden to all young people before arriving at puberty, the full attainment of which is generally dependant upon the first of the initiation ceremonies in the male, or upon initiation (where practised), or the birth of the first baby in the female. On the Pennefather River, for instance, stingaree, wild-fowl eggs, certain sharks, certain snakes, emu flesh, and, before the introduction of the iron harpoon, turtle, are forbidden them. The dependency of the turtle upon iron (which is capable of piercing the carapace) was explained to me by the young men by reason of the fact that while wooden har- poons were in vogue these creatures could only be caught by striking them in the soft parts, i.e., the neck and posteriorly, and their capture was consequently no easy matter, thus rendering their flesh a very scarce commodity. On the Tully River there is a distinction made in the foods forbidden to the young according as it is derived from the sea or land, in the former case the tabu being spoken of as chamolo, in the latter as kamma. Here chamolo includes stingaree, barramundi, mullet, trevally, and salmon, its disregard entailing the culprit's hair turning prema- turely grey. Kamma embraces bandicoot, iguana, porcupine, black snake, carpet snake and platypus ; and were any young person to transgress, the particular animal would make him sick by building its nest or laying its eggs inside the back of his neck. G. More than this, certain foods, varying with each district, are forbidden to any woman whatsoever, old or young ; thus, stingaree and mullet are tabu to all females at Cape Grafton and along a large extent of coast-line northward. During their NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 77 pregnancy the weaker sex have the limits of their menu still further reduced, by not being allowed to eat this or that, e.g., rock-cod between the Mossman and Cairns, where, should the forbidden fruits be partaken of, the fish would entirely disappear out of the sea, and the guilty parties die of sore bellies. And to crown all, whatever is cooked by men, all women have to regard as tabu. Old men may, indeed, institute the ban over any food which, owing to scarcity, they may wish to reserve for themselves. The social organisation of the tribe also bears important relations to the restrictions placed upon food, in that an individual dare not eat the various animals belonging to his or her own exogamous group ; or, as the natives will often describe it, " belong all same skin." In certain districts, however, e.g., Boulia, the animal, etc., may be killed by him for others. But again, a native is every- where restricted both from giving or accepting presents of food to or from certain of his relatives (see further). Parents have, of course, to provide the necessary food for their children up to the time of their first initiation, but in the hinterland of Princess Charlotte Bay, whatever a child up to that period rinds in the way of diet, e.g., iguana, sugar-bag, is tabu from its parents ; this particular prohibition having the special term of womba applied to it by the Kokowarra. S. Certain foods are also tabu (neither mentioned nor eaten) in connection with the various ceremonies. For instance, both during, and for some time subsequently to initiation, the young man is specially forbidden different diets ; during the course of the burial celebrations on the Pennefather River, and Peninsula generally, the relatives specially charged with the proper execu- tion of the rites are prohibited eating meat-flesh, etc. 9. There appears to be no constancy in the light with which the eating by the individual of his name-sake, when it happens to be an animal or plant, is regarded ; on the Palmer River it is tabu, on the Tully it is not. 10. The spot where anyone has been finally buried is tabu from the women only, men can visit there. This form of restriction also includes certain things connected with the present history of the deceased from the dilly-bag in which the mourning-string has been placed, even anything and everything in the hut where the bark trough with its enclosed corpse has rested (Bloomfield River), down to the particular locality where his own or other nature- spirits are supposed to linger. At Cape Bedford the birth-place is similarly tabu from everybody except the parents, the prohibi- tion comprising anything brought to the spot where the baby is lying, or anything that it is allowed to touch ; the navel-strings 78 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. can thus place the tabu upon yams, etc. The particular piece of ground reserved for the holding of the initiation ceremonies is always strictly tabu from all those who are not specially privileged to visit it. 1 1. The tabu of names of persons deceased has been fully dealt with already, and the explanation given3 accounting for it. At Cape Bedford whenever an Aboriginal unintentionally makes use of such a forbidden word, he will immediately correct himself, and say " barkar kada," i.e., "(my) mouth (is) foul/' ami expec- torate. 12. Certain of an individual's relatives are strictly tabu from him, in so much that he must neither approach, converse with, accept from, nor give them anything. This especially refers to the father-in-law and mother-in-law. These, and other relation- ship restrictions are, however, far from constant. Thus, on the Pennefather a man must not look at either of his step- parents, though it is permissible for him to converse with them witli face averted ; a woman may talk with both in a natural manner, the business of the mother-in-law here being to attend her in her confinements. At Miriam Vale, south of Rock- hampton, and at Boggy Creek, Upper Nornianby River, as well as elsewhere, a man may, under certain circumstances, address his step-parents from a distance in a comparative whisper. On the Tullv, both male and female talk to the father-in-law either by his individual name, whatever it may be, or by the generic one of ni-ubi ; but their teeth would rot out were they to converse with the mother-in-law, though they may speak of her by the generic term of wai-min, but never by her individual name. With the sole exception, perhaps, of those cases where the mother-in-law acts as midwife, the practice of both males and females refusingto touch any food prepared by their step-parents is universal. Jn some districts it is usual for the wife not even to converse with her husband's blood-brothers, but on the Tully she may lawfully have marital relations with them; the converse of husband and wife's blood-sisters, with its corresponding incon- Btancy, also holds true. It is the usual practice for a man never to talk to his blood-sister, or sometimes not even mention her name, after she has once reached womanhood ; her father, mother's or father's brother, or her husband if she has one, looks after her interests, and when necessary takes up her quarrels. :i Roth— Bull. 5— Sect. 72. NOKTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 19 Part II. Counting and Enumeration. In a previous Bulletin4 mention is made of the so-called tourna- ments held in the Cardwell and other districts throughout the year, except at flood-time, the variations in the number of days between successive performances and the interesting fact that the blacks have special terms for enumerating the days in the interval. The distances to be traversed, other engagements elsewhere, the control of the food supplies, etc., are some of the factors which make it very important that no mistakes should be made as to the dates fixed upon, the liability to error being increased through some of the camps having irregular intervals. Thus, in 1901, on the Lower Tully River, the prun was held either every seventh or thirteenth day from the termination of the last preceding, but on the upper portions of the same river it was on the eighth or thirteenth; while in the neighbourhood of Cairns the Yidinji Blacks would seem to have held them pretty regularly on the twelfth day. As often happened, owing, perhaps, to a case of homicide consequent on the fighting, or to a good season with plentj food, the performance might either be shorter or longer than usual, and a good deal of unnecessary quarrelling and bickering, through some of the visitors arriving too early and others too Late, was prevented by fixing names to the days in the intervals. This was the explanation given to account for this primitive kind of calendar, which lasted throughout the performances, i.e., the whole of the dry season. It must be admitted, however, that not only was this calendar shifted, but that it might be shorter or longer. However, as it referred to time when solely in connection with the performances, the arrangement made but little practical difference. When a prun is completed, the old men will arrange amongst themselves as to when and where the next is to be held, and a messenger will be sent to the different camps to tell them they are expected at such and such a place on a certain day. But many of the larger camps in the neighbourhood have their own calendar, which is similarly always being altered, so that the names of the days will, perhaps, not correspond. To obviate all mistakes, the messenger employs at least three methods to make matters clear — the message-stick, the fern-frond, and where it is understood, by mnemonics with the hand. The Yidinji Blacks apparently used all three. The stick is employed * Roth— Bull. 4— Sect. 15. 80 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEl'M. by cutting nicks on it, each cut representing a clay, but contrary to expectation I have never been able to find the passing of a day indicated by the crossing of a cut. With the fern-leaf, it is split in half, the number of leaflets left attached indicating the number of days of the interval, a leaflet being folded on itself for each day passed. On the Lower Tully River the intervening days are borne in mind by the different parts of the palms and digits, as follows, the messenger being able to explain to the various camps visited exactly how many days later they are expected : — Opening his left hand the reckoner names the first and second days as he points to the spots respectively so marked in the figure (fig. 6), the same with the fourth, fifth and sixth ; and now, with fingers all closed, he seizes the extended thumb and mentions the seventh, the date for which the next prun has been appointed. But supposing that it has been decided to hold the next per- formance after an interval of thirteen instead of seven days, the reckoner will open his hand again and point respectively to the spots numbered eight to thirteen, the final day always ending with the thumb, giving them names identical with those already mentioned by him for the first to seventh days, thus : — Fig. 6. 1st day 2nd or 8th day 3rd or 9th day 1th or 10th day 5th or 1 1th day fithorl2thday 7th or 13th day = chalgur chalgurodcabun meriri mono -chano moko-pulo karapo kari-unggol These words have no other significance, are absolutely distinct from the terms indicative of number, and are only applied to a day as a portion of the interval between the successive pruns, the idea of time-when being otherwise always reckoned by the number of sleeps. Amongst the blacks of the Upper Tully River the performance was held either on the eighth or thirteenth day. 'he numbers referred to being shown in tig. 7, where the names for the fourth and ninth, for the fifth and tenth, etc., are identical. The Cairns Natives (the Yidinji), who had an interval of eleven days between the performances, puloga as they called them there, NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 81 Ask a Mack as to reckoned the intermediate days on both hands : first and second on ball and tip respectively of left thumb, third to sixth on tips of remaining fingers, the seventh to tenth on right hand fingers, commencing with the little or.e, the eleventh falling on right thumb; the names applied bore traces of the three numerals, as well as compounds of them. Natives do not possess special terms to express numbers over three collectively, everything beyond this being relatively either few or many. Not that they lack the mental ability to appreciate a conce] tion of higher values — 1 have known of black children working at decimal frac- tions, and a young full-blood engaged as draughtsman in a large engineering works — but that the opportunity so seldom arises of having to exercise it. the number of occupants in a camp, he will probably tell you there are few ormany,and if pressed for further information, will mention the names of Tom, Dick, Harry, etc., ticking them off or not on either his fingers or in the sand, but always in pairs. He apparently takes a concrete view of the case, leaving you to form a mental picture of the number as a whole. He can certainly form such a mental picture for himself, because he will describe any large number of strangers, a flock of pigeons, anything in fact, of which the components are not individually known to him, in some such form as "plenty sit down all round about." It is true I have met with natives here and there who can count np to twenty pretty accurately in their own language, making use of the term for hand, foot, leg or arm to indicate a group of five (digits or toes), and forming the compounds from them accord- ingly, e.g., 8 = 5 + 3, 11=5 + 1 + 5, etc. But in all such cases they have mixed pretty freel)T with whites, and can speak fairly good English, with the result that, for ethnographical purposes, it is quite sufficient to mention its occurrence. Taking three northern languages of which we have accurate information, the numerals are as follows : — Cape Bedford. Bloomfield River, Oue Two Three nobun godera kundo nupun ma-ma-ra kollur Tally Rivei . yungkul bulai karbo 32 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. At Cape Bedford the adverbial form kundoi-go means three only, and is used to express any small number, hut only in com- parison with a large one, and is the nearest approach to our word "few"; kundo-kundo, or threes and threes, i.e., many, is com- parable with onr expression "dozens and dozens"5. On the Bloomrield any number beyond three is wor-pul, corresponding to our "plenty." The. Tally Blacks speak of a comparatively smaller and larger lot beyond three as mundi and katai respec- tively, with the result that they have been in perfect good faith applied to our words "four " and " five." As already mentioned, the counting is always done in pairs, and whatever the object of enumeration (excepting only the intervening days of the prun) no other aids to memory than the lingers are utilised. Opening the one hand (generally the right at Cape Bedford), he turns down digit by digit, commencing with the thumb (Bloomfield) or little finger (Cape Bedford), counting as he does so ; over five he commences again, but turns down two at a time, with each couplet saying " and two." On the Tully, after counting up anything, the Tally Blacks will often express the total as it were by using the term ballan-jo, i.e., the lot. Part III. Signals on the Road : Gesture Language. The ideagrams represented here are additional to those given in the " Ethnological Studies," etc., the figures in which are here referred to as " E.S." with a corresponding number. Since that work was written, I must include the eating of the corpse by the near relatives (see Pennefather River, etc., Burial Ceremonies)8 as another condition where gesture language is employed. Signals on the Road. Throughout the unsettled districts there are narrow path-ways, regular beaten pads, more or less all over the country. When a tree falls across this track, it is the latter which is shifted to the i ight or left as the case may be. To indicate the route taken by the traveller to those who are following behind, he makes use of certain signals, the commonest t which is done with the big toe. On the Pennefather River, for instance, between it and the Batavia, the trail of the big toe ■ Roth -Bull. 2-Sect. 25. Roth -Austr. Mus. Rec, vi., 5, 1907, p. 308. NORTH QUBEN8LAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 83 in the sand acts the same rule as a finger-post would to the European. In the area drained by the Middle Palmer River, a mark made on the ground outwards (from the track) with the ball of the toe indicates the proximity to a camping-ground. Around Princess Charlotte Bay the whole foot is scraped along the soil forwards, and the impression of the toes made as distinct as possible ; close to its extremity in front, a stick, from one to two feet long, around the free end of which some tea-tree bark has been wound, is stuck into the ground at more or less of an angle towards the direction pursued. The Palmer River Blacks appear to use the stick separate from the imprint ; for instance, direction pure and simple is by them indicated with a short withe, to the top of which is attached a tussock of grass, or with a small piece of bark by itself, the whole fixed at the required angle ; while a digging-stick similarly placed shews that the individual who left it there has gone a very considerable distance on the track pointed towards, (hi other occasions, as I have noticed in the hinterland of Princess Charlotte Bay, a piece is knocked off the summit of an ant-bed, and the stick is fixed on the top of the remaining portion. Where there happen to be cross-roads, the Tully River Blacks break off small houghs and lay them on the track to be followed ; on the other hand, if there are no boughs available, but grass is present, the tips of the grass-blades will be tied together over the path-way not to be pursued7. In the Rockhampton area the natives would at times make use of a tree by stripping a narrow piece of bark from above down and placing in the fork connecting it with the butt, any tussock of grass, the " heads " of which point towards the particular route taken"". If a tribesman, on the other hand, is dealing with his own immediate people, and the atmospheric conditions and state of the 7 Roth— Ethnological Studies, etc., 1S97— Sect. 225. 8 Mr. T. Petrie has given me the following notes on road-signals, etc., amongst the now defunct Brisbane Blacks. A tuft of grass, in situ, tied round with another hunch which has been pulled up, bent in the direction to he followed. In the scrubs the natives would just snap down, but not break, a twig here and there; they were always especially afraid of making a distinct pathway in the scrubs when once the Europeans came, for they had to be very careful about being hunted down by the black troopers. On a cleared space which they would make by the side of a pathway, they would stamp the imprint of a foot, and to hide their tracks they would often walk backwards. In tracking a kangaroo, etc., over rocks, the natives would bend down and blow on the " leaves" of the moss to see if any were loose, and so could tell whether the animal had passed over- it or not : this action of bending down to blow seems to have given rise in certain quarters to the erroneous impression that the scent was being smelt. 84 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. soil are favourable, his own " tracks " would be quite sufficient, independently of any sign-posts so to speak, because in a camp each one's footprints are known to all the others. The advent of strangers is recognised in other ways. The scrub-blacks on the Tully River certainly regard the screeching of the white cockatoo as warning them of danger. Just previously to one of my visits in this district, some years ago, my host (Mr. E. Brooke) had a personal experience of this kind : — While the natives were rendering him assistance with some fencing, a European stranger suddenly put in an appearance on the edge of the scrub without having been observed coming ; the blacks expressed themselves in their own dialect as follows: — "What was the matter with the cockatoos 1 they never told us anyone was coming." On the other hand, crows, hawks, and perhaps some other birds, will indicate proximity to a camp. The camping-ground, however, is usually sufficiently demon- strable by the fires burning, sometimes by the smell of the smoke alone. On more than one occasion my black companions have discovered a camp by the smell and the direction of the wind. Beyond the smoke being proof positive of a fire, and so indica- tive of the presence of human agency, I am now satisfied, after repeated enquiry and cross-examination, that the allegation of a method of communication by so-called " smoke signal," is not warranted by the facts. Gesture Language. Adult man.— ( = E.S. 110), G.B., P.R., Ro., and Pn. R., where, in addition, this ideagram means a father or any old man. Bushman, traveller (PI xvii., fig. 1). — The left hand, holding the spear, is raised ; the right arm, holding the wommera, swinging. Pn.R. Government tracker, policeman (PI. xvii., figs. 6, 23). — Two ideagrams representing either the peaked cap (i.e., the official uniform), or the military salute. OB. Woman, young woman (PL xvii., fig 15). — Hands rubbed up ami down the corresponding breasts, Ro.; or circled round the breasts to indicate their rotundity. Pn.R. Mother (PI. xvii., fig. 19). — Either hand placed on cones- ponding breast. Ro. (Compare E.S.I 12). Mother — Pulling down the nipple to shew the dependent breast ( = E.S.I 13), Pn.R. At Mornington Island, on suddenly surprising some women at one of the native encampments, they not only NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — -ROTH. 85 shrieked and screamed, but squeezed the milk out of their nipples, apparently to shew that they were mothers, and not virgines intactce. Venery, solicitation, etc. — A stretching forwards, and pulling backwards of the hand to indicate the seizure of the girl's wrist when she is captured by a man, is used in combination with the sign of a young woman (rotund breasts, see ante) to express a man's wishes which he does not care to express verbally. Pn.E. Venery (PI. xvii., fig. 14\ — Forefinger and thumb (representing the two thighs) are extended and widely separated. C.B. Venery (PI. xvii., fig. 12). — Forefinger of ens hand rubbed backwards and forwards into the ring formed by the thumb and forefinger of the other hand. Ro. Mother's or father's father (PI. xvii., fig. 10).— The length of the thumb touching the forehead. Ro. (Compare E.S.124). Father (PI. xvii., fig. 3). — Thumb and fingers touching corres- ponding shoulder. Ro. (Compare E. 8. 1 20). Brother, sister (PI. xvii., fig. 7). — Extended hand situate on corresponding thigh. Ro. Son, daughter (PI. xvii., fig. 11). — Hand placed over the genitals. Ro. Father's sister's child (PI. xvii., fig. 8). — Hand extended over umbilicus. Ro. (Compare E.S. 123). Husband (=E.S. 114). Ko. Little brother, sister, or child. — By pointing the forefinger to the back of the neck, where the infant is most generally carried, Pn.R. Orphan. — Represented by the signaller tugging at the nipple, and then putting the forefinger in the mouth ; the idea being that the child has lost the breast at which it sucked. P. C.B. Cattle (PI. xvii., fig. 4). — The two horns are represented by the raised hands and flexed wrists. P.C.B. (At C.B. and P.R. = E.S. 4). Horse (PI. xvii., fig. 13). — The trunk, with arms fixed as depicted, is flexed alternately from side to side to shew the " swing " of the animal in motion. P.C.B. Horse (PI. xvii., fig. 9). — The swing of the animal is here imitated with either arm alternately. P.R. Dog, dingo. — The heels are alternately kicked backwards along the ground and then one of the legs cocked up sideways. Ro. (At P.C.B. the ideagram = E.S.I, which in addition represents 7 86 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. an opossum here). Indicated by the raising of the paws (PI. xvii fig. 21). Pn.R. Dog, dingo (PI. xvii., tig. 5). — Tapping on the shoulder with the tinger-tips, but no interpretation obtainable. C.B., P.R. Kangaroo, wallaby in general (PI. xvii., fig. 2). — In the former, the hands (the animal's paws) are held at some distance in front, and motioned forwards and upwards (the hop) ; in the latter, the same idea, but the hands are held closer to the chest. Pn.R. Large Kangaroo (PI. xix., figs. 1 and 2). — The first sign indi- cates large size, while the second shows the position in which the paws are held. P.R. Kangaroo (PI. xix., fig. 5). — Some say that the thumb repre- sents the long ear, but the majority that it indicates the long foot. C.B. Kangaroo (PI. xix., fig. 8). — The two extended fingers represent the animal's elongate toes ; there is a suitable accompanying movement. Ro. (Compare E.S.23). Red Kangaroo, male (PI. xix., fig. 3). — The leg kicking out is represented. P. C.B. Note the extended thumb as in the idea- gram of a kangaroo at C.B. Red Kangaroo, female (PI. xix., fig. 4). Rotation at wrist with the open hand. Said to represent the movement of the animal's paws. P. C.B. At P.R. this ideagram is a sand-ridge kangaroo. Brown Kangaroo, male (PI. xix., fig. 7). — A vertical flexion of the wrist, indicative of the way the animal travels. P. C.B. Brown Kangaroo, female (PI. xix., fig. 6). — To represent the pricking up of the animal's ears. P. C.B. At P.R. this sign refers to any small kangaroo. Scrub- Wallaby (PI. xix., fig. 9). — In imitation of the way in which the paws are held. P.CB. Small Rock-Wallaby (PI. xix., fig. 10).— Both hands with palms backwards, imitating the position of the animal's front paws, or one haud held on a higher level than the other. Ro. White Wallaby (Plate xix., fig. 11).— Hands held, like the creature's, lower clown, but with the palms up. Ro. Paddymelon(Pl. xix., fig. 13).— In imitation of the position of the paws. C.B. Opossum (PI. xix., fig. 12). — Indicative of the footpads. C.B., P.R. (Compare initial position of E.S. 1). NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — KOTH. 87 Opossum (PL xix., fig. 15). — AfcC.B. an almost similar position is s iid to represent the rounded cheeks of the animal. B mdicoot (PL xix., fig. 18). — The extended little finger is supposed to be the creature's long foot. P.C.B., P.R. Porcupine (PL xix., tig. 17). — The thumb and little finger indicate the two feet, or according to some natives, the spines. C.B. Porcupine (PL xix., fig. 20). The pricking up of the ear is imitated. P.R. Native Companion (PL xix., fig. 14). — Indicating peculiarity of bill. Similar to E.S. 50, but the two fingers are in close oppo- sition laterally instead of one being underneath the other. P.C.B., P.R Native Companion (PL xix., fig. 19). — The shin is grazed with the fingers to shew the large rough scales on the bird's legs. C.B. Pelican (PL xix., fig. 16). — Slow, sluggish movement of the bird's wings. C.B. See ideagramfor snake in general at P.C.I'.. Duck (PL xix., fig. 21) — The flattened bill is represented by the forefinger flattening the tip of the nose. C.B. Emu (PL xix., fig. 24). — Head and neck, with movements, imitated with the hand and forearm. C.B., P.I! , Ko. (Compare E.S. 38). The local ideagram for the bird at P. C.B. ( = E.S. 36). Turkey-Bustard.— At P.C.B. (= EX 38), which in addition, expresses a pelican. Cockatoo (PL xix., fig. 22). — The raising of the top-knot. P. K. Cockatoo (PL xix., fig. 26). —Representation of the curved beak. C.B. (Compare E.S. 45). Eagle-Hawk (=E.S. 31) Ro.— At P.C.B. and C.B. it is identical, except that the palm is turned down instead of up. Mosquito (=E.S. 76) but on the opposite arm only at C.B. Bee, honey (PL xix., tig. 23) — The open hand brushed down the side of the face which is upturned : this represents the shading of the eyes from the sun while the individual is locating the bees' nest in the tree. Pn.R. At Rockhampton, the signaller gazes intently on the ground for the pellets of dung, and then raises his head at the same time that he shades his eves with his hand to escape the sunlight, etc. Bee, honey (PL xix., fig. 25). — -The bee (i.e., the forefinger) is flying home into the hole in the tree-trunk (i.e., the top of the shoulder). P.C.B., P.R, Bee, honey (PL xix., fig. 27). — The tomahawk (hand) is cutting the nest out of the tree. (Compare E.S. 81). C.B. 88 KKCORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Head-louse (=E.S. 85).— C.B., P.R. Vain in general (PI. xix, fig. 28). — The finger is brought sharply downwards and forwards from in between the protruded lips, and a final click made with the voice. (The wiping off of any remnant from the lips). P.C.B. Yam (PI. xix., fig. 34). — The shaking of the hands in this position indicates the washing of the plant during the course of preparation. C.B. Yam (PI. xix., lig. 29). — The act of digging it up from out of the ground. C.B. (Compare E.S. 89). Yam (PI. xix., fig. 30). — The rolling movement of the upper hand indicates the action of squeezing the " mush " through the interstices of the dilly-bag colander. P.R. Water (PI. xix., tig. 33). — Tapping with the closed fingers upon the bulged-out cheek to show there is water inside there. Pn.R., P.C.B., P.R. Water (=E.S. 105).— C.B. Water-hole (PI. xix., fig. 35). — Motion of the hand shows its circumference, the previous ideagram signalled with it indicating that water is being spoken about. C.B. (Compare E.S. 108, 109 where the movement of the hand shews the convexity of a mountain, etc.). River, creek (PI. xix., fig. 31). — The moving arm represents the flowing water in the depression of country indicated by the flexure of the wrist of the fixed arm. P.R. River, creek (PI. xix., fig. 36). — The finger shews the course of the stream. C.B. Mountain (PI. xix., fig. 37). — The hand raised above the head to indicate both height and slope. P.R. (Compare E.S. 108, 109). Mountain (PI. xix., fig. 38). — Similar to preceding, the arm above the head indicating height, its motion expressing the general contour. C.B. (Compare E.S. 108, 109). Waist-skein (=E.S. 128). -C.B. Fore-head band (PI. xix., fig. 41). — In the act of heing put on. C.B. (Compare E.S. 130 for a correspondingly similar ideagram). Spear (=E.S. 143).— P.C.B. Spear, Wommera-spear (PI. xix., fig. 40). — The finger repre- sents the peg on the wommera, the shaking of the fore-arm indicating the quivering of the spear just previous to being thrown. Pn.H., C.B. (Compare E.S. 143). NORTH QUEENSLAND BTHNOGRAPHY — KOTH. 89 Spear-thrower (PI. xix., fig. 39). — Arm raised in the act of throwing. C.B. (Compare previous ideagram). Tomahawk (=E.S. 146), but only the lower hand is used. Large number, etc. (PI. xviii., fig. 1). — Tapping both shoulders with the fingers. Interpretation not obtainable. P. C.B. Large number, etc. (PI. xviii., tig. 2). — Finger-tips on shoulders and an up-and-down movement at the elbows. Interpretation not obtainable. C.B. Large number, etc. (PI. xviii., fig. 3). — Indicated by the cluster of digits. When two boys are together I have seen them express this ideagram collectively by joining all four hands together in a clump. P.R. (Compare E.S. 163, 164). Direction. — Indicated with the forefinger at C.B. (Compare E.S. 171). On the Penuefather River '; to look in a certain direction" would be represented by pointing tin' finger to the eye, and then fixing the digit in the quarter required. Interrogation, of any sort (PI. xviii., fig. 4). — A movement downwards and simultaneous closure of the fingers (wiy like the act of catching a fly) with the palm of the hand turned away from the signaller. Pn.R. Request, demand (=E.S. 176). — C.B. Silence (PI. xviii., tig. 5). — Hand placed over the closed mouth, and then turned upwards ami outwards. Pn.R. (Compare E.S. 178). Silence (PI. xviii., tig. 9). — Open hand moved from the level of the chest downwards and outwards. C.B. Corrobboree, dance (PI. xviii., fig. 6). — The heel is raised, with an out-and-in movement at the knee, i.e., the local dancing step. C.B. Fire (PI. xix., fig. 32). — Blowing the spark into flame. C.B. (Compare E.S. 188). At P. C.B. the two ideagrams are identical with E.S. 188, 192. Sleep (=E.S. 193).— C.B. , P.C.B. Swimming — Represented by a movement of the arms swimming dog-fashion. Anger (PI. xviii., fig. 7). — Expressed by breaking the spear between the teeth. P.C.B. Also represented, as in other dis- tricts (C.B., etc.), by biting the ball of the thumb (=E.S. 199). Anger (PL xviii., fig. 10). — Showing his teeth, the individual bites the spear which he is shaking with his hands on either side. C.B. 90 RECORDS OF TIIK AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, Death, killing, corpse, etc. [a] (PI. xviii., 6g. 8). — Flicking the sides of the chest with the thumb and middle linger, and simultaneously "clicking" with the mouth — to signify the spear, etc., entering the body. Pn.R. [6] (PI. xviii., tig. 11). — Placing the forefinger of the one hand over the corresponding finger of the other hand ; its signification is the breaking of the neck. Pn.R. [c] (PI. xviii., fig. 12). — The lower edge of the hand placed at an angle over the bridge of the nose ; this indicates the descending blade of the wommera. Pn.R. [a] (PI. xviii., fig. 13). — By the raised hand, with the fingers open and clawed, Pn.R. At Cape Bedford the same ideagram is complete, both hands being used with fingers in similar position, to represent the individual in the act of falling back dead. Death, killing, corpse, etc. (PI. xviii., fig. 14). — Closed eyes, and fixed arms in extended position ; the stage of rigor mortis. P.R. (Compare E.S. 204). Forgetfulness, etc. (PI. xviii., fig. 15). — Plugging the ear with the forefinger and pulling out that which originally entered there. C.B. Amongst these natives the ear is the seat of intelligence, consciousness, etc. (Compare E.S. 205). Knavery, foolery (PI. xviii., fig. 18). — Tapping with ihe fore- finger on the ear. The individual referred to will not listen to reason. See note to previous ideagram. C.B. Derision, contempt. — Turning the buttocks at the person addressed and smacking them. P.C.B. and elsewhere. Affirmation. — Smacking of the hip with the palm of the hand. C.B. Negation (PI. xviii., fig. 16). — Hand, with flexed lingers, is thrown from under the (.bin outwards, the fingers falling loos- e. Pn.R. The same idea is also represented here by the European head-shake, but whether this has been introduced or not, it is difficult to say ; a similar remark may be applied to the Cape Bedford Natives, who in addition nod the Ik ad for affirmation. Nothing, none (PI. xviii., fig. 20). — The hand is shewn empty. C.B. Nothing, no more (PI. xviii., fig. 21). — In the sens-e of all being eaten, everything being now below that line. C.B. Tracks. — The signaller will touch the sole of one foot (raised) with the forefinger, and point to the direction which the tracks have taken. Pn.R. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 91 "Ghost," evil spirit (Pi. xviii., fig. 19) — He who with his claws catches the women and children who will go out of camp at night. C.B. (Compare E.S. 213). Good-bye (PI. xviii., fig. 22). — Hooked forefinger points in direction of person addressed. No interpretation forthcoming. Rockhampton. Bird, turtle (PI. xviii., figs. 23, 24). — The same initial position for both, but in former case an outward swimming (flapper) movement, and in the latter a vertical one (wings). Pn.R. Frog (PI. xviii., tig. 25). — The movement of the arms repre- sents the "jump." P.C.B. Iguana (PI. xviii., fig. 29). — The wobbling gait of the creature is imitated in the position of the elbows, which are alternately drawn, one backwards, the other forwards. Pn.R. At P.C.B. it is represented by the same sign as the red (female) kangaroo, but additionally with a wobbling movement of the limbs. Lizard (PI. xviii., fig. 27). — A vibratile movement at the wrist — the idea of rapidity ot motion. C.B. (Compare E.S.." ! ) Lizard (=E.S. 54).— P.R. Frilled Lizard (PI. xviii., fig. 28).- Shewing the "frill" by pulling at the ear-lobe. C.B. Crocodile (PI. xviii., fig. 30). — The extended arm and hand represents the creature's long snout, head and neck. P.R. Crocodile (PI. xvii., fig. 16). — Its snout and teeth are indicated by the forefinger and incisors. C.B. Snake in general (PI. xviii., fig. 17). — The forefinger is drawn slowly down from the root to the tip of the nose to indicate length. P.C.B. This ideagram indicates a pelican on P.R. Snake in general ( = E.S. 58, where the forefinger ought to be pointing downwards instead of up). C.B., Rockhampton. Water-snake (PI. xvii., fig. 22). — The forefinger is the animal's head protruded above the surface of the water. C.B., P.R. (Compare previous ideagram), Carpet-snake ( = E.S. 61). C.B. It can also be indicated here (PI. xvii., fig. 20), with the two separated digits on either side of the nose, to express the reptile's flattened snout Snake, fish. — Indicated by the same initial position, the extended forefinger with the thumb closed over the other fingers. In the former, the fingers traverse a sinuous course; in the latter, a vibratile movement laterally from the elbow gives the appearance of the animal when viewed through the rippling water-surface. Pn.R. 92 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Stingaree (PI. xvii.. fig. 17). — The forefinger drawn upwards on the thigh indicates the long tail. Pn.R. Fish, fish-net (PI. wii., fig. 18). —The outstretched arms with closed hands are holding the two triangular nets in suitable position for catching them ; may be represented with the one hand only. Rockhampton. Mullet (PI. xviii., fig. 26). — The finger expresses the tail, and is moved quickly in such manner as to shew how the fish skips along the surface of the water. C.B. (No other fish is repre- sented here). Part IV. A Series of Progressive Exercises in the Koko-yimidir Dialect, with Translations. (To accompany Bulletin 2).9 These exercises have been based, as far as possible, on those accompanying the Pitta-Pitta Grammar in the " Ethnological Studies."10 As the first three examples of the latter, however, were originally drawn up only to illustrate certain peculiarities not met with in the Koko-yimidir dialect, the exercises commence here with No. 4. They have all been revised by Rev. G. H. Schwarz, Superintendent of Hope Valley Mission Station, Cape Bedford. Example 4- 1. kalka nanu. 2. burnga ngando-ga. 3. hobo burla-ngan-be. 4 nanggor ngando-we. 5. dirraba yubalenbe. 6 bayenga danananga. 7. kalka bamaga. 8. magar ngando-we. 9. hobo nanu-rnun nulu dndara. 10. goda bama-we. Translation. 1. Thy spear. 2. A woman's dillv-bag. 3. At their (dual) place. 4. At the woman's camp. 5. The yam-stick belonging to you two. 6. Towards the hut belonging-to-them. 7. A man's spear. 8. The woman's net. 9. He is running from the direction of your place. 10. The man's dog. ■> Folio, Brisbane, 1901. — By Authority. 10 Roth — Ethnological Studies, 1S97, p. 1. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 93 Example 5. 1. yaba naini. 2. ngando bobo-ngato-me ninggal. 3. dirainggur bobo-nanu-ine ninggal. 4. kalka bamawe. 5. nanggor burlan- ganga-me. 6. kalka burlanganga-me. 7. bayen yubalengame. 8. yoku ngato. 9. dirlngar ngando-we. 10. yoku bobo nanume una. Translation, 1. Thy brother. 2. A woman is at my place. 3. There is an old man at your place. 4. A man's spear. 5. At the camp of the two men. 6. The spear belonging to the two (men), 7. A hut belonging to you both. 8. My firewood. 9. A woman's necklace. 10. There is firewood at your place. Example 6. 1. ugondu bobo-nanume kada. 2. bayen ngando-we una : nanio- ngan dudar. 3. munu bayen-nanume yandal. 4. milbir bama- we. 5. burngangantanun. 6. bobo-ngato-me nganka kandal uua. 7. nanggor danangan-ga dada. 8. milbir ngato bobo-nanume una. 9. goda burlangan-be bayen-ngantanun-ga-ine ngondu kadara. 10. dirlngar nangu bobo-nangu-me una. Translation. 1. Come back to your place. 2. Run from this woman's hut. 3. Grass grows at your residence. 4. The man's wommera. 5. Our dilly-bag. 6. There is a white flower at my place. 7. Go to their camp. 8. My wommera is at your place. 9. Their dog is coming back to our hut. 10. Her necklace is at his place. Eo;ample 7. 1. magar peba-ngato-me (vel ngato-n-ga). 2. yambun wandi-we. i -we 3. ganggal kamba-kamba-we. 4. diral dirainggur^ -be. 5. yani- ( -e bun goda- we. 6. dirngur dirainggur-we. 7. yaba kamba-kamba- we. 8. peba nanu. 9. ngamu-gar-ngrti ngantanun. 10. ganggal- ngai ngato. Translation. 1. My father's net. 2. The eagle-hawk's young one. 3. An old-woman's child. 4. The old-man's wife. 5. A dog's puppy. 6. The old-man's sister. 7. An old-woman's brother. 8. Your father. 9. Our aunts. 10. My children. 94: RKCORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Example 8. 1. peba danangan. 2. ganggal-ngai dirainggur-be. 3. ganggal- kambakamba-we ninggal burnga nangu. 4. kalka peba nanunga {vel nanu-me). 5. gauggal yaba-nanguuie. 6. wandi kabir. 7. kalka-ngai peba ngato-me. 8. burnga ngamu-nangunie. 9. dirngur-n-gai danangan-be. 10. bayen dirngur-ngai ngantanun- be. Translation. 1. Their uncle. 2. The old-man's children. 3. A dilly-bag belonging to the old-woman's child. 4. Thy uncle's spear. 5. Her brother's child. 6. A female eagle-hawk. 7. My father's spear. 8. His mother's dilly-bag. 9. Their sisters. 10. Our sister's hut. /'cample 9. 1. milbir yaba-nangu-me. 2. dirlngar ngamu-nanu-me. 3 yambun ganguru kabir-be. 4. dirngur-ngai dirainggurbe. 5. ganggal-ngai dirngur dananganbe. 6. yaba diral-nanu-me. 7. ganggal-ngai ngamu nangu-me. 8. milbir gammi nanu-me. 9. kalka peba-ngato-nga (vel ngato-me). 10. burnga-ngai ngamu nanu-me. Translation. 1. Her brother's wommera. 2. Thy aunt's necklace. 3. A female kangaroo's young one. 4. The old-man's sisters. 5. Their sister's children. G. Thy wife's brother. 7. Her mother's children. 8. Your grandfather's wommera. 9. M.y father's spear. 10. Your mother's dilly-bags. Example 10. 1. ganggal kambakamba-we dunggul pudai. 2. diral dirainggur-e nulu dirngur yerka-we kundanu. 3. ngamu-gar (-ngai) nanu dana magar peba ngatonga yitaren. 4. pitagur-(-ngai) dirainggur-e dana burnga ngamu nangun-ga mane. 5. peba danangan nulu wandi-kabir pudarai. 6. peba nganangan nulu milbir yaba nanun-ga mane. 7. ganggal yaba nanu-me nulu dakatinu. 8. dirngur-ngai ngamu nangu-me dana mayi puclal. 9. yaba peba ngato-me nulu ngamu nanu dabil. 10. yambun ganguru-kabir-e nulu munu pudarai. Translation. 1. The old-woman's child was eating a snake. 2. The old-man's wife will beat the young-man's sister. 3. Your aunts brought my father's net. 4. The old-man's children fetched bis mother's dilly-bag. 5. Their uncle was eating the female eagle-hawk. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. ! t 6. Our father is bringing thy brother's wommera. 7. Her brother's child will sit down. 8. Her mother's sistersare eatin_ 9. My fathei's brother is kicking thy mother. 10. The female kangaroo's young-one is eating the grass. Example 11. 1. dirngur dirainggur-e niilu inayi mandega. 2. kalka peba nangu < ° yambun ganguru-we bakanu. 3. ngamu nganangan nulu ngando kundai. 4. dirngur nangu-me nulu burnga-ngai woguren. 5. yambun wandi-\ve nulu boi-be ninggal. 6. yaba dirainggure nulu milbir peba ngatonga yitaren. 7. peba ngato nulu purai pudanu. 8. dirngur dirainggur-e nulu gangga bau-a-nu. 9 peba ngato nulu yaba nanu kundai. 10. diral dirainggur-e nulu pita-gur nanu gari kundanu. Translation. 1. The old-man's sister was bringing the food. 2. His fathei's spear will hit the kangaroo's pup. 3. Our mother was beating the woman. 4. Her sister was weaving dilly-bags. 5. The iagle- hawk's young-one is sitting in the nest. G. The old-man's brother brought my father's shield. 7. My uncle will drink the water. 8. The old-man's sister will cook the yams. 9. My father is beating your brother. 10. The old-man s wife will not strike thy children. Example 12. 1. yambun buriwe-ga walli dudara. 2. peba ngato nulu dirngur-nanu godera mane. 3. yaba ngato nulu dirngur nanu mandenu. 4. pitagur kambakamba-we dana ninggal. 5. yaba nangu nulu mayi nanu pudai. 6. dirngur ngato nulu yoku nanu mandenu. 7. milbir nanu warra. 8. ngayu burnga ngando-ga mandenu. 9. kalka nanu nulu ganguru tindai. 10. ngamu ngato nulu mayi dirainggur-ga pudal. Translation. 1. The emu's young are running about. 2. My father married (took) your two sisters. 3. My brother will marry your sister. 4. The old-woman's children are sitting clown. 5. His brother was eating thy food. 6. My sister will fetch your tire-wood. 7. Your wommera is a bad one. 8. I will bring the dilly-bag belonging to the woman. 9. Thy spear hit the kangaroo. 10. My mother is eating the old-man's food. 96 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Example IS. 1. dabaigo ngayu yaba dirainggure natinu. 2. ngando burla bodan-gur-ngai burla burnga-ngai wognmu. 3. kabir godera, burla gangga bau-ai. \. peba nulu ganggal-ngai nangu kundal. 5. ngayu ngando-ngai godera inane. 6. yambun gauguru-we nulu mayi warkangamu pudaral. 7. buriwe warka nulu purai kandal pudaral. 8. pitagur ngato dana ningganu. 9. ngayu ngando- warra-ngai kundanu. 10. bama muru nulu milbir warka-ngai mandenu. Translation. 1. I will sse the old-man's brother to-morrow. 2. The two good women will be weaving dilly-bags. 3. Moth girls were cooking yams. 4. The father is beating his children. 5. I married the two women. 6. The kangaroo's young is eating a lot of food. 7. A big emu is drinking the. clear water. 8. My children will sit down. 9. I will beat the bad women. 10. The short-fellow will bring the long wommeras. Example IJj.. 1. kalka dallel nulu tindalgo wanggar-waraigo dudara. 2. ngando nulu burnga bodan-ngai mane. 3. ngamu nulu purai warra pudaral. 4. kalka nulu ganguru kabir bakanu. 5. kanal dirainggur-e nulu kuman woketi. 6. ngantan (mina) buriwe pudaral. 7. burla mayi bodan mandenu. 8. bama-warragur dana milbir bodan-gur balkai. 9. burla burnga-ngai wogurgur. 10. ngali godera purai bobo-dir pudai. Translation, 1. A light spear Hies (runs) swiftly along the sky. 2. The woman fetched the good dilly-bags. 3. Mother is drinking dirty water. 4. A spear will hit the female kangaroo. 5. The old man's sister cut her leg. 6. We are eating emu. 7. They will both bring good food. 8. The bad men were making good spears. 9. Both an- weaving dilly-bags. 10. We were both drinking muddy water. Example 15. l.nundu ganggal ngato dabe.lbil. 2. yambun ganguru nulu dudara. 3. dirainggur milwarega : nulu bama-kaka-we munu uinalma. -1. bama yerlmbur nulu mayi warka pudal. 5, ngando- burbur-ngai dana kabir kabir kima-ngai kundai. ngayu ngakul dumbeti. 3. dabaigo nulu-go durnggaya. 4. kalka gura milbir-tchir ngali wudaya. 5. ngalau puleli : burla wainetinu. 6. nulu-go nambal nda kundati. 7. piri burla wanieya : nayuui nundu nangu waminu. 8. bayen ngando-we dana yirgalgal. 9. dirainggur gura kambakamba milbir-tchir dana kundatinu. 10. ngayu kuman dumbeya. Translation, 1. The whole lot of the old men were fighting between them- selves. 2. I broke my arm the day-before-yesterday. 3. He will smear himself to-morrow. 4. We two are bartering a spear for a wommera. 5. They-two will meet one another, when the sun goes down. 6. He was hitting himself with a stone. 7. You will meet him, where the two-rivers meet, 8. They were all chattering in the woman's hut. 9. The old-man and the old- woman will be hitting each other with wommeras. 10. I might break my leg. Example 29. 1. pitagur kambakamba-we piri-we walli-maril. 2. yambun ganguru-we munu-we walli-dudara. 3. dirainggur mayi-we : ngando nulu purai pudarai. 4. peba-to nila gari dadanu : nulu mil-waril. 5. yambun goda-we piri-we walli-marinu. G. ngando kaka-dir nulu bantchentcliil. 7. ngali kabir kima bantchinu. 8. mil-nda nangu gari dubila nulu kalka ngalbegamu. 9. di- rainggur mayi-we ningganu. 10. bama bodan gari bieninu. Translation. 1. The old woman's children are swimming about in the river. 2. The kangaroo's pups were running about among the grass. 3. The old-man was at dinner; the woman was having a drink. 4. Father will not got away to-day ; he is drunk (lit. eyes-fly). 5. The dog's pups will be swimming about in the creek. 6. He is attending to the sick woman. 7. We will both look after the delicate girl. 8. Do not let him steal the spear (lit. do not take your eyes off him : he might steal the spear). 9. The old-man will be at dinner. 10. Good men will not die. Example 30. 1. diral ngato nulu dadara. 2. bayen nundu unanu : ngayu nama. 3. milbir nundu mane : nayun ngato woa. 4. Yerka yoku-we mabelbi : nayun nundu bandi. 5. goda diral nanu-we 104 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. melbi : nangu ngayu kundanu. 6. ngando-we nundu burnga wudinu: ngando nayun ngali nati. 7. bama mayi warka pudaral: nulu wobun-tchir manaya. 8. bama dinggadir nulu uiayi warka pundana. 9. kamba kamba yoku bantinu. 10. yaba nanu bobo nangu-me ninggal Translation. 1. My wife is going away. 2. I see the hut you will be sleep ing in. 3. Give me here the woiumera which you fetched 4. You were cutting the tree which the boy climbed. 5. I will strike the dog which you promised to your wife. 6. We both saw the woman whom you will give the dilly-bag to. 7. The man who eats too much food will be full-up. 8. A fellow who is hungry will eat plenty. 9. The old-woman will cut the fire- wood. 10. Your brother is sitting down at-her-place. Example 31. 1. bama yura bodan ninggal : yura gari bieninu. 2. kalka bama-we ngayu ngalbinu. 3. nulu kalka nanu dumbinu ngayu nanu yendu wudinu. 4. burnga kabir-ga nundu ngalbi : nayun kabir ngayu nati. 5. ganggal nulu ngalbinu : nangu ngayu nama. 6. ganguru nulu kundanu : nangu ngayu pundanu. 7. kutchu ngayu karbanu : nangu nulu pundanu. 8. kalka dirainggur-ga nundu mane : dirainggur nulu bobo ngato-me ninggal. i>. bama nayun nulu ganggal ungga-dir kundanu. 10. golan yambun-gar walli dudara : ngamu danan- gan ngayu pudanu. Translation. 1. You who are good, will not die. 2. I will steal another's (i.e., a man's) spear. 3. He will break your spear : I will give you another 4. I saw the girl whose dilly-bag you stole. 5. I see the child which he is going to steal. 6. He will hit the kangaroo, which I intend eating. 7. I will catch the fish which you will eat. 8. The old-man, whose spears you brought, is sitting at my place. 9. He yonder will strike the child who is crying. 10. i will eat the opossum whose young are running about. Example 82. 1. wand u nanu milbir wudi1? 2. ngando ganggal-tchir wandu nulu? 3. wtnun nundu wamil? 4. ganggal wanun ? nanu? 5. ngando nayun wanun-gal ninggal ? 6. wondalga bama nulu dadara ? 7. nganingan nundu kaka una '{ 8. yoku wonda nulu golan mane? 9. ngato merila, peba, nganna? 10. mina gan- guru wonda ngantan pudanu. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY ROTH 105 Translation. 1. Who gave you the wommera ? 2. Who is the woman with a child ? 3. To whom are you going ? 4. Whose child I thine ? 5. Alongside whom is that-woman-yonder sitting? 6. Whither is the man travelling? 7. Why are you sick? 8. From which tree did he fetch the opossum ? (lit. where the tree he took the opossum from ?) 9. Tell me, father, what (do you want). 10. Where is the kangaroo we are going to eat ? Example 33. 1. nangu mayi gangga mundal-go una. 2. diraiuggur-e mayi warka unanu. 3. ngando-we nayun mayi warka woa. 4. ngato mayi gangga warka una. 5. ngayu mina kutchu warka magar- tchir mandenu. 6. dana kadagai-tchir kadanu. 7. piri burla wameya: barna warkangamu < dadanu. 8. nerando-ncai J ° \ nayun ° ° warkangamu didar-ngan ngonilu kadara. 9. dirainggur nulu nanggor-ga ngondu kadai, ngando galmba. 10. yerka mayi pudal : kabir galmba. Translation. 1. She has a small quantity of yams. 2. The old man will have a lot of foud. 3. Give that woman yonder a large quantity of food. 4. I have a large amount of yams. 5. I shall catch a large amount of fish with my net. 6. They will come with all their possessions. 7. All the men will go to where-the-rivers- meet. 8. The whole lot of women are returning from didar (Cape Bedford). 9. The old-man came back to camp : and so did the woman. 10. The boy is eating — and the girl too. Example 34- 1. bama nulu milbir mandenu : kalka galmba. 2. dirainggur kundodana yerlngar-go ninggal. 3. kalka, wondara nanu una % 4. ganggal wondara galbai ? 5. nanu mayi gangga warka una? 6. mina kutchu warka nundu mane? 7. nulu kutchu kundoigo mane: ngayu warkangamu. 8. dongoinga-ngai dana murkar walu pita, kundoigo galmba murkar ninggal. 9. dana ngando-ngai yerlngar-go yoku yubaigo ninggal. 10. buiiwe-ngai dana mina dabadaba : dana warkangamu galmba ninggal. Translation. 1. The man will fetch the wommei-a : and the spear too. 2. Three old men are sitting apart (lit. there are three old men : they are sitting apart). 3. How many spears are yours? 106 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. 4. How big is the child ? 5. Have you a large quantity of yams 1 6. What quantity of fish have you brought? 7. He caught a few fish : T caught a lot. 8. Ducks are a bit small : and they are also scarce. 9. The women are sitting apart near the tree. 10. The emus are large : they are also plentiful. Example So. 1. bama nulu bodan ngoba : ugayu pinal-mul. 2. ngando nulu bodan ngoba, warra ngoba : ngayu pinal-mul. 3. nulu dadai ngoba : gari ngoba. 4. mina-ganguru purai-e maril ngoba, — (ngayu) nadelmul (go) 5. goda-we ngayu mina mundal wudinu? (5. ngautan yuelelinu ? ningga-nu ngoba 1 7. ngando-ngai nganni ninggal? 8. nanu-ngu nga}Tu nanggorga dudauu? 9. ngalan netcbin yandal. 10. garko nundu ngondu kadanu? manu- budon ! Translation. 1. One hardly knows whether this fellow is a good one. 2. This woman may be good or bad : I don't know. 3. One hardly knows whether he went or not. 4. One would think that a kangaroo swims, but you can't be sure. 5. Shall 1 give the dog some food ? 6. Shall he stand or sit ? 7. Why are the women sitting? 8. Shall I run up to the camp for you (for your advantage, etc.) 9. The sun rises daily. 10. Will return later on Certainly ! Example 86. 1. nundu purai kana pudala : mayi gorer. 2. gari dadara, burnga ngato kana woa. 3. nanggor-ngan ngayu kana dadanu, nulu gorer. 4. wondalngan nundu milbir mane? 5. mina golan wonda ninggal? yoku-we ? 6. wondalga nundu dadara ? 7. bobo wanun-game nulu ninggal? 8. didar bobo yubaigo ? galakati. 9. ngantan ngondu kadanu. nila ? ngan-go ! 10. kanabudo ! Translation. 1. Drink before you eat. 2. Give ine a dilly-bag before you go (lit. don't go ! give me a dilly-bag first). 3. He will be going away from the camp after I do. 4. From whereabouts did you fetch the boomerang? G. Where does an opossum live? In a tree. 5. Whither are you going ? 7. At whose place is he staying? 8. How far is didar (Cape Bedford)? 9. We shall soon come back. When? Soon. 10. Adieu. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 107 Example 37. 1. kabir nulu ngakul dumbediga, nulu nanggor-ga dudai. 2. nundu mayi pudaiga, wobuntchir-niati. 3. ugayu nina kun- daiga : nundu dudai. 4. nundu ngani dabega ; ngayu batchi. 5. dirainggur kuman dumbetiga : nulu dakati. 6. ngando nulu mangal wokedi : nulu bayen ngato-rne ngondu kadai. 7. dant- chega : ngayu durnggatinu. 8. ngayu dadai-game nundu ngato ganggal nawa. 9. marelin-ga : kamba-kamba nulu tamal nambal- nda woketi. 10. bama nayun tindal-be kuman dumbeti. Translation. 1. Having broken her arm, the girl ran up to the camp 2. After having had your food, you were full up. 3. Being struck by me, you ran away. 4. 1 cried because you kicked me. 5. Having broken his leg, the old-man sat down. 6. The woman came back to my place : she had cut her hand. 7. When I have had a swim, I will grease myself. 8. Look after my child when I am gone. 9. While swimming, the old-woman cut her foot with a stone. 10. That fellow yonder broke his leg when running. Example 38. 1. mina golan ngayu wogureu : ngakul dumbeti. 2. peba nanu nina degai : nayun bobo wamila. 3. ugayu garko nanggor- ga ngoddu kadara : nundu ngato gangga wudinu ? 4. nganm-to ngantauun detchuren, nawaigo ngantan ningganu. 5. nulu detchurenga : yura dadara. 6. ngamu nangu detchuren : nayun nulu pudanu. 7. yerka ngurgoigo kadai : nangu ngayu mayi wudi. 8. mayi pudaiga : bama nulu dudai. 9. yerka batchelt- chil : yaba nangu-mun kundaiga. 10. kanabudo ' ngayu wauu- bieni. Translation. 1. While after opossums, I broke my arm. 2. Go to that place your father told you. 3. Will you give me yams (when) I come back to camp by-and-by 1 4. We shall stay (where) mother told us. 5. You are going, as he told you. 6. He will eat what his mother told him. 7. I gave food to the boy who came yesterday. 8. Having had his dinner, the man ran away. 9. The boy is crying because his brother hit him. 10. Enough ! that'll do ! I am tired. MOLLUSCA FROM ONE HUNDRED FATHOMS, SEVEN MILES EAST OF CAPE PILLAR, TASMANIA, By C. Hedley, Conchologist, and W. L. May. (Plates xxii-xxv.) No vessel equipped for deep sea investigation like the " Challenger " has ever explored the Tasmanian coast. The nearest point where a deep sea dredge has been hauled is oft* Twofold Bay, about four hundred miles from the scene of our work. Hitherto Tasmanian naturalists have confined their attention to shallow and sheltered waters. To search further and deeper the writers engaged the "Sea- Bird," a serviceable steamer of twenty-tive tons, and spent some hours of December 17th and 18th, 1907, in dredging around a spot seven miles east of Cape Pillar in an estimated depth of one hundred fathoms. We enjoyed the company and assistance of Dr. J. C. Elkington during the cruise. The weather was rough and unpleasant, and the success attained was due to the skilful management of the apparatus by the ship's engineer, Mr. Gulliver. We employed the bucket dredge, and for the final haul trailed a dredge behind the bucket with excellent results. The submarine slope of the land is here extremely steep. The contour has not been fully developed by soundings, but the few scattered observations indicate that a depth of three hundred and forty-three fathoms is reached about eight miles from the laud, descending to over a thousand fathoms at twelve miles and the level floor of the abyss, two thousand two hundred and seventy five fathoms beneath the surface, is attained at a distance of seventy miles. A remarkable feature was the total absence of mud in the area examined. The hard ground diminished the proportion of bivalves to gasteropods. The sea-floor was shown by the dredge to be carpeted by a dense growth of tunicates, alcyonaria, sponges, lnyozoa, etc., on a firm bottom of sand, rolled pebbles, and a conglomerate of recent shells. The rock was hard enough to dint the lip of the bucket. Some specimens of the siliceous pebbles, quartz, chert, jasper, etc., which Dr. C. Anderson kindly weighed for us, were 1092, 0'774, and 0-509 grams respectively- The coral Flabellum australe, Moseley, was abundant, and reached a large size. While we worked, a strong current drifted us north- MOLLUSCA — HEDLEY AND MAY. 109 wards, and we were led to believe from the fauna and composition of the sea-floor that this powerful current swept tbe bottom clear of mud, even at a depth of a hundred fathoms. We have here increased the known marine mollusca of Tasmania by one-eighth. Probably so large a proportion will never again be added in one act. Including fragments, illegible or undetermined forms, the collection amounts to about two hundred and eighty species, of which we record two hundred and fourteen. Representatives of groups other than the mollusca have been handed to specialists, and it is hoped that further reports may appear. Under the giant cliffs of Tasman Island have sailed so many great captains and so many famous naturalists, that the spot has revered memories to inspire the worker of to-day. For here in 1642 passed Abel Janz Tasman in the " Heemskerch " and "Zeehan." After a long interval the ill-fated Marion du Fresne followed him in 177*2. Five years late came Cook in the " Resolution." The " Recherche " bore D'Entrecasteaux with La Billardiere in 1792. And PeYon with Freycinet under Baudin voyaged in the " Geographe " and "Naturaliste" in 1802. Past here again, in 1826, Quoy and Gaimard travelled in the "Astrolabe" under Dumont D'Urville. From the deck of the " Beagle " Darwin saw the huge basalt columns in 1836. Four years later his friend Hooker, under Ross, passed in the " Erebus " and " Terror." The following are the species identified. A star (*) indicates that the species has not been recorded from Tasmania : — - *Scissurella australis, Hedley. Schismope atkinsoni, Tenison Woods ,, pulchra, Petterd. * Emargimda superba, Hedley and Petterd. ,, Candida, A.Adams. Fissurella concatenata, Crosse and Fischer. *Gibbiila galbina, Hedley and May. * Monilea pliilippensis, Watson. C 'antharidus irisodontes, Quoy and Gaimard. * C alliostoma columnarium, Hedley and May. ,, incertum, Reeve. ,, allporti, Tenison Woods. * ,, retiarium, Hedley and May. ,, hedley i, Pritchard and Gatliff ,, legrandi, Tenison Woods. Astele subcarinatum , Swainson. *£asilissa niceterhim, Hedley and May nO RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Euchelus scabriuscnlus, Angas. Cirsonella weldii, Tenison Woods. Cyclostrema crebrisculptum, Tate. micron, Tenison Woods. inscriplum, Tate. charopa, Tate, angeli, Tate. porcellanum, Tate aud May Liotia annulata, Tenison Woods. ,, josephi, Tenison Woods. * ,, petalifera, Hedley and May. * ,, may ana, Tate. Acmcea flammea, Quoy and Gaimard. ,, calamus, Crosse and Fischer. * Phenacolepas calva, Vei'co. Coccidina tasmanica, Pilsbiy. Rissoa unilirata, Tenison Woods. * ,, columnaria, Hedley and May. ,, olivacea, Frauenfekl. „ layardi, Petterd. ,, dubitabilis Tate. ,, proxima, Petterd. ,, cheilosloma, Tenison Woods. ,, tenisoni, Tate. tasmanica, Tenison Woods. incompleta, Hedley. *Eissoina liniea, Hedley and May. * ,, fausta, Hedley and May. ,, gertrudis, Tenison Woods. *Capidus devotus, Hedley. Cerithiopsis semilaevis, Tenison Woods. ,, tvrbonilloides, Tenison Woods. ,, crocea, Angas. ,, purpurea, Angas. Ataxocerithium serotinum, A. Adams. Triphora granifera, Brazier. „ angasi, Crosse and Fischer. ,, tasmanica, Tenison Woods. „ fascia?", 'JVnison Woods. *Turritella smithiana, Donald. * ,, cpulenta, Hedley. ,, subsquamosa, Dunker. ,, accisa, WTatson. *Epitonium morchi, Angas. * ,, ndidum, Verco. )5 MOLLUSCA — HEDLEY A.\D MAY. Ill *Crossea carinata, Hedley. ,, cancellata, Tenison Woods. *Sirius badius, Tenison Woods. Siliquaria tveldii, Tenison Woods. * Vermicularia nodosa, Hedley. * ,, Jlava, Verco. *Eulima munita, Hedley. Odostomia metcalfei, Pritchard and Gatliff. *Turbonilla scalpidens, Watson. ,, hofmani, Angas. Cingulina spina, Crosse and Fischer. * Pseudorissoina capiticava, Hedley and May. Oscilla tasmanica, Tenison Woods. * Septa petulans, Hedley and May. *C'ymatium columnarium, Hedley and May, ,, kampylum, Watson. *Xatica elkingtoni, Hedley and May. ,, subcostata, Tenison Woods. ,, tasmanica, Tenison Woods. ,, umbilicata, Quoy and Gainiard. Polinices beddomei, Johnston. ~*Amauropsis globulus, Angas. Calyptrea pellucida, Reeve. ,, calyptrceformis, Lamarck. Trivia australis, Lamar k. Cyprcea anguslata, Gmelin. Cassidea pyrum, Lamarck. * Marginella agapeta, Watson. ,, biplicata. Tate and May. ,, columnaria, Hedley and May. ,, cratericula, Tate and May. ,, flindersi, Pritchard and Gatliff. * ,, Icevigata, Brazier. ,, mayi, Tate. ,, mustellina, Angas. ,, ovulum, Sowerby. ,, simsoni, Tate and May. * ,, stilla, Hedley. ,, tridentata, Tate. Ancilla marginata, Lamarck. Terebra bicolor, Angas. *Cancellaria pergradata, Verco. ,, laevigata, Sowerby. Mitromorpha alba, Pritchard and Gatliff. „ pallidula, Hedley. 112 RECOKDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. *Drillia kasivelli, Hedley. * ,, nenia, Hedley. Daphnella kingensis, Petterd. ,, minuta, Tenison Woods. * ,, excavata, Gatliflf. Dunovania fenestrate, Tate and May. * Mangelia dyscritos, Verco. ,, delicatula, Tenison Woods. ,, spica, Hedley. ,, cance/lata, Beddome. ,, grii nulosissima, Tenison Woods. ,, niO'Iesta, Angas. „ desalesi, Tenison Woods. * ,, hilum, Hedley. Scaphella papillosa, Swainson. ,, mamilla, Gray. Mitra tasmanica, Tenison Woods. * ,, vincentiana, Verco. ,, scalariformis, Tenison Woods. *Microvoluta purpureostoma, Hedley and May. Euthria tennicostata, Tenison Woods. Pisania reticulata, A. Adams. Golubraria bednalli, Brazier. * Arcularia mobilis, Hedley and May. ,, ,, var. costata, Hedley and May „ jacksoneusis, Quoy and Gaimard. *Pyrene plexa, Hedley. ,, angasi, Brazier. *Murex licinus, Hedley and Petterd. ,, angasi, Crosse. *Trophon colnmnarius, Hedley and May. ,, molorthns, Hedley and May. ,, petterdi, Crosse. ,, rudofphi, Brazier. ,, sarmentosus, Hedley and May. ,, simplex, Hedley. * ,, stimuleus, Hedley. '::'Coralliophila lischkeana, Dunker. Cylichna arachis, Quoy and Gainiard. Leucolina micra, Pritchard and Gatlitf. *Philine columnaria, Hedley and May. *Limacina inflata, D'Orbigny. *Cavolina irispinosa, Leseur. ,, trident at a, Forskal. *Clio virgula, Rang. MOLLUSCA HEDLEY AND MAY. 113 *Clio pyramidata, Linne. * ,, balantium, Rang. ~*Acanthochites crocodllus, Torr and Ashby. * LepidoplevA-us columnarius, Hedley and May. Cadulus spretus, Tate and May. *Nucula beachportensis, Vercu. ,, micans, Angas. ,, obliqua, Lamarck. * Limopsis tenisoni, vat', penelevis, Verco. Lissarca rubricata, Tate. * ,, rhomboidalis, "Verco. Area reticidata, Gmelin. *Glycymeris sordida, Tate. ,, tenuicostata, Reeve, Philobrya fimbriata, Tate Philippiella crenatulifera, Tate. ,, rubra, Hedley. Oslrea angasi, Soweihy. Trigonia margarilacea, Lamarck. Chlamys asperrimus, Lamarck. Pecten medms, Lamarck. *Cyclopecte>i nepeanensis, Pritchard and G-atlift. * ,, obliquus, Hedley. *Lima angulata, Sowerby. ,, bidlata, Born. ,, lima, Linne. *Limea murrayi, Smith. MytUus planidatus, Lamarck. Modiola australis, Gray. Modiolaria barbata, Reeve. Thraciopsis angustata, Angas. Myochama anomioides, Stutchbury. Myodora albida, Tenison Woods. ,, ovata, Reeve. Cuspidaria tasmanica, Tenison Woods. Curia atkinsoni, Tenison Woods. * ,, compressa, Hedley and May. ,, delta, Tate and May. * ,, hamata, Hedley and May. Mylilicardia calyculata, Linne. Venericardia amabilis, Deshayes. * ,, cavatica, Hedley. * „ columnaria, Hedley and May. * ,, dilecta, Smith. ,, rosulenia, Tate. 114 RKCOKDS OF TIIK AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM * Condylocardia por recta, Hedley. ,, pectinata, Tate and May. *Codakia jacksonensis, Smith. ,, tatei, Angas. * Diplodonta adamsi, Angas. ,, zealandica, Gray *Bomia radiata, Hedley. Dosinia caerulea, Reeve. Chione gallinula, Lamarck. Tellina decussata, Lamarck. * Soletellina hedleyi, Sowerby. Saxicava arctica, Liune. JPanopaea australis, Sowerby. Megasella cumingii, Davidson. Kraussina atkinsoni, Tenison Woods. *Terebrattdina radida, Hedley. ,, cancellata, Koch. *Cryptopora brazieri, Crane. We have placed the whole of the types of the new species in the Australian Museum collection ; they are as follows : — GlBBULA GALB1NA, Sp.HOV. (Plate xxii., tig. 2). Shell depressed-turbinate, broadly perforate, translucent, glossy. Colour variable, either uniform buff', uniform white, or brown spirals on a white ground. Whorls four and a half, rounded on the base, subangled at the periphery, flattened above and impressed at the suture. Sculpture : the protoconch smooth, the next whorl with a couple of spiral keels, which by intercalation multiply in number, but decrease in relative importance as the whorls advance, tlie last whorl carrying close tine spiral threads, of which every fourth or fifth predominates. The radials are confined to faint growth lines. Aperture slightly descending, oblique, angled above, rounded below; outer lip simple; columella f.xpanded, and a little reflected above, a substantial callus unites the lips. Umbilicus deep, narrow, spiral, externally funicular, exempt from the spiral sculpture. Height, 5-5 mm.; maj. diam. 7 ; min. mm. Several specimens. The novelty is nearest to G. tasmanica, Petterd, of which it may be regarded as a deep water repiesentative. G, galbina is thinner, larger, proportionately lower and broader, and more MOLLUSCA HEDLEY AND MAY. 115 widely umbilicate. A single specimen of G. galbina was taken by the " Thetis " in 63-75 fathoms off Port Kembla, New South Wales, but was catalogued1 as G. lasmanica, Petterd, Calliostoma columnarium, sp,nov, (Plate xxii., fig. 3). Shell rather solid, imperforate, turbinate, angled at the peri- phery. Colour buff. Whorls five and a half, including a proto- conch of a whorl and a half, which is tilted, malleated, and concluded by a small varix. Sculpture. : three spiral keels appear on the second whorl; as growth proceeds these increase in number but decrease in strength, till at last behind the aperture they are represented by twenty engraved spiral lines extending from the suture to the centre of the base. These are decussated by faint oblique growth lines. Aperture oblique, rhomboidal, outer lip simple, columella thickened, insertions joined by a thin callus. Height, 7'5; rnaj. diam., 8 ; min. diam., 7 mm. A larger broken specimen is 10 mm. in major diameter. Four imperfect shells were taken. In general appearance this resembles C. legrandi, Tenison Woods, but differs by blunter keel and the distant engraved spirals. Calliostoma retiarium, sp.nov. (Plate xxii., fig. 1). Shell small, subperforate, conical, with sharply keeled peri- phery, overlapping spire whorls and a flat base. Colour and number of whorls uncertain, the latter exceeding six. Sculpture: small spiral threads parted by wider interstices amount to seven on the penultimate, and to twenty on the last whorl, of these a double row compose the peripheral keel. On either side of the keel the interstices are wider than usual. The radials are irregular oblique wave-like folds, twenty-two on the last whorl, which raise beads on the keel rows, and there cease abruptly. On the base incipient radials bead the inner spirals. Aperture oblique, trapezoidal, outer lip simple, sharply angled by the periphery, columella insertion a little reflected over the minute umbilicus. Length, 7 ; maj. diam., 6 ; min. diam., 5 mm. A single worn specimen represents this species, whose sculp- ture and contour are not approached by any other Australian Calliostoma. 1 Hedley— Auatr. Mus. Mem., i\\, 1903, p. 334. 11G RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Basilissa niceterium, sp.nov. (Plate xxii., figs. 4, 5). Shell imperforate, conical-turbinate, thin, of silken lustre. Colour uniform pale cream. Whorls five and a half, including a small pointed obliquely set protoconch of a whorl and a half. Sculpture : prominent spiral keels, three to the penultimate, ten to the body whorl, successively diminishing from the suture to the base, undercut below the narrow summit, parted by much broader flat interstices. These keels, apparently folds in the shell substance, are microscopically beaded by fine radial striae, represented in the interstices as hair lines. The protoconch does not share the adult sculpture, but is minutely inalleated. Aper- ture oblique, subcircular, columella glazed, arched, running out to a spur. Outer lip unfinished, the ends of the ribs projecting beyond the interstices like claws. In the throat a furrow corres- ponds to each external keel. Height, 7 ; maj. diam, 7 ; nrin. diam., 6 mm. One whole and some fragmentary specimens were taken. The novelty is by no means a characteristic Basilissa, for it is imperforate, its lustre is rather silken than nacreous, if the sutural sinuation exists, it is masked by the sculpture. Yet the aggregate of its characters agree better with Basilissa than with another genus. From Segiienzia, for instance, which the sculp- ture immediately suggests, the entire columella excludes it. Liotia petalifera, sp.nov. (Plate xxii., figs. 6, 7, 8.) Shell minute subdiscoidal, spire very little elevated, base broadly and deeply umbilicate. Colour white. Whorls four, of which two constitute the protoconch, the last descending, and in slight contact with its predecessor. The protoconch is smooth, helicoid, and sharply defined. Sculpture : last whorl with twenty-four, penultimate with nineteen, elevated curled and forwardly-directed lamellae, whose broad summits nearly equal their interstices. The lamellae are smooth and glossy, but the interstices are distantly spirally striated. Aperture complete circular. Height, 0-6 ; maj. diam, 1*25; min. diam, 0'85 mm. Several specimens. The species has a general resemblance to L. capitata, Hedley, from which the denser varices of L. petalifera at once separate it. MOLLUSCA — HEDLEY AND MAY. 117 ElSSOA COLUMNABIA, Sp.Tior. (Plate xxii., fig. 9). A " Rissoa " of the group of R. bicolor, Petterd. Small, glossy, subcylintlrical, summit blunt. Whorls six, divided by impressed sutures. Colour variable, red, purple, or orange on the apex, fading on the lower whorls ; the last usually white, with a pale narrow median yellow band. Sculpture : tine close radial hair lines. Aperture perpendicular, circular, peristome reflected all round. Length, 2*6; breadth, 1*1 mm. Several specimens. In colour, size, and form this approaches Rissoa subfusca var. micronema, Suter, - from which it differs by absence of spiral sculpture and mere slender shape. PiTSSOINA LINTEA, sp.HOV. (Plate xxiii , fig. 11). Shell elongate, turreted, thin, translucent, glossy. Colour white. Whorls eight and a half, separated by a channelled suture, first two smooth and dome-shaped. Sculpture : numerous close, fine, spiral threads wind over the whole of each whorl. Last whorl ascending at the aperture. Aperture effuse, not provided with a varix, anterior canal well marked, columella arched and broadly reflected on the body whorl. Length, 7 ; breadth, 2-5 mm. A few specimens. The lack cf radial sculpture at once separates this from other spirally grooved Australian Ri88oince. RlSSOINA FAUSTA, Sp nov. (Plate xxii., fig. 10). Shell smooth, glossy, translucent, elongate, with impressed suture. Colour pale cream, with orange spots disposed in five rows, two of which ascend the spire. Whorls eight. Aperture subtriangular, anterior notch distinct, columella thickened, arched, outer lip slightly reflected, thickened within. Length, 65 ; breadth, 1*5 mm. Several specimens. This is nearly related to R. lintea, but differs in being smaller, coloured and smooth. 2 Suter— Proc. Malacol. Soc., iii., 1898, p. 4. 9 118 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. PSEUDORISSOINA CAPITICAVA, Sp.ltOV. (Plate xxiii., figs. 12, 13). Shell slender, elongate, diaphanous, smooth, constricted at the suture, and thus conveying a nodose expression to the spire. Colour white. Whorls six, exclusive of the protoconch, margined at the suture. The heterostroph? apex of this genus is more complex than was at first supposed. The early whorls are concealed by the later, and the vertex of the shell is a whorl which rises as an arch and encloses the protoconch in a hood. It may be that the first whorls are not merely wound at right angles to the adult, but are completely reversed by rotation through ninety degrees. Aperture subtriangular, channelled above, effusive below, outer lip thickened, inner lip with a distinct callus deposit. Length, 4*4; breadth, 15 mm. Several specimens. This is closely related to P. tasmanica, Tenison Woods, but the novelty is a narrower shell, with an additional and more inflated whorls. Septa petulans, sp.nov. (Plate xxiii. . fig. 14). Shell small, conical, produced. Whorls asymmetrically swollen, six remaining on the type. Our material does not present a complete apex. Colour cream, with rusty irregular scattered dashes. Sculpture : seven varices, being at the rate of about one to two-thirds of a whorl, between these slight radial plica- tions raise the larger threads into low tubercles, interstices microscopically transversely striated. The spirals consist of tine revolving threads parted by shallow interstices, sixteen on the penultimate, and about thirty-five on the last whorl. Here and there, especially on the base, the threads tend to be alternately larger and smaller, while a few of the peripheral threads stand out more conspicuously than the rest. ApertXire perpendicular, ovate, a conspicuous tubercle in the posterior angle. . Anterior portion of the columella crossed by several transverse wrinkles. Outer lip faintly dentate within. Canal short and broad. Length, 35 ; breadth, 1 4 mm. Several broken shells were dredged, but our figure and descrip- tion is based on a dead shell gathered by one of us (May) on the beach at Pirate's Bay, near Cape Pillar. Dr. Dall tinds in the radula generic distinction between Sejrta and Cymatium. We associate our species with the former from the gezieral resemblance it bears to 8. tritonis, Linne. MOLLUSCA — HEDLEY AND MAY. 119 Cymatium columnakium, sp.nov. (Plate xxiii., fig. 15). Shell small, thin, elongate, spire rather distorted. Whorls •eight, including a smooth, rounded two-whorled protoconch. Colour pale straw. Sculpture : varices eight, sculptured by the spirals, disposed irregularly at intervals of half or two-thirds of a whorl. Longitudinal ribs small, about twenty to a whorl, not reaching the base of the last whorl, narrower than their inter- stices. Both ribs and interstices crossed by small spiral threads, towards the periphery some threads pack in two prominent bundles, giving the whorl a slightly bicarinate outline ; on the final whorl the threads amount to thirty-five. Edge of aperture produced into a thin upstanding rim. On the base of the columella are two elongate tubercles, and distributed within the outer lip are half a dozen others. Canal short. Length, 21 ; breadth, 8-5 mm. Several specimens, all dead and mostly broken, were taken off Cape Pillar. The species was previously dredged off the Pilot Station, Derwent River, by one of us (May). The novelty stands nearest to C. quoyi, Reeve, from which it differs by being thinner, more slender, and with weaker sculpture. Three tertiary shells, I', oligostiruti, T.gemmulatus, and T.sexcoslatus, are described by Prof. R. Tate:; as related to quoyi. Dr. Dall is inclined to refer Triton quoyi to Conrad's genus Personetlai. Kesteven has suggested that Nassaria kampyla, Watson, should also be grouped with G. quoyi5. Apparently Paristernia murray- ana, Tate'5, is related to Watson's species. Dr. J. C. Verco, who kindly compared the species at our request, writes, 2 vi. '08 : " P. murrayana, Tate, is quite distinct from N. kampyla, Watson, in being more solid, and in having three plicate teeth at the end of the columella." JSTatica elkingtoni, sp.nov. (Plate xxiii., fig. 18). Shell small, smooth, rather thin, globose, spire exsert, whorls four. Colour dull white, apex orange, gradually fading away on the succeeding whorls, the last trace being a faint subsutural :i Tate— Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., x. 1888, pp. 126-7. * Dall— Smithsonian Miscell. Coll., 47, 1904, p. 130. 5 Kesteven — Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxvii., 1902, p. 473. 6 Tate— Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., x. 18S8, p. 155; xi. 1S89, pi. iv., f. 4. 120 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, band on the final whorl. Aperture semilunate. Umbilicus small, half filled by a central spiral callus which expands as a pad ou reaching the margin of the aperture. Height, 9 ; maj. diam., 9 ; min. cliam., 7 mm. A few specimens. Nearly related to Ar. subcostata, Tenison Woods, but differs by larger size and exsert spire. Named in honour of Dr. J. C. Elkington, our companion on the cruise. Marginella columnaria, sp.nov. (Plate xxiii., tig. 19). Shell rather large, thin, translucent, narrow, subcylindrical, spire slightly elevated. Colour amber. Whorls four. Aperture long, linear, three strong plications on the columella, a thin callus on the inner lip. The outer lip rises above the penultimate whorl from a callus base, which does not quite reach the apex, in a low arch, bends far forward, and then descends vertically. No denticules appear within the lip. Length, 75 ; breadth, 3-5. Several specimens. The subcylindrical shape of this species readily distinguishes it from co-generic forms, among winch M. caledonica, Jousseaume, makes the nearest approach. MlCROVOLUTA PURPUREOSTOMA, sp.nOV. (Plate xxiii,, figs. 20, 21). Shell small, rather thin, fusiform, blunt at either end. Colour white, within the aperture stained purple. Whorls five. Shell almost smooth ; a few faint spiral grooves occur on the base and below the suture. Aperture elliptical, outer lip simple, smooth within. 1 n the conventional attitude two plaits are visible on the columella, but turning the shell to show the deepest interior, a small plait appears above and another below- the central couple. Canal short, rounded. Length, 6 ; breadth, 3 mm. Another specimen, length, 8; breadth, 3*5 mm. Two specimens. The novelty is distinguished from M. australis by lack of colour, feebler plaits, smaller size, and less breadth. Dall has compared MicrovohUa to Ccmomitra7 . The characters of the former genus, as now enlarged, seem to us to incline to the Mitrid?e rather than to the Volutidre. Dall— bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., xviii., 1JSS9, p. 163. MOLLUSCA — HEDLEY AND MAY. Arcularia mobilis, sp.nov. (Plate xxiii., tig. 16). Shell small, rather thin, conical. Whorls well rounded, thus appearing a little contracted at the sutures, in number five and a half, including a smooth two-walled protoconch. Colour dull white, with irregular brown spots, which tend to disposal in spiral bands. Sculpture : the whole shell is neatly engraved with sharp narrow grooves, about ten to the penultimate and eighteen behind the aperture. Wave-like radial ribs, about a dozen to a whorl, are usually more conspicuous above, and become obsolete on the last whorl. Aperture oblique, round, strongly varixed without, crenulated within to correspond with the external sculpture, a slight tubercle posteriorly. (.'anal short and strongly bent. Length, 7 ; breadth, 4 mm. Numerous specimens. "We cannot recall any near all)7 of this very variable shell. Var. costata. (Plate xxiii., fig. 1 7). In this form, which perfectly intergrades with the type, the spiral sculpture is suppressed, and a radial sculpture is assumed of close, strong rounded ribs, about twenty to a whorl, which traverse the whole shell perpendicularly. If the intermediates were unseen, the extreme would be readily granted specific rank. Trophon oolumnakius, sp.nov. (Plate xxiv., fig. 22). Shell of medium size, elongate, roughened by the profuse decora- tion. Colour pale yellow, with brown on the apex, a basal and a sutural band. Whorls nine, including a smooth conical proto- conch of two and a half whorls. Sculpture : thin projecting varices, nine to a whorl on the larger whorls, ascend obliquely and continuously from whorl to whorl. These varices are scalloped by the passage of the spirals, and develop sharp points on the shoulder; on the hase they degenerate to mere scales. The spirals amount to twelve on the body whorl, and to three or four on the upper whorls ; they are crowded on the base, but separated on the shoulder by flat interstices of equal or greater breadth. A secondary microscopic sculpture of faint radial threads, and still fainter spiral scratches, appears between the varices. A per- 122 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. tuie oval, shielded by the youngest varix ; columella excavate. Length 20 mm.; breadth, 8 mm. Some fragments of this distinct species were also dredged in eighty fathoms twenty-two miles east of Narrabeen, N. S. Wales, by Prof. W. A. Haswell and one of us. Trophon molorthus, sp.nov. (Plate xxiv., fig. 23). Shell narrowly fusiform. Whorls subgradate, seven, including a smooth pointed two-whorled protoconcli. Colour dull white. Sculp- ture: the radial ribs about twelve toa whorl, are broad and wave-like, divided by interstices of equal breath, commence at the shoulder, swell at the periphery, and fade away towards the lower suture, or, in the case of the last whorl, the base. The upper whorls are traversed by about eight evenly spaced spiral low cords, separated by Hat interstices of equal breadth, which cross ribs and interstices alike. On the last whorl the cords amount to twenty-two. Aperture oval, lip unfinished, canal turned a little to the right. Length, 10-5 ; breadth, 4*5. Several specimens. A near ally, a variety of which occurred with it at Cape Pillar, is T. simplex, Hedley. s From that T. molorthus differs by less rounded and more slowly increasing whorls, shorter canal, and more numerous spirals. Trophon sarmentosus, sp.nov. (Plate x.xiv., fig. 24). Shell small, thin, rather glossy, narrowly fusiform, angled at the shoulder. Whorls six, including a smooth, pointed two- whorled protoconcli. Colour pearl grey, with ferruginous on base, apex, and sometimes a sub-sutural line. Sculpture: ten low, broad, solid varices, equal in breadth to their flat smooth interstices, continue perpendicularly from whorl to whorl. On the shoulder these develop a pointed tuberele, and on the base are crossed by indistinct spirals. Aperture oval; from the base of the columella projects the inner side of the short rather straight canal. Length, 5; breadth, 2-15 mm. Several specimens were obtained. T. petterdi, Crosse, T. rudolphi, Brazier, and the present form a graduated series. The - Hedley— Austr. Mus. Mem., iv. 1903, p. 380, f. 93. MOLLUSCA — HEDLEY AND MAY. 123 intermediate form, Peristernia rudolphP, Henri and Brazier, which also occurred or!' Cape Pillar, is distinguished from the novelty by its coarse spirals. Philine columnaria, sp.nov, (Plate xxiv., figs. 25, 26). Shell trapezoidal oblong, thin, semitransparent. Colour milk- white. Sculpture : fine close spiral scratches crossed by irregular and inconspicuous growth lines. Aperture below broad, above narrow, the summit arched, projecting beyond the spire, inserted below the top of the last whorl. Edge of outer lip simple. Inner lip defined by a thick layer of callus, at the base of which is a small umbilical groove. Centre of the summit occupied by a shallow pit margined by a groove, but the nucleus is concealed by a layer of callus spreading from the suture. Length, 6-5 ; breadth, 5 mm. Several specimens. The novelty is larger than other Australian forms, except P. anyasi. It is not, however, the young of that species, for it is more trapezoidal, has distinct spiral lines, and an axial hollow above. Lepidopleurus columnarius, sp.nov. (Plate xxiv., tigs. 27, 28). Valves round backed, greatly arched, lateral areas inclined to the rest of the valve. Posterior valve with full rounded umbo. Girdle with minute, dense, imbricating scales. Colour uniform waxen. Sculpture : minute grains strung in longitudinal radiating rows, parted by deep grooves of equal width. Going forwards from the mucro additional rows are intercalated. The pleural and jugal areas together have about fifty rows. The lateral areas aie differentiated by densely packed, less prominent and disarranged grains. Length of single curled and shrivelled specimen about 8 mm.; breadth, 3 mm. This is the first deep water Chiton to be reported from Austra- lian waters. We have not the advantage of comparison with specimens, but, judging from literature, the novelty has a general resemblance to L. cancellatus, Sowerby, and in detail differs by smaller and denser granulations. Compared with L. inquinatus, 9 Henn and Brazier— Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, (2), ix., 1894, p. 166, pi. xiv. , f. 1. 124 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Reeve, L. columnarius lacks colour, has a more prominent mucro, longer and more arched valves, the granules are sharper and their radial arrangement more distinct. *»v Glycvmeris sordida, Tate. Pectunculus sordidus, Tate, Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Austr., xiv., 1891, p. 264, pi. xi. f. 8. Glycymeris sordida, Verco., loc. cit.y xxxi., 1907, p. 227. This shell appeared plentifully as worn and separate valves. It had not been seen before either in Tasmanian waters or on the Pacific coast. G. insignis10 is probably a synonym. Cuna compressa, sp.nov. (Plate xxiv., figs. 29, 30, 31, 32). Shell rather large for the genus, ovate truncate, the anterior and dorsal margins forming a right angle, solid, very shallow lunule and escutcheon both narrow and inconspicuous. Colour dull white. Sculpture : irregularly furrowed by growth inter- ruptions, and rayed by about twenty half obliterated riblets, which do not extend over the anterior and posterior extremities. Prodissoconch, a smooth well defined dome, followed by a step. Inner ventral margin denticulated by twenty small tubercles and sockets. Length, 9'2 ; height, 8-6 ; depth of single valve, 2 mm. One of the largest of the genus. Our dredging showed it to be a common shell off Cape Pillar, as Dr. J. C. Verco had previously found it to be in forty fathoms off Beachport, South Australia. Cuna hamata, sp.nov. (Plate xxv., figs. 33, 34, 35, 36). Shell solid, rather inflated, spiral-ovate, hooked above, lunule faint, escutcheon evanescent. Colour dull white. Sculpture: surface roughened by irregular concentric growth lines, radials wanting. Umbo spirally produced, directed ventrally. Inner ventral margin beset with about thirty small tubercles. Height, 5 ; length, 4; depth of single valve, 15 mm.~^ At the scene of our investigations this is an abundant species. The "comma"' shape distinguishes it readily from the rest of the 10 l'ilsbry— Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadel., 1906, p. 231 MOLLUSCA — HEDLEY AND MAY. 125 genus. An unnamed shell related to the above, but differing by being half the size, faintly radially ribbed, and not so sharply bent over above, was taken in Half-moon Ba3r, Stewart Island, New Zealand, by Mr. A. Hamilton. Venefucardia columnaria, sp.nov. (Plate xxv, tigs. 37, 38, 39, 40). Shell small, trapezoid-oblong, solid, inflated and inequilateral. The anterior side produced, about twice the length of the posterior. Colour uniform pale yellow. Sculpture: twenty-two low radial ribs parted by narrow grooves ; anteriorly these are few and broad, posteriorly small and crowded. Irregular growth stages segment the ribs, which are aKso traversed by a secondary sculpture of fine concentric hair lines. Lunule lung and narrow. Inner ventral margin with about eighteen small tubercles. Length, 8 ; height, 7 ; depth of single valve, 3 mm. A few worn and separate valves. CONDYLOCARDIA POKRECTA, Hedlev, (Plate xxv., figs. 41, 42). AVe were surprised to find as a common .shell off Cape Pillar this* species, described two years ago11, from the Capricorn Islands. And we take the opportunity of substituting an excellent drawing by Miss \Y. West for the poor figure which accompanied the original description. To facilitate the deter- mination of this difficult group, we also add a figure (PI. xxv., figs. 43, 44, 45) of the related C. peclinala, Tate and May. 1 ' Hedley— Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxi., 1900, p. 4~o, pi. xxxviii., f. 24. A NEW GENUS and SPECIES of TURTLE, FROM NORTH AUSTRALIA. By Allan R. McCulloch, Zoologist. (Plates xxvi-xxvii.) The Trustees have recently received from Mr. Hugh W. Christie, Lighthouse-keeper at Point Charles, a small turtle L53mm. long, captured near Port Darwin, North Australia. While entering the family Gheloniidse it is apparently distinct frum any of the three genera at present known, and I therefore propose for it the na.meNataf.or. We know nothing either of its habits or food, and as it is a unique specimen I have been unable to examine its skull. It is most nearly related to Chelonia, and judging by the similar form of its upper jaw, which is not hooked, is doubtless herbivo- rous From that genus, however, it is separated by the different arrangement of the shields of the head, and the distinctly paired nuchal. Also the upper shields of both head and body have each a large symmetrical areola placed rather behind their centres. Eretmochelys is distinguished by its hooked jaws and the two pairs of prefrontal shields, while Caretta has five or more pairs of costal shields. Natatok,1 gen.nov. Head and carapace covered with horny shields, each with distinct symmetrical areolae; nuchal shield divided into two, each half having its own areola; five vertebrals, and four pairs of costals; twelve pairs of marginals. Plastron as in Chelonia, with a well developed intergular. Head with a pair of large pre- frontals; frontal in contact with the prefrontals and a pair of large supraoculars; parietal shield very large and followed by a single post-parietal; two pairs of temporals. Upper jaw not hooked. Limbs paddle shaped, with one claw each. 1 S'atator — a swimmer. A NEW GENUS AND SPECIES OF TURTLE— McCULLOCH. 127 The sides of the carapace, or marginal shields, are reflexed, and though it would seem that this is the natural condition, it is not certain that it has not been caused by lateral pressure in packing during transit. Natator tessellatus, sp. nov. (Plates xxvi.-xxvii.) Head covered with large symmetrical shields of which the greater portion of each is occupied by a moie or less rugose areola. Upper jaw with a small triangular incision at the tip. A pair of large prefrontal shields separated from the maxillary sheath by a small scale. Frontal much smaller than the supraocular-, pentagonal, its anterior edge wedged in between the prefrontals. Parietal very large, connected with and surrounded by the frontal, supraoculars, two pairs of temporals, and a single post- parietal. Two suboculars, and one postocular, between which and the soft skin of the neck are six or seven irregular shields. Mandible strongly hooked. Carapace rounded, it being only one-ninth longer than broad; unicarinate in the young, and with the sides renexed (see note above.). Lateral and posterior margins serrated and formed of twenty-six shields. The nuchal is divided in the median line into two distinct shields. All the shields of the carapace have very distinct symmetrical areola? placed rather behind the centre, which are coarsely pitted: those of the vertebral shields are six or seven sided, while on the costal series they are four, rive, or six sided; on the marginals they are quadrangular, the postero- external angle being produced as a spine. Plastron with a large intergular, and a series of inframarginals. Each shield with a more or less central areola which is smooth and not so well defined as those of the back. Two prominent ridges, commencing on the gular shields, pass backwards and outwards along the line of areola?, being most widely spaced and strongly developed on the pectoral and abdominal shields, whence they converge again and are lost on the anals. A small triangular shield separates the distal ends of the. anals, but it is very soft and imperfect and is possibly lost with age. ' The upper surface of the fore-limbs is margined anteriorly with a row of squamiform shields which become larger as they approach the tip. Hinder margin with six shields. The remainder of the upper surface is covered with small, irregular, juxtaposed scales. Lower surfaces similar, but without the scales 128 ..,.„ ' :'°? REC0KUS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. on the hinder margin. Hind-limbs short and rounded, otherwise like the fore-limbs. Colour brownish-olive above, with tortoise-shell markings, the areolae and margins of the carapace of a lighter shade. Margins of the limbs and the under surfaces yellowish. M easurements — Total length 152 mi Length of head Length of carapace Breadth of carapace Length of anterior limb Length of posterior limb My thanks are due to Mr. J. Douglas Ogilby who kindly examined the turtles in the Queensland Museum and otherwise assisted me in the preparation of the above. 34 116 104 67 43 n. MINER ALOGICAL NOTES : No. TIL— RHODONITE, BROKEN HILL, NEW SOUTH WALES. By C. Anderson, ]\LA., D.Sc. (Edin.), Mineralogist, (Plates xxviii-xxix.). Fine specimens of rhodonite are found in the sulphide zone of the Broken Hill silver-lead mines, associated with galena, blende and garnet, The occurence seems to have been Hist noted by Professor R. Beck of Freiberg, by whom it has been described.1 It is found either as crystals with the characteristic rounded edges of rhodonite, or as isolated fragments disseminated through the ore ; it generally shows evidence of corrosion by the metalliferous solutions, and various stages of replacement by galena and blende may be traced. The mineral is of a pleasing deep red colour, and in small well crystallised specimens is quite transparent ; it greatly resembles some varieties of garnet. Of the seven specimens which form the subject matter of this paper three were kindly lent by the Director of the National Museum, Melbourne, one by the Geological Department of Sydney University, the others are from the Australian Museum collection. Five crystals (referred to hereafter as Nos. i.-v.) were measured on the two-circle goniometer and the co-ordinate angles obtained; a few interfacial angles were also determined The position chosen is that of Goldschmidt,- which, for rhodonite considered by itself, and particularly for the usual habit of the Broken Hill crystals, is more suitable than Dana's/3 as the three most promi- nent faces, which are also the directions of cleavage, are made axial planes, but Dana's elements show more clearly the relation of rhodonite to the other members of the pyroxene group. In habit the crystals vary somewhat, but they may be generally described as extended parallel to c (010). ' The commonest forms are a (001), c(010), 6(100), o(110), s(110), the three first being particularly well developed. In all twenty-eight forms were recognised, of which ten are new, or at least not recorded in Goldschmidt's ' Winkeltabellen.' The new faces occur principally 1 Beck — Zeits. prakt. Geol., March, 1899, pp. 65-71 (trans. Kec. Geol. Surv. N.S. Wales, vii., 1, 1900, pp. 20-28). 2 Goldschmidt — Krystallographische Winkeltabellen, p. 2S7. 3 Dana— System of Mineralogy, 6th Edition, 1S92, p. 37S. 130 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. in the zones [010, 001] and [100, 001], and are, as a rule, long and very narrow, giving only fair reflections, hence some of them may be merely vicinal in character ; the face (113) is dull, and the re- flection was obtained by cementing a fragment of glass on it ; (112) appears as a small square patch. On crystal iv. there is a dull rounded face, probably (112), but it did not admit of even approximate measurement. The faces (207) and (037) may be vicinal to (103) and (012) respectively, the others are un- doubtedly valid forms. The available information regarding the new forms is tabulated below ; two readings enclosed by brackets are independent determinations made on the same plane. Crystals i., iii., iv. are from the collection of the National Museum, Melbourne ; ii from the Sydney University collection. Measured. Calculated. Form. Cryst. Reflection. P 0 P O f O / Of o I A 013 i. { 30 30 30 35 38 16 38 0 30 11 38 10 \ fair + 5 015 ii. 127 20 26 27 127 21 26 26 fair C 014 i. iii. 134 8 134 17 134 44 29 0 29 2 29 18 1 fair + fair + iv. 134 47 29 8 134 53 29 9 good Z>013 i. ii. { 1 11 28 111 15 143 39 34 3 33 58 33 37 I fail- fair + iv. 143 34 34 9 144 9 34 1 poor £037 i. { 151 19 151 19 39 24 39 31 151 19 39 28 ! 1 fair /•' 103 ii. 87 32 44 8 87 33 44 1 good G 207 ii. 86 51 40 58 fair + v. 88 41 39 38 87 6 41 33 faii- #201 iii. 87 -3 71 45 poor iii. \ 86 6 86 2 71 41 71 54 85~56 71 51 1 ) fait- £"113 iv. 161 2 1 29 30 161 32 29 9 A 1 1 2 iii. ; 150 16 150 13 43 9 43 15 150 27 43 10 } good MINERALOGICAL NOTES — ANDERSON. 131 The elements were calculated from the following angles, all the reflections being sharp : — Form. Mean. Limits. No. of Measurements.

P o 110 b 100 a 001 n 102 O / 44 111 92 30" 80 30 88 41 o / 21 50i 51 25 or or 44 5 to 44 19 92 27 „ 92 41 80 22 „ 80 44 88 37 „ 88 45 a 1 at 21 48 to 21 52 51 23 „ 51 30 14 16 13 4 The elements deduced are compared below with those given by Goldschmidt in his Winkeltabellen : — Anderson . . Goldschmidt. a (3 y a c 94 46 94 42 o / HI 34 111 27 85 56 86 06 114792 • 1-1550 1-83158 1-8317 The elements for Dana's position were also calculated for com- parison with FlinkV as corrected by Dana, and Pirsson's for the fowlerite variety5 : — Anderson . . Flink .. .. Pirsson a 0 y a c o I 103 21 103 18 103 39 108 42 108 44 10S 48^ 82 6 81 39 81 55 1 07281 107285 1-078 •62379 •62127 •62627 Comparison of these elements suggests a morphotropic relation- ship, and it is very desirable that the exact composition of Broken Hill rhodonite should be ascertained; at present, however, a sufficient quantity of suitable material is not available. A brief description of the individual specimens follows (lettering according to Goldschmidt). 4 Flink— Zeits. Kryst., xi., 1SS6, p. 506. 5 Pirsson — Amer. Journ. Sci., xl., 1890, p. 484. 132 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Crystal i. (Plate xxviii., figs. 1, 2). — This is the smallest and the best crystal ; it measures 1 x -2 x -5 cm. in the axial directions, is practically free from gangue, and (mite transparent. In hahit it is elongated parallel to the a axis, and might almost he descrihed as tabular on (010). Combination :~-a c bosir A G D Emkiqpurln. Crystal ii. (Plate xxviii., figs. 3, 4). — It is the front half of a crystal, incomplete below, measuring 1*6 x Dl x 1*5 cm., and carries a good deal of attached galena as cleavage fragments and small grains. The faces o(110) and k (01 1) are unusually large. Combination : — a cb o s k B D mki p F G p. Crystal Hi. (Plate xxix., tigs. 1, 2). — This crystal measures Id x •8 x 1*2 cm., and may be described as thick tabular on (010); on 100 there is a rounded depression like a small thumb mark ; the left side of the figure is bounded mainly by a cleavage plane. Galena in cleaved lumps is attached to the lower surface. Combination : — a c b o s k tv C k r I n H L P

III (U 401 142 2 65 6 142 8 65 4 Our thanks are due to the Director of the National Museum, Melbourne, and to Acting-Professor W. G. Woolnough, for the ready loan of specimens. 10 OCCASIONAL NOTE. No. I. SEPIA BRAGG I, VERCO.— A RECORD for the STATE. By C. Hedley, Conchologist. Heavy and continuous gales had prevailed for a fortnight, during which eighteen inches of rain had fallen and several wrecks had occurred on the coast. A Museum party then spent a profitable afternoon inspecting the pelagic drift on Maroubra Beach. On 8th August, 1908, a tremendous sea still running, we found a continuous purple streak of lanthina, Velella, and Physalia along the wash of the waves. This drift was wholly pelagic, no ground fauna appeared at all ; probably such was carried down by the undertow. The drift seemed also southern, such surface forms as Glaucus and Porpita were remarkable for their absence. The storm had overwhelmed sea fowl ; Cadet D. B. Fry found a dead, though fresh, Penguin (Eudyptula minor) on the sand, a bird which rarely reaches so low a latitude. Carcases of Prion ariel were numerous. Cadet R. Kinghorn found a Spirula spirula shell with part of the animal attached. A drift spar encased in living barnacles yielded the crab N autiloyrapsus minutus, Linn., to the scrutiny of Mr. A. R. McUnlloch. Amongst the thousands of lanthina ianthina, Linn., we detected a dozen of the rarer lanthina exiyua, Lamarck, with their floats complete. Perhaps the most interesting article fell to my share in the shape of a couple of shells of Sepia brayyi, Verco,1 described last year from South Australia, but as yet undetected on the Pacific Coast. Our specimens are only an inch in length. The South Australian type is 60 mm. long, while a specimen from the Heytesbury Coast, Victoria, kindly presented by Mr. G. B. Pritchard, is 62 mm. in length. It is probable that the Tasmanian record of Sepia elouyata, D'Orbigny & Ferussac,- is based on Sepia brayyi. An icthyological treasure, the second known specimen of Eupetrichthys angustipes, Ramsay and Ogilby, rewarded Cadet E. le G. Troughton, who found it stranded on Maroubra Beach the following Saturday. 1 Verco— Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., xxxi., 1907, p. 213, pi. xxvii., tigs. 6, 6«, 66, tic, 6d. 2 Tate and May— Proc. Lion. Soc. N.S.W., xxvi., 1901, p. 351. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XVII. Gesture Language. Fig. 1. Bushman; traveller. 2. Kangaroo ; wallaby. 3. Father. 4. Cattle. 5. Dog ; dingo (see also fig. 21). 6. Government tracker ; policeman (peaked cap ; see als>o rig. 23). 7. Brother ; sister. 8. Father's sister's child. 9. Horse (see also rig. 13). 10. Mother or father's father. 11. Son ; daughter. 12. Venery (see also fig. 14). 13. Horse (see also fig. 9). 14. Venery (see also fig. 12). 15. Woman ; young woman. 16. Crocodile vsee also PI. xviii., fig. 30). 17. Stingaree. 18. Fish; fish-net. 1 9. Mother. 20. Carpet snake. 21. Dog; dingo (see also fig. 5). 22. Water snake. 23. Government tracker ; policeman (military salute ; see also fig. 6). REC. AUSTR, MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XVIT. KXPLANATION OK PLATE XVIII. Gesture Language. Fig. 1 . Large number, *** >> sj 4. Interrogation. 5. Silence (see also tig. 9). 6. Qorroboree ; dance. 7. Anger (see also tig. 10). S. Killing ; death ; corpse (sec also fig. 1 1 9. Silence (see also tig. 5). 10. Anger (see also fig. 7). 1 1. Act of killing. 12. 13. II. Killing; death; corpse (see also fig 8) 15. Forgetfulness. 16. Negation. 17. Snake in general. 18. Knavery ; foolery. 19. Ghost ; evil spirit. "JO. Nothing ; none. 21. Nothing; no more. •22. Good-bye. ."' ' Bird or turtle. '_>:>. Frog. 26. Mullet. 27. Lizard. 28. Frilled lizard. 29. Iguana. 30. Crocodile (see also PI. xvii., fig. 16). REC. AUSTR, XIUS, VOL. VTTT Plate X V M I . i:\ri.AV\Tin\ of i-latf xix. Gesture Langdagj . Fie 1 / r B .,' , Large kangaroo. !> — i ,, :;. Male red kangaroo. ,, 4. Female ,, ,, .";. Kangaroo in g< neral ( ee also tig. 8). ,, (i. Female brown kangaroo. ,, 7. Male ,, ,, S. Kangaroo in general (see alsofig. 5). ,, ',). Scrub-wallaby. ,, 10. Small rock wallaby. ,, 11. White wallaby. ,, 12. Opossum (see also fig. 15). ,, 13. Paddy-melon. ,, 14. Native-companion see also fig. 19) ,, lf>. Opossum (see also fig. 12). ,, 16. Pelican. ,, 17. Porcupine (see also fig. 20). ,, Ks. Bandicoot. ,, 19. Native i panion (see also tig. 14). ,, 20. Porcupine (see also rig. 17). ,, 21. Duck. ,. 22. Cockatoo see also fig. 26). ,, 23. Bee; honey (see also figs. 25, 27) ,, 24. Emu ,, 25. Bee; honey (see also figs. 23 and 27). ,, 26. Cockatoo (see also fig. 22). ,, 27. Bee ; honey (see also figs. 2:! ami 25). ,, 28. Yam (see also tig. ,"i 1 1 ,, 29. Vam digging. „ 30. ,, 31. River; creek (see also fig. 36). „ :v>. Fire. ,, 33, Water. ,, 34. 5 am (see also fig 28). .. :;."). Water-hole. ,, 36. Hiver; creek (see also tig. 31 " 'li' I Mountain. ,, 39. Womerah or spear-thrower. ,, 40. Womerah spear. ,, 41. Fillet, or forehead hand. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plati; XIX EXPLANATION OF PLATE XX. Figs. 1 and 2. Whirlers. These are hung by the string to catch the wind, and so made to revolve near a baby, rendering the latter " tabu ; " used at Butcher's Hill, Oooktown ami Bloomrield River. In the Koko-yimidir dialect, spoken from the Annan and Endeavour Rivos along the coast line to Cape Flattery, they are called marpan. In the Koko-yellangi dialect, spoken at Butcher's Hill, the name is jinna-juronggor . The colours used are red and white. Both implements are from Butcher's Hill. ,, 3. A whaler charm to render an object " tabu.:' Mapoon— Dr. Roth surmises this to be a modern form <>f the charm represented in PI. xxi., figs. 1 and 2. The colours used are red and white. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XX. H. BARNES, Junr., photo., Austr. Mus,. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXI. Figs. 1 and 2. Painted spear heads hung in proximity to an object to render it " tabu." The colours used are red and white. Mapoon. ,, .'>. A charm to render an object " tabu." By the Koko-minni Blacks of the Middle Palmer River it is called Uirni (see PI. xx., fig. .'}). The colours used are red and white. The implement was obtained at the Palmer Native Police Camp. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XXI. H. BARNES. Junr.,phot< Auitr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXII. 1. Calliostoma retiarium, Hedley and May. 2. Gibbula galhina ,, 3. Calliostoma columnarium ,, 4-5. Basilissa niceterium ,, 6,7,8. Liotia pelalifera ,, 9. llissoa columnaria ,, 10. Rissoina fau&ta ,, REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XX TT. WINIFRED WL:ST, del., Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIII. Fig, 11. Rissoina lintea, Hedley and May. 12, 13. Pseutlormoina capiticava, Hedley and May. 14. Septa petvlans, Hedley and May. 15. Gymatium columnarium, Hedley and May. 16. Arcidaria mob! lis, Hedley and May. 17. ,, ,, var. costata, Hedley and May. 18. Natica elkingtoni, Hedley and May. 19. Marginella columnaria, Hedley and May. "20, 21. Microvoluta purpureostoma, Hedley and May. REG AUSTR, MITS., VOL. VII. Plate XX III, 12 v WINIFRED WEST, del., Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIV. 22. Trophon columnariua, Hedlcy and May. 23. ,, molorihus ,, , , 24. ,, sarmentosus ,, ,, 25. 26. rhiliiK columnaria ,, ,, 27, 28. Lepidopleurus columnarius, Hedley and May, 29, 30, 31, 32. Giuia comprised ,, ,, REG AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. 25 WINIFRED WEST, del Aub.ti. Mui. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXV. . 33, 34, 35, 36. Cuna hamata, Hedley and May. ,, 37, 38, 39, 40. Venericardia columnaria, Hedley and May. ,, 41,42. Condylocardia porrecta, Hedley. ,, 43. 44. 4.">. ,, peetinata, Tate and May. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XXV. 37 »Z5&t mm WINIFRED WEST, de Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVJ Natator :• ssellatus, McOulloch. htly redi REC. AUSTR, MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XXVI. (, II. BARNES, Junr . photo., Austi. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVII. Natator tessellatus, McCulloch, Slightly reduced. KEC. AUSTB. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XXVI I. I - ^ 1 f H. BARNES, Junr., photo., Austr. Mub, EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXVIII. PvHODOMTI . Broken Hill, N.S. Wales. Figs. 1, 3. Orthographic projection. Figs. 2, 4. Clinographlc projection of tigs. I and 3 respectively. Forms.— a (001), c (010), b (100), o (110), s (110), «c (01 1J, n (012), m (0\1). k (011), i (021), q (101), p(102), ti (103), r (102), / (203), n (101), /x(iir„ * (ill). I Lettering and indices according to Goldschraidt : unlettered faces are new | REC. AUSTR, MUS. VOL VII. Plate XXVIII. C. ANDERSON, del. Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXIX. Rhodonite. Broken Hill, N.S. Wales. Figs. 1, 3. Orthographic projection. Fig. 2. Clinographic projection of fig. 1. , , 4. Stereogram . (For lettering and indices see explanation to Plate xxviii.) H EC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VTT. Plate XXIX. C. ANDERSON, del. Austr. Mus. REU. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Frontispiece. CORRECTIONS. Substitute the Explanations of Plates \. and II. herewith, for those formerly supplied. EXPLANATION OF PLATE 1. Aboriginal Custom;-!. Fig. I. Assisting in confinement. ,, 2. Medicine man sucking bone out of wound. EXPLANATION OF PLATE II. Fig. I. Doctor using sucking string (this has been already published, see Bull, v., tip. 28.) ,, 2. Man and two women, the latter with children astride on their shoulders. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS from the SOURCES of the BARCOO, WARD and NIVE RIVERS SOUTH CENTRAL QUEENSLAND Part II.1 — Cephalopoda. By R. Etheridoe, Junr., Curator. (Plates xxx.-xlix., and Fig. 8.) I. — Introduction. The "Ammonites" proper contained in Mr. H. W. Blomfield's collection are few in number, and will l>e noticed in a later part of this Memoir. The following descriptions of the " Crioceri " are offered with a considerable amount of diffidence, and to arrive at these results I found it imperative to undertake a general review of our Cretaceous forms hitherto associated with the names Crioceras and Ancyloceras; the outcome of this work, extending over many months, is to my mind, I regret to say, anything but satisfactory. This arises from two primary causes, the frag- mentary state in which the fossils are frequently found, ami the difficulty experienced in grouping such portions, from many and widely separated localities, in well defined species. A secondary cause is due to the fact that many of the hitherto described tonus are based on portions of shells onlv, and in two instances at least the descriptions are so inadequate that recognition of the species is practically reduced to guess work. In no instance is this more apparent than in that of Cr iocer as austral e, Moore, the Australian type of the group. To render my investigations as complete as possible, I assembled all the specimens of the above two genera within my reach, and drew upon the following collections, as well as our own : — The Mining and Geological, and Macleay Museums, S}7dney; National Museum, Melbourne : Geological Survey, and Queensland Museums, Brisbane ; Geological Survey Collection, Adelaide ; and the Sweet Collection, Melbourne. For the loan of specimens from 1 Part i.— See Austr. Mus. Rec vi., 5, 1907, p. 317. 11 13G RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. these collections, my thanks are due, respectively, to Mr. E. F. Pittman, Prof. T. W. E. David, Prof. W. Baldwin Spencer, Mr. H. Y. L. Brown, Mr. B. Dunstan, Mr. C. J. Wild, and Mr. G. Sweet, all of whom responded in the most cordial manner to my applications. -' With the intention of ascertaining all that could be learnt of the Australian type, C. australe, Moore, I enlisted the sympathy and help of my friend, Dr. A. Smith Woodward, who endeavoured to obtain for me a reproduction of Moore's figured specimen, believed to be in the Bath Museum, where the remainder of Moore's collection of Australian Mesozoic fossils is deposited. Most unfortunately, however, this particular fossil appears to be non-extant, either lost or mislaid, and so this avenue of informa- tion is closed to me. This investigation has necessitated an entire reconsideration of all the facts hitherto published regarding our Crioceri and Ancyloceri, and the modification of a good deal of pre-existing work, including my own. If Crioceras australe, Moore, is to remain on our list, then a goodly proportion of the following results is open to suspicion ; but if it he permissible to absolutely reject this name, on the ground of insufficient description and loss of type, then I believe the suggested determinations following are as near to the truth as the materials now gathered together will permit of. II. — As to Crioceras australe, Moore. It is not my intention to recognizee, australe as a species, and it is as well, once for all, to give my reasons for so doing. The only characters worthy of note, and they are not of much value, given by Moore are the following: — (1) large size; (2) volutions closely fitting ; (3) earlier cost:e regular, rounded and slightly curved ; (4) later costse widely separated and acute, with two '•depressed bosses on either side" (of the median line of the venter it is presumed .') : (5) younger sulci (intercostal valleys) rounded; (6) older sulci regularly concave; (7) mouth seven and a half inches by seven ; (8) siphuncle small and immediately ventrad; (9) venter broad, three and a half inches. Onl}' one of these characters is of sufficient importance to be specific, the occurrence of the two "depressed bosses' on either 2 The present paper will therefore contain descriptions of fossils from localities other than those comprised within the geographical boundaries given in the title. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 137 side ; the others are common to all our larger Crioceri at some period of tbeir growth. Moore could have told us whether or or no these large tubercles occur on each costa, or on alternate costse, or the tubercle-bearing costa? separated by many or few undecorated ribs, all important points in the separation of our species, as will be seen later. Again, nothing definite is said of the relative positions of these tubercles, whether abdominal, lateral, or supra-dorsal. I certainly laboured under the impression I knew C. australe, and have so named specimens ; now, however, I can only regard such determinations as hasty generalisations. If Moore's species is to be retained and distinguished by possessing two rows of tubercles on each side the middle line of the venter in the gerontic condition, then we are left with man}' non-tuberculate specimens in a younger stage of growth that must remain, from their imperfect condition, nameless. During my researches in Austra- lian Cretaceous Palaeontology, I have never met with a large Crioceras possessing two such rows of tubercles in the aged condition of the coil. Moore said of his species — "shell very large." We certainly do possess a huge so-called Crioceras, or perhaps even two, in our Cretaceous beds. Mr. Felix Ratte figured'1 about one-half of a shell ascribed to C. australe, the perfect diameter of which would have been about four feet, and so far as the state of preservation discloses, non-tuberculate. The late Dr. W. Waagen ascribed to this species a large Indian Cretaceous shell4 without any trace of the two rows of tubercles on the more adult whorls, but, on the other hand, with fasciculate costae and two rows of large tubercles on the younger, or inner whorls ; this was a direct departure from Moore's description. I committed a further mistake by including5 a shell of fine growth in C. australe, apparently entirely devoid of tubercular ornamentation. Under these circumstances, viz., the incompleteness of Moore's description; the loss of his type-specimen; and the different interpretation put on the meaning of the name by Messrs. Ratte, Waagen, myself, and collectors in general, 1 am induced to abandon the name as the most direct way out of a serious difficulty. 3 Ratte -Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S.Wales, (2), i. 1SS6, pl.ii. 4 Waagen — Jurassic Fauna of Kutch (Pal. Ind.), Ceph., 1875, i., No. 4, p. 246, pi. lx., rigs. 1 a-c. 5 Etheridge— Geol. Pal. Q'land, etc., 1892, pi. xxxi., f. 1. 138 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. III. — The Names Crioceras and Ancvloceras. Before proceeding with the specific descriptions, it may be well to pass in review some facts in the history of these genera. Leveille's original description as Crioceratites is not available, and I have to fall back on D'Orbigny's, ° which is a very wide definition. The principal features of his Crioceras, irrespective of the sutures, were a discoida] form, the coil enrolled in one plane, the whorls non-contiguous, and an oval, round, or com- pressed mouth. From the figures, the first of which is Leveille's type (C. duvalii), we learn these interesting facts, viz., the increase in the circumference of the whorls was comparatively slow and slight, the coil a very open one, and in the type three rows of tubercles on each side the middle line of the venter. D'Orbigny's Ancyloceras so closely resembles Crioceras in its earlier stages that Mr. J. E. Astier7 united the two, in which he was followed by Messrs. Pictet and Campiche, but unfortunately they selected the former name, thereby denying to Leveille's genus its undoubted priority. Palaeontologists have since used both names, some one and some the other. The whole question is excellently and clearly put in favour of Crioceras by Messrs. Sarasin and Schondelmayer, to whose remarks* the reader is referred, but they point out that the genus Crioceras is, amongst all the genera of Ammonitidae, one of those interpreted very differently by authors. Amongst those who are in accord with the above authors are Messrs. M. Neumayr, M. Neumayr and V. Uhlig, and E. Haug. The difficulty appears to have been to find some satisfactory method of division into genera of the heterogeneous assemblage of forms previously known as Crioceras, to replace the old D'Orbignyan one of degree of enrolment. The artificial nature of this method was, I believe, first pointed out by Dr. M. Neumayr, who suggested a division of the Ammonitidse on the basis of natural kinship, to some extent then already foreshadowed by Quenstedt and Pictet. Neumayr and Uhlig described9 three lines of development of Crioceras forms from Ammonite stocks — one from Olcostephanus, viz., C . Jissicostatum ; a second from Hoplites (H. /n/strix), viz.r C. roemeri, N. & U.; and the third also from Hoplites {11. longinodis), \iz., C. seeleyi, N. & I'. These authors did not 6 D'Orbigny— Pal. Knim; Terr. CivL, i., Ceph., p. 475. A stier— Ann. Sci. I'hys. Nat. Soc. Nat. Agric Lyon, (2), iii., 1851, p.435 8 Sarasin anil Schondelmayer— M6m. Soc. Pal. Suisse, xxix., 190'2. p. 99. Neumayr and Uhlig — Palaeontographica, xxvii., 3-t*>, 1881, p. 184. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 139 define Crioceras, but from developmental facts brought forward discussed the propriety of subdividing the genus. Glancing through their figures I find their conception of the latter includes — (a) close coiled forms (C. seeleyi); (b) the same with a shaft or limb (C. urbani); and (c) open coiled forms (C. capricornu, C. roemeri). In 1883(1) Dr. V. Uhlig restricted Crioceras10 by removing from it C. asterianum, D'Orb., and with Hamites depressus establishing for them the genus Fidelia,11 as a connecting link with the Ammonite Lytoceras, Suess. Uhlig further removed from Crioceras a group of species typified by C. puzosianum, D Orb., of a more or less dwarfed habit, and a louse open coil, as Lytoceras.1 - The embryonal chamber in the last named is followed by one, or one and a half, smooth whorls, when costse are gradually acquired, with ;i limb and crozier. "Uhlig, after a close study of the Cephalopoda of the Werns- dotf beds, arrived at the conclusion that the major part of the forms referred to as Crioceras or Ancyloceras were genetically annexed to Hoplites, and that a generic distinction between the spiral Crioceri and those of the Ancyloceras type was superfluous. In 1889 Mr. E Haug suggested a separation of Crioceras and Ancyloceras based on the sculpture which he considered was much stronger on the "dwelling chamber" (shaft and crozier) of Ancy- loceras than on the spirally inrolled whorls " which in Crioceras never appear to be the case'' 1:;; he selected Ancyloceras mathero- nianum, D'Orb., as the type of Ancyloceras, and included in it both close and open-coiled shells1 '; as an example of the former is Scaphites coquandi, Math., and of the latter S. provinciate, Math. The sculpture selected by Haug as typical of his defini- tion of Ancyloceras consists of a uniform double row of tubercles on the flanks and two rows of abdominal tubercles (i.e., one on each side the median line of the venter) always on the crozier, and sometimes on the spiral.1"' So far as I can understand his meaning, Haug appears to regard all Crioceri as constantly inrolled in a plane, bow-shaped, or spiral, in the latter case with or without a crozier. l0Uhlig— Denks. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien., xlvi., 2, p. 25S. "Uhlig— Lor. fit., p. 202. The name Pictetia was subsequently (1S85) proposed by C. Brongniart for a Neuropterous insect. l2Uhlig— Loc. cit., p. 260. i3Haug— Beitrage Pal. Oster.-Ung. Orients, vii., 3 and 4, 1889, pp. 207 and 212. !iHaug — Loc. cit.. p. 214. l5Haug — Lor. cit., p. 214. 140 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Hang's restriction of Ancyloceras was regarded by Dr. D. J. Anthula16 as unsatisfactory; although he stated his opinion that a trustworthy definition of the D'Orbignyan genus could not be given. In 1902 appeared the paper, ahead)' quoted, by Messrs. Sarasin andSchondelmayer.1 ' These authors vigorously dispute Dr. Haug's definition of Ancyloceras on the grounds that it is contrary to the generally admitted opinion in phylogenetic classification to give importance to the characters of the terminal portion of the shell in preference to the initial. They define Crioceras as con- sisting of species "derived from Hoplites, which present dis- jointed whorls with an inrolment sometimes crioceratic, some- times ancyloceratie." The mode of enrolment emplo}red by D'Orbigny is not of preponderating importance, nor is a group classification of the species assisted by the structure of the sutures, in consequence of their uniform and constant characters; on t lie other hand, the sculpture of the initial whorls is a good feature for differentiation into groups. These authors divide Crioceras ( + Ancyloceras) into seven groups, each corresponding to a subgenus. For their second group (or subgenus) they reserve the name Ancyloceras, with C. renauxianum, D'Orb., as type, instead of A. matheronianum, D'Orb., the more usually accepted type. Messrs. Sarasin and Schondelmayer, whose paper is dated 1902, do not appear to have had the advantage of consulting Hyatt's classification published in 1900. Their second group, just referred to, contains two of Hyatt's genera — Tomoceras (-4. duvalianum, D'Orb.), and Dirri- moceras {A. simplex, D'Orb.). The third group, typified by Ancy- loceras matherouiamivi, D'Orh., is, according to Hyatt, Ancyloceras (sensu strictu) ! Lastly, the fourth group, with A. tabarelli, Astier, as its representative, is more or less equivalent to Hyatt's Acrioceras, of which the species named is the type. In 1900 appeared the first volume of Eastman's translation1" of Zittell's ' Grundzuge der Palajontologie,'1 '•' with the article ' Cephalopoda ' revised and in a great measure rewritten by the late Prof. A. H}'att, and containing the classifica- tion referred to above; it is to lie regretted that this highly 99. 1900. Svo. London. ^'/ittel— Grundzuge der Pahuontologie (Palivozoologie) Svo. Munich and Leipzig, 1S95. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDoi:. 141 talented man did not live to elaborate the classification there forecast. Hyatt distributed the evolute Cephalopoda through several families, but those with which we are at present chiefly concerned are the following : — 1. AncyloceratkUr — " Includes only such forms usually assigned to Anry- loceras, Crioceras, etc., as have three rows of tubercles on either side on the larger costre. Between the latter are smaller costations without tubercles. Costaj sometimes interrupted across the venter by a smooth zone." Figures A. matheronianum, D'Orb. 2. Grioceratida; — " . . . with only two lines of tubercles on either side of the median line of the venter. The latter may have a smooth zone or be crossed by the coske, which are either single or double between the tubercles " 3. Anisoceratidce — " .... two rows of tubercles on either side the median line of the venter. Cost;t- large and single, or imperfectly bifurcate, and may cross the venter." 4. Hamitidce — Single costaj crossing the venter uninterruptedly, and no tubercles at any stage. It appears tome that Hyatt attached considerable classificatory value to the external sculpture, and had he lived to complete his work a path very difficult to others would have been rendered smoother. IV. — Australian Crioceri. There is a strong community of structure throughout all the Australian shells of this type. It is only by attention to the degree of inrolment, breadth of the venter, convexity of the Hanks and the sculpture, that specific separation and demarcation can be attained ; I have paid attention, as a primary means, to the sculpture of the initial whorls, in the few instances in which it is visible. Nearly all our forms appertain to the more closely coiled type ; apparently only two show any tendency to the open coil condition. I do not give detailed descriptions of the sutures. The specific differences appear to be so trivial that short of a special terminology for the lobe and saddle subdivisions it is impossible to express oneself clearly and at the 'same time tersely. Suffice it to say that throughout the species the community of structure in this respect is remarkable. In this they appear to be in accord with those forms studied by Messrs. Sarasin and Schondelmayer. The septa, speaking generally, throughout our specimens, are divided into six principal lobes as in the typical Hoplite-like Crioceri, such as C. emerici, C . matheronianum, etc.; the superior lateral lobes are always the longest with a broad body. The descriptions that follow7 cannot be regarded as eminently satisfactory, nor do I see how such can be the case when the 1 4J RECORDS OP THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. sculpture varies at different stages of growth, aud I am mainly dependant, although not in every instance, on incomplete material. Jt' the tuberculatum be made use of as a guide, to some extent following Hyatt's lead, we find the Australian species can be arranged as follows : — 1. Without tubercles of any kind. C. taylori, mihi. 2. Tubercles only in the youngest condition, one row on each side the middle line of the venter. C. itautiloides, mihi. 3. The same as No. 2, with three rows of tubercles. C. jackii, mihi. 4. With one row of tubercles on each side the middle line of the venter throughout life (i.e., as far as known) — C. axonoides, mihi ; C. jUndersi, McCoy; and C. plectoides, mihi. 5. With two rows in a similar position throughout life. C. laf/iieitx, mihi; C. cordycepoides, mihi. 6. With three rows in aged individuals (young stage unknown). C. lampros, mihi. According to Hyatt's classification, only one of these groups (No. 5) can be strictly regarded as a member of the Crioceratidse, and one referable to his Ancyloceratidre (No. G). The diminutive forms of the Point Charles and Shoal Bay beds are too fragmentary, in most cases, for an opinion to be formed of their more perfect condition. Not long since I endeavoured20 to provisionally refer these to genera, but without marked success. It is almost superfluous to mention that our Australian species, with one possible exception, are not typical Crioceri of the C. duvali group. The latter throughout their volutions are more or less pipe-like, and increase but little in diameter. On the contrary, the former do, and are much more ammonoid, and even to some extent nautiloid, in appearance. In this respect if one conceives Pictetia asterianum, D'Orb.,21 to hs closer coiled than it is, the resemblance to our C. jackii in the gerontic stage is very marked. This ammonoid-like appearance was remarked on by Neumayer and Uhlig in C. Jissicoatatum, Koemer. -- In some dwarfed European species Uhlig discovered23 that the first, or first and a half, volutions succeeding the embryonal are 2°Etheridge— S. Austr. Pari. Papers, 1907 (Suppl. to No. 55, 1900). pp. 15-18, pis. ix.oci. "D'Orbigny— Pal. Fran^ Tern Oct., Ceph. i., 33-42, 1S42, pi. cxv. bis, figs. 3 ami 4. aaNeumayr & Uhlig — Palaeontographica, xxvii., 3, 1SS1, p. 1S2, pi. hi., f. 1. 23 Uhlig— Denk. K. Akad. Wiss. Wien, xlvi., 2, p. 260. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 143 smooth, the following whorls gradually acquiring costse as growth went on. These he separated as Leptoceras, and one of our smallest species appears to me to fulfil these conditions, viz., C. edkinsi, mihi.24 As Hyatt did not live to elaborate his classification, it is my intention, in the following pages, to refer the whole of the Aus- tralian forms to Crioceras, with the exception of the species just mentioned. When the limits of Crioceras have been de6ned by those with large collections at their disposal and access to the old types, it will be possible to relegate our local species to their respective groups. Genus Crioceras (LeveWe), D'Orbigny, 1842. 25 Crioceratites, Leville, Mem. Soc. Geol. France, ii. 1836, p. 313 (fide D'Orb.). Crioceras, D'Orbigny, Pal. Franc. Terr. Cret. i. (Ceph.), 33-42 1842,-''' p. 457. Ancyloceras, D'Orbigny, ibid., p. 491. Ancyloceras, Astier, Ann. Sci. Phys. Nat. Soc. Nat. Agric. Lyon, '(2), iii., p. 435. Crioceras, Neumayer and Uhlig, Palaeontographica, xx\ii., 3, 1881, p. 181. Crioceras, Uhlig, Denk. K. Akad. W'iss. Wien, xlvi , 2, 1883, p. 258. Crioceras, Haug, licitriige Pal. Ost.-Ung. Orient, \ ii., 3 and 4, 1888, p. 2u6. Ancyloceras, Haug, ibid., pp. 211 and 214. Crioceras, Anthula, ibid., xii., 3, 18U9, p. 124. Crioceras(T) leptus,27 sp. nov. (Plate xxx.; Plate xxxiv., fig. 2.) Sp. Chars. — Size of shell unknown. Venter rounded, narrow; abdominal margins rounded ; dorsum flat, costate ; impressed '■^Etheridge— Geol. Pal. Q'land, etc., 1S92, p. 502, pi. xxx., figs. 8 and 9. 25As an addition to Mr. C. D. Sherborn's remarks (Geol. Mag., (4), vi., 1899, p. 223) on the dates of publication of the "Livrasons" of D'Orbigny's Cephalopoda (Pal. Franc.) I would point out that Bronn (Index Pal., i. , 1848, p. 348) gives 1840 as D'Orbigny's date of Crioceras. It may also be mentioned parenthetically that the latter in one publication (Pal. Franc. loc. cit., p. 459) gives Leveillc's date as 1836, and in another (Prod. Pah, ii., 1850, p. 65) as 1837, whilst Bronn (loc. cit.) as 1835. 26Date^e Sherborn. 144 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. zone absent ; flanks so very little rounded as to appear almost Hat; section longitudinally and obtusely triangular (or longi- tudinally deltoid). Cost* single, obtuse, broadening forwards, straight on the venter, curved slightly forwards on the dorsum, and simply oblique, or very slightly sigmoidal on the Hanks ; intercostal valleys delicately lined to correspond with the costse. Obs. — Three disunited portions of whorls are referred to under this name, two of which may belong to the same individual specimen. Three characters combined serve to distinguish these, viz., the narrow venter, comparatively flat flanks, and the absence of tubercles. In the second of these features there is a general agreement with C. axonoitles, but the tubercles of the hitter are wanting. The three specimens are to some extent exfoliated, but I hardly think this would have obliterated all trace of tubercles, had the latter ever existed. The cost* agree with those of the median and older conditions of C jackii. The flat, or almost straight- walled flanks assist materially in giving rise to the longitudinally deltoid outline of the transverse section of the walls, which is entirely unlike that of C. jackii. Pending the acquisition of more perfect material, the claim of these disunited portions to specific rank can only be regarded as tentative. Loc. — Liud River, a branch of the Mitchell River, Cape York Peninsula [G.S.Q.; and A.M. (IF. Cope)].- 7» Criocekas, sp. (Plate xxxviii., figs. 1, 2.) Obs. — This fragment is figured for future reference. It consists of portion of one whorl only, long-oval in transverse section, with a narrow rounded venter, a flat dorsum, exhibiting hardly any trace of an impressed zone, and absolutely flat flanks. The costa? are obtuse (although not large), particularly on the venter, which they cross withouti curvature, but on the dorsum are faintly inflected forwards, whilst on the flanks these ribs are slightly '27Xf7rr6j, thin. -7aThe abbreviations used in this and following localities are as follows:— A.M. = Australian Museum Collection, Sydney. Q.M. =Queensland Museum Collection, Brisbane. G.S.Q. —Geological Survey of Queensland Collection, Brisbane. <..S.=»G. Sweet Collection, Melbourne. U.S.---- Macleay Museum, University of Sydney. M.G.M. Mining and Geological Museum, Sydney. X.M.M. — National Museum, Melbourne. G.S.S.A.=Geological Survey S. Australia Collection, Adelaide. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 145 sigmoidal ; here and there one is bifurcate, the bifurcations supra-dorsal in position. There is one row of pimple-like, uniform tubercles, on either side the median line of the venter, along the abdominal margins, one on each costa. The specimen agrees with C. leptus except in the bifurcation of a few of the costa?, and the presence of the pimple-like tubercles. Amongst the Port Darwin Cretaceous fossils of Shoal Bay occurred a small Crioceras28 whorl which may possibly be an inner volution of this form, although the venter is subtruncate instead of round, and a well-marked impressed zone is present. Attention is mainly called to this with the view of future identification. Loc. — Barcoo, Wai'd, and Nive Rivers District [A.M. (//. W. Blomfield)J\ Crioceras jackii, Eth. fil. (Plate xxxi.; PL xxxii.,figs. 1, 2 and 3; PI. xxxiii.,fig. 1; Pl.xxxiv., fig.l; PI. xxxv., fig. 1; PI. xxxvi., fig. 1; PI. xxxvii.; PI. xxxviii., figs. 3-5.) Crioceras jackii, Eth. fil., Proc. R. Phys. Soc. Edinb., v., 1S80, p. 305, pi, xvii., figs. 55-58. Crioceras irrequlare, Ten. Woods, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, xvi., 188*2, p. 151, pi. viii., f. 2. Crioceras anslrale, Eth. til., Geol. Pal. Q'land, etc.. 1892, p. 499, pi. xxxi., f. 1; pi. xxxii., figs. 1-5. Crioceras irregular e, Eth. fil., Geol. Pal. Q'land, etc.. 1892, p. 501, pl.xxxiii., f. 1; pi. xlii., f. 16. iSp. Chars. — Shell large, robust, whorls five or six, close coiled, rapidly enlarging and overhanging one another; venter rounded or convex, rapidly broadening as the shell grew; siphuncle small; abdominal margins obtuse; dorsum more or less concave, costate; impressed zone broad, shallow ; flanks convex ; umbilical cavity wide and open ; section varies from octagonal round the full}' tubercled costa? to transversely deltoid around the non-tubercled. Sculpture varies at different stages of growth ; the first two and a half to three whorls bear a series of prominent or thickened obtuse costa? separated by from two to four (commonly two) ordinary round small costa?, all close together; beyond the above point costa? are all simple, regular and uniform, or a few bifurcate 28Etheridge— S. Austr. Pari. Papers (Suppl. to Xq. 55, 190G). 1007, p. 17, pi. ix., figs. 7 and 8. 146 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. merely, gradually enlarging or broadening, and becoming separated by wider and wider intercostal spaces, on the venter somewhat convex forwards, on the dorsum more so, and on the flanks distinctly sigmoidal ; intercostal spaces (or valleys) finely lined. Tubercles very characteristic and confined to the earliest whorls, comprised in from one to three rows on each side the middle line of the venter as prominent, bold nodes; when only one row, this occurs along each abdominal margin ; when two, the second appears at about the middle line of each flank ; and when three, the third is supra-dorsal in position ; when in three series, these nodes gradually die out in the following order — the supra-dorsal disappear first, the flank nodes next, and finally the abdominal nodes on some part of the third whorl. tSepta with very undulat- ing surfaces from the high development of the lobes and saddles. Obs. — It will be remembered that subsequent to my original description of C.jackii, I referred-'' the latter to C. australe, Moore, as the younger stage of the latter. This determination 1 can no longer uphold, through my inability to recognise C. australe. I was led to this chiefly by Dr. W. Waagen's concep- tion of C. australe, and still believe that the last named and my C.jackii are one and the same. The acquisition of additional material has increased my knowledge of both the older and younger conditions of C.jackii, and it now appears to be one of our best defined species. In a former synonomy I united with C. jackii under the common name C. australe, the late Mr. F. Ratte's figures'10 of the large Crioceras in the Australian Museum. This monster, when perfect, must have possessed a diameter of upwards of four feet, but its state of preservation is so unsatisfactory that I now feel diffident of passing an opinion on its identity; tubercles are not visible. The largest specimen I feel disposed to refer to this species measures eleven inches by nine inches cross-diameters, the breadth of the last existing whorl being five inches from the middle of the venter to the umbilical edge. The general appearance is decidedly ammonoid, particularly that of the Lytoceras group, arising to some extent from the close contiguity of the whorls to one another, although in this feature there is slight variability. In some cases the coil is close, in others there is an appreciable void between the volutions, when the projecting conical tubercles along the ventro-lateral margins become conspicuous. 29Etheridge— Geol. Pal. Q'land, etc., 1S92, p. 499. •™Ratte— Proc. Linn. ,Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), i., 1SS<>. p. 133, pis. i. and ii. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 147 The costae of the specimen mentioned in the latter portion of the last pai-agraph but one, are one inch apart, and as the shell increases in age the sigmoid al curvature becomes less apparent, and the costae straighter or less curved. On these mature whorls these large costae are more abruptly inclined on their fore aspects, gradually sloping or shelving off on their hinder faces into the concave valleys or intercostal spaces ; this is a characteristic feature of C. jackii. The costae of the tuberculate whorls, and for some distance beyond the termination of the nodes, are uniformly convex, obtuse and close. Those bearing tubercles are always more or less swollen and enlarged, with from two to four simple ribs between them. The normal number of rows of tubercles is certainly three, as already described, but specimens are before me with two, or even only one row visible. At the same time it may be accepted as a fact that in no instance has a specimen with the general characters ascribed to this species been found to possess nodes beyond about the third or certainly the fourth whorl. The section of the tubercle whorls is octagonal, the venter between the two abdominal rows being truncate and hollowed. The section of the remainder of the whorls is transversely deltoid. The convexity of the flanks and the marked difference in sectional outline at once distinguishes C. jackii from the portions I have termed C. leptus. To some extent in its young state it is our representative of the magnificent European C. romeri, N. & XJ.,"1 but the latter is much more highly ornate and the cost* of the two forms differ otherwise. In general appearance C. jackii is not unlike the American form C. percostaticm, Gabb32; a comparison may also be made with C. ramososeptatum, Anthula,33 in which the first three whorls are also nodose. In a previous paragraph it is stated only one row of tubercles may occur on the earliest volutions of this species. Indeed, one may go a step further by calling attention to specimens in which no trace of tubercles is visible, but otherwise presenting the costal features of the more mature conditions of C. jackii. These costae are remarkably regular, thick, rounded, although rather depressed, particularly on the venter, where they are 31Neumayrand Uhlig — Palaeontographica, (3), xxiii.,188l,3,p. 187, pi. lv. a2Gabb— Pal. California, i., 4, 1861, pi. xvi. 3:5 Anthula — Beitriige Pal. Oster.-Ung. Orients, xii., 1900, pi. xiv., f. 4a. H> RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. slightly inflected forwards, broadening as the shell grew ; on the flanks some of the costae are directly transverse, others faintly sigmoidal. T have repeatedly hesitated to unite these shells (typified by PI. xxxi.) with C. jackii proper (typified by PI xxxii., fig. I; PI. xxxiii., hg. 1; PI. xxxv., fig. 1), but their respective forms, mode of inrolment and costal characters are so similar, I ulti- mately felt unjustified in separating them in the present state of ii iv knowledge. It may ultimately be necessary to do so, if it can be shown by dismembering the whorls, or obtaining portions in such a condition, that even one row of the characteristic C. jackii tubercles is not present, although some specimens un- doubtedly possess the swollen costs; of C. jackii. Locs. — Walsh River, a tributary of the Mitchell River, Cape York Peninsula [G.S.Q.; Q.M.]. Saltern Creek, north of Bar- caldine, Central Queensland [Q.M.] Roma, South-east Queens- land [Q.M.]. Hughenden, North-Central Queensland [Q.M.; G.S.]. Tate River, a branch of the Lynd River, Cape York Peninsula [G.S.Q.]. Barcoo, Ward and Nives Rivers District, South- Central Queensland [A.M. (H. W. Blomfieldj]. West-south-west of Mount Mulligan, near Walsh Telegraph Station, Cape York Peninsula [G.S.Q.]. Crioceras nautiloides, sp. nov. (Plate xlv., and Fig. 8.) Sp. Chars. — Shell of medium size, robust. Whorls, only two known, close coiled, very rapidly enlarging and greatly over- hanging one another; initial whorl unknown; venter very broad and convex; abdominal margins very obtuse; dorsum broad, flattened, impressed, coscate ; impressed zone broad ; flanks very convex; umbilical cavity wide and deep ; section transversely- broad-oval. Sculpture varies at different stages of growth ; in the first whorl known the costse are both simple and fasciculate, from one to three of the former separating two or three of the latter; on the succeeding large whorl all are simple, straight on the venter, gently bent forwards on the dorsum, and faintly .sigmoidal on the flanks ; tubercles are confined to the first whorl preserved, one row on each side the middle line of the venter, latero-ventral in position, uniting the costse in fasciculi of two or three. Obs. — The specimen }delding the above characters is imperfect, lacking the inner whorls except one, and also deficient at the distal end. Although only a cast and possibly at one time semi- LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 149 o o 3 •Ji 150 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. plastic, I do not think it has undergone distortion. If the latter be the case, it is remarkable for the breadth of the rounded venter, and convexity of the flanks. The section, a transverse broad oval, is more truly oval than any other of our forms, even than that of C. plectoides. In possessing tubercle-united fasciculi of cost?e C. nautiloides resembles C. axonoides, but whilst the tubercles of the latter continue throughout life (so far as the shell is known), in the present species they stop short at a certain period of growth, as in C. jackii, and do not appear on the more mature whorls. Were it not for the fasciculate condition of the costse, no objec- tion could he raised to including this with C. jackii provisionally on the ground of distortion arising from plasticity as a cast. Loc. — Aramac, Thomson River, Central Queensland [G.S.Q.] Crioceras axonoides,"4 sp. nor. (Plate xxxii., fig. 4 ; PI. xliv., fig. 1.) Sp. Chars. — Shell large, with a depressed discoidal appearance. Whorls four (as far as known), close coiled, very gradually enlarging and not greatly overhanging one another ; initial whorl unknown ; venter comparatively narrow ; abdominal margins rounded and tuberculated throughout life ; dorsum flat, costate ; impressed zone imperceptible ; flanks very gently rounded, inclined to be straight-walled; umbilical cavity wide, com- paratively shallow, and open ; section longitudinally and obtusely triangular (deltoid). Sculpture varies at different stages of growth ; on the earlier whorls the costa? are oblique and both simple and in fasciculi, the former one or two in succession, the latter in groups of two or three ; on the later whorls all are simple and non-fasciculate ; on the venter of the inner whorls straight, and simple or fasciculate ; on the flanks of the outer whorls oblique, and on the venter straight ; on the dorsum throughout bent forwards. Tubercles in one row on each side the middle line of the venter along the abdominal margins ; on the inner whorls prominent, pointed, and conical, uniting the fasciculate costse in bundles of two or three, usually the latter, gradually lessening in size as the shell grew, and on the fasciculi ceasing, one blunt tubercle to each cost a. Obs. — This species must have attained a large size; the figured example possesses a diameter of ten and a half inches. One of aia^d)v, ovos, a wheel. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 151 the most important features is the retention of the tubercles throughout life, or at any rate so far as the latter is known, anil their occurrence on each costa after the cessation of the fasciculate grouping of the costa?. At what precise stage this took place it is difficult to say, as the inner whorls ai'e incomplete. In the figured example, however, the shell had attained to a diameter of four inches before the change from fasciculation to simplicity took place. This change in the sculpture is a very important feature, because in a species to follow C '. flindersi the grouping of the costse continued on to the shaft and crozier, i.e., throughout life. The fasciculi usually consist of three costse, but sometimes two, gathered into a bundle by the conate tubercles, then cross- ing the venter separately ; these fasciculi are separated by from one to two simple ribs. In this grouping of the costse there is a good deal of character, difficult to express in words, for although the early costation of C. nautiloides is fasciculate, the general appearance from that of the present form is quite different. Loc— Queensland ! [U.S.]. Crioceras ammonoides, sp. nor. (Plate xlix., figs. 1, 2.) Sp. Chars. — .Shell small, ammonoid, compressed. Whorls two and a half known ; earliest whorls open and loosely coiled ; later whorls close and contiguous; initial whorl vermiform, with an acute apex (?); venter narrow, depressed convex; abdo- minal margins rather sharp, inclined to be angular ; dorsum and impressed zone unknown ; dorsal or umbilical margin rather sharp and somewhat angular ; flanks broad and almost flat ; umbilical cavity wide and open ; section deltoid-ellipsoidal. Sculpture on the initial whorl of transverse micro-stria?, on the remainder of the whorls either of single or bifurcate costse, or in fasciculi of two ; on the venter straight, on the flanks sigmoidal ; tubercles small and papilla-like, in a single row along each abdominal margin, and at varying distances apart, both on single costfe, or uniting the fasciculi, separated by from one to four non-tuberculated costre. Obs.—I have three specimens of this form before me, agreeing in characters and size ; from this I opine they are more or less mature individuals. At any rate they certainly appear distinct from the earlier condition of any of the other species, so far as 1 know those portions of the latter. Tl-e species is remarkable for its narrow and almost flat venter, the lateral flatness of the whorls, 12 152 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, and hence generally compressed form ; the longitudinal narrow, and oval section is not seen in any other of our species. The costa? are also more truly siginoidal than in other Austra- lian forms. The tubercles are arranged to some extent as in C. plectoides, with intervals occupied by non-tubercUlated costse, and like those of the latter they are always small. On the other hand, there is a most important difference between the initial whorl of the two species, here it forms a free open coil, but in C. plectoides the coil is close and the whorl contiguous ; I regard this initial condition as a very important feature in these shells. The almost flat flanks recall those of C. leptus. The general appearance is very Ammonite-like, hence the specific name. £oc. — Barcoo, Ward and Nive Rivers District, South-Central Queensland [A.M. (//. Jfr. Hlomfield)]. Port Douglas [G.S.Q ].34a CRIOCERAS PLECTOIDES,35 Sp. 710V. (Plate xxxiii., fig. 2; PI. xlvi., fig. 1; PI. xlvii., figs. 1-4.) Sp. Chars. — Shell of medium size, robust. Whorls contiguous, at least six, overhanging one another, and rapidly broadening as the shell grew ; initial whorl vermiform, with an acute apex ; venter obtusely rounded, broadening much with age ; abdominal margins rounded, indicated only by the positions of the distant tubercles ; dorsum flat, costate ; impressed zone wide and faintly indicated ; flanks obtusely rounded ; umbilical cavity wide, open and deep, the latter feature arising from the rounded and over- hanging condition of the whorls; section markedly quadrate. Sculpture similar throughout life, consisting of narrow, rounded costse, seldom bifurcate, and varying in strength and distance apart according to position on the whorls ; simply transverse or very faintly concave backwards on the venter, convex forwards on the dorsum, and faintly siginoidal on the flanks. Tubercles obtuse, node like, in one row on each side the median line of the venter, and denning the abdominal margins not otherwise indicated ; at irregular distances apart, but closer in the young condition than during middle life and on single costse ; in the 34aIf Port Douglas, north of Cairns, is meant, possibly a mistake has been committed in this locality. On Dunstan's Geological Sketch Map of Queens- land (1905 the area around Port Douglas is coloured Deseri Sandstone I pper Cretaceous) ; the specimen has all the appearance of a Rolling Downs (Lower Cretaceous) fossil. asn\(KTT) a coil. LOWER CRKTACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 153 former stage there occur from three to five plain costse between every two node-bearing ribs, but in the latter there may be as many as ten plain costse occupying such a position, and here the tubercles often extend across three costs?, but without rendering the latter fasciculate. Septa concave on the whole, but with a very rolling surface arising from the development of the lobes and saddles, which are highly digitate. Obs. — C. jjlectoides is remarkable for the general uniformity of its characters throughout the various stages of growth so far as they are known to me ; it is a compact and well grown shell and one of the neatest of our Crioceri. The costse are narrow rounded ribs, not sharp crests, and appear to retain this character throughout life. Tuberculation of the costse is similarly preserved, so far as the growth of the species is known to me. The tubercles are node-like, obtuse, and round in the earlier stages of growth, one to each costa, but in later conditions three ribs appeal- to be involved in each tubercle, the latter perched on them as it were : these, however, do not divert the course of the costse and render them fasciculate. The finer details of the sculpture are unknown, as the test is not 2> reserved in any case. In the sectional outline of the whorls, and wide venter, C. ])lectoides approaches C. nautiloides, but differs in its costation and tuberculation. The shaft and crozier are unknown. Locs.— Cameron Downs, south of Hughenden, North Queens- land [G.S.Q.]. Wellshot Run, near Barcaldine, Central Queens- land [G.S.Q.]. Walsh River, a tributary of the Mitchell River, C ipe York Peninsula [Q.M.]. Mount Cornish, near Muttaburra, Central Queensland [Q.M.]. Barcoo, Ward and Nive Rivers District [A.M. (//. W. BlomJMd)]. Queensland ! [U.S. J. {Central Australia [G.S.]. Crioceras flindersi, McCoy, sp, (Plate xxxvi., fig. 2 ; PI. xxxix.; PI. xl.; PI. xli.; PI. xlii., fig. 2; PI, xliii.; PI. xliv., fig. 2.) Ancyloceras Flindersi, McCoy, Ann. Mag. Xat. Hist., 4., xx., 1867, p. 356. Ancyloceras Flindersi, Eth. fih, Mem. Geol. Survey N.S. Wales, Pal. No. 11, 1902, p. 44, pi. viii., figs. 1-3. Crioceras Flindersi, Eth. til., S. Austr. Pari. Papers, 1905, No. 71, p. 14, pi. i.,f. 1., pi. iii., figs. 1-8. 154 RECORDS OK THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Sp. Chars. — Shell attaining a large size, robust. Whorls, at least four, close coiled, rapidly enlarging and overhanging one another ; crozier .sharply and shortly curved ; shaft often with a compressed and lank or lean appearance ; initial whorl vermiform, with an acute apex ; venter of the whorls narrow and much arched in the young state, broadening and less arched in the older condition, narrow and gently rounded on the crozier and low convex or almost truncate on the shaft ; abdominal margins rounded ; dorsum flattened, costate , impressed zone very faintly indicated, more apparent in the young state, not visible on the shaft and crozier ; flanks of the whorls and shaft compressed, llattened, on the crozier slightly rounded ; umbilical cavity wide and open ; section longitudinally oval. The nature of the cos tie and tubercles varies according to growth and position; in the young state the cost* are obtuse and rounded, some more pro- minent and obtuse than others, single, or bifurcate low down on the flanks ; as growth progressed the costs? became sharp and angular, and either single (venter, dorsum, and flanks), larger and smaller alternately, bifurcate as before, or fasciculate (flanks and venter) in bundles of two to four (usually three) on whorls, shaft, and crozier; on the venter straight, on the flanks sigmoidal, varying only in degree, and bent forwards on the dorsum ; inter- costal spaces, or valleys, very narrow in the young condition, wide and concave on the old whorls. Tubercles very prominent and well marked, one row on each side the middle line of the venter along the abdominal angles, and at irregular distances apart in the young, but on the maturer whorls, shaft, and crozier on nearly every costa or group of costal ; those of the simple costse node-like, those uniting fasciculi on the whorls cristiform, elongated in the direction of the coil, those on the shaft low and conical ; mid-lateral and dorso lateral nodes absent. Obs. — This is one of the three Australian Crioceras in which I have been able to trace the various parts of the entire shell, whorls, shaft, and crozier ; the nature of the sculpture is so characteristic, little or no mistake can be made, the retention of strong fasciculate bundles of costse and prominent nodes through- out life being very characteristic. No doubt this shell attained to a very large size, although T have not the means of saying how large, but McCoy compared it with the C. gigas, J. de C. Shy., of the British Cretaceous, and speaks of it as a "gigantic" species. The largest portion of a whorl to come under my notice, as elsewhere recorded, is eight inches long by four and a half wide (i.e., transversely), but this is only a portion of a Sank, or side of a whorl the circumference LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 155 therefore, allowing for the full venter, dorsum, etc., must have been considerable. The limb, or shaft, always has a laterally compressed or flattened outline, giving it a " lean " appearance, except in an instance to be noted immediately. The relation of limbs of this nature to the coiled portions is satisfactorily shown in a specimen from the Queensland Museum (PI. xl., figs. 1, 2). The costse are more or less always sigmoidal on the flanks, often strongly so, frequently bifurcate, the points of bifurcation being either low down on the flanks, supra-dorsal to all intents and purposes, or along the middle line. The former occur on the flanks of the whorls usually, and the latter on the shaft ; at these points the costsa are not tuherculate. These subdivided costse may, or may not, pass over the venter singly : when not so doing they are gathered into fasciculate bundles along the rounded abdominal margins by the prominent tubercles. A fasciculus of three or four costse on a flank may be continued across the venter as two costte only, and per contra, a similar bundle on the latter maybe represented on a flank simply by two also. A specimen in the National Museum, Melbourne, displays a marked departure from the typical condition of the costa?, in that many of the flank ribs are single, but on the venter between the two rows of tubercles all are double. The appearance of the tubercles is also worthy of note, in that the}' are cristiform, or longitudinally elongated on the whorls, other than the youngest, becoming more mammillary on the shaft and crozier. I received from the Geological Survey of Queensland a portion of a large whorl measuring thirteen inches long by four inches in diameter, but in a poor state of preservation. In comparison to its size, the venter is not wide, but decidedly convex, although the flanks are by no means so. The dorsum is costate, without an impressed zone, and rather flat. The costae are very large, one inch apart from crest to crest, straight and simple on the flanks, curved forwards on the dorsum, and directly transverse on the venter and double, the single line of nodes on each side separating these double costa? from the single on the flanks. This may be a condition of C. Jiindersi, like the smaller example already referred to as in the National Museum, Melbourne, one in which the fasciculate condition of the costae on the flanks has not been developed ; this opinion, however, is expressed with all reserve. I now wish to draw attention to three marked conditions of costation, indicating its variability notwithstanding a fundamental resemblance throughout the whole suit of specimens. 156 RKCORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Flinders River, Queensland. — Portion of a whorl, the flank cost 86 either single or in fasciculi of two, chiefly the latter, each fasciculus and single costa tuberculate along the abdominal lines. The venter is low convex, and in crossing it the single costal become duplicated as well as those forming the fasciculi (PL xxxix., figs. 2 and 3). Saltern Creek, Queensland. — Portion of a whorl, the venter low convex, the flank costai again slightly sigmoidal in fasciculi of three to five. These fasciculi are complex, thus : — the nodes alon» the abdominal lines unite two or three costa? as the case may be, each group with an anterior and posterior rib derived from the others by bifurcation, the latter passing over the venter free without reference to the tubercles. On the other hand, those united by the tubercles either retain their individuality of two or three, or become four to the bundle (PI. xl., figs. 3 and 4). Wellshot (?), Queensland. — Portion of a large shaft or limb without the compressed or "lean" appearance already referred to, tentatively referred to C '. Jlindersi. The venter is decidedly convex, the fl^nk costa? faintly sigmoidal, and less oblique than in the two preceding instances. The abdominal tubercles either unite fasciculi of two flank costa?, or a tubercle of equal size interrupts the course of a single rib, but in either case all the costa? on crossing the venter are double. Here and there single costa? of equal strength to the former are interpolated between the fasciculi without relation to the latter, and are non-tuberculate; these encircle the whole limb. Another modification occurs by the anterior costa of one fasciculus, and the posterior of the fasciculus preceding being derived by bifurcation from one and the same parent rib along the mid-lateral or dorsolateral lines. This is the most varied decoration of any of the specimens referred to C. Jlindersi, and, as already stated, the specimen is only pi-ovisionally placed with that species (PL xxxvi., fig. 2; PI. xlii , fig. 2; PI. xliv., fig. 2). C . jlindersi, by the characters of its costfe and tubercles, much resembles the European C. seeleyi, N. it U."'; In the specific description reference is made to the low convex or almost truncate condition of the shaft venter. This feature is reproduced in even a more marked degree on the shaft venter of C. cordycepoides, mihi,"'7 and were it nut for the second line of tubercles, dorsolateral in position on the latter, and the difference in size, it would be difficult to separate C. cordycepoi<1>* from C. jlindersi. •"'■Neuiiiaviand Uhlig — Palaeontographia, xxvii., 1881, p. 1S5, pi. li., f. 1. :17Etheridge— S. Austr. Tail. Papers, 1905, No. 71, p. 14. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 157 Another very interesting point in connection with this species is the occurrence in the Port Darwin beds of shaft portions38 reproducing in every particular, in miniature, the features of the flat-ventered variety of C. flindersi just referred to. I am at present at a loss to account for these miniature forms at Point Charles, unless they represent a dwarfed race of species found in other portions of the Australian Cretaceous. Loc. — Whitewood Ridge, Sesbania, North-Central Queensland [G.S.Q.]. Cameron Downs, south of Hughenden, North Queens- land [G.S.Q.]. Flinders Piver, Carpentaria [Q.M.] Saltern Creek, north of Barealdine, Central Queensland [Q.M.J. Well- shot Run, near Barealdine, Central Queensland [Gr.S.Q. Mount Cornish, near Muttaburra, Central Queensland [Q.M.]. Barcoo, Ward and Nive Rivers District [A.M. (//. IV. Blomfield)]. Head of Flinders River, North Queensland [N.M.M. (Messrs. Cay-son and Sutherland; McCoy's type)]. Olive Downs, near Milparinka, North-west New South Wales [M.G.M.] Charlotte Waters, Central Australia [N.M.M. , G.S.S.A.]. Dalhousie Springs, north of Oodnadatta, Central Australia [G.S.S.A.j. Central Australia [G.S.]. Ckioceras lampros,38" sp. nov. (Plate xlviii.) Sp. Chars. — Shell ponderous, attaining a diameter of twenty- one inches at least, but only one and a quarter whorls are known. Venter generally truncate; abdominal lines indicated by a row of tubercles on each side the middle line of the venter; dorsum flat, costate, very broad at the distil end ; impressed zone obliterated; flanks flattened, broad; section generally quadrate, becoming distinctly octagonal on the fully tuberculated costse. Sculpture consisting of costaeof two kinds, primary and secondary; the former on the venter and flanks are large upstandirg crests at regular intervals apart, and tubercle-bearing, but on the dorsum are not to be distinguished from the secondary cost* occupying the intercostal spaces ; on the venter the costa? are straight (transverse), straight or very slightly curved on the Hanks, and on the dorsum convex forwards. Tubercles very large and strong, in three rows on each side, one abdominal, one infra- abdominal, and the third supra-umbilical (or supra-dorsal). Obs. — This form is known to me only as two almost completely exfoliated whorls of large size, and a few disjointed pieces. It 3«Etheridge— Ibid, 1907 (Suppl. No. 55, 1906), p. 16, pi. x., tigs. 6-0. 3 saAn/n7rpos, magnificent. 158 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. vies in size with the large Crioceras in the Australian Museum already referred to, but the entire absence of any trace of tuber- culation on the latter renders a further comparison impossible. It is the only instance amongst our large Crioceri of a shell bearing three rows uf tubercles in advanced age ; certainly C. jackii possesses the same number, but this occurs at the coin- mencement of its career only. The tubercles are borne upon what may be termed the primary costse, which at the distal end of the coil are two and a half inches apart from crest to crest. On the dorsum, where some trace of the test remains, they decrease very greatly in size, and are there similar to the ordinary or secondary costse. The section of the whorls when taken on the primary costse is octagonal, viz., three angular lateral lines on each side or flank, with the truncate venter and flat dorsum, but if the section is taken on the secondary costai in the valleys it is simply quadrangular ; the infra-abdominal line of tubercles is the largest. C. lampros must have attained a very large size ; the diameter of the one whorl alone is twenty-one inches. This is the only one amongst our Crioceri that conforms to Hyatt's definition of his Family Ancyloceratid*, after the type of A. matheronianum, D'Orb. A similar arrangement of the tubercles occurs in C. thiollierei, Astieiy';;' and also in the smaller form 0. tabarelli, Astier.40 Another exotic Crioceras much resembling this species in the form of the costse and again in the presence of three rows of pro- minent tubercles is C. munieri, Sar. & Schon.,41 of the French Neocomian. In the Point Charles deposit, Port Darwin, occur fragments of whorls with three rows of tubercles. In this and C. lampros the tubercles are confined to the larger or primary costae, and the venters are more or less flattened or depressed. In one case the tuberculate costse are single,4"1 in the other they are double across the venter, between the latter and the flank nodes, and again between the latter and those along the dorsal edge, the nodes ■' 'Astier— Ann. Sci. Phys. Nat. Soc. Nat. Agiic. Lyon, (2), iii., p. 448, pi. xix., f. 7. 1 Astier — Loc. cil., p. 449, pi. xxi., f. 9. 1 ]Sarasin and Sch.mdelmayer — Mem. Soc. Pal. Suisse,xxix., 1902,pl.xiv., f. 1. •±'»Etheriuge— S. Austr. Pari. Papers, 1907 (Suppl. to No. 55), 1906, p. 16, pi. x., figs. 4 and 5. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 159 acting as centres of union.4 lb What the relation of these frag- mentary and comparatively diminutive north-western forms may be to the larger species of Eastern Australia it is at present impossible to say. Locs. — Cambridge Downs, near Richmond, .North-Central Queensland [Q.M.]. (l)Maranoa River, South-East Queensland [G.S.— sketch]. The fine specimen (PL xlviii. ) from the Queensland Geological Survey Collection is without a locality. Crioceras cordycepoides, Eih.fil. Ancyloeeras cordycepoides, Eth. fil., S. Austr. Pari. Papers, 1905, No. 71, p. 14, pi. i., figs. 3-5; pi. ii., fig. -4. Sp. Char. — Shell small, coil and shaft in one plane ; proximal end of one whorl, little more than crooked, terminating in an obtuse apex; shaft slightly bent ; venter truncate, flat ; dorsum rounded ; flanks slightly rounded ; section longitudinally oval, or obscurely quadrate. Costse strong, oblique on the flanks, straight or advancing ventrally and retreating dorsally, gathered into fasciculi of three or four costae by a line of nodes along the dorso- lateral lines, and another along the abdominal lines, the median rib of each fasciculus stronger than the others ; on the truncate venter usually straight, a few arched forward, corresponding in number to those of the flanks, and the median rib stronger than the others. Tubercules of the abdominal lines large and node- like, or produced as short acute spines. Obs. — The resemblance of the shaft of this species to certain conditions of the corresponding part to C.flindersi has already been referred to. Relying on Pictet and Loriol's illustration of C. {Ancyloeeras) tabarelli, Astier,42 I instituted a comparison between the latter and G. cordycepoides, but now I am in possession of Astier's Memoir, " Catalogue Descriptif des Ancyloeeras," I find the resemblance to Astier's species4 3 is not so close. There is this manifest difference — C. tabarelli possesses three lines of tubercles on each side the middle line of the venter, whilst C. cordycepoides, 4lbEtheridge — Loc. tit., p. 1G, pi. ix., figs 2 and 3. 1 - Pictet and Loriol — Descrip. Foss. Terr. Neoc. Voirons, Pt. 2, 1858, p. 27, pi. v., figs. 1-7. *3Astier— Ann. Sci. Phys. Nat. Soc. Nat. Agrie. Lyon, (2), iii., 1851, pi. xxi., f. 9. 160 KKCORDS OF THB AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. as already stated, has but two. C. tabarelU was selected by Hyatt as the type of his genus Acrioceras.* 4 C. cordi/cepoides and the next species, C. laqueus, are the only forms falling into Hyatt's Family Crioceratidse, as defined by him.45 Loc. — Oaka-towya or Dalhousie Springs, north of Oodnadatta, Central Australia. Criockras laqueus, Eth.fd. (Plate xlix., figs. 7-9.) Ancyloceras or Hamiles, sp , Eth. til., Trans. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales, xvii., 1883, p. 89, 2d pi., lower 1. h. fig. Hamites (?) laqueus, Eth. fil., Geol. Pal. Q'land, etc., 1892, p. 496, pi. xlii., figs. 14 and 15. Crioceras, sp., Eth. fil., Geol. Pal. Q'land, etc., 1892, p. 502, pi. xxxiii., figs. 4 (1 5 and 6). Anisoceras (?) sp., Eth. fil., S. Austr. Pari. Papers, 1905, No. 71, p. 14, pi. i., f. 2; pi. ii., figs. 1-3. Sp. Chars. — Shell small. AVhorls apparently not more than two; shaft long, curved; crozier comparatively large, unsym- metrical, loop- or link-shaped, returning directly towards the shaft, but not quite in the same plane, almost touching the latter ; initial apex vermiform, blunt ; lumen large. Venter of the whorls and shaft narrow but convex, comparatively broad on the crozier; dorsum of the shaft appears to be costate, but in the bend of the crozier flat and smooth ; flanks gently convex. Costa? strong and sharp, transverse on the venter, oblique or slightly sigmoidal on the tianks, absent (?) on the dorsum of the crozier, some single, but usually fasciculate in bundles of two or three, the component ribs of each fasciculus united by a series of very prominent tubercles, supra-dorsal in position, again passing over the dorsum of the shaft single, double, or treble ; along the abdominal lines on each side the middle line of the venter is a row of smaller tubercles or nodes, one to each costa. Obs. — A comparison of all the specimens represented by the above synonomy has convinced me they are one and the same species, and that the name Anitoceras applied to one of them must be dropped. 1 1 Hyatt— Zittel's Text-Book Pal., Eastman's Edition, i., HKlO, p. 58S. 1 Hyatt — Loc. <■>/ , p, 58S. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 161 In the specimens figured in the " Transactions of the Royal Society of New South Wales," and again refigured in the "Geology and Palaeontology of Queensland," there is an indication of an oval margin or lip, in that the terminal costa? are much more prominent, and on the centre of the venter are backwardly curved, forming a kind of shallow "hyponomic" sinus. The tuberculation of this form is very marked. There is a line of prominent, almost spine-like tubercles, supra-dorsal in position, which unite the costa?, or most of them, into bundles of two or three, but instead of then passing over the dorsum as single ribs, as is usually the case, the costa? again split up into a like number as before. Along each side the median line of the venter there is a further row of small pimple-like nodes, one to each costa. There is another specimen that may be only a variety of C. laqueus (or possibly a distinct species) in which the venter is much broader, the costa? far more numerous and finer, but with the same marked supra-dorsal tubercles as in C. laqueus proper, although the rows of pimple-like nodes along the abdominal angles are absent. Again, at one end of the specimen there certainly seems to be a definite margin representing the lip of the living chamber with a shallow sinus, but in this instance the marginal costa? are not elevated above the others. This form is represented in the Point Charles beds of the Northern Territory of South Australia by two indifferently pre- served specimens. For the present I regard these fossils merely as a variety of C. laqueus. In the "Geology and Palaeontology of Queensland," etc., another specimen was figured,1'1 apparently a portion of a shaft, and evident]}' related to C. laque.us in that some of the costa? are gathered in fasciculi by tubercles more nearly lateral than supra- dorsal, but as in the above species again dividing to pass over the dorsum. The identity of this specimen must for the present remain in doubt. Loc. — Aiamac Well (at 184ft.), Aramac, Thomson River, Central Queensland [G.S.Q.]. Fifteen miles south-west of Hugh- enden, North-Central Queensland [G.S.Q.]. Tower Hill, Lands- borough Creek, a head tributary of the Thomson River, North Queensland [Q.M.]. Barcoo, Ward and Nive Rivers District, South Queensland [A.M. (H. W. Bl omfield)\ Dalhousie Springs, north of Oodnadatta, Central Australia [G.S.S.A. and A.M.]. (?)Point Charles Lighthouse, Port Darwin [A.M. (Messrs. Christy and Godfrey)]. •^'Etherklge— Geol. Pal. Q'land., &c, 1892, PL xxxiii., figs. 5, G. 1G2 RECORDS OK THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Crioceras taylori, Eth.ftl. (Plate xlix.j figs. 3-G.) Ancyloceras Taylori, Eth. til., Geol. Pal. Q'land, etc., 1892, 'p. 498, pi. xlii., £. 13. (?) Ancyloceras, sp. ind., Eth. fil., Bull. Geol. Survey, Q'land, No. 13, 1901, p. 33, pi. ii., £. 5. Sp. Chars. — Shell below medium size. Whorls apparently not more than three, close coiled ; shaft moderately stout, slightly curved, but total length unknown ; crozier loop- or link-shaped, UDsymmetrically curved, returning directly towards the limb, but not quite in the same plane, almost touching the latter; venter of both whorls, shaft and crozier broad and rounded; dorsum of the whorls and shaft rounded, of the crozier flat; flanks of the whorls rounded, but of the shaft and crozier flattened ; section of the shaft gradually becoming longitudinally oval, and on the crozier transverse or broad-oval. Costa? obtuse, on the whorls simple transverse and touching one another ; on the shaft similar but separated by well marked valleys, those of the venter inclined forwards, on the dorsum backwards, and on the flanks slightly sigmoidal ; on the crozier transverse or slightly sigmoidal, well separated, and often bifurcate, the bifurcation taking place low down on the flanks around the dorsal or umbilical edges. Tubercles absent. 06,s-. — One of the most striking features of C. taylori is the general simplicity of its thick costaj. There is no trace of tubercles at any stage of growth. G. taylori is undoubtedly allied to C. laqueus in size, form, and presence of the loop-like crozier, the remarkable fact being that the outer limb of the crozier is not quite in the same plane as the curve of the shaft proper, and whilst returning towards the latter does not appear to abut against it. The costa; are round and cord-like, very regular, without fasciculation, and no trace of bifurcation until the curve of the crozier is reached In their simplicity they greatly resemble both those of the genus Macroscaphites, and Ancyloceras simplex, D'Orb., chosen by Hyatt as the type of his Dirrymeceras.A ' I have provisionally incorporated in the synonomy the reference to an ''■Ancyloceras" I described from the collection of Mr. (',. Sweet, Melbourne, obtained at Hughenden ; it certainly possesses features in common with C. taylori. ' Hyatt— Zittel's Text-Book Pal., Eastman's Edition, i., 1900, p. 586. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 1 G3 Portions of small Crioceri(l)iif with simple, non-tuberculate costae occur plentifully in the Port Charles and Shoal Bay beds of the Northern Territory, but the costae are relatively coarser for the size of the specimens than those of C. taylori. Locs. — Aramac Well, Aramac, Thomson River, Central Queens- land [G.S.Q.]. Head of Walsh River, a tributary of the Mitchell River, Cape York, Queensland [Q.M.] Barcoo, Ward and Nive Rivers District [A.M. (//. W. Blomfield)\. (?)Central Australia [as.]. Criockras (?), sp. (Plate xxxv., fig. 2; PI. xlii., fig. 1; PI. xlvi., fig. 2; PI. xlvii. fig. 5.) Sp. Chars. — Shaft and crozier large, the extension of the former into the latter forming a broad curve, uncompressed. Shaft straight; venter narrow ; ahdominal lines defined by tubercles ; dorsum broad and almost fiat ; impressed zone obliterated ; flanks biangular, but on the whole rounded ; section around the primary costae unsymmetrically hexagonal, around the valleys broad-oval, or almost round. Costae primary and secondary, the former single, strong, and often separated by shallow valleys of varying width, but usually wide; primary costae of the shaft and crozier venters straight and trenchant between the two rows of tubercles marking the abdominal lines ; on the shaft dorsum inclined slightly forwards ; on shaft flanks oblique or faintly sigmoidal, and biangular, the angles separated by a line <>f dorso- lateral tubercles on each flank; costae in the crozier bend straight; secondary costae straight and flat, filling the valleys ; test with delicate encircling lines. Tubercles arranged in two rows on each side the median line of the venter on the primary costae on])-, two rows abdominal and two rows dorso-lateral, all conical, acute and prominent. Obs. — I have here united three specimens, believing them to be the same, although differing in a few minor details ; the coiled portions are at present unknown to me. The first of the three specimens is a large shaft with very pro- minent, outstanding, and irregularly distant primary costae ; it is on the dorsum of this example that the secondary costae and test are visible. It is a remarkable specimen, and in some of its aspects resembles the coil C. lamproa, such as the angularity of the primary costae, here hexagonal instead of octagonal as in the species named ; the straight or horizontal nature of the trenchant primary costae on the venter is another point of resemblance. 48Etheridge— Mem. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., ii., 1, 1902, p. 46, pi. v i i . . figs. 12, 13; S. Austr. Pari. Papeis, 1907 (Suppl. to No. 55, 1906), p. 16, pi. ix.r figs. 11-15. 164 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. The arrangement of the tubercles in three rows on each side the median line of the venter, and but two here, would in the ordinary course separate the two portions, but in many Crioceri the number of rows varies on different portions of the shells. There is, on this account, the bare possibility of the shaft now under description being that of C. lampros. Of the three speci- mens this also exhibits the truncate outline of the venter in a more marked degree than in the other two, although it is quite apparent there also. Again, the hexagonal section around the primary costa?, the simplicity of the latter, and their markedly straight course and trenchant nature of the venter, with the additional line of tubercles on each side, will serve to distinguish this limb and crozier from those of G Jlindersi, McCoy. The second is a crozier and part of a shaft on which the primary cost* are more regularly spaced apart. Tn the third specimen, provisionally united with the first and second, the proximal end of the limb is preserved (PI. xlvi., fig.2); this does not lead to a coil, but is returned on itself in the form of a hook after the manner of D'Orbigny's Hamites. The con- tiguity of the two portions is so close there could by no possible means have been room for a coil ; the deduction is therefore reasonable that we are here dealing with a specimen possessing geuerally the appearance of such a shell as Hamites eleoans, D'Orb., nor does there appear to have been space for a second return of the limb as in //. attenuatus, J. Sby., the type of Hyatt's genus TomeutocerasA !l On the whole, this form does not appear to be a Crioceras pure and simple, nor can it be included in the Hamitid* of Hyatt's classification, one of the characters of the latter being "no tubercles at any stage." Locs. — Tambo, Barcoo River, Central Queensland (Plate xlii., fig. 1) [A.M. (Mrs. Alice Hamilton)]. Barcoo, Ward and Nive Rivers District (PI. xlvi, fig. 2; PI. xlvii., fig. 5) [A.M. (//. W. Blomjietd)]. (?)Central Australia [G.S.]. Genus Leptoceras, Uhlig, 1883. (Denksch. K. Akad. Wissensch. Wien., xlvi., 2, 1S83, p. 260.) Obs. — Mr. V. Uhlig established Leptoceras as a subgenus of Crioceras for dwarfed forms with an open coil and the first or first and a half whorls noncostate, and the sutural divisions with tew ramitications ; he cited as examples of his subgenus C. /mzo- sianum, D'Orb., and G.cristatum, D'Orb. The costai are straight and slightly inclined towards the front. Uhlig remarks that the '• Hyatt -Zittel's Text-Book Pal., Eastman's Edition, i., 1900, p. 586. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS— ETHERIDGE. 165 difference between these dwarfed and little sculptured shells with comparatively simple sutures and the gigantic highly ornamented forms with abundantly ramified sutures is so marked that the bestowal of a subgeneric appellation seems perfectly just. Messrs. Sarasin and Schondelmayer, 5 ° on the contrary, consider Uhlig's Leptoceras to be based on fragments of much larger shells possessing a regular spiral, and terminal portions straight or curved. We have in our Cretaceous one form that in all probability conforms to Uhlig's definition. Leptoceras (?) edkinsi, Eth.jH. Crioceras edkinsi, Eth. fil., G-eol. Pal. Q'land, etc., 1892, p. 502, pi xxx., figs. 8, 9. Sp. Chars. — Shell small, not exceeding three-quarters of an inch in diameter, open-coiled. Whorls not more than one and a half; shaft straight; venter narrow, convex; abdominal angles rounded, defined by small nodes ; dorsum flattened and very feebly costate; impressed zone none; tlanks very gently rounded, almost flat; section longitudinally oval. Costa- simple, obtusely angular, equidistant ribs, neither fasciculate, bifurcate, nor inter- polate, but occasionally one becoming larger than the others ; on the venter bent forwards, and steep-faced in that direction ; on the dorsum faint but apparently bent forwards also; on the flanks oblique or here and there sigmoidal. Tubercles small, one row- on each side the middle line of the venter, either on each costa or with intervening barren costse. Obs.— In 1892 I wrote as follows of this little shell : — " As the examples are numerous, and constant in their characters, they can only be regarded as adult individuals, and as such are certainly new to the Cretaceous rocks of Queensland ;" this still holds good. It is a small and pretty species, and needs com- parison only with some of the small forms from the Point Charles beds of Port Darwin. Small more or less curved fragments31 occur in the Point Charles beds with narrow rounded venters, and simple and equal costa?, with one row of nodes along each abdominal angle and on each alternate rib ; there is a community of appearance between these and L. edkinsi. Loc. — Wells (at 230 ft.) seven miles east of Mount Cornish Homestead, near Muttaburra, Central Queensland [G.S.Q.l. 508arasin and Schondelmayer — Mem. Soc. Pal. Suisse, xxix., 1902, p. 97. 5iEtheridge— Mem. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., ii., 1, 1902, p. 46, pi. vii., figs. 14, 15; S. Austr. Pari. Papers, 1907 (Suppl. to No. 55), 1906, p. 16. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY. Bulletin No. 12. On Certain Initiation Ceremonies. By Walter E. Roth, Magistrate of the Pomeroon District, British Guiana; late Chief Protector of Aborigines, Queens- land ; Corresponding Member of the Anthropological Societies, Berlin and Florence, the Anthropological Institute, London, etc. (Plates L-lyL; Figs. 9-11.) Contents. Sect. 1. The why and wherefore of the Ceremonies p. 166 2. Do the Initiation Dances bear relationship to certain Totemic Performances? ... p. 168 3. Initiation on the Mclvor River p. 169 4. ,, ,, Bloomrield River p. 176 5. ,, ,, Tully River p. 177 6. ,, at Princess Charlotte Bay ... ... ... p. 178 7. ,, in the Rockhampton District ... ... ... p. 183 1. I have been present at initiation ceremonies on the East Coast (Princess Charlotte Bay, Mclvor River, etc.), and several1 in the North-Western Districts; I cannot say that I have been initiated into the latter, for the very good reason that I was not prepared to submit myself to the necessary sexual mutilation, an ordeal to which I am not aware that any European, however keen on Anthropological Science, has hitherto allowed himself to be subjected. Though various customs, e.g., marriage, scarring, nose-piercing, certain food restrictions, a new name, social rank, etc., may here and there depend upon initiation, very little of a definite nature appears to be known of the why and wherefore of the ceremonies at all, beyond the fact that the prevailing European idea of their having a benifieently moral and educational value is erroneous. At Cape Bedford, some of the old men told the Rev. Schwa rz- and myself that initiation is a matter of custom, and still pre- '1'ei descriptions see Ethnol. Studios, etc., 1897 — Sect-. •_".>!» to 315. '2A gentleman who has lived upwards of 20 yeais among these people. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 167 served for custom's sake. Others told us, and I am more and more convinced that this is an essential of the raison d'etre of all these initiation ceremonies, that they were hungry, and had to prevent the younger men and boys from eating those food-stuffs of which they (the old ones) were in want. The old men do their best to carry out this idea by showing the younger generation the influence they wield in executing certain performances, by giving an air of uncanniness and mystery to the proceedings in carrying them out in secret, and by making them believe that any violation of the orders given concerning the eating of certain things will be punished by the infliction of various diseases and deformities. The food-stuffs which are here forbidden include the wokai (Dioscorea sativa var. rotunda), gangga (Vitis acetosa), barwan (a fruit), watan and banu (both of them roots), fresh- water eels, a particular variety of turtle, a certain kind of honey, etc. The novitiate must attend two whole ceremonies before being allowed to partake of any of these until finally one of the old men rubs each of these articles successively on his (the novice's) chest. Should he. however, eat of the forbidden fruit withiu the prescribed period, his face will become disfigured, his nose rot away, etc. — one such example being shown me in proof. Beyond being commanded what not to eat, the novice here receives no instructions whatever concerning his sexual or social relationships,3 no moral or ethical precepts are inculcated, nor is any form of education (in the ways of hunting, weapon-making, etc.) imparted ; indeed, from what I learnt and saw, I should judge that his education, such as it is, is greatly misguided and retarded by attendance at the ceremony. When during the dance connected with the Body-louse (PI. liv., fig. 1), the actors hunted in the central performer's head and on his genitalia, and ate or pretended to eat the vermin, I naturally concluded that it was a lesson in cleanliness. When, in the poisonous "Stone-fish" dance (PI lii., fig. 2) a performer accidentally trod, or pretended to tread, on the dorsal fin and yelled out with the pain, the first thought that struck me was that this was a warning to the novices to take extra precautions in the hunting of this particular animal. But I was wrong in both these and similar conclusions, for after every form of enquiry, direct and indirect, I was able to satisfy myself that throughout all these series of performances, not one has any ethical or educational significance — there is not indeed the slightest inten- tion of pointing a moral to adorn a tale. So also on the Bloom- 3He may, however, receive such instructions on the Bloomfield River, 13 16S RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. field River4 no moral principles are inculcated during the initiation performances ; if anything, the novice is let into a few of the swindles, etc., and the reasons for practising them to his own advantage and self-preservation — at any rate, a marked change comes over the lad about this time, and whereas pre- viously he could be taught and given explanations of certain of the natural phenomena that might be brought under his notice, it is almost futile to attempt doing so subsequently. On the Tully River, apparently the one and only particular object of the performance is the infliction of the belly-scars, without which no man can marry. At Princess Charlotte Bay, throughout all the many weeks that the performances continue, the novice learns nothing special in the way of bush-craft, weapon-making, or any thing else of use to him in the future ; all this he picks up as best he can, as opportunity offers. In all cases, however, the novice has two or three virtues inculcated into him, viz., obedience to and respect for his elders, and self-control : with what profit, however, remains to be seen. It is noteworthy that many of the dances relative to animals and plants which are performed specially at the initiation cere- monies may be re-enacted here and there on occasions of ordinary rejoicing as the common corrobboree, e.g., the Crocodile Dance of the Pennefather River.5 2. It is quite possible that subsequent enquiry may show that the various dances representing the antics of the different animals or the growth of certain plants, which as will be seen are through- out Northern Queensland more or less intimately connected with the initiation ceremonies, bear relationship to the Totemic per- formances described by Messrs. Gillen and Spencer in Central Australia. By Totemism I understand a certain connection between an animal or plant, or group of animals or plants, and an individual or group of individuals respectively, and judged by this standard, the only Totemism discoverable throughout North Queensland is that met with in the animals, etc., forbidden to the different exogamous groups, and to a far less degree to women and children generally, and to the novices temporarily at the initiation ceremonies.6 But such Totemism as this is explicable, as I have already shown,7 on the more rational grounds of food- supply, to regulate the proper distribution of the total quantity 4 According to Mr. R. Hislop, who has spent most of his life there. "Roth— Bull. 4 — Sect. 26 (d), pis. xxxiii., xxxiv. aRoth — Bull, xi., part 1. Tabu and other forms of Restriction. 'Roth— Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1897— Sect. 71. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 169 of food available. Thus the husband, according to his particular exogamous group, lives on articles of diet different from those of his wife or wives, who of course belong to another group; both of which again are different from those permissible to their resulting offspring who belong to a third group. Hence, to put it shortly, whereas in a European community with a common dietary, the more children there are to feed the less will become the share for the parents, in the North Queensland system the appearance of children will make no appreciable difference in minimising the quantity of food available for those who <,'ive tliem birth. Any scarcity in the total quantity of all the food is met by a change of camping ground, any scarcity of particular diet, or any diet difficult to obtain and capture, being rendered tabu at the expense of the women, younger people, and children. It is noteworthy also that while the four exogamous groups are practically identical throughout North Queensland, the different animals, etc., associated with each group vary in the different districts with local requirements. Holding these views, I therefore speak of these initiation dances as possibly bearing relationship to Central Australian totemic performances, but what the particular relationship is, there is not at present sufficient evidence to say. Should, however, a connection be ultimately found, the very pertinent question will then arise as to whether the North Queensland initiation dances represent a primitive condition which has become developed into the advanced and intricate ceremonials recorded from the centre of Australia, or whether it is an example of degeneration. The true solution must be sought for in arduous field-work, and not in academic study. 3. It was towards the end of June, 1899, that I witnessed an initiation ceremony amongst the Koko-yimidir speaking Blacks at a spot on the southern bank of the Mclvor River about four miles from its mouth. The presence of a European interpreter with a twenty years' knowledge of the language enabled me to understand the meaning and explanation of everything I saw and wanted to know. This particular ceremony took between four and five weeks to get through ; both Cape Bedford, Endea- vour, Mclvor, and Starcke River Blacks were taking part in it. The food-supply for so large a number of natives, some one hundred and fifty, not being procurable in the immediate locality, a few days' spell was necessitated every now and again to allow of the participants hunting further afield. The ceremony itself is known as ngan-tcha ; this word has the same meaning as ta-bul ( = " tabu "), the words being interchange- 170 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN' MUSEUM. able in all cases except when expressing this rite, for which the former term is exclusively used. Considering that at so com- paratively short a distance removed as Princess Charlotte Bay there are five or six different and progressive initiation ceremo- nies, it is interesting to learn that here but one ceremony is known and practised. It is not necessarily held every year, two or three intervening perhaps, and the location is shifted on each occasion. The exact time of year would appear to be immaterial, though usually it is held after the wet season, messengers being sent to neighbouring tribes telling them to assemble ; it is also held independently of any particular phase of the moon. The age at which the novices are chosen to attend the ceremony has nothing whatever to do with puberty ; anyone from an old man with children to quite a young lad. The extreme ages of those I myself observed must have been from twenty-two or twent}r-three down to eight or nine. They wear no accoutre- ments, neither are they painted (until the last days' proceedings), nor is any new name applied to any of them individually, nor is silence enforced throughout the whole ceremony. After the performance the late novice is known as a ngumbal. The performers paint themselves all over with red, with white streaks over and below the eyes, meeting on either side of the face in a single line running down either side of the neck, and hence either diverging along each shoulder and armor continuing down over the chest to join below the navel, or else converging into a single median band. On the head is worn the merrimbal, the cockatoo top-knot feather head-dress, or when this is not obtainable a small bunch or even a single feather may be stuck into the hair. There is no special performer who is leader, chorus-master, etc, all arrangements being made by the old men collect i vely. The initial proceedings may be described as follows : — In the morning the novices are seized by the hair of the head and led away from the main camp by the men to a spot selected at some considerable distance away, and left there in charge of a keeper who accompanies them throughout the proceedings. This keeper has no special name applied to him, his duties being to see that his wards eat only of the prescribed foods (a list of those tabu has already been given), see only what is allowed to be seen, and keep within the boundaries limited to them. The men next return to the main camp, where they hold their first performance, that of the Native Companion, which alone the women are per- mitted to see ; the dance of this particular bird invariably con- stitutes the first of the performances. Subsequently the women NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 171 are told, not shown, the boundary of the initiation-ground, this being marked by certain stakes stuck into the earth ; should any female even see these boundary-marks, she will get ague,8 and should she trespass beyond it, will be certain to die. A more or less circular space is next made (Fig. 9) in the presence of the novices, at any time during daylight, and hence- forth all subsequent proceedings take place herein. This space, about fifty feet in its longest diameter, is cleared of stumps, leaves, etc, and the sandy soil levelled as carefully as possible. Near the centre the sand is ..-'"'" """•--. scooped out and thrown up on i, \ either side in the form of a horse-shoe magnet, the arms of such "magnet" pointing to the north ; I learnt that this / ' ... is invariably the position fl A assumed, with regard to the ■ ; compass, by this central por- ■ I | | | I tion. On the eastern side is | \ i I the low bush-fence wherein Viwi/^ tne fires burn at night, and the novices with their guar- dian sleep. The circular space is known astheb6-ral, a word signifying anything level, the central rut as the piri( = river) Fig. 9. and its banks as the woln-gur The main proceedings commence after the sun is well up and continue until the rising sun is at about an angle of 4 5= with the horizon, when there is an interval until the afternoon when the sun is in a corresponding position, the performance ceasing with the dark. In the daily interval the majority of the performers go hunting, the movements of the novices with their guardian being confined within a limited area. At night, when various dances take place in the circle, the novices lie in the bush-fence with eyes closed or covered so as not to see what is going on ; these dances relate to various night animals and night birds. The essential portion of the ceremony, that indeed which the novices are permitted to watch and have explained to them, takes place during the day-time, and consists of different dances repre- senting various members of the fauna and flora. Some three or 8My attack ot ague-fever here was in all good faith ascribed by these folks to this cause. 172 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. four performers would particularly play the part, all the others circling around in Indian file and playing chorus ; it is the busi- ness of the latter to shout in unison, to keep time with the stamping of the feet and the clapping of the hands laterally. The shouting is nearly all " au ! au ! au ! " hardly any words being actually spoken, the whole performance being what we should almost call ''dumb show." Among the performances so gone through are the dances relative to the native companion (invariably the initial one as already mentioned), owl, pheasant, body-louse (PI. liv., fig. 1), black palm (PI. lv.), frog, a certain fresh-water fish, mosquito, crab, honey, kangaroo, dog running after a lizard, fresh-water mussel (PI. lvi.), stone-fish, alligator, eel, and flying-fox (with the blacks all hanging by their legs from the branches of the trees around), these three coming on just before the snake-dance, which closes the whole rite. As can be imagined, only some two or three of these dances can be performed daily, the more enjoyable ones bearing repetition longer than others. Thus, beyond the change of repertoire, the ceremony proceeds from day to day with but slight, if any, variations. The scene opens daily as follows :— Say the time for the after- noon show has arrived, some of the pprfouners may be resting in the low bush-fence, or elsewhere, outside the boral, when the guardian will bring up his wards from the spot where they have been camped and lead them into the central rut where they squat down one behind the other. The performers next take up their position around the boral (as in PI. liv., fig. 2, where the low bush- fence can be recognised in the intervals of legs) and circle round the rut same three or four times in Indian file, shouting, stamping, and clapping as they go. When this is over, some of the other performers rush into the cleared area from the northern aspect, each stopping suddenly in front of the novices and pretending to let fly a spear at them, but the latter sit motionless. Leaving their spears in the bush-fence, these late arrivals join the other performers, one of whom drags each novice in turn by the hair of the bead out of the rut, which he is not allowed to touch, and leads him to the edge of the circle. The following are some notes concerning the dances already referred to : — (a) Body-louse(Pl.liv.,fig 1). Here are represented threecentral figures with some of the others dancing and skipping around. Of tin; three central ones, the performer on the left is just in the act of putting into his mouth the vermin caught, while he on the right is looking for more, the centre one having his head pulled NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY— ROTH. 173 about most unmercifully and in all directions during the search. But this is not all, for the last-mentioned individual is next laid on his back, and the search continued in the groin, fork, and on the testicles. As each insect is caught, an extra " au ! au ! " is given. When no more are discoverable, all three stamp the ground with their knees, raising the elbows and arms as each jump is made, the chorus circling and shouting all the time. (b) The Black-palm(Pl.lv.). In this show, while things are being got ready, the novices, standing on the edge of the boral, are made to turn their backs to it. At the same time certain of the old men cover their eyes and ears to make the mystery doubly sure. In the meantime a large black-palm leaf is brought in from the neighbouring scrub and stuck upright in the centre of the circular area. The novices are now turned round and allowed to see it, when it is shaken about and subsequently torn to pieces, the central figures stamping with their knees, and the chorus shouting and dancing around as before. The novices — one of the little fellows can be distinguished in the plate — are told by the old men that they made the plant grow there where the)- saw it, and they believe them. (c) The Milkandar (a bird). The central performers on their knees, with arms raised, imitate the sound of the bird towards which they are spasmodically jumping up in order to try and catch it; chorus as before. (d) The Wo-dil (a bird associated with water-lilies) is repre- sented by the central individuals picking up small handfuls of sand and tossing it here and there —the idea of the little tit skipping from flower to flower. (e) The Mosquito. Tn this, which requires some little time for preparation, the performers hide in the surrounding scrub. Some three or four with leafy branches in their hands conic rushing out into the ring, jump about in all directions and brush away the imaginary mosquitoes from off their bodies, heads, thighs and legs. They are soon joined by the singers, and again a repetition of chorus, stamping and clapping. (f) The Crab. The novices, as in the Black-palm ceremony, have their backs turned, some Grevillea nuts being, in the mean- time, brought from their hiding-place behind a neighbouring tree, and hidden in the circular area. The novices on turning round see one of the performers on a neighbouring branch beckoning to two others in the far distance to come up as the tire is ready, and only waiting for the crabs to be roasted. These two then advance, and amid great excitement will And crab {i.e., Grevillea 174: RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM- nut) after crab, the chorus yelling extra strong as each is discovered. ((/) The Dornorn (poison "stone-fish,"0 well known to the Cooktown Europeans) is very dangerous in that a stab from its dorsal fin can produce a very ugh' poisonous wound. While the backs of the novices are turned, a beeswax model of such a fish (PI. Hi., fig. 2) is placed, but left visible, in the ring. On being allowed to gaze upon the bond again, they see the chorus circling round and round the three central performers, who, with down- pointed spears, are trying to find it, and pretending to miss it each time. Indeed, so well is the mimicking carried on that finally one of the central figures treads upon the model and, seemingly poisoned, utters an unearthly yell, in which of course the dancing chorus join, and falls to the ground in agony. (A) The Fresh-water Mussel(Pl.lvi.). Here again the credulity of the novices is imposed upon, for while they are made to turn their backs and have their eyes closed, several live shells are planted within the central rut or piri. When allowed to see, there is one performer sitting on the bend of the horse-shoe with his legs inside, and holding an empty palm-scale trough in his hands. On either side of him, and sitting on the edge of the rut, is another performer, each taking his turn at diving into the sup- posed water. After many contortions, standing on his head even, and legs outstretched, amid the cries of the chorus, lie conies up to the imaginary surface with a shell, and, accompanied with much yelling and rejoicing, hands it to the other "diver," who places it in the trough. The photo, from which the illustration is prepared has just caught the one man putting the shell in the trough, and the other cocking up his leg to make ready for another dive. The realism may be carried still further by the divers pretending to get their fingers nipped, or else sitting on the banks of the rut and shivering with the cold after having been in the water so long. Thus da)r after day, morning and afternoon, the performances follow each other in rapid succession, the final proceedings being constituted as follows : — When the last dance is over, the central horse-shoe is obliterated, and the whole surface rendered level by all the performers, with spears down, gradually converging from the, circumference and stamping aa they gel to the centre. A "murla" is then placed in the ground where the bend of the horse-shoe originally was; the word murla means honey, and is applied to the object intended to represent a honey-comb, the "Synnncydium horridum, Linn. (Ed.). NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 175 hollow log indicating the hollow trunk or limb of the tree, while the two beeswax funnels are supposed to be the lipped openings whereby the bees enter. It is placed in the ground as shown in the diagram (Fig. 10), and renders the area tabu;10 all have to Fig. 10. tread upon it as they pass over it. The novices are next entirely covered with red paint (but wearing no cockatoo top-knot head- dress) and taken down in procession to the main camp; here each one, while held by an old man at the side, is beaten on the calves with wet hushes by his youngest group-mother, and then goes into hiding. They ultimately return, join in the dancing with the men and women, and sleep in the main camp that night. Next day the novices are covered with bushes and led to another and smaller cleared circular space (unconnected by any allej'-way with the original one) where they are hidden under ;i heap of bushes, and where the wrestling contests take place in the presence of the women. So as to prevent any quarrelling, brothers as a rule are made to wrestle with each other, though the participants may have to be separated by relatives inter- vening with raised hands. Here the novices stay all night, and during the course of the next few mornings get painted with white streaks, one above and below the eyes, joining at the outer angles, continued down each side of the neck, and so over the trunk on to the front of each thigh. They are then told to lie down and go to sleep, which they pretend to do by lying perfectly still on their backs with eyes closed. Each one is next suddenly " awakened " by a sharp pinch on the arm and told that he has been snake-bitten, at which he commences to be frightened, and then starts crying. His old mentor then proceeds to kill the imaginary snake by means of a small variety of bull-roarer which he whirls through the air in various directions, such action being believed to prevent the bite having a fatal effect. This bull- roarer is now given to the novice, who then has the power not only to kill snakes but even people by its agency ; it is called dunggul, a term also meaning a snake. Two or three days later the snake dance is ended by the novices being shown a 10 I had already met with these murla on initiation grounds on the Stareke River and on the Bloomfield River ; the specimen from the latter locality is, however, solid. 176 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. huge representation of a carpet snake fixed on a tree, and the ceremony is completed. No personal ornaments are worn significatory of having under- gone the rite, this being only known by the man's word or by public report. Women go through no ceremonial. i. On the Bloomfield River, when a sufficient number of friendlies can lie got together in one locality, ami this will depend upon a suitable season and adequate food-supply, all the boys who are to undergo the rite are taken to a spot well removed from the women and the actual camp, to where a " lean-to " of branches is set up. About ten or fifteen yards distant from this shed is the initiation ring, an oval space about twelve yards by six, formed in some sandy spot, the sand scooped out, and thrown up to form a raised edge just wide enough for one individual lo walk along on. At the lean-to each boy is covered from head to foot with Grevil lea-bark charcoal by his father or mother's brother, the ashes being applied with the hands, which are spat upon. The proceedings will commence at any time during the day or evening. The boys are now taken to the cleared space within sight or sound of which no woman or other uninitiated males dare to be present. Here the elders go through a whole series of dances or performances relative to various birds and animals, and as each is executed the father or mother's brother explains to his ward the meaning and details of it ; at the commencement of each separate dance, except that of the wild-cat, during the whole course of which their faces are turned aside in the direction of "home," they are directed to look homewards while things are being got ready. These dances are done in relays and extend over a space of sometimes four days, without sleep and but little food, and that only of a certain kind, with the. result that the poor novices are pretty well half-starved and knocked-up for want of sleep. The novices are also painted differently at the close of the ceremony, with red ochre, to what they were at the opening. As soon as the elders have decided that they have had enough of it, the men in charge of the boys will collect some leafy boughs under cover of which, just like a mm ing forest, they all march hack towards the original camp. Before reaching it, however, they stop at another cleared more or less circular space with its accompanying lean-to shed, and stand up in two rows, i he novices forming the front one. The mothers (blood- or group-) of the initiated youths are now allowed to approach, each woman coming close up with a leafy bough which she switches lightly across the thighs of her own particular boy, who thereupon enters the lean-to, where he has a short rest. Having so rested a while, NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 177 the snake dance is performed in this smaller cleared space, this being followed by the wrestling matches. At last they all return to the original encampment, where the novices now occupy the bachelors' quarters. .Some time subsequently, depending upon the season, etc., the young fellow commences to eat certain of the foods that have previously been forbidden him, the first that he is allowed to partake of being the wo-kai yam (Dioscorea, sp.), the last, many months later, being the scrub-hen's eggs. None of these food-stuffs, however, is he allowed to speak of by their right name ; to specialise — lie must generalise them all as bandil- maja. Furthermore, during all this period that he is being allowed to gradually partake of more and more of the various foods which had hitherto been forbidden him, all women and any uninitiated males are strictly to avoid, touch, etc., anything that he has eaten from or drunk of. At length he gets his nose pierced by an individual known as the pi-wal (who is sometimes a woman), one being appointed to each novice, whose duty it is to acquaint him with the relationship, etc., that he now bears to other members of the tribe ; from this time onwards tin- young man never speaks by name either to or of his pi-wal unless by chance there happens to be some blood-fend springing up between them. It is only subsequently to the initiation that the young men are taught the use of the bull-roarers. Females go through none of these initiation rites ; men need not necessarily have gone through it, even before marriage or even before children have been born to them. 5. On the Lower Tully River their is no name attached to the ceremony which is carried nut for boys alone, and apparently with one particular object only — the infliction of the belly— ears. No women, and no young boys who have not already been initiated, are allowed to be pr< sent. Several youths may be initiated at the same time, from one up to five or six. They are informed of it a week or so beforehand, as also are a few of the gins who are told-off to prepare large quantities of a particular food-stuff, the " bara " nut. The boys are about seventeen or eighteen years of age, when the moustache is developed, when they are considered read}7 for the rite. The ceremony lasts from four to five days, but does not take place at any particular time of the year; it is usually gone through in the neighbourhood of a river-bank, but not necessarily always in the same spot. No special dresses, ornaments, etc., for either the men or the young boys, and no special implement beyond flint-flake, are brought into requisition ; the novice's name is not changed, nor is any- thing special taught him All who have undergone the ceremony 178 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. have the same social rights in that, as soon as the scars are healed, they are " men," and can have wives. After having been crammed with the bara nut, their bellies distended, and the incisions made, the novices next get up and go inside a hut specially reserved for them, a very big grass one, and there they stay by themselves. The same food, which the women have prepared for them, is brought here by the men, with whom only, besides amongst them- selves, are they allowed to speak. They may walk about in the close neighbourhood, but must wear the bark blanket around them when the gins may see them thus covered, but from a dis- tance only. This goes on for two or three days, during which period certain of the elder men go hunting for eels. At the end of this time, the novices are taken to some isolated spot away from their camp, and while their attention is purposely diverted to something else, another old man will suddenly jump into view and frighten them. The latter generally appears from behind, holds the cooked eels in front of him, and then divides them amongst the lads, who eat them, rubbing the fat over their bellies. After the eating of these fish, the kokai-kokai (as the boy is called after he receives his chest-mark) becomes a ngu-tclia. He still remains within, or in the neighbourhood of, the special grass-hut for another day or two, during which period the elder men prepare the kumbi (Colocasia macrorrhiza) root and frighten him with it as was done in the case of the eels. Some four or five days after the commencement of the ceremony, the scars begin to heal, and the youth is called a mulari, when he may be seen by the others as well as by the women. A few weeks later the scars are quite healed and raised, and he is called a chalma, a "man," when he is allowed to many. During the whole ceremony, the novice only partakes of the eels and the Colocasia, everything else being forbidden him, but when it is over the restriction is removed and he can eat anything he chooses. 6. In the hinterland of Princess Charlotte Bay, amongst the Koko-warra and Koko-rarmul, where I watched the initiation proceedings during November, 1898, the first takes place during the latter months of the dry season, after the lad has arrived at early puberty. He is caught up from amongst his mates in camp and taken by force, notwithstanding his own screams and his mother's entreaties, to a cleared circular space, the name of which (KYVA. bo-ata, KRA. barta) gives the name to the first of the series of rites which take place here. This space is about twenty to twenty-four feet diameter with the edges all raised except that portion of it facing the north, where there is a sort NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY BOTH 179 of en trance- way ; there are no marked trees or distinctive .signs anywhere around. The novice, in company with others in the same predicament, is made to sit at a fire on the eastern side of the space, at some distance removed, and from here he watches the elder men taking part in the performance, though he is not per- mitted to witness them actually dressing themselves, their sole deco- rations consisting of the cockatoo feather head-dress and a streak of white paint on face and trunk (PI. lii., fig. I) with sometimes another or two put on the thighs of the leaders. Dancing com- mences at sunrise to continue until about breakfast-time, and starts again when the sun is getting low until sunset. It consists of a representation at each performance of the antics and move- ments peculiar to the following animals, and many others, ex/., native-companion, mopoke, eagle-hawk, sparrow-hawk, owl, frog, iguana, dead blackfellow, whistler-duck (all in this particular order), etc. That relative to the native-companion always comes first. It is said that a very long time ago this bird found a ground-chili, and not knowing what it then was, ate it, with the result that not oidy did his head and beak take on a scarlet colour, but that he got all hot and "all-same drunk"; and that it was during this predicament that he learnt his steps which he subsequently taught to all the other animals and birds in the order mentioned, each finally coming to have a special one of its own. These performances are repeated almost daily until the commence- ment of the wet season, when the dancing, instead of ceasing at sunset, continues all night until sunrise, the pre-prandial one being at the same time discontinued. All this time the novices do not approach anywhere near the general camp, or the women, but are tended night and day by one of the elder men who take on this duty turn and turn about. They are permitted certain foods only and forbidden others ; among the former are dugong, kangaroo, opossum, lily-roots and seed, Vitis trifolia root, and (big-bee) honey, while the latter include yams, (small-bee) hone}', eel, stingaree, turtle, big mullet or any other big fish, ted bream, and anything else red. They also learn and have to avoid the animals belonging to their own exogamous group. The names of all these forbidden things must not be mentioned by them, although they may be indicated by signs ; any transgression in this respect would be followed by disease. They also regularly practise the various dances the}' see performed, especially those peculiar to their own particular group, but they do this well away from the circular space, which they are strictly forbidden to enter ; they are also told all the places and things that are tabu. When at last the ceremony is over, with the commencing wet season, they return to the general camp, but dare not mention anything they have seen or heard to either their mothers, sisters, 180 RECORDS OF TIIK AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. or any females whatever. In the following season when the next bo ata ceremony takes place, the novice is allowed to enter the cleared space with his decorations, and join in the dancing along with the other performers. After he has thus twice, i.e., during two seasons, taken an active part in the actual dance within the precincts of the bo-ata ring he is led up before one of the very old men who rubs his (the novice's) chest and stomach with each of the different food-stuffs so long forbidden, which he successively places in the }Tounger man's hand, as a sign of their being now permitted him. Having completed this initiation, the novice is a barnbata, can speak by name of all these food-stuffs to his fellow-men, and is now allowed to many. The Koko-warra here have six initiation ceremonies through which an individual, if he is anxious to reach the top rung of the social ladder, has progressively to pass. Taking them in their proper order, they are the bo-ata, urr-dii, gaun-darang, an- den, alkir, and alkan-jinna. As an individual passes the first three, he is known successively as a barnbata, karkanta, and alpo-anna. The neighbouring Koko-rarmul Tribe have only four rites, the barta, an tar a, an-pi, and an-piil, an individual passing the first two being called first a barn-batang, and then an an tarn tang. I was witness to portion of the alkir or fifth Koko-warra initia- tion ceremony, which I was informed was a replica of what had been going on daily for some six or seven weeks previously. For Q a Fig. 11. this rite a special piece of ground known as the rau-rar (KWA.) was laid off; this consists of a broad path separated from a narrow one by a screen, an arrangement which in diagram would appear something like Fig. 11. The broader pathway, cleared of timber, leaves and rubbish, which thus constitute the slightly NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY ROTH. 181 raised e lges, is about twenty feet wide, and well over one hundred and fifty feet long, forming a fine sandy tract leading straight from the main camping-ground to the screen. The latter, or areria (KWA. term signifying any fence in general, e.g., a fish- trap one) is about five feet six inches high formed of switches tied at their upper ends on to a cross-piece which in turn is main- tained in position at either extremity by resting in the fork formed of two slanting uprights. This structure is shown in the centre of the PI. liii., fig. 1, taken at a spot about half-way down the broad track, a portion of which is distinguishable in front. On either side of it is an artificial bush-fence which, with the screen, thus together shut off from observation from the main- camp side anything which is taking place beyond. No one, except the actual participants and novices for the particular rite, are allowed to come, or even to look, behind the screen ; the whole of the initiation ground is of course tabu from the women. On the further side, the narrower pathway leads a sinuous course into a patch of dense scrub where in a secluded spot the dressing and decoration of the principal characters take place. The "orchestra" take up their places just behind the screen, the musical accompaniment of the song consisting of a length of hollow log, split in half, with the concavity turned downwards ; upon its convexity some five or six individuals were hammering away, and keeping good time, with their sticks, a splendid-toned reverberation being thus produced. Plate liii., tig. 4, shows these musicians in situ, four of them squatting on one side of the log and three on the other ; the sticks are in evidence. To the left of them are three figures standing upright, these are smeared from top to toe with charcoal-grease, which gives them quite a shiny appearance, and are known as the crows. It is they who help to dress and decorate the two principal individuals to be immediately described, and hence may be quite correctly described as "dressers." On the extreme right of the picture can be just recognised the horizontal cross-piece on to which the switches and light leafy saplings constituting the screen are tied. In the very centre is the fire, which is of course required considering that the ceremony only commences when the sun begins to set. The main figures actually distinctive of the ceremony are also shown in PL liii., fig. 3, representing the Amboiba,11 individuals who, ^Similarly masked and dressed figures (PI. 1., figs. 13-14) known as Amboipo, are met with in the initiation ceremonies further north, e.g., Margaret Bay, where the decorations of the performers are even more elaborate (PI. li. ). 182 RECOkDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. in days gone by, are believed to have driven the Blacks on their different peregrinations. They are covered with strips of tea-tree bark, each from two and a half to three feet in length, fixed into a top-string or rather rope so as to form what may be described as a huge "corner-fringe" (the upholsterer's term) quite nine or ten yards long. Starting at the waist, this fringe is wound round and round the individual from below up over his arms and covering him, except for the face, in his entirety. Over the face is worn a mask, formed of an oblong piece of tea-tree bark, on which is painted a red cross over a white back-ground ; two eye-holes are inserted in the horizontal limb of the cross. The mask is kept in position by means of three finely pointed small spears upon which, here and there, some blobs of feather- down are stuck ; these bits of down can be recognised as the white spots above the mask on the right hand figure. The spears themselves, the alkir, have some important signification, and give the name to this particular rite. At another stage of the pro- ceedings (PI. liii., fig. 2) the Amboiba assumes a kneeling position, his face uncovered and the mask fixed in between the spears over his head ; he thus remains immovable for some considerable time, while certain explanations and injunctions are given to the novice by a third party, for an Amboiba never speaks. While the latter's faces are uncovered, and only so long as this lasts, a hand is placed over the novice's eyes, so that he should see nothing of the change being made in the accoutrements by the crows. The special injunctions given to the novice are that for the whole of the coming season (i.e., practically a twelvemonth), the shortest time before which an opportunit}rcan prevent itself for his taking the sixth or final degree, he must not give either to his own, or any other, women, or his children, any (small-bee) honey, eels, large iguana, barramundi, or red bream. Should he happen to catch any of these animals, etc., on his travels, and not require them for himself, he must give them to the elder men only. On the other hand, supposing the women can obtain any of these things through their own personal exertions, which is almost impossible for them to do, they are allowed to eat them provided they do not happen to be tabu to them individually. When the change of dress had been made, and the novices taken away, the dressers unwound the tea-tree bark from the Amboiba, a signal that the main portion of the ceremony had come to a close. The sun had now set well below the horizon, the enveloping darkness was becoming very pronounced, and soon the further side of the screen was deserted, the participants and myself returning to the main camp. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY ROTH. 183 After the evening meal was over, the two Amboiba were again dressed up with their masks, etc., in the scrub on the further side of the screen, but on this occasion they advanced to the open end of the broad alley-way where the orchestra had already taken up their places. The women and children were thus allowed an opportunity of looking at them, and they joined in clapping hands to keep the time. A youngish looking lad was next seized, and his eyes covered ; he was firmly held in his captor's grip while the two Amboiba purposely and forcibly dug into him their elbows and shoulders from under their crinkled tresses. Instead of advancing now with the dancing, the two central figures retired a few paces towards the screen (with the masks all the time turned towards the main camp) and then rested ; the orchestra shifted their positions during the interval, at the same time that the boy was again knocked about. This kind of music and dancing, with alternate retiring and resting, continued all the way back to the screen, and when about half-way down the alley-way the women and children were sent about their business back to camp The boy must have been somewhat badly bruised, considering the time taken, at least three-quarters of an hour, to cover the length of alley-way, and the number of times, corres- ponding with the intervals, that he must have been knocked about. He was never allowed to see what was actually taking place, for when he was at last permitted to free his eyes, upon arrival at the screen, the Amboiba had disappeared behind it. 1 learnt subsequently that this particular lad was completing his noviceship in some ceremony earlier than the present alkir or fifth rite, and that it was only during the few final nights of the latter that this "bruising" business took place. It must be remembered that up in these districts several of the initiation rites may be going on all more or less at one and the same time. 7. In the Rockhampton District1 • when the old men consider that there are enough young men, of the age of puberty, to be operated upon, they call all the tribe together, stating publicly that they will have a big dance. Word is soon passed round, and certain men who have been previously agreed upon each catch such a young boy. These certain men belong to that particular exogamous group whence the novice will eventually take his wife, and so their relationship to the boys maybe spoken of as that of brothers-in-law or nu-pa. Each nu-pa tells his novice what to do during the whole time, something like three months, that he is being initiated. Having thus all been finally 12This is from notes given me by Mr. W. H. Flowers, late of Torilla and Fine Mountain, via Rockhampton, 1867-1891. 14 184 RKC0RDS OP THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. coll-cted, the young unmarried men take the novices into the bush, while the old men prepare the ground, i.e., make a clearing, leaving neither grass nor stick. In the evening, the women are told to lie down in the camp and keep themselves covered, so that they should see nothing. Fires are lighted round the clearing, and the novices then brought in from the bush, made to sit crossdegged in the middle, and told not to look up at whatever is being said or done, but just simply to beat the ground in front of them and look only at the spot they are beating. The other Blacks then wrestle, carry on various dances, and make noises suddenly here and there, and all round about, but the novices dare not look up. This goes on until midnight or perhaps later, when the other Blacks have a meal, but only a very little honey is given to the novices, and then only by the nupas. The other Blacks go on to their own camp and sleep, leaving the novices with their guardians within the ring of tires ; finally the nupas retire to outside the fiery circle, leaving only their wards within. Next morning the novices with their attendants leave camp before sunrise, and are allowed to hunt, but they may only eat of certain foods, and in addition are kept on very short rations. At sundown, the women and children are again sent to camp, and about dark the novices are brought to the clearing wherein they find some other blacks wrestling and dancing, and walking slowly round the circle of fires look only down on the ground directly in front of them, until such time as they are told to go inside. The nupas do not accompany them now within the cleared space, but advise and explain the various dances to them from the outside, the novices continuing to sit cross legged and to beat the ground just in front. This goes on daily and regularly for about a month, the novices having very little food or rest, and camping at night within the circle of fires on the bare ground without covering of any sort, though should heavy rain fall in the interval they are allowed, in company with their guardians, to go into the bush and erect a hut in which to camp. During the whole of this month, the women and children never see the novices, who are submitted to various ordeals, in one of which each is held up at full arm's length by his nupa and nupa's tribal brothers for some little period, during which procedure he is not supposed to move a muscle. In tin course of the following month the novices are tried still more. The other blacks will make jokes and laugh loudly quite close to them, but the novices must not even smile. At other times, they will shout out something like this — "I say ! Some heavy rain is coming! Where's your blanket V — but the novice must take no notice, and must not show by any sign that he has even heard. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 185 Again, a black will sidle up to a novice and drop a billet of wood, saying, " See the fine fish I caught. Won't we have a big feed to-night !" — a remark rather trying for a young man who for the past two months has been almost on starvation diet. Everything indeed that can be thought of is*done to get him to forget himself even for a moment, and make him look up, speak or laugh. When finally the old men consider the novices have been sufficiently tried, they tell the nupas so. That sime evening the novices paint themselves up as " men," with feathers in their hair, and cease to be novices any longer. Now for the first time since the ceremonies began are they seen by their mothers and sisters, and as by this time they have become very thin, not only do their relatives in particular, but the whole camp in general, make a great fuss and cry over them. Still even for three or four months later, the newly-made " men " may only eat honey, yams, and " old man opossum " flesh, but they must not gnaw the bones. After this lapse of time they may eat anything except emu-flesh, which must always be brought to the old men in camp, and never eaten by young men at all. NOTES on the NESTING-SITE of GEIIYGONE PERSON AT A, Gould. By Alfred J. North, C.M.B.O.U., C.F.A.O.U., Ornithologist. (Plate lvii.) Among the animal kingdom, birds, owing usually to their non- combative habits, and luck of powers of retaliation, appear to be highly endowed with instinct enabling them to resort to manv stratagems and devices to secure protection, either from an enemy when threatened hy dinger, or during the usually anxious period of the breeding season. Birds that deposit their eggs on the grassy sward, or nearly bare earth, would appear to stand more in need of a protector than ixny others, but strange as it may seem, the bare and exposed situation in which the eggs are laid, affords them the very best protection. Take, for instance, the eggs of the Southern Stone Plover (Burhi?ms grallarius) and the Spur-winged Plover (Lobivanellus lobatus), how closely izi colour do they resemble their surroundings; or the eggs of the Black-faced Dotterel (jEgialitis melanops), the surrounding pebbles on the margin, or in the dried up bed of a creek or river. The eggs too of the Pratincole {Stiltia i*abMa), so frequently deposited on a sun-baked plain, and as the wheel marks show sometimes right in the centre of the track, how hard they are to distinguish even in their apparently unprotected state. Again the eggs of the Red-capped Dotterel {JSyicditia rvficapiUa) deposited on sandy dunes and sea-beaches, with only a lew small pieces of gravel to keep them from rolling away, how closely do they assimilate to their surroundings, and how very difficult they are to discover by the untrained eye. The actions of the birds alone are frequently the only means of discovering them, by their feigning a broken wing or leg. This is where instinct is at fault, for to anyone but a novice it is the most fatal mistake the birds could make, and is a sure indication that either eggs or young are near at hand. Some birds, however, to me appear to be endowed with a certain amount of reasoning powers, for why will the Red-kneed Dotterel (Erythroyouys ductus) when NOTE ON THE NESTING-SITE OF GERYGONE PERSON AT A-NORTH. 1 87 laying her eggs near the margins of a swamp often slightly smear them with mud ; the Australian Dotterel (Peltohyas australis) when leaving her eggs cover them with a layer of thin sticks, two or three inches in length ; and the Black-backed Magpie (Gymnorhina tibicen) when leaving the nest cover her eggs with a layer of wool and rabbit fur I1 Many species, too, when a Cuckoo deposits an egg in their nest, if it contains no eggs of their own, covers up the Cuckoo's egg with a layer of lining material, sufficiently thick to prevent incubation. Of the many stratagems used by birds to secure immunity from harm, probably no more ingenious device is utilized than that of the JNlask'ed Bush Warbler (Gerygone personata), who nearly always builds its hooded dome-shaped nest close to a wasp's nest, of which fuller details may be found in "Nests and Eggs of .Australian Biids."'-' The White-throated Bush Warbler, too, or Native Canary (Gerygone albigidaris), a migratory species visiting South-eastern Australia during the spring and summer months, and at present common in the vicinity of Sydney, often builds its nest in trees affected with scale, and thickly infested with ants, while yet another species, the Large-billed Bush Warbler {Gerygone magnirostris), inhabiting Northern and North-eastern Australia, more frequently builds a long pendant nest on a vine or branch overhanging water, and closely resembling a mass of debris, left by the receding water after the creeks or rivers have been in flood. Hence the name of " Flood-bird " locally applied to this species in the neighbourhood of Cooktown and the Bloom- held River District, North-eastern Queensland. My colleague, Mr. Allan R. McCulloch, who was collecting in 1907 at Somerset, Cape York, and on some of the adjacent islets, returned with a number of birds in different stages of plumage, in some instances from the young in down to the adult, also some nests, and eggs and photographs of eggs, sea-birds and young, in situ, of which the latter will form figures for future Parts of the " Nest and Egg Catalogue" now being prepared for the press. Among the photographs is a very interesting one of a deserted nest of Gerygone personata built in close proximity to a wasp's nest, which is reproduced (Plate lvii.). Mr. McCulloch has also kindly supplied me with the following notes relating to the taking of it. 1 North.— Austr. Mus Sp .Cat., I. Nests and Eggs of Austr. Birds, i., 1900, p. 6. 2 North. — Austr. Mus. Sp. Cat., I. Nests and Eggs of Austr. Birds, i., 1903, p. 202. 188 RECORDS OP THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. "On the 10th October, 1907, Mr. Bertie Jardine and myself were walking through the dense scrub near Somerset, Cape York, on the lookout for birds' nests, I having my camera ready for use. In a particularly quiet and shady part, Mr. Jar.line pointed out. a nest of Gerygone personaix hanging on some low bushes about three fet from the ground, and placed only eight or nine feet off the track. As is usual with this bird it was hung close by a wasp's nest, and surrounded by a tangle of vines, some of them very prickly. Both the birds' and wasps' nests were deserted, though there were a few of the injects flying around, and we had little difficulty therefore in securing a photograph." Gerygone personata, in building its nest close to an occupied wasp's nest, may be regarded as living with comparative safety from human enemies, unless one chooses to disregard what we are tuight in our early school primers — " Do not irritate wasps.' EXPLANATION OF PLATK XXX. CrIOCERAS LEPTC7S, Eth. fit. Fig. 1. Lateral view of portion of a whorl with a broad, almost flat Hank, traversed by regular hardly sigmoidal nontuberculate costse. ,, 2. Ventral view of Fig. 1, displaying the narrow venter and compressed outline ; the costa? are practically straight on crossing the former. ,, 3. Dorsal view of Figs. 1 and 2, exhibiting the Hat costate dorsum destitute of groove, the costa' bent slightly forward, and the longi- tudinally obtusely triangular section. Compare this with the section of a typical C. jackii (Plate xxxii., tig. 1). (Figures slightly less than natural size.) KEC. AUSTR MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XXX. H. BARNES, Junr., pholo., Austr. Mils. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXI. Criockkas jackii, Elh. fil. Fig. 1. Lateral view of a fine partly testaceous specimen with obtuse rounded costa1 in the earlier stages, becoming more angular with growth ; tubercles are not visible. ,, 2. Dorso-ventral view of Fig. 1, displaying the overhanging whorls, convex venter, and broad oval section. (Figures slightly more than half natural size.) EEC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL VII. Plate XX XL H BARNES J. .in., pho:o . Austr. 'Mu^. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXII. Crioceras jackii, Eth. fil. Fig. 1. Ventral view of a cast wholly devoid of test. The swollen primary coshe with the intermediate secondary costa; are well shown, the former bearing two ventral and two infra-ventral lines of tubercles ; on the left hand side of the figures two of the supra-dorsal tubercles are also visible. This is the typical C. jackii. ,, 2. Similar view of a partly testiferous example, without tubercles. (See Plate xxxi., fig. 1; PI. xxxiv., fig. 1). ,, 3. Portion of a septal suture. Crioceras axonoides, Eth. fil. ,, 4. Portion of a septal suture. REC. AUSTR. MUS, VOL VII. Plate XXXII. ■ I 1 H, BARNES, Junr., photo , Austi . ,Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIII. Criockiuis JACKII, Eth. Jil. Fig. 1. Lateral view of the shell represented in Plate xxxii., fig. 1, an imperfect internal cast ; the secondary cost;o are, in this instance, almost always two between each pair of primaries. The weathered sutures are quite perceptible at the distal end. Criockras plectoides, Eth.fd. ,, 2 Portion of a septal suture. REC. AUSTE. MUS, VOL. VII Plate XXXTII. % n > ^1 . > ■ A -«>«*• w W^O i^n H. BARNES, Junr. phutc. Auitr. Mui. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIV. Criockras jackii, Eth.fl. Fig. 1. Lateral view of a partially testiferous example with characteristic obtuse and somewhat sigmoidal cost;r destitute of tubercles. Criockras leptus, Eth.fl. ,, 2. Portions of three septal sutures. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VI. Plate XXXIV. H. BARNES, Junr., photo., Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXV Criockras jackii, Ethfil, Fig. 1.— Lateral view of a partly testiferous example with overhanging whorls, and tubercles on the oldest whorl preserved. Three- quarters natural size. Criockras, sp. ,, 2. Ventral view of a large shaft or limb (seen in lateral view in Plate xlvii., fig. a) with a narrow venter, strong, distant, cristiform costa1; three angles of the hexagonal primary enstate si Hirii and two rows of acute tubercles on each side are visible, two abdominal and two dorso-lateral. (.See Plate xlii., ii<_'. 1 ; PI. xlvi.. fig. 2; PI. xlvii., fig. 5). (About one-half natural size.) REC. AUSril MUS., VOL. VII. J LATE XXXV. I H UARNES, Jmir , photo , Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXVI. Crioceras jackii, Eth.jU. Fig, |. Lateral view of a media in sized imperfect cast on which the older and smaller whorls are wanting, but at the proximal end so pre- served, three rows of tubercles are visible. Three quarters natural size. Crioceras flindersi, McCoy., sp. ('?). 2. Lateral view of a large nontesiiferous limb or shaft, showing a convex venter, sharp, slightly sigmoidal and sometimes bifurcate, Easciculate costse; between the two Hues of strong abdominal tubercles it will be seen the costse are double. (See Plate xlii., fig. 2 ; PI. xliv., fig. 2). Three-quarters natural size. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII Plate XXXVI. H. BARNES. Junr.. photo.. Austr. Mu>. KXI'LANATION OF PLATE XXXVII. ClilOCERAS JACKII, I'.lll.jil. Fig. 1. Lateral view of the earlier whorls, partly testiferous, displaying the semi-open coil and swollen tuberculate costae ; the costs in general are gently sigmoidal and at rare intervals bifurcate ; the secondary cost;e are also more numerous than usual, and, like the primary, increase in thickness towards the venter. The three rows of tubercles arc also well shown, the abdominal and supra-dorsal rows in this instance continuir.tr as far as one another. ,, 2. Similar view of another specimen, partly testiferous, and possibly somewhat older than that represented in Fig. 1, with rugged and large tubercles ; here there is usually the normal number of secondary costaj. REG. AUSTR. MUS, VOL. VII. Plate XXXVII. H. BARNES, Juni,. photo., Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXVIII. Crioceras, sp, Fig. 1. Lateral portion of a whorl with direct, or very faintly sigmoidal, sharp costae, each bearing a simple pimple-like node. ,, 2. Ventral view of Fig. 1 ; the costte are very slightly bent forwards. Crioceras jackii, Eth. fil. ,, 3. Lateral view of the older whorls with obtuse thick costse, but those tubercle-bearing more swollen than the others. Careful inspection of the innermost revolution will reveal the three rows of tubercles, the dorsal first dying out, then the lateral (supra-dorsal), and finally the abdominal row at about the twelfth costa before the distal fractured end. ,, 4. Lateral view of a shell rather larger than that represented in Fig.3, with very regular thick costa;, here and there slightly sigmoidal. No tubercles visible. ,, 5. Ventral view of Fig. 4. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XXXVIII. H. BARNES, junr., photo. Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXIX. ( KIOCKRAS FLINDERSI, McCoy, ■-/■. Fig. 1. Lateral view of part of a large whorl (McCoy's type) with a portion of the convex venter defined from the Hank by the longitudinally elongated tubercles ; the costae are curved. Three-quarters natural size. ,, 2. Lateral view of a natural cast, with sigmoidal costse, and similar tubercles to those si en in Fig. 1. ,, 3. Ventral view of Fig. 2. In nearly every instance the costse crossing the venter are double. REC. AUSTR. MUS, VOL. VJI Plate XXXIX. H. BARNES. Jiinr., ph..|n . Austt. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XL. Crioceras flindkrsi, McCoy, sp. . 1. Lateral view of a partly testiferous coil and a portion of the shaft or limb, with both simple, bifurcate and fasciculate sigmoidal COSt, 'i . ,, 2. Ventral view of the limb portion of Fig. 1. The costas crossing the venter are eithei single or double he t ween the in bricks marking the positions of the abdominal angli ,, .'>. Lateral view of portion of a natural whorl cast in which the fasci- culation of the cost® is excellentlj shown. ,, 4. Ventral view of Fig. 3. Here the costae crossing the venter are, some single and ethers treble between the tubercles, which have assumed a more ni outline than in other similai specimi as. ,, 5. Lateral view of a natural limb or shall cast with fasciculate and bifurcate curved costse and the characteristic longitudinally elongated tubercles. ,, G. Ventral view of Fig .">. The venter is narrower than usual, with three and even four costte crossing it between the two rows of tubercles. HEC. ATJSTR. MUS., VOL. VII Plate XL H. BARNES, junr, Austr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLI. Cbiocebas flindersi, McCoy, sp. Fig 1. Lateral view of tin- proximal portion of a large natural cast with rather sigmoidal costae in places slightly fasciculate, the component ribs of the fasciculi united by the usual longitudinally elongated tubercles. ,, 2. Lateral view of portion of a large whorl, partly testiferous, in which the characters referred t'> under Fig. 1 are more forcibly emphasised. ,, 3. Lateral view of portion of a shall or limb with the remains of the nacreous layer, provisionally referred to this species, in which the tubercles have become rounder and more node-like. REU. AUSTR. MDS., VOL. VII Plate XLI. H. BARNES. Junr., pliolc, Austr. iviu: . EXPLANATION OK PLATE XLII. Crioceras, sp. Fig. 1. Lateral view of a crozier and part of a limb or shaft possibly identical with the specimens represented in Plate xxxv., fig. '1, and PI. xlvi., fig. 2, and PI. xlvii., fig. 5. In this instance the tubercles are confined to the abdominal angles, and are noi developed on the flanks. Slightly more than half natural size. Crioceras flindersi, McCoy, sp. (?) ,, 2. Dorsal view of the limb or shaft cast represented in Plates xxxvi., ti^f. '2, and xliv., fig. '2, exhibiting a flat dorsum, and strong, single, slightly curved costse. Seven-eighths the natural size. REC. AUSTR, MUS, VOL. VII. Plate XLII. K. BARNES, junr., phcto; Ls Aii5tr. Mus FA' PL A NATION OF PLATF XLIII. Criockras flindebsi, McCoy, »}>. Lateral view of a natural cast of a crozier arch exhibiting the typical costa; and tubercles of the species. Slightly less than natural size. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XLIII. •^-- 1 H. BARNES, Junr., Dholo., Auslr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLIV. Crioceras axonoides, Eth.Jil. Pig. 1. Lateral view of a portion of a fine, partly testaceous, disk-like shell. The costae are all single, sharp, slightly sigmoidal, and moderately close ; at the proximal end large and prominent tubercles gather the costas into fasciculi, but from the point at which the latter cease the costas each bear a single tubercle along the abdominal angles. A similar fasciculation is seen in C. uavti- loides (Plate xlv., fig. 1), but the remainder of the costre are non- tuberculate, and the sections of the two forms are very different. Slightly more than half the natural size. Crioceras flindersi, McCoy, sj>. ,, 2. Ventral view of the limb or shaft portion seen in Plate xxxvi., fig. 2, and PI. xlii., lig. 1, with a broad, almost Hat venter, strong abdominal tubercles, and the costaj on crossing the venter occa- sionally single, but usually paired. Slightly more than half natural size. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XLIV. H. BARNES, Junr., photo., *3ustr. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLV. Cbioceras nautiloides, Eth.fd. Fig. 1. Lateral view of a natural cast with overhanging whorls, and very convex Hanks. On the inner half whorl the costae are fasciculate in bundles of two or three, and the uniting tubercles large and blunt ; the remainder of the costas are devoid of tubercles. Slightly less than half natural size. ,, 2. Ventro-dorsal view of Fig. 1, displaying the broad rounded venter, nontuberculate costse, overhanging whorls, and the very broad- oval section. Slightly less than half natural size. REC. AUSTR. MUS ., VOL. VII. Plate XLV. /"* i\U h. BARNFSi Junr., photo. Austi • Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLVI. Criockras plectoidks, Kth.fil. Fig. 1. Lateral view of a partially testiferous example, with a row of obtuse, node-like tubercles along the abdominal angle :it variable distances apart — from three to ten intermediate and nontuberculate costte (see Plate xlvii., figs. 1-4) ; sutures are visible. CraocERAs, sp. ,, 2. Lateral view of a partly testiferous shaft or limb, the proximal end not concealed, but simply hooked as in D'Orbigny's Hamites. The primary costa: only bear tubercles in two rows, one abdominal, the other lateral (see Plate xxxv., fig. 2; PI. xlii. , fig 1 ; PI. xlvii., fig. 5, which may be identical). Seven-ninths the natural size. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII Plate XLVI. M. BARNES. Junr., Pholo Ausir. Mus. EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLV1I. Crioceras plectoides, Eth. fil. Fig. 1. Lateral view of a neat and well preserved partially testiferous specimen illustrating the principal characters of the species. ,, 2. Ventral view of Fig. 1, exhibiting the wide and rounded venter. ,, .'}. Ventrodorsal view of Figs. 1 and 2, displaying the broad rounded venter, overhanging whorls, and nearly round section. ,, 4. Lateral view of portion of a natural cast whorl corresponding in size to the subject of Plate xlvi., fig. 1 ; an almost complete suture is here visible. Crioceras, sp. ,, 5. Lateral view of the specimen represented in Plate xxxv., fig. 2, exhibiting the dorso-lateral line of tubercles (see Plate xxxv., fig. 2; PI. xlii., fig. 1; and PI. xlvi., fig. 2). Seven-twelfths the natural size. 11EC. AUSTR. MITS., VOL. V1T. Plvte XLVII. H. BARNES. Junr., DhC!0., Aus.r. Mus. t EXPLANATION OF PLATE XLVIII. Crioceras lam pros, Eth.jil. Fig. I. Literal view of an imperfect but fine shell, partly testiferous, measuring two feet across the longest diameter. The strong cristi- i'orm, distant costiu with three tubercles on each are veiy notice- able : the bitter are abdominal, infra-abdominal (or lateral) and supra-dorsal in position. At the proximal end the test has been entirely removed, revealing the sutures. .. •_'. Ventral view of Fig. 1, exhibiting a broad, generally convex venter. EEC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XLVIII. H. BARNES. Junr.. pholo., Austr. Mus- EXPLA NATION OF PLATE XLIX. Crioceras ammonoides, Eth.fil. V"\£. I. Lateral view of a fairly well preserved specimen exhibiting slightly sigmoidal costaa, usually single, but at times united into bundles of two by pimple-like tubercles ; the latter may also occur on single COSt,T?. ,, 2. Ventral view of Fig. I, showing the narrow depressed-convex venter and abdominal tubercles. Crioceras taylori, Eth.fil. ,, 3. Lateral view of the proximal end of a nontestiferous specimen with regular obtuse costaa. ,, 4. Lateral view of the distal end of another similar specimen exhibit ing the curvature of the crozier, and nontuberculate nature of the species. ,, 5. Lateral view of another distal end with coarser costa?. ,, 6. Ventral view of Fig. 5. Crioceras laqueus, Eth.fil. ,. 7. Lateral view of portion of a partly testiferous crozier (?) displaying the sharp costse arranged in bundles of two or three, the fasciculi united by a row of prominent tubercles supra-dorsal in position. Slightly above natural size. ,, 8. A similar specimen to Fig. 7 with coarse costa; and larger and more acute tubercles. Slightly above natural size. ,, 9. A third and somewhat similar specimen with marked fasciculation of the costaa ; the supra-dorsal row of tubercles is very distinct, and at the upper end of the figure is a tubercle of the abdominal series. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate XLIX. H. BAUNtS, Junr., photo, Austr. Muj. EXPLANATION OF PLATE L. One of the masked figures, Amboipo, met with in the initiation ceremony at Margaret Bay. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VIT. Plate L. G. \V. C. PYM, photo. EXPLANATION OF PLATE LI. The masked figure Amboipo, in the Giant Kingfisher Dance at Margaret Bay. REC. AUSTR. MUS, VOL. VIT Plate LT. kwS* &»►. Its i i i i v Mi < '>lfwi$ -'Hi hdMH ' \ ' !-j «\ip 41 i^xilli! y G. W. C PYM, photo. EXPLANATION OK PLATK LI I. Fig. 1. Form of decoration of one of the performers at the bo-ata in the first series of initiation rites of the Koko yinridir Blacks in the hinterland of Princess Charlotte Bay. Fig. 2. Beeswax model of the dornorn or "poison stone-fish " (Syrian- cydium horridum, Linn.) used in the dance of that name amongst the Koko-yimidir Blacks at the Mclvor River. REC. AUSTR. MUS., \T0L. VII. Plate LIT. 1. Dr. W. E. ROTH, photo- 2. H. BARNES, Junr., photo , Austr. Mus- EXPLANATION OF PLATE LIII. Fig. 1. The screen separating the broad from the narrow paths of the rau-rar in the alkir or fifth initiation ceremony of the Kokowarra Blacks, at Princess Charlotte Bay. I •_'. The two Amboida, the two main performers of the alkar or fifth initiation ceremon 3 of the Kokowarra Blacks at Princess Charlotte Bay, kneeling with faces uncovered. Fig. 3. The same standing with the faces covered. Fig. 1. The "orchestra," behind the screen seen in fig. 1, with the three crows or " dressers" standing on the left hand. REC. AUSIR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate LTI[ • > EXPLANATION OF PLATE L1V. Fig. 1. Dance of the Body-louse of the Koko-yimidir Blacks at the Mclvor River. Fig. 2. Kurh day's opening scene of the Koko-yimidir initiation ceremonies with the performers standing around the bo-nal, or circular space of the initiation ground, and the initiates in the pin, or central rut. EEC. AUSTB. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate LI V Dr. W. E. ROTH, photo. EXPLANATION OF PLATE LV. Dance of the Black Palm of the Koko-yimidir Blacks at the Mclvor River. REC. AUSTR, MUS, VOL. VIE Plate LV Dr. \V. f. ROTH, Photo. EXPLANATION OF PLATE LVI. Dance of the Fresh-water Mussel of the Koko-yimidir Blacks at the Mclvor River. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. VII. Plate LVI. Dr. \\ t;. l"!OTH. ohoto. EXPLANATION OF PLATE LVII. Nest of Masked Bush-warbler (Gerygone pemonata, Gould) built in close proximity to a wasp's nest. REC. AUSTR. MUS., VOL. TIT. Plate LVJI. A. R. McCUl LOCH, photo Austr. Mus. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY. Bulletin No. 13. FIGHTING WEAPONS.1 By Walter E. Roth, Magistrate of the Poineroon District, British Guiana ; late Chief Protector of Aborigines, Queens- land ; Corresponding Member of the Anthropological Societies of Berlin and Florence, the Anthropological Insti- tute, London, etc. (Plates lviii.-lxi.; Fig. 12.) Contents. Sect. I. Spears:— 190 2. North -West and Lower Gulf Districts 190 3. Pennefather River Districts .. ... ... ... 11)1 4. Princess Charlotte Bay, Cape Bedford, Bloomtield River, and Palmer River ... ... ... ... 192 5. Lower Tully River District 194 6. Rockhampton District ... ... ... ... ... 195 7. Brisbane ,, .. 196 8. Spear-throwers ( VVommeras) : — ... ... ... ... 197 9. Pennefather River District ... ... ... ... 197 10. Palmer and Laura Rivers ... ... ... ... 19S 11. Cape Bedford, Endeavour and Bloomtield Rivers ... 199 12. Princess Charlotte Bay ... 200 13. Lower Tully River ... 200 14. North-West Districts -200 15. Boomerangs: — ... ... . . ... ... ... ... 201 10. Lower Tully River 201 17. Mackay District 202 is. Kockhampton District ... ... ... ... ... 202 19. Brisbane ,, .. 203 20. North-West and Lower Gulf Districts 203 21. Shields — Peninsula and North-West Districts : — ... 203 22. Tully River and Card well Districts 204 23. Bloomtield and Endeavour Rivers ... ... ... 205 24. Rockhampton District ... ... ... ... ... 20.3 25. Brisbane ,, .. 206 26. Throwing-stieks (Nulla Nullas)— North -West Districts; — 207 27. Tully River 207 2S. Rockhampton District ... ... .. ... 207 29. Brisbane ,, 209 30. Fighting-Poles 209 31. Two-handed Swords 209 32. Single-handed Swords 210 33. Manner of Fighting— Inter-tribal .. 210 34. ,, ,, Individual .. 211 1 Dr. Roth, when transmitting his MS., requested that the details of a few implements in his collection left undescribed, might be added ; thes are now incorporated and distinguished by being placed within brackets -(Ed.) e 190 RECORDS OF TIIK AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. 1. Spears : — As to how much labour is entailed in the manufac- ture of a spear depends largely upon the nature of the timber employed according as to whether this is a bamboo or a thin sapling, or whether the implement is cut out of a tree en bloc, as happens sometimes in the Boulia and Rockhampton Districts, or split out of the solid. The different methods adopted in getting it into shape, e.g., bending, straightening, etc., as well as the tools, etc., required for the purpose, have already been described 2 . I propose including certain mention of the spears used in hunting and fishing, which although not fighting weapons, find a more or less natural place here. 2. Most of the weapons used in the North-Western Districts have been fully detailed3, and hence require little additional description. Mr. E. Palmer, however, records three additional timbers used for spears in these areas :—PJt.r(igmites communis, Trim, stems used for reed-spears on the Mitchell River; Sesbauia a ijj/ptiaca, Fersoon, stems for the ends of reed-spears at Cloncurry; Thryplomene oligandra, F.v.M., for the points of reed-spears only, on the Mitchell and Gilbert Rivers. Spears that have since been met with are the stone-spears' of Burketown, Point Parker, and the ranges along the Queensland Northern Territory Border, and the multiple-prong lish-spears of the Wellesley Islands. The lancet flake of the former is fixed into the split extremity of the shaft after the manner of a wedge5, and then bound round with twine, and finally strengthened with cement. The prongs of the fish-spears, spliced and fixed only with twine on to the proximal portion, have their barbs one behind the other, cut out en bloc (Fig. 12). TThe spear selected for description has the shaft scarfed, and is tri-pronged. Both portions of the former consist of stick- saplings fined down. The following are the measurements : — ft. in. Length over all ... ... ... 11 2 of butt 4 0 shaft proper ... ... 5 2 prongs ... ... 2 0 The butt is cupped for the reception of a wommera peg at the proximal end, and bound with coarse native twine ; at the distal end it is scarfed to fit against a corresponding proximal scarf on 2 Roth— Bull. 7— Sects. 2, 3, 4. :'Roth— P^thnol. Studies, etc., 1897— Sects. 246-251. * Roth— Bull. 7— Plate vi. and Sect. 24. Fie- 12- ■' Roth— Bull. 7 -Sect. 31. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 191 tlie shaft piece, this union being also bound or lashed with similar twine (PI. Iviii., tigs. 1 and 2). The head or distnl end of the shaft is grooved on three faces to receive the basal ends of the prongs, the whole union for the length of eight inches being again bound round or whipped with native twine. The inserted portion of each prong is five inches, leaving a barbed length of nineteen inches; the blunt barbs are cut-out of the solid, one behind the other, and all facing inwards, but the dis- tance apart on the same prong is not uniform, varying from one to two inches.] 3. On the Pennefather River spears have the generic term of che-a applied to them, and are formed of a proximal (butt) portion morticed into a distal (shaft tip) one6, the latter being either simple or multiple. The extreme tip is called pe-udana. All these spears are thrown with a spear-thrower or wommera, though they can occasionally be used with the hand alone. The barb, except in the stingaree-tail spears, is of a kangaroo-bone pencil (nowadays oft replaced by thick iron wire) fixed into a longi- tudinal groove, cut with a tooth-scraper", into the spear tip beyond which it projects ; it is bound round and round with twine, the cording finally giving place to a plain looping (PI. Iviii., tig. 3), the whole of which is ultimately covered with cement substance. The colouring of these spears is fairly uniform ; starting from the proximal end is a short length of white, a corresponding one of red, and a longer one of black, the latter being "fixed" with a special medium, this latter is either the gum of a Melaleuca, or human blood obtained from the arm. The timber employed for the distal portion of all these spears, except (d), is the Acacia rothii, Bail. (NGG. lar.), that for the proximal varying, as will be seen in the following short descriptions of the different varieties : — (a) Short light spears, proximal longer (from two-and a-half times down) than the distal position, and no barbs. Used only for playing with, and all known by the general term of po-ini. Made of Hibiscus brachysivhonius, F.v.M. (NGG. yi-awara), Croton triacros, F.v.M. (NGG. bo-atha), Macaranga tauarius, F.v.M. (NGG. arm-buta), Desmodium umbellatum, DC. (NGG. owono), or Pluchea indica, Less. (NGG. onogona). (b) Heavier and longer spears, proximal longer than the distal portion, and armed with stingaree-barb fixed on to the tip — a fi Roth — Bull. 7 — Sect. 43, for method of mortising and for treatment of the butt end. 7 Roth— Bull. 7— Sect. 30. 192 RECORDS OF THK AUSTRALIAN ML'SKUM. few central ones surrounded by' others in form of a circlet. These spears, used for fighting, have all the general name of larna-pe (the Nggerikudi term for a stingaree-barb) applied to them. Made of "bamboo" (NGG. ro-amada), or Hibiscus tili- aceua, Linn. (NGG. kdrnbrana)8. (c) Heavier and longer spears, but the proximal portions much shorter (one-fifth or even less) than thecUstal. Used for hunting kangaroo, fish, etc. Made from timber' called ombo. which is bartered from the Einhly River, or fro.m Premna obtusifoliay R.Br. (NGG. mo-odo), or Eucalyptus tessMarix, F.v.M. (NGG. winnichanna). These spears pass by the general name of to-ono. (d) Weight and length similar to (c), but the proximal portion much lon»er (five times) than the distal, which is multiple (three or four pieces) and barbed, and used for hunting kangaroo, fish, etc. They have the generic name of d^-ro. Pioximal portions manufactured from Hibiscus tiliaceus, Ldnn., Thespesia j>>/>ulnm, Corr. (NGG. pe-aman^^uii), or Tristauia suaveolens, Sm. (NGG. ta-andruno), the distal from the Carappa molucceu.sis, Lam. (NGG. adaimbite). 4. The Princess Charlotte Bay, Cape Bedford, Bloouifield and Middle Palmer River spears may be dealt with collectively, with the Cape Bedford ones, about which very reliable inforniation is known, as the type. Local generic names for spears are KRA. K XT. K X E. KMT. kalka9, K W A. alkir. All the following Cape Bedford spears are made of a distal (shaft) morticed into proximal (butt) portion, the one extremity of the barb invariably foinxing the very tip of the completed spear. (a) Stingaree-barbed, single (PI. lviii., fig. 5) or multiple (PI. lviii , tig. G) with the barb or barbs pointing for- wards, long proximal end of bamboo or reed, and short distal oo is obtained from the Hann and Kennedy Rivers, and forms a staple barter, e.g., to the Koko-minni of the Middle Palmer River, etc. Here and there an odd spear or two are met with, not necessarily introduced from anywhere else, which appears to have a local name, yet without sufficient history to allow of its being con- sidered a typically local weapon. Such for instance, is the mon- gil mon-gil of Cape Bedford, a lonjj reed proximal, and a short hardwood distal, the latter armed with wooden barbs placed in pairs alternately on opposite sides. Other examples are the burongamo and o-w6rn of the Middle Palmer and Bloomfield Rivers respectively, and from their very nature require no detailed description. A timber, which so far, 1 have not had cause to mention, used for making spears on the Middle Palmer River, is the Acacia lysiphloea,T?.v M ( KAM I. urr-te). Another1 '- is Corypha australis, B.Br. (Cabbage-tree Palm), the wood of which is split and made into spearheads on the Endeavour and Normanby Rivers. 5. (in i he Lower Tully River are to be met the four following varieties of spear, the three and four pronged fish-spear being an introduction of but comparatively recent years.- — 1 on the authority "t Mr. I-'.. Palmer. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY ROTH 195 (a) The worurnera-spear is built of two pieces, the proximal longer than the distal ; the former is made of grass-tree (MAL. pi-ran) or Eupomatia laurina, R.Br. (MAL. mu-jir), the latter from a split Archontophcenix alexandra;, Wendl. (MAL. kopan- gara), Ptychosperma elegans, Blume. (MAL. warkai), or from a sapling of Mj/rtus exaltata, Bail. (MAL. yambi). Stingaree-barbs may beattached or not ; if present, the spear is called a warra- katcha, and its distal extremity covered with red and white rings, but if not present, this extremity is smeared with a uniform red. It is used for fighting purposes, and for spearing wallabies. (b) The chukaji is a hand-spear, formed of a single piece of local " hard-wood " (MAL. pindanyo), obtained only from Mount .Maekay, either cut out from, or a sapling itself of, the tree. Its proximal end is pointed, but of course not so sharp as the distal. From aoout five to eight to nine feet in length. It is this spear which is used by the four gins at the Prim ground1'1, and also employed by men for fighting. (c) The warkai, also thrown without a wommera, is so named from the black-palm (Ptychosperma elegavs, Blume.), out of which it is split, and is mostly used for spearing eels and other fish. (d) The wi-valli is another hand-spear also cut out of one piece, seven to eight feet long, heavy, clumsily made, and the only spear having a spatulate tip, the latter being covered with ngobi14 gum; the butt-end tapers somewhat. Made of local "hard-wood" (Myrtus exaltata, Bail.), or another timber known as yalma. 6. In the Rockhampton District, where I made my enquiries in 1897, the spears met with were of the simple (single-piece) acicular type, about seven to eight and a-half feet long, with the butt ending in a sharp abrupt point ; any marked shortening than this was due in all probability to the weapon having been broken, and subsequently sharpened up again. The weapon was always thrown with the hand, no spear-throwers being known here, as well as all up the coast-line certainly as far north as Townsville. Its manufacture consists in cutting it out in its entirety from a " wattle "-core, or from an outer strip of " brigalow " or " rose-wood." Sometimes, just previous to a fight, a barb or two, placed oppositely, might be fixed on with twine and cement-substance at some considerable distance from the tip (Pl.lviii., fig. 8 ). At Glenroy, on the Upper Fitzroy River, I saw a l3Roth— Bull. 4— Sec. 15. Melicope australasica, F.v.M. See Bull. 7 — Sect. 13. 196 RECORDS OK TI1K AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. couple of spears manufactured within the previous two years by local blacks (presumably Karun-burra) similar to the preceding, with a thickisb girdle taking the position of the barb (PI. lviii., tig. 10); but the Rockhampton (Tarumbul) Natives knew nothing of this substitution. Three spears in the possession of Mr. A. Cowie, of Rockhatnpton, were of interest, not onty in that he himself had obtained them from the blacks in the district under consideration some eighteen or twenty years previously, but that the barbs were cut out of the wood en bloc. I made careful enquiry from l be older natives concerning any information about these weapons, which were all about eight feet six inches long, and Learnt that they passed under the name of mMo, the term for a barb, peg, etc., but that they had not been made for many-a- long day, the necessary timber, owing to the white settlers, being then obtainable at no less a distance than nine or ten miles from the township. The first is a " rosewood " one obtained in Rock- hampton from Westwood aborigines. It has a flattened expanded head twenty inches long and three inches wide, sloping in a graceful curve to a slender point, each side being carved into four barbs (PI. lviii., fig. 11); from this enlargement, which has been raddled, the diameter of the shaft progressively diminishes to the butt where it abruptly tapers off. The second, from the same locality, with tip similarly flattened, has five barbs, but only on the one edge (PI. lviii., fig. 12) : the shaft is peculiar in that it progressively increases down to the butt. The third example, believed to have come originally from the Marlborough District is of the common acicular type, but bears a barb cut out of the wood itself, the tip of the weapon not being flattened (PI. lviii., fig. 13). 7. The Brisbane Blacks1*' had three kinds of spears, all of them simple, i.e., of one single piece, and thrown by hand only. (a) The pi-lar was made from Eucalyptus crebra, F.v.M. (local " iron-bark," the tandur of the local natives). They would pick out a young straight-grained tree, one that would split well, climb up to ten or eleven feet, cut a transverse notch above deep in, then two vertical ones reaching down from it, a transverse one below according to the length they wanted, and split it off. Then gradually trimmed it down to the size required. They then spoke-shaved it with a Mytilus (mainlanders) or Donax valve1 ,; (coastal ones), smoothed it down with a piece of broken shell, which was subsequently replaced by glass, straightening and ,5Notes from Mr. T. Petrie. Roth— Ball. 7— Sect. 28. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 197 bending, etc , as required, blacked it all over in the fire and finally hardened the point by the same means. This pi-lar was made from nine to ten feet long, and used for fighting at close quarters. Sometimes old ones were nicked very nearly through, about two inches from the tip, for some fellow they had a special "down" on, so that when stuck in, it would break off and remain behind. At other occasions one or two stingaree barbs might be stuck on with beeswax and twine for a similar purpose. (b) The kannai was made from a young sapling of a certain scrub-wood, chosen to about the size required, the bark must be scraped off, and then pointed. Used for fighting and hunting ; and just before a tight bundles of these would be collected from the scrubs. It was blacked all over in the fire, as in the case of the pi-lar, and hardened at the point, the last twelve inches or so of which was finally scraped quite white ; this was done to enable one to see it coming when thrown. Sometimes the tip might be left blunted, when three or four prongs, each from six to seven inches long, would be attached to it, the weapon being then used for purposes of fishing. (c) The rose-wood timber spears, not manufactured here, but bartered from the Ipswich Blacks, were also called pi-lar, and used similarly for fighting at close quarters. 8. Spear throwers (wommeras) were absent in the eastern coastal districts, extending from Townsville to Rockhampton, and were unknown in Brisbane (T. Petrie), but they w^eie present in the area around what is now Charters Towers. In their most primitive form of a hooked stick (PI. lviii.. fig, 1-1) the}' are met with in the Wellesley Islands and neighbouring mainland. 9. Wommeras on the Pennefather River are known bv the general name of arai-i1 ~ . Used both as a spear-guard and as aspear- thrower. The blade (PI. lviii., fig. 15) varies greatly in width, but with greater width there has, of course, tobeacorrespondingly larger peg ; greater width, however, is not considered an advantage. It is manufactured from five different timbers: — Erythrophlceum laboucherii, F.v.M. (NGG. nau-muta, " iron-wood "), Acacia rothii, Bail. (NGG. lar), Mimusops parvifolia, Linn. (NGG. ngo-ru), Eucalyptus terminalis, Sieb. (NGG. rar-ru), and Aglaia elmag- noidea, Benth. (NGG. andro-e). To prevent the timber from splitting after being cut from the tree it may be buried in the ground for two or three months before anything further is done 17 Further down the Gulf coast-line between the Mitchell and Staaten Bivers the Gunanni call them yur-nganya. 19S RECORDS OP THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. to it1*. The different parts of such a weapon are spoken of as follows: — the proximal (handle) portion to-o, the distal kwanna, the blade a-tar, the peg ko-kan, edge of the blade bii-ni, the shell- haft pi' -ra (after the name of the shell), and the extreme proximal end of the blade beyond the haft teriwan (= tail). For decora- tive purposes the blade may be covered with a mixture of resin and fat, producing a polished or varnished appearance19. The peg is a circular pencil of iron-wood, not flattened at all, pro- jecting somewhat below the lower edge of the blade. It is fixed into the vertical edge of the blade-head, which is split for the pur- pose (PI. lviii., fig. 10), by means of a shell, or with the teeth ; two holes are then drilled, through which twine, etc., is passed to tie the peg in position, slipping being prevented by means of a thick covering of Canarium austr alicum,!?. v. M., cement2®. The handle is covered with a similar cement, so as to prevent it from slipping through the hand. The cement at one or both extremities of the blade may be occasionally decorated with the dried (yellow) strips from the outer covering of the " Rock Lily " (Dendrobiv ni bigibbum, Lindl.) orchid. The shell-haft is formed of two oval-cut pieces of pera shell {Melo diadema, Lauik.)-1 attached with beeswax, while a few Abrus precatorins beans may help to ornament the edges in-between ; the angle at which the shell-haft is affixed varies a good deal, and appears to depend on individual caprice. 10. The Koko-minni Blacks of the Middle Palmer River, Laura River, Maytown, have "iron-wood" (Erythrophlceum laboucherii. P.v.M.) spear-throwers. The blade is long, compara- tively narrow (though wider at the centre), with gradually sloping proximal (handle) extremity22. The long peg, which has a deep transverse nick in it to catch into the extremity of the spear-butt, is formed from an Acacia and fixed on to the blade by tendon passing through two holes in it, this portion of the peg being accordingly flattened from side to side, into two holes correspondingly drilled into the blade (PL lviii., fig. 17) ; the ligature is covered with Grevillea cement, the back of the peg remaining free of it (PI. lviii., fig. 18). The haft, fixed at from anything of an acute to an obtuse angle, is either of Melo ,s Roth— Bull. 7 Sect. -1. 19 Roth — Bull. 7 Sect. 19. This blade may be sometimes stained. Roth— Bull. 7 Sect. 13. 2i "Melo Wommera." See Etheridge-Proc. Linn. Soe. N. S.Wales (-2), vi., 1891, p. 699; Luschan— in Bastian-Festschrift, L896, pl.x.,fig.5.— (Ed.) Both here and at Cooktown, and the Bloomiield River, Ficus leaves are employed for smoothing down the blades. Roth — Bull. 7 — Sect. 3. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 199 shell (KM I. tomg, or ye-cha) bartered from the Musgrave River, etc., or else of a lath of wood doubled upon itself. The spear- thrower is known here as borna. 11. At Cape Bedford, on the Endeavour and Bloomtield Rivers, and at Butcher's Hill, the iron-wood spear-thrower has a com- paratively long blade, even width throughout, and a short peg with a slight nick. The peg, which is cut from Petalostigma quadriloculare, F.v.M. (KYI. ckn. dun jo), is neither flattened nor drilled, but tied with tendon, etc., on to two holes drilled into the blade (PI. Iviii., fig. 19), the cement covering the back of the peg (PI. Iviii., fig. 20) ; a similar arrangement to what is met with on the Pennefather. The cement used is usually that of the iron-wood, but the Grevillea23 is preferable when obtainable, as it lasts better. The handle is either haftless (PI. Iviii., fig. '21) or else hafted with two pieces of Melo shell fixed on with bees- wax (PL Iviii. fig. 22), or else with a thin lath bent on itself (PI. Iviii., fig. 23). The Cape Bedford name of the implement is milbir. At Butcher's Hill 1 have seen wommeras made out of a yellow-coloured timber (KYE. nga-til), which I have not yet succeeded in getting identified. On the Bloomtield River, and along the small stretch of coast- line between it and Cape Grafton, is to be seen the bent or moon- shaped variety of spear-thrower (KYE. ballur), in addition to the straight kind. The ballur24 (PI. Iviii., fig. 24) is employed for spearing fish or birds with, especially anything at very close quar- ters. It is comparatively short, made of a light timber, is haftless, and generally decorated with red and white pigment at its distal extremity. It is thrown in a manner different from all other wommeras, in that the blade rests in the fork between the first finger and the thumb, instead of, as in the ordinary style, between the first and second fingers25. As an example of how two tribes, although almost contiguous, may be ignorant of each other's ways and customs, it is interesting to note that sometime during 1897 one of these moon-shaped spear-throwers was thrown up on the beach at Cape Bedford'- 6, and brought to the Rev. Schwarz, who, never having seen one before and being anxious to 23 Roth-Bull. 7— Sect. 13. 24 Illustrations of modifications of this wommera will be found in Etheridge— Froc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), viii., 1S94, pi. xiv., fig. 2 ; in Luschan — Bastiau-Festschrift, 1896, pi. x., fig. 2 — (Ed.) 55 Roth— Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1897 -Sect. 253. '2fi Cape Bedford is only about thirty miles as the crow flies from the Bloomtield River, where the moon-shaped spear-throwers are manu- factured. 200 KKOOKDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN Ml.'SEUM. know something about it, asked the local blacks what it was ; they could not give it a name, but they told him that the person who made it must have been mad ! 12. At Princess Charlotte Bay the wommera is made of iron- wood. The blade is longer than at Cape Bedford, etc., wide at the centre, narrower at the handle, with the shell-haft fixed at any angle, obtuse or acute. The long peg is flattened at its attachment ; if drilled it is only partly covered with cement, if tied on it is wholly covered. Local names : — KRA. bo-un, K IVA. alvau-ul. North-west of Princess Charlotte Bay, the koko-olkulo type of spear-thrower is comparatively short and wide, almost leaf-bladed with a long peg, this peg is made of "beef-wood," and tied on, not drilled, its back being covered with beef-wood (Grevillea) cement. With this kind of wommera a very short spear, about six feet long, is employed. 13. On the Lower Tally Iti'ver the spear-thrower, used with the bangkai spear, is called charin (= nasal septum) from its flatness. It is a long thin lath with two holes drilled at its extremity, and the peg (MAL. kom) tied on with small strips of "lawyer-cane" {Calamus, sp.). 14. In the North -Western Districts I have nothing to add to the descriptions of spear throwers already given-7, but must draw attention to a very primitive form of implement met with in the Wellesley Islands, and on the adjoining mainland in the neighbourhood of Burketown-8 (PI. lviii., fig. 14). [It is a straight stick in one piece, two feet five inches long, obtusely pointed at the proximal end, and round throughout the entire length until within about the last six inches, when the sides are flattened more and more, resulting in an " eel-tailed " distal end. The latter is higher than the shaft, the fore upper angle forming the "peg"; it is a very light implement.] Two other types, it is true, are occasionally to be found in the area around Burketown, but they are certainly not of local manufacture, being brought in from the eastward29. [The first of these is, again, a plain stick'1", gradually taper- ing a little from proximal to distal, two feet long and raddled. 27 Roth-Etlmol. Studies, etc., 1897— Sect. 253. Note the small projection on the edge of the blade at the distal extremity illustrated in fig. otift of the :-;une work. 28 Type in general figured l>y Luschan — Bastian-Fcstschrift, 1S96, pi. ix., fig. 9— (Ed.). 29 Westward and southward — (Ed.). ■'"'See Spencer and Gillen— Northern Tribes of C. Austr., 1904, p. 669, fig. 224. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 201 At the proximal end is placed a tassel of human hair " ringlets," each ringlet a two-ply twist (PI. lxi., fig. 1) ; it is prevented from slipping off by a washer of gum-cement around the stick (PI. lxi., fig. 2), hut hidden hy the tassel. The distal peg is of wood, held in position by string lashing, gum-cement covered. The second implement31 is narrow, rigid, and lath-like, about three quarters of an inch in thickness, plano-convex or slightly bi-convex, and two feet ten inches in length by one and three- quarters wide. The proximal end is cut out for the reception of the hand of the spearsman, but affording a very small grasp (PI. lxi., tig. 3). The wooden peg at the distal end is large and obtuse (PI. lxi., fig. -4), and held in position by a gum-cement coating, and doubtless lashed on beneath. The whole of both surfaces is highly raddled and decorated with broad pipeclay transverse hands at both ends, the whole intermediate surface being pipeclay cross-hatched.] 15. Boomerangs are either manufactured from the flange of a tree (a natural form) or else cut en bloc. North of the Palmer River, they may be said to be absent in the Peninsula. Employed for both fighting and hunting purposes. 16. The generic name for a boomerang on the Lower Tully River is wa-ngal. This can be either a eharal-jego (charal == to bounce on the ground), a fighting one, i.e., one which, on striking the ground, flies low; or a nyaral (= to buzz, hum), a toy one, i.e., one that flies high. The quality of either cannot be gauged except by experience1-. Fortunately or unfortunately, the natives have learnt that if, during a fight, a good fighting-one gets broken, they can utilize a toy one by throwing it wrong end- on on to the ground, when it will rise but little. With either kind, a left-handed one {i.e., one which, when thrown, will swerve to the left) is spoken of as chaku-i, and a right-handed one as yural-bara, similar terms as the particular attributes in a man. The boomerang is manufactured from the following timbers, only one of which have so far been identified : — the yarran (Rhodomyrtiis macrocarpa, Benth.), yandan, bokobai, charkala, puchera, yalma. In all cases, as well as around Cardwell, it is made from the flange on the butt of the tree, and hence is an example of a natural form. Furthermore, it is always got-out 31 "Biletta"— See Etheridge— Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), vii. . 1893, pi. xi.; Luschan — Bastian-Festschrift, 1896, pi. x., fig. 6; Spencer and Gdlen, loe. cit , p. 669, figs. '222-3— (Ed.). s2 Both— Bull. 4— Sect. 22. 202 RKCoRDS OF TUB AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. in the same manner, represented in PI. lix. , fig. 1, with a cut above and below, and one behind. This last cut is made about three inches from the free edge, the split travelling simultaneously up and down, and used to be done with a stone tomahawk ; even withoul this split a smart blow will remove the piece required. The timber so removed is then cut into shape by splitting, then chipped, then scraped with flint, then with shell, and finally rubbed over with the pumice stone which is obtained both in the Tullv River and at its mouth. The fighting boomerang is clumsier made and heavier than the toy one, and is always used for offensive purposes by making it strike the ground Hist. Originally it used to be ornamented with a uniform coating of red pigment. Its parts are only mimed as the mollo or handle, and its opposite extremity as the chinna or foot. 17. Around Mack ay, the natives will descrihe the local boomerang as having two knees, i.e., a more or less defined double bend, which results in giving the weapon a very typical appearance (PI. lix., fig. 2). 18. In the R'ockhainpton and surrounding coast-district, except its southern portions, e.g., Gladstone and .Miriam Vale, the boomerang (PI. lix., fag. 3; has a very marked bend or knee close to its proximal (handle) extremity, the upper convex surface showing a fine stone-chisel fluting; its extremities are tapering, while the width of the shaft gradually increases from the handle onwards, until it reaches its maximum of about two and half inches at a spot situated at about thi-ee-quarters of its length. Lumholtz figures88 one similar to this from Coomooboolaroo, Central Queensland. A straight line joining its two extremities measures about twenty-six and a half inches, this increasing slightly as one travels northwards from Rockhampton. It is made of brigalow, rosewood or wattle. At Marlborough (1.S97) a local aboriginal told me that in the olden times boomerangs used to be orna- mented on their convex surface with large diamonds ('graved) placed end on end, each diamond being subdivided by parallel lines into four smaller ones. On the Keppel Islands I could learn nothing about boomerangs, whereas at Miriam Vale the only two specimens obtainable were bidaterally symmetrical, i.e., with the knee at the middle, its widest portion, and were said to be return or toy boomerangs. 93 Lumholtz —Among Cannibals, 1890, p. 334, 2 figs. I do not think that Lumholt/.'s figure represents the same weapon as above, described l>y Dr. Roth. — (Ed.). NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — RUTH. 203 19. At Brisbane34 the boomerang, or braggan, was made from the spur of a tree as on the Tully River, cut above and below, and split off. Both the toy and fighting variety were thrown either on to the ground, or direct into the air. As compared with the toy, the fighting one had less of a bend, was heavier, more rounded on both sides, and thrown lower. It would, when thrown on the ground, proceed at first in a straight course and then gradually taper to the right or to the left, the thrower learning by previous experience when it would turn off, on which side, and where it would hit. When thrown on to the ground direct it would turn off at the spot struck. The natives would often practice on the trees with these weapons, each owner thus getting to know just exactly what his particular weapon could do. 20. The boomerang of the North- West Districts hasalready been described by me35. Around Normanton and the Gulf Coast, just to the North of it:J,;, the weapon becomes heavier and clumsier, the more or less acute angle at the wider knee (PI. lix., fig. 4) gradually giving place to an only slightly perceptible curve (PI. lix., fig. 5). Thus, on the eoast-line between the Mitchell and Staaten Rivers the Gunanni call both varieties by the same name of we-angala, but use the angular one for fighting at close quarters by throwing it on the ground, the curved one for knock- ing over wallaby, native companion, and bandicoot. 21. Throughout the Peninsula no indigenous shield is to be met, the place of the weapon being taken by the broad-bladed spear-thrower, which, in the hands of a skilful fighter, can brush to the right or the left, as the case may be, any spear that may be thrown at him. On the Gulf Coast-line, the northernmost limit of the shield would appear to be the Mitchell River, where the weapon is more or less identical with the Normanton and North- West District pattern, in that it is made from a split timber and subsequently trimmed down into shape. The North-West types I have already described '■'" . The Normanton District shields are usually decorated with red and white bands. [A typical example (PI. lx., figs. 17, 13) measures three feet three and a half inches in length by one foot in width It is a large and proportionate!}' very elongate oval shield, not unlike a drawn out "Goolmarry," and concavo-convex, convex externally, slightly concave on the inner surface, becoming flatter towards 3i Notes from Mr. T. Petrie. 33 Roth-Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1897— Sects. 239 to '244. 36 In areas where it is made from the flange of a tree. 37 Roth— Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1897— Sect. 254. •J04 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSKUM. the apices, which are obtusely rounded ; the lateral margins are parallel in the central region, and slightly converging at the ends. Both surfaces are raddled, the outer decorated with three pipeclay and four dark-red narrow transverse hands at the centre, with a pipeclay panel occupying the whole of each apex. The handle or holdfast, on the inside, is of the ordinary pattern, but rather larger than usual.] 22. On the Lower Tully River the shield or pi-kan is made from Ficus chretioides, F.v.M. (MAL. magura) and from another timber, not identified, but known to the local Mallanpara Blacks as keba. It is cut from the tree on similar lines as the boomerang. A curved incision is made in the flange both alove and below, and the spur next chipped about half-way through on either side along the lines required (PL lix., fig. G), and the piece then hammered or pushed out Such shields are therefore not exactly oval, their shape on one edge depending upon the greater or less concavity of the flange. After this piece has l>een removed it is chipped away on both surfaces, except at the centres, which remain ; in section, this stage of its manufacture would be represented in PI. lix., fig. 7. To the cen- tral boss on the front of the shield nothing more is done for the present, though it may subsequently he shaved down a little ; into the projection at its future back, however, two longitudinal holes are chipped, these being united below by hot cinders, together constitute a handle at the end of the process. The weapon is then lightened by means already detailed38, then rubbed down with pumice stone, etc., and finally painted. In the designs of the patterns so depicted (Pi. lix., figs. 8-10) theie is no meaning or interpretation, and on this subject very careful enquiries have been made, both by myself and on my behalf throughout the district ; there may be some three or lour typical styles, but, as a rule, one man copies another's, the copy being either a travesty or an improvement, according to the light in which it is regarded. The front of the shield is called kananja, a word signifying "the inside" in reference to its outside (outer bark) having been removed in course of manufacture. The central projection is the namnia, the back of the shield the chu-cha (=person's back, dorsum), while dumbul (a term signifying the female genitalia) is applied to the handle portion39. This manufacture of a shield from the 3g Roth— Bull. 7— Suet. 2. There is a verj fine series of these shields in the Australian Museum. Se< Etheridge— Journ. Anthrop. Inst., \x\i., 1S96, p. 1-37, pi. vii.— (Ed.). NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY— ROTH. 205 flange of a tree extends southwards to below Card well, and north- wards to the Bloomfield River, and is met with along the mountain ranges of the hinterland, e.g., Atherton. 23. The Bloomfield weapon was somewhat more oblong and rectangular as compared with that of the Tully, and usually larger, such dimensions as three and a half by one and a half feet being not uncommon ; it is, however, fast falling into disuse, and even so late as 1898 was only being occasionally manufactured bv some of the very old men. The Bloomfield Natives called it kun- juri, and used to paint it with varying designs. Although no shields are found on the Endeavour River and at Cape Bedford at the present day, the local Koko-yimidir Blacks speak of them as gorndor-e. Indeed, so far as the eastern coast-line is concerned, the Endeavour River must be regarded as the northerly limit of the weapon. 24. In the Rockhampton District shields are all made from the local "cork-wood," the rumul of the Tarumbal Blacks, and present a more or less similar shape40 (PI. lx., figs. 1 and 2) — an elongate oval, with flat (PI. lx., figs. 3 and 4), in some cases approaching a markedly convex (PI. lx., tig. 5), posterior surface, and incised handle. Each main encampment used separate characteristic gravings on the anterior surface : — (a) Rockhampton and Gladstone. Two transverse incisions, comparatively deep on occasion, divide it into a large central and two terminal compartments (PI. lx., tig. 6), tin- former is black- ened witli charcoal grease, the latter whitened. Two specimens measured from twenty-one to twenty-one and a half inches long, eight and a half to nine inches wide, and two and a half to three and a half inches thick ; in the smaller the handle-groove extended close to the sides of the weapon (PI. lx., tig. 7), a somewhat unusual feature in this locality. (b) Yeppoon. Three transverse, and one longitudinal band, raised slightly above the general surface ; these are blackened, the intermediate spaces being whitened (PI. lx., fig. 8). Some- times patterns of red and black may be observed in addition, either in alternate row or in their entirety, independenty of the graving, but this colouring would appear to be empirical. The number of transverse raised bands — up to four, even five — usually varies with the size of the weapon. From twenty to twenty-one and a half inches long, nine to ten inches wide, and two to three and a half inches thick. 40 "Goolmarry" type — See Etheridge — Proc. Lima. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), ix., 1874, p. 514, pis. xxxiii. and xxxiv.; Id. — Journ. Anthrop. Inst., xxvi., 1S96, p. 157, pi. vi., figs. 7 and 8.— (Ed.) 16 206 KECOKDS OP THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. (c) Marlborough. There are two transverse incisions with a contained raised pattern in the form of a cross (PL lx., tig. 9) ; the posterior surface also has a raised surface of a crossed type (PI. lx., fig. 10). These shields are sometimes to be seeu painted, but tlie colours vary. A specimen, with slightly convex back, measured twenty by nine by two and a half inches. (d) Tilpal, Torilla. Anterior surface similar to the Yeppoon pattern, and the' posterior (PI. lx., fig. 11) somewhat a development of the Marlborough type. A specimen with dis- tinctly convex back measured twenty-seven and a half by ten and a half by three inches. (e) Miriam Vale. Smaller, more truly oval and much more flattened than any of the preceding (PI. lx., figs. 13 and 14); anterior surface blackened. Used for protection in the case of weapons thrown from a distance. The measurements of one example were twenty by ten and three-quarters by one and a half inches. Another type here is heavier (PI. lx., figs. 14 and 15) comparative!}', and differing from all the others in having almost equally convex anterior and posterior surfaces ; it is employed at close quarters for fighting with the heavier varieties of nulla. The measurements of an example were twenty-two by nine by three and a half inches. Nothing definite was known concerning shields on the Keppel Islands. 25. At Brisbane41 the shield or kuntan42 was made from "cork-wood" (Erythrine, sp.) by splitting, each split half being trimmed into the ultimate shape required43. It was then put aside for two weeks, until quite dry, because while damp the wood could not be charred. The handle was next made as follows: — the two holes were outlined in charcoal, the lines then cut in with a flint or celt, the intervening parts picked and dug out with a hardened-pointed stick, then hot cinders put on and blown on, rnore picking, and finally joining the two holes beneath. The whole surface was next covered with warm beeswax, producing a dark brown colour. There were two kinds of shields, but both called by the same name — a thin broader one for warding off spears in the big tights, and a thick narrower one for receiving blows from waddies in single-hand combat. The former, after the beeswax had dried, was painted with pipe-clay according to pattern (PI. lx., fig. 16) on the upper surface and uniformly covered with it on the under ; the thick narrower shield had nothing on them beyond the beeswax. 41 Notes from Mr. T. Petrie. 42 Also the name of the timber from which it was made. 13 As in the case of the Northern Koolamons. Roth --Bull. 7 — Sect. 62. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 207 26. The nulla-nulla is not so much a hand implement as a throwing implement, i.e., it is used more for throwing at short distances than for hitting at close quarters, and is very often employed in hunting wallaby, kangaroo, etc. Its manufacture is gradually dying out in the Boulia District, where it is not employed for purposes of barter, though it was (1897) pretty common along and to the north of the Leichhardt-Selwyn Ranges. It is made from the " gidyea " (Acacia homalophylla, F.vJVI), coloured black with charcoal grease, and measures up to about two feet in length. The distal extremity is enlarged and tapers to a point. A good one is usually incised with some circular bands at the proximal end, and with a longitudinal nutirlg which reaches either to the tip or ceases abruptly about an inch from it. The Pitta-Pitta Blacks speak of it as moi-ro ; the Maitakudi call it ma-ro. This type of weapon (PI. Ixi., tig. 6) i» common throughout the whole of North Queensland44, as well as the Cen- tral Districts, and was to be met among the old Brisbane Blacks. In shape it is comparable with the wooden mallet of the Wellesley Islands4"'. 27. On the Tully River there are, in addition to the common type just mentioned, a two-pronged variety known as wirka, as well as a globular and a decorative (pine-apple) pattern, all more or less identical with those to be observed in the Rockhampton District (PI. Ixi., figs. 7, 9, 10). The pine-apple type has on occasion been seen in the Peninsula and Eastern Coast-line ; Lumholtz figures4'' it from Herbert Vale, and Petrie from Bris- bane. Considering its limitation to the extreme north and to the coast-line, and its resemblance to the pine-apple stone club of New Guinea, I am inclined to regard it in the light of a Papuan introduction. 5*128. In the Rockhampton District nullas were usually made from " brigalow " or wattle, timbers known to the local Tarumbal (Rockhampton Tribe) as ku-nun and pakkar respectively; rosewood was occasionally employed, and on the Keppel Islands mangrove. Six or seven varieties are known, the first three of which are manufactured in large (heavy) and small (light) size. The heavy- ones never left the hand, being used for the offensive and defen- sive at close quarters. The light ones were thrown from a distance, but were often used for knocking over native-bears, kangaroo and other game, i.e., employed as hunting weapons. 14 At Princess Charlotte Bay it has the following names: — KRA. kunbai-il, KWA. pa-ul. 4r'Roth -Bull. 7— Sect. 38. 46 Lumholtz -Among Cannibals, 1890, p. 73, fig. b— (Ed.) L'OS RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Good nullas should show the fine fluting caused by the stone chisel, and all possess handle-marks to prevent the implement slipping. Of late years, some of these weapons have been (?) improved by the addition of horse-shoe nails stuck into the distal extremity. In the neighbourhood of Rockhampton itself the Tarumbul had a word — barkel (=any stick or handle) — to express all these varieties of nulla collectively. To the following short description of each the Tarumbal name is attached : — (a) The distal or free extremity progressively enlarges, to end finally in a gradually tapering point (PI. lxi., fig. G), and is the commonest of the seiies. The .smaller kinds are called barkal, the larger tindil. (!>) The weapon gradually enlarges from the handle-end to the globular extremity, this knob being either distinct from or merged into the shaft (PI. lxi., figs. 7, 8). Known as tanda. (c) The head of the implement is girdled, the girdle being sub- sequently cut into from two to five rows of squares, hy means of transverse and longitudinal incisions (PI. lxi., fig. 9) ; it is called a nil-li. For decorative purposes, I have here and there seen one of these weapons with two opposite sides of the girdle shaved down to the general surface level and then coloured red and white respectively. (d) Cut out on the same general lines as the common barkal, but having the distal end fissured into two, three (PI. lxi., fig. 10) or four prongs. It varies from twenty-eight and u half to thirty-one inches in length. Called tambara or yambara. (e) The distal extremity is in the shape of a more or less beak- like projection (PI. lxi., fig. 11); sometimes there may be two of these "beaks" (PI. lxi., tig. 12) opposite to one another, while occasionally there may lie found an intermediate third or fourth When decorated, the implement often has the beaks coloured white, and the intervening bases raddled. Called yu-lun. (f) A form only made apparently by the Karun-burra Blacks of the Upper Fitzroy River, etc., but not within recent years. As compared with the commonest type, the " head " is defined from the shaft by a distinct ledge, and its tip tapers far more abruptly (PI. lxi., fig. 13). A specimen which I obtained in 189747 was twenty six and a half inches long. (g) The distal extremity is in the form of a curve flattened from side to side. It is said to have been cut from the flange of IT Now in the Queensland Museum, Brisbane. NORTH QUEENSLAND ETHNOGRAPHY — ROTH. 209 a tree, and was called bi-teran48 (PI. lxi., fig. 14). At Glenroy, a selection on the Upper Fitzroy River, in Karun-bnrra country, I obtained a variety of this weapon having the curve sharply bent, and a couple of deep nicks cut into its extreme convex edge49 (PL lxi., tig. 15); the handle marks were of a regular diamond pattern. In regard to the above varieties of nulla, all save (f) were met with, or records concerning them obtained, throughout the Rock- hamptou District, except at Keppel Island, at Gladstone, and at Miriam Vale ; at the last-mentioned localities (d), (e) and (f) were not recognised, while on the Keppels only (a) proved to be familiar. 29. At Brisbane" the nullas were made out of iron-bark and saplings ; they were all painted black, similar to the Rockhanipton types; the tabri (a) for fighting and hunting, the mur (f) for fighting, a weapon similar to (c) for fighting at close quarters, and the bakkan (g) for killing by a blow on the back of the head. 30. On the Middle Palmer River the men's fighting pole (KMI. eln-ba-la) is made of "box-wood" (Eucalyptus resiuif era, Smith), on the same pattern and used after the same methods as that of the North-Western Districts51. At Princess Charlotte Bay the implement (KRA. albe-ila, KWA. alkau-ura) is some- what shorter. In the Rockhampton area the women's fighting pole (TAR. rang-kwan) isabout six feet long, and used in the same three positions of defence as has already been recorded ; the weapon, which is made of " brigalow " becomes progressively thicker from the proximal to the distal extremity, both being sharply pointed. 31. In the Rockhampton District, at the North-Rockhampton Yaamba Road Camp, I obtained in 1898 a two-handed sword that had recently been made by an old relative of a Karun-burra friend of mine. The old man told me that in the days before the advent of the whites it used to be employed in the area extending from Yaamba towards Broadsound, and made to strike either with its convex or concave edge, He called it a bi-teran, a term identical with that applied to the similar but much smaller pattern of Rockhampton nulla-nulla (PI. lxi, fig. 14). The ib This is the " Bendi " type — See Lumholtz— Among Cannibals, 1890, p. 334,2 figs ; Etheridge— Internat. Archiv. Ethnographie, x., 1S97, pi. ii i - , fig. 22— (Ed.) 49 The " Langeel " type— see Etheridge, loc. cit., pi. iii., tig. 6— (Ed.) r>°Note from Mr. T. Petrie. 51 Roth— Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1S97— Sect. 255. 210 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. straight line joining the two extremities of this particular speci- men62 measured forty-six inches, while the greatest width of the blade, with equally convex sides, was three and a half inches; it was made of brigalow. Lumlioltz figures"'1 one of these, and says it is usually covered with cross-bars of chalk. The two- handed swords of the North-West Districts have already been described'"1 4. 'M. Single-handed swords are met with in the Cardwell and Bloom field Districts. On the Lower Tully River this weapon, the barkur (PI. lxi., fig. 16), is made from Myrtus exaltata, Bail. (MAL. yambi), and from another tree which I have not been able to identify. Such a tree of about six inches in diameter is cut off at the butt and felled, the length required removed, and then split down the centre (PI. lxi., fig. 17). A slab can then be taken from either half (PI. lxi., fig. 18), and chipped to shape. The shape of weapon thus follows the shape of the tree, straight or bent ; the straighter it is the more preferable it would appear to be. To make the handle a cut is made into either side of tlie slab, which is then split ; fibre twine is finally wound round the handle and covered with beeswax. One edge is as a rule sharper than the other, but both edges can be used for cutting ; if the weapon has a distinct hend or curve, it is the con- vex edge which is apparently only used, but if straight, both are used, and the whole may be uniformly raddled. The proximal or handle-end amongst these Mallanpara Blacks is known as mura, and the distal extremity ngorn, a term signifying the forehead. It is from four and a half to five feet in length, and always used with the one hand stretched over the shoulder, the weapon hang- ing behind the back, and brought forward from above down with a more or less sudden jerk ; well directed, a blow from it can split a man's skull. This weapon used to be manufactured on the Bloomtield River, but now (1898) only occasionally by the old men. The Koko-yellanji Natives here call it worran. 33. ^TfJ'y little reliable information is to hand as to the metho Is ami procedure adopted in cases of one tribe fighting with another collectively; indeed, the progress of settlement and opening up of the country has rendered warfare such a compara- tively rare institution nowadays, as to limit it to districts, e.g., portions of the Gulf Coast-line not ordinarily accessible to European observers. What was observed in the Boulia District 62 Since presented to the Queensland Museum, Brisbane. •'••'Lumholtz— Among Cannibals, 1890, pp. 332,334, lig. on l.h. -(Ed.) Roth— Ethnol. Studies, etc.. 18— Sect. 245. NOKTII QUEENSLAND KTHNOGKAPHY ROTH. 211 has already heen recorded55. On tlie Bloonifield River (B. Hislop) there was one individual, not necessarily the oldest, who took the lead and planned out the whole mode of attack ; this leader wore the cockatoo top-not feather-tuft head ornament, which rendered him sufficiently conspicuous. At the field of battle the older women would either try to prevent blood-shed or else with dancing egg the combatants on to greater fury, their conduct depending upon local circumstances, cause of quarrel, etc. Prisoners were not taken, but the final victors would seize the opportunity of capturing any women of whom they might be in want. 34. With regard to individual fighting, the following notices may not be out of place : — At Miriam Vale (C. E. Roe, in L892) the men would often, when at close quarters during t lie wrestle, try to seize each other by the testicle, the successful one increasing the pull by pressing his free hand on his adversary's shoulder ; outsiders would then interfere. They used to fight very hard in the old days, but one would never take advantage of another-— at least, not in the case of a weapon being accidentally broken. They were very stubborn, and would continue the strife on the following morning if one had been rendered unconscious or perhaps received a sufficiently severe wound to incapacitate him for the rest of the day. The women in fighting would throw hot cinders at one another. At Boyne Island, Gladstone District (C. Medley, 1887) the natives, when fighting, would try and rupture each other. On the Bloomfield River (Ji. Hislop), fighting between two people alone was not common. The one about to be attacked might be ignorant of the attacker's intentions, and yet would stand up to a blow or cut without so much as flinching ; were he to turn tail and run, he would be considered a coward and probably speared. On the other hand, the two might thrown down their weapons, rush at each other and wrestle, during which process one would try and throw the other — unlike the wrestling contests at the initiation ceremony. At last they will fall, the one on top trying to throttle the one below ; the former, however, will then often get the worst of it by the by-standers and mutual friends striking him with wommeras, etc., on the back and head, while the latter will be saved. Friends and relatives will always try and prevent fatal consequences. 55 Roth— Ethnol. Studies, etc., 1S97— Sect. 238, last par. NOTES on the ARCHITECTURE, NESTING HABITS, and LIFE HISTORIES of AUSTRALIAN ARANEIDiE, based on SPECIMENS in the AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. By W. J. Rainbow, F.L.S., F.E.S., Entomologist. (Plates lxii.-lxiv.; Figs. 13-15.) PART VII.-ENTELEGYNiE [Continued). Family ARGIOPID^ ( = EPEIRID^E, Auct.). Sub-family ARGIOPIN^L This sub-family is not only the largest of the family of which it forms part, but contains some of the commonest, and most familiar of all spiders. It is the sedentary, orb-weaving species that are the first to attract the attention of the casual observer or amateur collector. The reason for this is obvious, for not only are many of the species large and more or less striking in appearance but, with the exception of a few aberrant forms, construct orbicular webs in prominent situations. Missionaries and travellers in out-of-the-way places, who are good enough to think of museums or arachnological students, when making col- lections, invariably "bag" large numbers of Argiopida? — often duplicating a species many times over — and little of aught else. In fact, so numerous are arboreal spiders in such collections, that one is often inclined to think that amateur collectors ignored the fact that there were such things as ground-roving species. In Australia, the Argiopinse are represented by the following groups : Argiopeaa, Cyrtophoieaj, Arachnurese, Cycloseae, Man- goreae, Aranese, Caerostrese, Gasteracantheae, Anepsiea?, Cyrtara- chneae, Glyptocranieaa, Poltyeae, Cehenise, Arcyeaj, Dolophoneaj, and Anapese. The spiders included in the first of these groups are easily dis- tinguished. The cephalothorax is very flat, rarely longer than broad ; pars cephalica is truncated in front, relatively short and straight, and has the segmental grooves well-defined laterally, but indistinct or effaced posteriorly ; pars thoracica is rounded laterally, the radial and median transverse grooves are distinct ; NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ARANEIDyE — RAINBOW. 213 usually the cephalothorax is thickly clothed with a silky, silvery- white pubescence. Amongst those species in which the cephalo- thorax is longer than wide are Argiope protensa, L.K., and those species described by myself as A. extensa, A. pallida, A. gracilis, and A. bullocki. The posterior row of eyes are strongly pro- curved, and are usually the largest of the group ; the median pair are in an almost straight line, poised upon a tubercular eminence, and are closer together than are those of the posterior pair; the lateral eyes are contiguous, and are poised on tubercles; of these latter the anterior eye is much smaller than its neigh- bour. The epigynum is, with a few exceptions, either a rounded or transverse elliptical depression divided by a strongly arched, longitudinal process. In the genus Argiope, Aud. in Sav., the females are remarkable for their exquisite beauty. A. tetherea, Walck., = A. regalis, L.K., and A. cemula, Walck., — A. magnified, L.K., are familiar, and brilliantly coloured Australian examples. Speaking of the latter. Workman1 says :— " When living this is a very beautiful spider, the colours being most brilliant. It has certain!}' the power (possessed by several other tropical spiders) of turning quite dark when disturbed. I imagine it is able to do so by raising and depressing the hairy covering of the body." Both A. dithered and A. cemula are widely distributed, the for- mer, which is popularly known as the "Cris-cross" and "St. Andrew's Cross " spider, occurs both in New Guinea and Aus- tralia, and, although a tropical species, has been recorded as far south as Wollongong- ; the latter species ranges through the Malaysian Archipelago, New Guinea and Northern Queensland. Compared with the females those of the opposite sex are veri- table pigmies, and are much more soberly tinted. As with the Nephilina? so with this sub-family, the males live on the upper edge of the web, and subsist upon the smaller insects that have been ensnared, and which are too insignificant to attract the attention of the female. Two genera constitute the group Argiopese, namely, Argiope, Aud. in Sav., and Gea, C. Koch, and both occur in Australia. The range of the former has been denned as " Orbis utriusque reg. trop. et subtrop. rarius temper. ; " and the latter : " Africa 'Workman — Spiders, i.; Malaysian Spiders, 1S96, p. 27. 2L. Koch — Araeh. Austr., i., 1871, p. 44. 214 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. trop. occid. (africana E. Sim.) ; Asia trop. (spinipes C. Koch) ; Malaisia ; Papua si a ; Nova-Hollandia et Polynesia ; Amer. sept, calid. et An til he (heptagon Hentz)."8 The webs of A. cemulce and A. cetherea, according to Workman's description and figure are much alike.4 The orbicular portion varies from fifteen ins. to seventeen ins. in diameter, and is com- posed of from twenty-five to forty-eight rays ; the inner spiral has from six to nine turns ; the free zone measures about one inch ; and the outer spiral has from twenty-five to fifty-six turns. At the centre of the web, and extending from the inner lines of the outer spiral right across the free zone, there are two distinct ribbons of white silk which meet at the centre, cross each other, and so produce the tigure of a St. Andrew's Cross. Sometimes the ribbons extend well into the inner rings of the outer spiral, but each ribbon is always zig-zaged in outline. Other species also weave a ziy-zag ribbon of silk (in fact this feature is peculiar to the webs of these orb-weavers), but in some instances the ribbon is a single one, and is placed perpendicularly, in others it takes the form of a more or less round ring, much like the ribbons or stubilimetita in the webs of some exotic Uloboridae. None of our Australian Argiopinse, so far as I have been able to observe, make what Dr. McCook describes as a central shield, but it is quite possible that some of our native species — at any rate the more typical forms — may do so. Speaking of this in connection with the American Argiopiiue, McCook says : — "The peculiarity which first strikes the observer is the oval shield of white silk which covers the hub. This is thickest and closest in the centre, and grows thinner and more open towards the margin, where it gradually merges into the radii which are attached to it. In the adult spider it is usually about two inches long by one and a half wide. Attached to the shield above and below, and extending upward and downward between two radii, is a zigzag ribbon of white silk, an inch or more long and one- fourth of an inch or more wide. It traverses the whole central space, and extends downward about two inches until it is lost in the spirals of the lower half of the orb.""' From the time when the young Argiope spreads its first orbicular snare, the zigzag ribbon is present, but it is always much more highly developed in the webs of adults. The question ■'Simon— Hist. Nat. Araignees, 2nded., i., 1S92, p. 7t>'.'. 'Workman — Lor. cit., p. 27, tig. h. •McCook — American Spiders and their Spinning Work, 1889, i., p. 97, figs. 52 and 89. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ARANEID/E — RAINBOW. 215 naturally arises as to the reason for the presence of this ribbon. It cannot be for special protection, because the web is usually built in an open space, where owing to the animal's colour and the conspicuous position it takes up at the centre of its web, it can be easily seen. A bird or predatory insect in quest of such prey (for the Argiopids are often found in wasps' nests) would not be likely to miss it. McCook expressed the opinion that the ribbon is introduced for the purpose of strengthening the shield, but since all the species do not construct a shield or screen, that cannot fully explain the reason for its presence. Personally, I am inclined to the opinion that it acts as a support to the central space and hub and also that it materially assists in bearing the weight of the spider's body ; where a shield is constructed, the zigzag ribbon woidd, doubtless, be beneficial. The central space and hub of the web of Argiope is very fragile and delicate, whilst the spider, in proportion tu it, especially when gravid, is large and heavy. The spider, like all orb-weaving species (with the exception of those which roll or fold leaves, whose habits will be referred to later on) when at rest takes up her position at the centre or hub, and always head downwards ; but the Argiopea* differ from all other Argiopidse in the disposition of their legs, for whereas orb- weavers in general spread their eight ambulatory limbs well out, Argiope, on the other hand, always rests with hers arranged in pairs, well extended, and so approximated that they describe the letter X. A, cetherea and A. cemula always dispose theirs in pairs over the zigzag ribbons forming the St. Andrew cross design. The general structure of an Argiope web is very similar to that of the typical orb-weaver ; it varies in dimension, according to the size of the architect, and sometimes according to environment; but whatever the size or surroundings may be, the zigzag band of silk on stabilimentum is always present, hence the naturalist can always tell when he sees one of these snares (even though the architect be absent) the genus to which the latter belonged. It is interesting to note the modus operandi of working-in the ribbon. The main structure of the web with its supports con- sisting of outer lines or groups, radii and concentric rings having been completed, A. cetherea drops down to a point a little below the centre of the snare and takes up its position between two rays running in an oblique direction towards the central point of the hub ; this she ascends, discharging silk from her spinnerets as she does so, and as all are at work voiding simultaneously, ii follows that a broad ribbon is the result. The zigzag effect is caused by the animal swinging its abdomen from side to side as 216 RECORDS OK THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. it climbs. This process is repeated on each side of the huh, both above and below, until the work is completed. The web is always suspended in a more or less vertical position, with the ordinary framework and supporting lines, but if the locality he one that is exposed to strong gusts of wind, an irregular or retitelarian web may be spun, as a means of protection, on either side of the orb. I have not infrequently seen such in the scrub land around Botany Bay. When a retitelarian web is con- structed in conjunction with the orb, the lines of the former are continued both above and below the latter. McCook has noted the same feature in connection with American spiders of the genus Argiope. This retitelarian web being built in front of each face of the orb, has been termed by the American author quoted " protective wings," and he suggests that they may be a protec- tion against hostile insects or other enemies hovering around the web, the slightest touch of which on one or other of the protect- ing wings would instantly telegraph the presence of an undesir- able visitor, and so allow the legitimate tenant of the web time to drop to the ground and seek cover. The cocoon of Argiope cetherea is much like that of Nephila ventricosa, mihi, figured and described in my last paper upon this subject.'1 Usually it is found at the end of a twig of some shrub hard by the maker's orb-web. Occasionally I have seen one attached to the tops of the blades of some coarse grass or at the tips of brackens, and sometimes amongst the stems of the latter. The ova-sac is completely surrounded by a mass of loose flocculent yellowish silk, and is composed of a thin, crisp, papery substance; it is flask-like in shape, and perfectly imper- vious to water. Within this papery shell there is another sac, more or less bag-shaped, and this contains the eggs. Unlike the outer or flask-shaped sac, this bag is soft and flexible. Inter- posed between the outer walls of the latter, and the inner walls of the flask-like structure there is a quantity of soft, loose, floccu- lent silk, which completely surrounds the bag. Thus, it will be seen, the eggs are admirably provided for in the way of protec- tion, not only against heavy rains, but predatory foes such as birds, lizards and mice. They do not wholly escape, however, — nothing in nature ever does — for certain Hymenopterous insects, such as Ichneumon flies, sometimes succeed in piercing the entire mass with their long ovipositors. The eggs are of a glossy, trans- lucent, yellowish tint. The cocoon of A. aitherea may be looked for during the autumn months, and the spiderlings in spring. 0 Rainbow— Aust. Mus. Uec. , vi., 5, 1907, pp. 336-7, tig. 53. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ARANEID^E — RAINBOW. 217 Gea, C. Koch= Ebaea, L. Koch, occurs in "Africa trop. occid. (africana E. Sim.); Asia trop. (spiiiipes C.Koch); Malaisia ; Papuasia ; Nova-Hollandia et Polynesia; Amer. sept, calid. et Antille (heptagon Hentz)."7 Notwithstanding its geographical range, the genus is a small one, only about a dozen species being known ; of these, six have been described from Indo-China, one from Australia (G. theridioides, L. K., Port Mackay); one from New Guinea (G. bitubercu/ata, Thor. ) ; and one (G. prtecincta, L. K.) from Samoa The individuals are all small, but there is little difference in size between the sexes ; if anything, the males are slightly the smaller. The architecture of only one species (G. festiva, Thor.8) has been described and figured. It is a small and closely fabricated orb, erected perpendicularly, and measuring from five to six inches in diameter; rays. 48-56 ; inner spiral, 7-11 turns; free zone, 1 in.; outer spiral, 32-58 turns. This web, which had no zigzag ribbon (stabilimentiim), was noted at Singapore. Nothing is known of the spider's cocooning habits. The section Cyrtophorea? includes only one genus, Cyrtophora, E. Sim., and its distribution is : " Orhis utriusque reg. tropicse et subtropical. '"■' Our species C. hirta, L.K., C.parnasia, L.K., and C. sculptilis, L. K., were each originally recorded from Bowen. According to Simon, the latter Australian species is a synonym of C. citricola, Forsk., a form that has been recorded from the Mediterranean region, tropical, East and West Africa, South Africa, Madagascar and neighbouring islands, Yemen. India, Ceylon, and Singapore. The webs of Cyrtophora differ from the characteristic snares of the family to which it belongs. Examples of these have been described by both Workman (G. citricola10) and McCook (C. basilica,11 McCook). The orb is of a very primative type, and takes the form of a dome, which latter consists of a large number of radii and spirals, all closely woven ; the latter extend entirely and with equal regularity to the summit. Immediately below the dome and supported by the radii of the latter is a horizontal sheet or floor composed of lines irregularly cast. Both above and below dome and floor, and surrounding both, is a complicated retitelarian structure. Primitive though it be, this form of snare 7Simon — Loc. cit., pp. 769-770. 8 Workman — Loc. cit., p. 30, fig. h. 9Simon — Loc. cit., p. 775. 10 Workman — Loc. cit., p. 32, fig. h. 'iJVTcCook— Loc. cit., p. 164, fig. 154. 218 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. is distinctly beautiful. Considering their beauty, it is a pity these structures are so fragile ; and also that when kept in captivity the architects persistently decline to give an example of their architectural skill. I have kept many species for obser- vation at different times, but none have ever favoured me with a web such as they fabricate in nature. Doubtless th? surround- ings were not favourable. Dr. R. H. Pulleine, of Adelaide, informs me that he has often noted a web of a South Australian spider exactly like that described by McCook in respect of C. basilica. The section Arachnurete, like the preceding, includes only one genus, Arachnura, Vinson, and it abounds in " Afric trop., orient., contin. et insul.; India; Malasia; N.-FTollandia et N.-Zelandia."1 - It has not yet been recorded from Papua, but it is only reason- able to suppose that it exists there. Simon says he possesses an undescribed form from the Philippines. These spiders are not large, but they are of striking form. Our species are A. higginsi and A. caudata, Bradl. I have collected the former at Waterfall, National Park, and at Guildford, and have also seen specimens from Tasmania. Mr. W. Bullock has collected it at Parkville near Scone, and Mrs. Ross at Armidale. Originally it was taken at Darling Downs, Queensland. The cephalothorax is flat, and the grooves at the junction of the cephalic and thoracic segments, as well as the median trans- verse thoracic groove, are deep and strongly defined; the abdomen overhangs the base of the cephalothorax, and at its anterior extremity is deeply indented ; it is long and attenuated, the posterior extremity tapering so as to appear like a tail, which latter is terminated with a spur-like process, but the projections forming it are small and, in point of size, unequal. The males of our species are unknown ; Simon, however, observed one in Ce}don, probably the male of A. scorpionoides, Vinson, which was only about one millimetre in length, whilst the female measured 15, so that the disparity between the sexes is very great. The webs of A. higginsi observed by me at Waterfall and Guildford were perpendicular, of the normal orbicular form, and about fifteen inches in diameter. When disturbed, this species drops from its web and hangs suspended by its spinnerets to a fine thread of silk. In this position it would certainly escape the persecution of predatory foes, since both in colour and appearance it resembles a dead rolled leaf. If greatly alarmed, this spider w- ill drop to the ground and feign death. On one occasion when Simon— Loc. cit., \>. 777. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN AKANEID.E —RAINBOW. 219 collecting in the bush, I came across an individual of this species amongst the fallen sticks and leaves that constitute the forest debris, and had it not been that \ observed a slight movement in one of its legs, probably clue to disturbing the rubbish, it would have escaped my notice. It would seem, however, that the orbicular form of snare is not constant with Arachnura. A New Zealand species discovered by Dr. Llewellyn Powell " spins only a few irregular threads, cross- ing each other at various places, among twigs or small branches and stems of herbaceous plants, very similar to spiders of the genus Theridion."13 Simon's observations of the webs of species of this genus at Manilla14 agree with mine as detailed above in respect of A. higginsi. Four genera are included in the next section, the Cyclosea?, but only one of them, Cyclosa, Menge, is included in our fauna. The range of this genus is " Orbis totius reg. temp, et calida?."15 Epeira rhombocephala, Thor., from Cape York, and E. Valletta, Keys., from Rockhampton, together with a number of Malaysian, Papuan, and Polynesian forms, have been transferred by Simon from Araneus (Eperia) to the genus Cyclosa. Of the two Aus- tralian forms quoted, Cyclosa vallata is alone known to me. It is a very small species, measuring only about three and a half millimetres in length; the abdomen is longer than broad, strongly arched, and has two large tubercles on its upper surface. The species included in the genus are very variable, and the abdomen may be ovate, obtusely rhomboidal, subquadrate, or shortly ovate and subglobose. The webs of Cyclosa are orbicular, and are fabricated in an almost vertical position, the spirals are numerous and very closely woven ; a stabilinientum is present, but this latter varies with the different species. The ova are deposited in a series of cocoons, which are sometimes concurrent with or constitute the siabilimentum. The species described by me, together with its web and cocoons, as Epeira pallida, must be transferred to the genus Cyclosa.^'' Mangorese is a section to which no Australian species have as yet been assigned, but seeing that one genus, Lobetiua, Simon, included in it is represented both in New Guinea (L. opaciceps, "Cambridge — Aun. Mag. Nat. Hist., (4), vi., 1S70, p. 116. 14Simon — Loc. cit., p. 777. 15Simon — Loc. cit., p. 783. 16Rainbow — Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, xxiii., 1897, p. 514, pi. xvii., fig. 1, and pp. 534 and 535, tig. 1. •220 RECORDS OF THK AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM Simon), and also in New Zealand (L. plagata, Simon), it is only- natural to suppose that it will sooner or later be found to exist upon the mainland of the Commonwealth. The range of this srenus is " N. Guinea et N. Zealandia."1 7 Notwithstanding the fact that the section Araneai comprises only five genera, three of which are represented in Australia, it nevertheless includes one, Araneus, Clerck, which probably embraces more species than any other included in this branch of the fauna. About one thousand species are known to naturalists, and many still await description. The series or groups into which the genus may be systematically divided have been exhaustively treated by Simon in his masterly work, " Histoire Naturelle des Araignees," and to this every arachnological student, anxious to acquire something more than a superficial knowledge of his subject, must turn. The genus Araneus ( = Epeira, Auct.) is represented in all parts of the habitable globe; many of the species are widely distributed, and some are exceedingly common and variable. Simon defines the range of the genus as " Orbis totius regiones omues."1 s Amongst trees, between bushes, amidst coarse herbage, in gardens and orchards from early spring to late autumn these spiders may be found. The webs are orbicular, but varying degrees of regularity and skill maybe noted in the structure, and in the habits of the species. Some construct a perfect orb, the size of which depends largely upon the species ; but it may also be influenced by situation or surroundings. There is usually a " nest " or resting-place at the extremity of some spur or branch- let, formed by bringing a number of leaves together and binding them into position with silk. This retreat, when found, is always connected with the hub of the web by what McCook terms a "trap-line." The retreat is used as a refuge from insectivorous foes or shelter in wet or excessively windy weather. Some orb- webs are imperfect : that is to say, they do not always form a complete circle — a sector may be wanting; some, indeed, only fabricate about half an orb. One of the most extraordinary webs I have ever seen I saw at Mosman. This was some years ago, before this favourite suburb of Sydney was built upon as it is now, and when it was a beauty spot as Nature designed it. This interesting snare was stretched between three large native shrubs, the positions of which described a triangle. For the want of a better term this may be described as a double web, to differentiate 1 'Simon — Loc. cit., p. 7i)5. ^Simon— Lor. cit., p. 829. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ARANEIDJE — RAINBOW. 221 it from the compound web to be described later on. The main body of the mesh consisted of the typical orb, with the customary outer lines or guys, but at the back, and running down the centre, a semi-orb had been built. This latter may not have been the work of the architect of the complete orb ; it may have been purely adventitious. I am the more convinced that this is so, because I have carefully examined many webs since, and have not found another example, and I certainly think I should if it had been the result of instinct. At the time I discovered this web I sought for the architect, but it had evidently made good its escape, and was probably simulating death amongst rubbish, or hiding in some quiet nook or corner. Occasionally orb webs may be met with that have two or three more or less horizontal lines fixed to the hub and some adjacent object. These lines communicate with a tubular or leafy retreat and, as they are drawn tightly, cause the snare to be somewhat depressed at the centre. Fx"equently huge orbicular snares are erected at consider- able heights. I have recorded one such that I saw on the South Head Road, Belle View Hill, Sydney,19 the topmost trans- verse line of which ran from a tree on one side of the road to a telegraph post on the other. By a well directed stone, I succeeded in bringing the builder down, and it proved to be the common Araneus herione, L.K. It is remarkable. considering how fragile these structures are, the amount of wind-pressure they can bear; this is due, no doubt, to their elasticity. The com- jjound web, to which I referred above, consists of an orb, and an elaborate and complicated reti- telarian snare, which latter is sometimes at the rear of the web, sometimes at both sides of it, and sometimes continued both above and below (fig. 13) much like some of the snares constructed by certain species of Aryiope. Pig. 13. Compound Web. X9Rainbow — Loc. cit., p. 531. 17 222 KKCOHDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. All these orb-weaving spiders have the habit of enshrouding superfluous prey, or such as are powerful and likely to do damage to the snare, with silk. As the victim struggles, the spider paj - out a line of silk, which not only becomes entangled in legs and wings, but is made to closely and tightly encircle the insect's body, and so render it helpless. Insects thus enclosed may be seen hanging on the outskirts of a web. It is really remarkable what differences are found to exist in the common orbed web, when one takes the trouble to make and compare notes. The old school of naturalists contented themselves by simply noting the fact that spiders of certain genera constructed geometric webs, and these were generally accepted as being round or wheel dike. But, as a matter of fact, all orb-webs are not round, nor is the hub always strictly at the centre. The radial lines may be, and often are, longer above the hub than below, and sometimes vice versa ; then again the number of radii varies : there may be only seventeen of these, or more than fifty. I have counted in different webs 17, 22, 24, 2f>, 26, 32, 36, and 52 radii ; but the differences are not specific. Three webs made by one species, Araneus productus, L.K., among the shrubs in my garden, had 26, 32, and 36 respectively. Another interesting feature is that it is not necessarily the largest web that has the greatest number oT radii ; indeed, I have most fre- quently found that the smaller webs made by the diminutive species of Araneus have not only more radii, but also a greater number of spirals than those made by their larger congeners. The snares of A. productus, A. heroine, and A. brisbance, L.K., may each vary, and often do, both in size, number of radii, number of spirals, and supporting lines or guy-ropes, but all these variations are due to peculiarities of site. The webs of Araneus are almost invariably parallel to the plane of the horizon, but frequently exigencies of construction compel such an arrangement of foundation lines as to deflect the snare more or less sharply from the vertical plane. < hie of the commonest spiders around Sydney is Araneus wagneri, mini20; a species which, together with its web, nest, ova-sac and other details of its life-history, I described and figured souk; years ago. Another species common around Par- ramatta and Liverpool, A. sylvicola, mihi,21 makes, it is inter- esting to note, a web like tl it of the former species; moreover, its nest consists of a roll I if. and its ova-sac a folded one, Rainbow— Loc. cit., :.• ii., 1896, , " pi. xi.\., figs. 2, 2a, 2b, 2c, 2d, and p. 335. 2aRainbow — Loc. cit , xxiii., 1897, p. 51 t, pi. xvii., figs. 4, 4a, and p. 536. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ARANEID^ — RAINBOW. 223 exactly like A. ivagneri. Indeed, the life-history of these two widely distinct species appears to be exactly similar in every detail. A. wagneri is apparently far from being particular as to tlie material it uses for its nests. At the moment of writing I have before me four examples of paper nests collected by me at Can- terbury. Notwithstanding that there was no shortage of material in the shape of leaves available for nests, four individuals had actually utilised scraps of newspaper for the purpose. Two of these examples are rolled so as to form cylindrical retreats, one is in the form of an elongated cone, and the fourth is simply folded. Each of these nests have their edges held in position with silk, and the interior of the chamber lined in the usual manner with the same material. .Messrs. Philip de la Garde, R.N., and J. J. Walker, R.N., each collected specimens of such paper nests made by A. ivagneri on Garden Island, Port Jackson, so that the habit of utilising such material does not appear to be uncommon. The cocoon of Araneus heroine is about an inch and a half long and half an inch wide; it is ovate, densely matted, and the silk of which it is composed is dark green. The cocoon is usually located near the extremity of a small branch, and is surrounded and held in position by an irregular network of fine lines. Both the density of the cocoon and the labyrinthine lines surrounding it must be decidedly protective. The cocoons of some spiders are penetrated by the stings of parasitic wasps, but those of many species of Argiopidse are rendered fairly immune from attack by the defensive retitelarian network that surround- them. Within the cocoon there is, of course, the ova-sac ; this latter is invariably white, of a paper-like texture, and it encloses a number of yellowish eggs surrounded by yellowish, flocculent silk. Some species of Araneus enclose three small ova-sacs in their cocoons. When the time arrives for the Argiopid spiderlings to make their appearance, they cut a small opening at the apex of the cocoon, but they are probably a few days old when they do this, as they have already passed through one moult. This is proved by the fact that when a cocoon is opened numbers of cast skins are seen. In cutting their way out, they are not assisted by the mother. In fact she almost invariably dies long before the young ones make their appearance. Professor B. G. Wilder, an American naturalist, was of opinion that birds were instrumental in aiding the escape of youngspiders fi hi eir cocoons, because he had observed a bird, about the size of a sparrow, pulling at a 224 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, cocoon hanging in a tree. I am doubtful if such a provision exists in Nature. My experience is that a cocoon is never designedly opened until the time is ripe for the young ones to escape, and this is controlled by the instinct of the latter. Birds do undoubtedly pull spider-cocoons and webs to pieces, but it is in order Bthafc they may line their nests with the material. Food is not necessary to spiderlings when domiciled within the cocoon, and therefore no provision is made in this respect ; and furthermore nothing in the shape of cannibalism obtains until some time, probably a week or ten days, after the young have escaped. No time is lost after escaping from the cocoon, in the fabrication of a web, but it is a common one in which every member of the community, males and females — at this stage indistinguishable- -assist in constructing, and in which all have a share. This web consists of a closely woven sheet that envelopes everything within its vicinity and from which, until after the second moult, thev evince no desire to wander. It is interesting to note that these sheet-webs are usually densest above, the cocoon (Plate lxii.), for it is there that the majority of the infantile spider community will be found. If the web be disturbed but slightly, immense numbers of these tiny creatures will rapidly descend by means of their drop-lines (which are emitted as they fall) and hang dangling in the air. For about a fortnight the spiderlings live together gregariously, but the migratory instinct then manifests itself. Each individual that has escaped the dangers, including cannibalism, with which tin; life of an infant spider is beset, assumes the attitude common to the Araneidse prior to the aeronautic flight. In some species the eight legs are so spread as to describe a circle, the abdomen is then depressed and silk is voided, the animal turning round and round as it does so ; in this way a " foot-basket " is made, after which the abdomen is raised, and a delicate gossamer thread is thrown out until sufficient has been voided to carry the tiny animal off. Even the calm air of a room is sufficient of itself to lift one of these animals and waft it along in its current. In the Held, prior to ballooning, the young orb-weaver takes up a position, back downwards, on some of the retitelarian lines, and commences to pay out silk as follows : — First the spinnerets are brought into close contact, and the liquid silk is emitted ; the spinnerets are then separated by a lateral motion, which breaks up the silk into fine filaments ; on these filaments the air-current impinges, drawing them out to a length which is regulated by the will of the animal ; and, on the spinnerets being again brought together, the filaments NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ARANEIDiE — RAINBOW. 225 coalesce and form a compound line.22 In flight, the animal is carried off back downwards, and its feet control and aid in spreading out the filaments, at the base of which there is, in the case of some species, a small quantity of flocculent silk which forms a kind of hammock or basket. This latter is often con- siderably larger than the spider. "When the spider wishes to descend, it hauls in and rolls up the filaments in a tangled mass. The orbs made by young spiders are very similar to those of the adults. They are, of course, much smaller, and have a lesser number of rays and spirals, but where there is any ornamenta- tion, as in the case of Argiope, or where it is customary for a matured spider to make a nest or retreat, we find the young ones, as soon as they start constructing orbicular snares, doing exactly the same. The young of A. wagneri and A. sylvicola each roll a small leaf or piece of paper in exactly the same manner as do the adults. But after each succeeding moult, and as the animal grows, webs and nests become larger until they have attained their maximum. A. herione passes through eight moults or changes of skiu, after which it is adult. Amongst the synonyms of this genus Simon, with a query, includes Heurodes, Keys. This genus was erected by Keyserling to receive a species which he named turrita,23 on account of the curious structure of its abdomen. I think, however, that Keyserling's genus should stand for the reasons stated by him. In a brief note he says : — "This genus is near to Epeira W., but is distinguished therefrom by its spineless legs, the high clypeus, and the great breadth of the cephalic segment in front." Two other small genera are included in^this section : — Care- ]>alxis, L.K., and Acroaspis, Karsch. The first of these occurs in " N.-Guinea ; N.-Hollandia ; Amer. centr. et merid.," and the latter is restricted to " Nova-Hollandia."24 Of about a dozen species assigned to Carepalxis, six occur in Australia. The species described by me as Epeira coronata" 5 belongs to this genus. The web of C. tuberculata, Keys., is small, but of the normal orbicular type. Acroaspis contains only two species, both of which are unknown to me. Two genera are included in the group Gasteracanthese, namely G aster acantha, Sund., and Fticyosaccus, Simon. The range of the 22Blackwall— Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xv., 1845, p. 241. 23Keyserling — Die Arach. Austr., ii., Suppl., 1886, p. 116, pi. ix.,figs.3,3o. 24Simon— Lot: cit., p. 830. -•Rainbow— Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, xxii., 1896, p. 629, pi. xlix.v fig. 1. 226 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. former has been denned by Simon as " Orbis totius regiones tropica?,"- ,; but it also occurs in .subtropical and, to a limited extent, in temperate zones : the latter genus is only found in " Brasilia : Amazonas."2 7 About 200 species of Gasteracantha have been described, and these have been divided by Simon into two sections, based upon the structure of the abdomen, and the number and proportion of the spines, and these include several subgenera.28 The Gasteracantha are easily distinguished by the abdomen, which is hard (chiiinous), armed with two, four, or six spines, which vary in length, strength, and direction, and issue from <1 liferent points of the margin The abdomen is also marked on tiie upper surface, and sometimes underneath, with numerous symmetrically disposed cicatrose spots, varying a little in size, form, and position. These markings Cambridge designated sigilla, owing to their resemblance to seals impressed upon the surface. The number, distribution, and relative distinctiveness of these sigilla are often of assistance in the determination of the species. The males are veritable pigmies compared with the females, and differ much from the latter in respect of abdominal armature. In some species of Gasteracantha the abdomen is very flat, in others it is more or less arched, but whichever it may lie it is always very large in proportion to the cephalothorax, and its anterior angle always overhangs the latter. The legs are always short. The webs of Gasteracantha are usually constructed in open places. The species common around Sydney, G. minax, Thor,, = G. Jlavomaculata, Keys., constructs a snare about eighteen inches in diameter; it is orbicular, vertical, and closely meshed. The rays vary in number (22 to 30) and do not meet at the centre, but are connected with a common ring. When the web is newly constructed the rays do meet, but the central extremities aie afterwards cut away, thus leaving an open ring or hub. The beaded spirals commence close to the ring and continue towards the outer lines or framework. There is no stabilimentuni present. According to McCook and Simon, some species decorate their webs with tufts of white, flossy silk, but those that I have seen in the bush around Sydney were not so ornamented. The latter author, however, says that the habit is variable with the same Simon — Loc. cit., p. 845. -TSimon — Loc. cit., p. s 17. Simon— Loc. cit., pp. 838-843, pp. 845-847. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ARANEID.E — RAINBOW. 227 species. There is no retreat constructed in connection with these snares. When resting in the web a Gasteracantha always occupies the centre, and, as usual, rests head downwards. In such a position, owing to their colouration, they form very con- spicuous objects, but their spiny armature doubtless protects them from the raids of insectivorous birds. I have seen many spiders that have been taken from the crops of the latter, but never a Gasteracantha. G. minax occurs also in Queensland and Victoria. There is a common black variety of this form to which L. Koch gave the name lugubris, and which he regarded as a distinct species. The differences are merely those of colour, and the size and shape of the spines. Another variety to which the same author also gave specific rank is G. minax, var. aslrigera. This latter variety is black only on the upper surface, whilst the former is black both above and below. Both the typical form and its melanic varieties are common in Queensland, New South AVales and Victoria. The cocoon of G. minax is very variable, but very pretty. It is usually found attached to the stem of some adjacent plant, such as a weed, grass, or wild flower, and is more or less elongate in form. Usually it is bound to a stem, longitudinally, but some- times it is pendulous. The colour varies from dark brown to golden-brown or even bright yellow, and examples vary in length from about 35 mm. to 15 mm.; of these the larger are by far the most attenuated. The cocoons are beautifully made and closely woven. Two specimens in the collection of the Museum are attached — one partly to the stem and partly to a leaf of a Flannel Flower (Actinotus helianthi, Labill.), and the other partly to a petal and partly to a stem of a Flannel Flower ; a third example is suspended from a grass stein (Plate lxiii., rigs. 1, 2, 3). Other species recorded as occurring in Australia are : G. fornicata, Fab., " Neu Holland"; G. vitlata, Thor., Port Mackay, Queensland; G. tvestringii, Keys., "Neu Holland"; G. sacer- dotalis, L.K., Bowen and Cape York, and to these localities I now add Port Darwin; G. suminata, Cape York; and G. variegata, Walck., Bowen. Three genera are included in the group Anepsiere, viz., Aspido- lasius, E. Sim., Anepsia, L.K., and Paraplectanoides, Keys. The first of these is, as far as we kuow at present, restricted in its range to Central America ; the second, although it has not yet been recorded from Australia except in error, may, nevertheless, be reasonably expected to occur here, seeing that it is found in 228 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. "Asia merid.; Malaisia et Polynesia;"-9 the third, which con- sists of two species only, viz., P. crassipes, Keys., and P. kochi, Cambr., occurs only in " Nova Hollandia."3'0 Nothing is known of the habits or life-history of either of these species; in fact, no observations have been recorded as to the economy of any members of the group. The group Cyrtarachnea? is a widely distributed one, and con- tains half-a-dozen genera, many of the species of which are striking forms. Two genera occur in Australia, viz., Cyrtarachney Thor., and Pcecilopachys, E. Sim. Of these the range of the former is " Reg. mediterr. Occident.; Africa tropica occid. orient., austr. et ins.; Asia centr., merid. et orient.; Japonia ; Malaisia ; Nova Hollandia ; and that of the latter, " Nova Hollandia et Polynesia."81 In reference to their webs, Simon remarks that those that have been observed are large and very regular. I have collected several specimens of Pcecilopachys bispinosa, Keys., around Sydney. Most of them were obtained by beating bushes over an inverted umbrella ; one individual that I was fortunate enough to observe was resting on a bright green leaf, in which position it simulated, to a marvellous degree of fidelity, the excreta of a bird. Indeed I at first regarded it as such, but knowing that this habit is common with many species of the Arthropoda, I was induced to look more closely, and so detected the deception. Others who have brought me specimens, or to whom I have pointed out this habit, have confirmed my observa- tion. The legs of the animal are short, and when it is at rest these are bunched-up closely to its sides ; the abdomen is large, and its anterior extremity projects boldly over the cephalothoi ax; on its upper surface there are two large acuminate tubercles ; these latter are dull white, and are elevated on a broad trans- verse field of yellow-brown, in front of which is a transverse bar of dull white; hence the colours of the animal, together with its dorsal abdominal tubercles and bunched-up legs, simulate most unmistakeably the irregular mass of chalky-white and brown so characteristic of the excreta of birds. I have seen specimens of this species from the South Sea Islands and from many parts of Australia. Cyrtarachne setosa, Keys., is another striking form, the legs and abdomen of which are armed with stout bristles. The type '-'■'Simon — Loc. cit., p. 870. Simon — Loc. cit., p. 871. -'Simon— Loc. cit., \>. SSO, p. 876, fig. 942. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ARANEID.E — RAINBOW. 229 of this species, which was collected at Sydney, was in the Godeffroy Museum, but its whereabouts now is not known. Cyrtarachind cocoons that have been collected are described as being globose and attached to a long peduncle. Several such have been forwarded to me from time to time, but always, unfor- tunately, without the spider (Fig. 14). Glyptocraniea? includes four genera, two of whicli occur in Australia, viz., Ordyarius, Keys., Fig. 14. Cocoon of and Dicrosticlius, E. Sim. The former occurs in " India et ins. ; Taprobane (Hobsoni Cb.) ; Birmania (sexspi- nosa Th.) ; ins. Amboina (clypeatus E. Sim.) ; Nova Hollandia (monstrosus Keyserl.)";32 Dicrostichus, on the other hand, occurs only in "Nova Hollandia."'1 "' Notwithstanding its wide range, very few species of Ordgarius have been described. These are 0. hobsoni, Cambr., from India and Ceylon; 0. sexspinosa, Thor., from Burinah ; 0. clypeatus, E. Sim., from Amboina ; and 0. monstrosus, Keys., from Peak Downs, Queensland. Besides these, Simon says he has one (unnamed) in his collection from Java. Dicrostichus includes three species and one variety, viz., D. furcatus, Camb., and its variety dislinctus, mihi ; also D caliyi- nosus, mihi ; aud D. maynijicus, mihi. The retitelarian web, egg-bags, and leaf-nest (the latter in the form of a cornucopia) have already been described and figured by me.34 I now have the pleasure of figuring and describing the nest of D. furcatus (Plate Ixiv.). The web of this species, like that of D. maynijicus, is small and of the retitelarian type, the lines of which are closely woven amongst the leaves of the plant upon which the spider has become domiciled. On referring to the right-hand side of the plate, a little above the spider, the reader will perceive the body of a wasp which has become entoiled in the outer lines of the snare. The nest or retreat is among the thick maze of leaves at the top of the plate. It is very closely and densely woven, but is not nearly so neat a structure as that made by 1). maynijicus. It will be noted on referring to the plate that the spider does not rest in its snare after the manner of other Argiopids, but with the head upwards. Some years ago ;; -Simon — Loc. cit., p. 885. 33Simon — Loc. cit., p. SS6. 34Rainbow — Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, xxiii., 1897, p. 53S, figs. 2 and 3. 230 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. my friend, Mr. A G. Hamilton, gave me a photograph of D. maynijicus with egg-hags and nesl , and that spider also is shown resting head upwards. The egg-hags of D. furcatus differ from those of D magnificus ; they are smaller, have a shorter peduncle, which latter have again flattened apical extensions, that are directed either at right or oblique angles according to the position of the objects to which they are attached. The effect of these flattened exten- sions is to give to the egg-bag a flask-like appearance. In other respects, both externally and internally, those now figured are similar to the ones previously described by me, and quoted above. Besides these egg-bags, there is, in the Museum collection, two others attached to a nest of leaves bound together. These are probably constructed by another species of Dicrostichus, but they are much larger and have a different shape. Those figured in the plate herewith are delineated at their actual size. The ova-sac figured in the text is five inches long and three inches in circumference at its widest girth (Fig. 15). The nest and cocoons (two) of, D. furcatus described above were collected by Mr. W. Bullock at Parkville, near Scone, and pre- sented by him to the Trustees of the Australian Museum. Besides this we have in our collection a nest made by the same species to which four egg-bags are attached. The latter was collected at Sydney by Mr. E. D. Lee, and by him presented to the Trustees. The large one is merely labelled " New South Wales." The group Pol ty ere contains five genera, only one of which, however, occurs in Australia, i.e., Poltys, C. Koch, and its range is "Reg. tropicre cunctse Africre, Asia? et Oceanise."3 5 Keyserling has described five species from Queensland,'30 and T have described two others, one from Cooktowu (/'. multituberculatus),*'' and one from Fremantle, W. Australia (/'. salebrosus).38 Keyserling's Fig. 15. Cocoon of Dicroatichus sp. Simon — hoc. cit., p. SO."?. 3GKeyserling — Die Arach. Auatr., Suppl., 1SS6, pp. 123-133. 7 Rainbow— Austr. Mas. Rec, iii., A, 188S, p. S2, pi. xviii., figs. 2. 2a, ■1 b. Rainbow— Lot. cit., v., 2, 1904, p. SO, figs. 28, 29. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ARANEIDiE — RAINBOW. 231 species are P. laciniosus, Peak Downs ; P. mammealus, Peak Downs ; P. coronatus, Cape York ; P. keyserlingi, Gayndah ; P. bimaculatus, Peak Downs. To the range of the latter I now add : Canley Vale, near Sydney, and Spiingwood, Blue Mountains. The webs and nesting-habits of these spiders do not appear to have been observed. Usually the species are obtained from withered brandies, to which their colour and form so closely harmonise. The field-note given to me by Mr. J. J. Walker, R.N., with P. salebroms3 ,J agrees with those recorded by Keyserling.40 Two genera, viz., Gehr.nia, Thor., and Taczanowskia, Keys., are included in the group Celamiere. The range of the former is " N. Hollandia; Tasmania; N Zealandia," but the latter occurs only in Peru and Brazil.11 The spiders included in this group are decidedly abnormal — so much so, indeed, that some authors have at first regarded them as members of that very distinct family the Thomisidae. Cam- bridge, for instance, founded a genus, which he named Thlao- soma4"'2 for the family just quoted, but it is now accepted by authors as a synonym of Celcenia, and is, as such, one of the numerous genera included in the great family Argiopidse. All the species of Celcenia are striking forms, and the commonest of them, C. excavata, L.K., and G. (= Thlaosoma) dubium, Cambr., are remarkable for their simulation of the excreta of birds. Prior to receiving Simon's great work, I had, in common with others, regarded G. excavata and C. dubium as Thomisids, and in one of my early papers4 :; in which I described the life-history, mimetic habits and egg-bags of the first named species, I so placed them. Up to the present date, five species of Celcenia have been described from Australia and five from New Zealand. Our Aus- tralian species are : G. kinbergi, Thor., from " New Holland " ; C. excavata, from Brisbane, but now known to range from N.E. Queensland to Tasmania ; C. dubia, Cambr., New Holland (fairly common around Sydney); C. distiucta, Cambr., "New Holland"; and C. calotoides, mihi, from Parkville near Scone. In reference to C.distincta,! pointed out in a previous paper44 that Cambridge founded his species upon an immature and dried 39Raiubow — Zckn cit., p. 31. 40Keyserling — Loc. cit. pp. 125, 127, 131. 41Simon — Loc. cit., pp. 897-S. 42 Cambridge — Journ. Linn. Soc, x., 1869, p. 271. 43Rainbow — Proc. Liun. Soc. N. S. Wales, xxii., 1S96, p. 336. 4iRainbow — Loc. cit., xxvii., 1902, p. 4SS. 232 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. example, and that in all probability a specimen that had fallen into my hands would prove to be synonymous with the species described by Cambridge. I am still inclined to that opinion, but must await material for comparison with the type before venturing to express a decided opinion upon the matter. The example which 1 regard as C. distincta came from Prospect, near Sydney. When discovered it was resting upon a twig, in which position it closely resembled a broken spur. Had it not been for an indiscreet movement upon its part, it would have been passed by unobserved, and so would not have been included in our collection. The life-history and cocooning habits of C. caloloides was described and figured by me last year.4 5 I now figure C. excavata and her egg-bags (Plate Ixiii., fig. 4). The young of Celcenia disperse by " ballooning." They make "foot-baskets" and throw out filaments until the latter are sufficiently long to overcome the laws of gravitation just as do those species previously referred to in this paper. Seven species only are included in the group Arcyerc, and these are divided into two genera, viz., Arci/s, Walck., the range of which is " N. Hollandia et Tasmania; ins. Fidji (brevijmlpus Karsch.); ins. N. Caledonia (perlatus E.Sim.); and Archemorus E. Sim., from Tasmania.4 ,; Nothing has been noted in respect of the weaving and cocoon- ing habits of the Arcyea?. All the specimens I have collected have been taken by " beating " and "sweeping." Arcys lancearis, Walck., ranges from Brisbane to Tasmania ; A. cornutus, L.K., has been recorded from Rockhampton, Bo wen, and Peak Downs, Queensland, and to these localities I now add, Tweed River, New South Wales; A. cdatus, Keys., Sydney; and A. clavatus, Keys. In his description of the latter species, Keyserlingdoes not state the locality from whence his type came, but concludes with a note " Museum Godetf'roy." I have, how- ever, received specimens from the Jenolan Caves District. Arche- morus contains but one species, A. simsoni, E. Sim., and that comes from Tasmania. By the comparative hardness of their abdominal integument, and the cicatrose impressions on the upper surface of the latter, spiders of the group Dolopkonea? present a somewhat superficial resemblance to the Gasteracanthids. They are not, however, 1 Kainbow— Austr. Mus. Rec, vii., 1, 1908, pp. 44-46, fig. 2. 46Simon — Loc. cit., p. 901. NOTES ON AUSTRALIAN ARANEID.E — RAINBOW. 233 armed with spines, and only two species are at present known that possess a vertical tubercle, which arises from the middle of the dorsal surface of the abdomen like a column ; they are Dolophones turriyera, L.K.. and D. nasalis, Butl. Generally speaking, the abdomen is flat, broad, and transversely oval or cordiform. Two genera are included in this group, viz., Dolophones, Walck. =Tholia, L.K., and Pitharatus, K. Sim. The former is dis- tributed over " Ins. Ceram ; ins. Paem. ; N. Hollandia ; and N. Caledonia;'' and the latter "Ins. Java et pen. Malayana."47 Of Australian species D. testudinea, L. K., has been recorded from Port Mackay and Bowen, but it has also been collected in New Caledonia; D. turriyera, L.K., from Brisbane, and to that locality I now add : Sydney, Parramatta ; D. clypeata, L.K., Queensland ; D. noctacantha, Walck , Sydney ; I), nasalis, Butl., Queensland ; D. peltata, Keys., ? locality ; D. tuberculata, Keys., no locality given, but I have receive. 1 specimens from Bungen- dore. New South Wales collected by Mr. A. M. Lea ; D. pilosa, Keys., from Peak Downs, Queensland, to which 1 now add Antonio, near Rydal, New South Wales, collected by .Mr. S. J. H. Moreau ; D. mammeata, Keys., Australia; D coni/'era, Keys., from Peak Downs; and D. simpla, Keys., Sydney. The locality from whence D.clypeata was obtained was unknown to Koch, who states at the foot of his diagnosis : — " Vaterland: 1 Zwei. Examplare in K. K. Museum zu Wien " ;' 8 and ECeyser- ling, in respect of his species, D. mammeata, vaguely records it as " Australien."19 The webs, nests, and cocoons of Dolophones have not been recorded. On referring to my note-book, 1 And that in November, 1890, I collected a specimen of D. testudinea at Belle Vue Hill, Sydney, from an orbicular web. Anapea? is the last section into which this great family is divided. It is split up into four genera, ouly one of which occurs in Australia. This genus, Chasmocephalon, the distribution of which is " Africa max. austr.; N. Hollandia,"50 was founded by Cambridge in 1889 51 for the reception of a West Australian species which he named ueylectum, and which is the only one of the group, so far as we know at present, occurring in Australia. 4 7 Simon— Lot: at., p. 904. 48Kooh.— Die Arach. Austr., i., 1S71, p. 24. ±9Keyserling— Op. cit., Suppl., ]8S6, p. 109. 50Simon— Loc. cit., p. 92S. 5 1 Cambridge— Proc. Zool. Soc, 1889, p. 45. 234 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Chasmoce)>halou was placed by Cambridge in the family Theridiidse, from which it has been removed to tlie Argyopida? by Simon. In the introduction to his paper5'- the Rev. O. P. Cambridge says : — " One of the spiders described here is remark- able, not only for its minuteness, being no more than half a line in length, but for the peculiar character of its cephalothorax, in which the ordinary indented lines showing the junction of the caput and thorax are replaced by two deep oblique fissures, neces- sitating, along with other characters, the formation of a new genus This specimen has been in my possession for many years past, but had until lately been overlooked owing to its having been accidentally concealed among the hairs on one of the legs of a large spider received in 1864 from the Swan River." •^Cambridge — Loc. cit., p. 35. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS from the SOURCES of the BARCOO, WARD and NIVE RIVERS, SOUTH CENTRAL Q U E EN S L A N I). Part II. — Cephalopoda.1 By R. Etheridge, Junr., Curator. (Plates lxv.-lxviii.) Of the few " Ammonites " contained in Air. H. W. Blomfield's Collection only one requires detailed notice ; this will conclude the account of the fossils presented by him to the Trustees. The whole series is a most instructive one, and has added largely to our knowledge of Australian Cretaceous Palaeontology. The species are : — ScJdambacliitt roslratus, -J. Sby., sp. Haphceras daintreei, Eth., sp. Amaltheus olene, Ten Woods, sp. I take the opportunity, also, of describing another Ammonite new to our Cretaceous rocks, and also a Gasteropod ; these were sent to me from the Queensland Museum amongst the Crioceri lately described. Genus ScHLCENBAoniA. X eitmayr, 1875. (Sitz. K. Akad. Wissensch. Wien., Ixxi., 1 Abth., No. 5, 1875 p. 658.) Obs. — A genus created for a series of variable species of Chalk Ammonites with strong and pronounced keels, such as A.rostratus, J. Sby., A. texanus, F. Roemer, A. varians, J. Sby., etc. SCHLCENBACHIA ROSTRATUS, J. Sby., Sp. (Plates lxv., lxvi., lxvii.) Ammonites roslratus, J. Sby., Min. Concho!., ii., 1817, p. 163, pi. clxxiii. Ammonites inflatus, J. Sby., ibid, p. 170, pi. clxxviii. Ammonites inflatus, D'Orb., Pal. Franc. Terr. Cret., i. (Ceph.), 1841, p. 304, pi. xc. 1 Continued from p. ]S8. 236 RECORDS OP THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Ammonite* inflatus, Stoliczka, Foss. Ceph. Cret. Rocks S. India (Pal. Ind.), i., ser. 3, pt. 1, 1863, p. 48, pi. xxvii.,pl. xxviii., pi. xxix., pi. xxx., figs. 1-3. Ammonites (Schlmibachia) inflatus, Eth. til., Geol. Pal. Q'land, &c, 1892, p. 493, pi. xxxiv., tigs. 1-4, (?) pi. xlii., tig. 12. Sp. Chars. — Shell large, discoid ; whorls numerous (precise number unknown) ; venter variable, narrow or broad according to age, broad in young examples, narrower in more mature and aged individuals ; keel more prominent and sharper in older than in younger shells, the surface of the venter always channelled on each side the keel ; abdominal angles defined by lines of huge tubercles varying in character according to position, and always hidden by the embracement of the whorls ; dorsum correspond- ing in width to the venter, with a u-shaped impressed zone, in the young sharply angular but in older individuals wider and shallower ; flanks flat to depressed convex ; umbilical cavity wide and open exposing all the whorls ; section variable, according to age, but always higher than wide, and in strict outline octagonal ; costse on the older and smaller whorls gracefully sigmoidal and usually bifid at about the middle of the flanks, but in aged examples this bifurcation ceases and the costa: are all single, long and short alternately ; tubercles in two or three lines, or rows, on each side of the keel, one row abdominal in position, the other supra-umbilical, and if a third be present it is mid-lateral ; all increase in size with age, the abdominal in the uerontic condition are large, conical and pointed ; spiral lyrse also occur on middle-aged shells, roughening the costa', but faint in the valleys, and crenulating the abdominal rows of tubercles, also visible in the ventral channels. Obs. — Although known as an Australian species I am induced to figure the accompanying specimens as indicative of size and confirmatory of the previous determination. The mouth has not been observed in an Australian specimen and the rostrum only doubtfully so. The variation in size and form of the tubercles is remarkable ; where crossed by the spiral lyrse they are more expanded and blunter as compared with the conical projections of other parts of the shell. The section, inclusive of the dorsal groove, is octagonal in the smaller and younger whorls, but longitudinally elongated in consequence of the projection of the keel ; the embracement of the whorls always conceals the abdominal row of tubercles. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 237 Dr. F. Stoliczka commented on the variability in the number of rows of tubercles in Indian specimens of this species. The same instability appears to exist in the present specimens, one of the matrix casts exhibiting three rows, two others two rows only ; the coiled cast (Pi. lxvii., fig. 1) one row on the concealed whorls, and two on the exposed volutions ; the testiferous example reveals only two, but between these rows, the inter- section of the costaa and lyrse become prominent and sub-echinate. The sigmoidal curvature of the costse is far more noticeable on the youug than the more mature individuals, and the sharpest curve of each sigmoid is always in the ventral channels where it practically forms a continuation or extension of the tubercles, and is directed forwards. The largest matrix cast represents a perfect shell of one foot in diameter. The resemblance between the Australian examples of S. ros- tratus and Stoliczka's figures of specimens from the Ootatoor Group of the Indian Cretaceous, particularly that represented in his Plate xxvii. is very strong. S. ROSTRATUS, J. Sby.. Val\ ANTIPODEUS, Eth. fil. Hystrichoceras, sp., Eth. fil., Mem. K. Soc S. Austr., ii., 1, 1902 p. 47 Hystrichoceras antipodeus, Eth. fil., ibid, pi. vii., fig 6. Obs. — In my account of the South Australian Cretaceous fossils I placed a few small fragmentary Ammonites provision- ally in Hystrichoceras, Hyatt-. These shells, I have since learnt, occur at Point Charles in incredible numbers, and never appear to attain to more than a small size, as I now find through the reception of successive collections. At the time I wrote the fragmentary specimens before me did not reveal what I now believe to be their close relation to the inner, or younger whorls of S. rostratus. Hyatt selected Ammonites coupei, Brong., as the type of his proposed genus, but figured A. varians.3 Our Point Charles Cephalopods present a most unmistakable resemblance to the latter, but less to the former. Now, Mr. A. 2Hyatt— Zittell's Handb. Pal. (Eastman ed.), i. 1900, p. 589. 3 Hyatt— Lor. cit., p. 589, fig. 1233. 18 238 RECOKDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. de Grossouvre. in his account of the French Upper Chalk Ammonites4 amended Neumayr's Schlcenbachia, saying — "Je pren- drai done comme espece type de ce genre Schlbnbachia varians." It follows, therefore, if A. varians, J. Sby., is to be considered a typical example of Hystrichoceras, the latter and Schlcenbachia, Grossouvre, are in a measure synonymous, but, if on the other hand, Hyatt's name is restricted to A. coupei, it may not be so. Be this as it may, until we are better acquainted with the limits of Hystrichoceras as intended by Hyatt, I consider it sounder policy to place the Point Charles shells under Schkenbachia rostratus, retaining my specific name antipodeus as a varietal one. The finer structural details, owing to the peculiar state of preservation, are not visible on the Point Charles specimens, but the abdominal tubercles, as in the larger S. rostratus, are canted forwards towards the mouth. The fine specimen now to be described, from the collection of the Queensland Museum, combines in one two fossils not hitherto recorded from the Australian Cretaceous. These are an Ammonite, appertaining to the genus Perisphincles, Waagen, and a Pleuro- tomarid, in all probability a species of Leptomaria, Deslonchamps. In their present condition these fossils are simply casts, all trace of the tests having disappeared. Both genei'a are met with in the Jurassic and Cretaceous formations, but these types are essentially Cretaceous. For the opportunity of describing them I am indebted to Mr. C. J. Wild, Acting-Director of the Queens- land Museum. Genus Perisphinctes (Waagen), Neumayr and Uhlig, 1881. (Palaeontographica, xxvii., 1881, p. 143.) Perisphinctes kayseri, X. and U. (Plate lxviii.) P. kayseri, N. and U., Palaeontographica, xxvii., 3-6, p. 146, pi. xix., figs. 1, \a and b. Sp. Chars. — Shell large, obtusely planorbiform ; number of whorls unknown, but the volutions increasing in width slowly; venter convex; flanks rounded, although not greatly so; umbilical or dorsal edge abrupt and declivitous ; section longitudinally 4Grossouvre — Mi'm. (arte Geol. Det. Fiance, 1S93, p. 109. LOWER CRETACEOUS FOSSILS — ETHERIDGE. 239 oval. Sculpture consisting of strong costaB, bent very slightly- concave forwards on the flanks, and single as far as the line of embracement of the volutions, there dividing into twu or three subordinate costa? forming fasciculi, with here and there single, interpolated, and free costse, all crossing the venter almost at right angles to the plane of the whorls; tubercles wanting. Obs. — A large Ammonite measuring fourteen by twelve inches on cross diameters, and three feet six and a half around the cir- cumference (central line of the venter). The strong costre, single ou the flanks, usually divide into three subordinate ribs, or there may be two only, at the ventro-lateral or abdominal lines, and then cross the venter. When a costa simply bifurcates, there is always a free interpolated secondary rib. The fasciculation of the costaa, a marked feature of the genus, is here a very pronounced character. In common with other species of Perisphinctes, tubercles are entirely wanting. The smaller Ammonite nestling in the umbilical cavity with the Leptomarice may be a young stage of the more mature shell. A glance at the beautiful figures by Messrs. Neumayr and Uhlig of the North German Hills Formation Perisphinctes5 will at once convince the reader how very closely this Queensland fossil approaches to the European. In fact, I quite fail to appre- ciate any difference between the former and P. kayseri, N. and U., other than that of size, and by a less curvature of the costa- on the local shell, which is slightly more than double the size of the European fossil. It appears to be more akin to this species than to the larger P. losseni, JST. and U.6, although even this lias some points of resemblance to the Australian representative of the senus. j=>v Genus Leptomaria, Deslonchamps, 1865. (Bull Soc. Linn. Noruuandie, ix., 1865, p. 423). Leptomaria (?), sp, (Plate lxviii.) Obs. — The close resemblance of these casts to Leptomaria giyantea, J. de C.'Sby. 7, of the Lower Greensand of England r,Neumayr & Uhlig — Palaeontographica, xxvii., 3-6, 1891, pis. xvii.- xxi. fiXeumayr & Uhlig — Loc. cit., pi. xviii. 7X<>\verby — Trans. Geol. Soc, (2), iv., p. 339, pi. xiv., fig. 16 ; Stoliczka — Leptomaria, Ciet. Fauna S. India (Pal. Ind.), ii. (Gastropoda), 7-10, IStS, p. 3S6. 240 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. emboldens me to refer them to the genus in question, for little more than resemblance can be made of them. L. gigantea is a large conical species with the height and breadth equal, the whorls overlapping, and the sides in general straight. In the present instance, merely internal casts, the whorls were very slightly convex and did not overlap ; no signs of the band or sculpture remain. This slight convexity may not quite afford an index to the true outline, for Stoliczka says of L. indica — " only when the surface of the shell is worn off do they present a continuous convex outline." I have not seen the base, the reference to Leptomafia being made solely on the lateral resemblance to L. gigantea, L. indica, etc. ON A NEW SPECIES OF APHRODITA. By T. Harvey Johnston,- M. A., B.Sc, Parasitologist, Bureau of Microbiology, Sydney; Hon. Zoologist, Australian Museum. (Plate Ixix., tigs. 1-8.). There are in this Museum a number of Polychretes formerly labelled Aphrodita austral is, Baird1. The original description of this species is sufficiently general to include several allied forms. Prof. W. Mcintosh,2 however, gave a much better description, accompanied by figures, of specimens collected off Port Jackson by H. M.S. " Challenger." As he had examined Baird's type in the British Museum, we may safely take his description as a means for comparing our own worms with A. australis. The animals are apparently distinct. Both possess forty-two segments, which narrow very rapidly towards the posterior extremity. Our type, an adult female, is seventy-five milli- metres long ; its greatest width (excluding the setse) is in the region of the tenth, eleventh and twelfth segments, being thirty- two millimetres. The posterior fifteen segments total only nine millimetres in length. The region of greatest width is more anteriorly situated than is shown in Mcintosh's figure. The prostomium or head is very small, rounded, and completely covered by the anterior pair of elytra. The median tentacle is very short, being almost rudimentary. It is more rounded than in A. australis. There are two pair of simple, sessile, black eyes, the anterior pair being much larger and more darkly pigmented than the posterior. The latter are situated above and behind the former (PI. Ixix., tig. 2). The eyes are directed fowards, their appearance from the front being on PI. Ixix., fig. 3. The first stigerous segment (peristomium) is visible dorsally on removing the elytra, as a collar- like ridge behind the prostomium. The scales of the next segment completely overlap this segment and the heas)i Loc. > >>.. ]>■ 51. * Mcintosh -Mon. Hi it. Annelida, Pt. ii. (Ray Soc, 1900, p. 247). ON A NEW SPECIKS OF APHKODITA — JOHNSTON 243 firm structures, dark brown in the adult but much lighter in colour in young specimens. They seem to be arranged in three rows on the neuropodium. The uppermost consists of two very strong, dark seta? ; the next, of three or four smaller and lighter coloured ones ; ami the lowest, of several still smaller bristles. This division is not as well marked posteriorly, the two lower rows becoming one, the uppermost remaining fairly distinct. All of these setse are similar in shape (PI. xlix., tig JS). They taper rather rapidly at the end, which is bent slightly and has a rounded extremity. There are no processes present, but longi- tudinal striations occur. A. australis has ventral seta? of two or three kinds, one ends in a rather broad point and bears minute processes, whilst the others may be either dart-shaped or else slightly hairy. There seems to he only one seta present in each peristomial neuropodium. It is short and thick, very little of it projecting beyond the foot. The next segment bears two on each side, these representing the uppermost of the three rows visible in segments situated more posteriorly. The aciculum of each division of the foot is a short, dark, slightly curved, sharp- pointed body, which does not project. The parapodia are ringed and like the ventral surface of the animal, hear numerous tubercles. The ventral cirri are short, the majority being only two mm. long. They are rather thicker at the base than the dorsal cirri. Each tapers towards the end, becoming swollen some distance from it, so as to become rather spatulate (PI. xlix., tigs. 1,2.) This may be caused by the preserving fluid. There is a ringed appearance externally. A strand of tissue is visible in the middle. The dorsal and ventral cirri of the peristomium are very long compared with those of other segments, and lie close behind the palps, constituting the peristomial tentacles. They are long in the next segment also, but decrease in size rapidly in succeeding segments. Near the base of each ventral cirrus there is situated a small whitish tubercle, probably representing the segmental papilla.5 The dorsal cirri alternate with the elytra, the peristomium bearing cirri. Excepting those which are borne on the most anterior segments and are relatively long, these organs are about nine millimetres long. They are rounded and tapering, ending in a slightly enlarged tip. Like the ventral cirri, they are ringed and possess a median strand of tissue. The peculiar net- 5 Haswell — Note on Segmental Organs of Aphrodita (Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, vii., 1S82, p. 610). 2-11 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. work of fibres, mentioned by Mcintosh, is also present, and in addition there may be seen a number of rather large nucleated cells, some rounded, others branched, resembling nerve cells. They are scattered throughout the organ. Both dorsal and ventral cirri bear some very minute papillae. As before mentioned, there are thirteen pairs of elytra, com- mencing on the second setigerous segment. The three or four anterior pairs are rather smaller than those succeeding. The shape is sub-circular, the scale from the fourth segment measuring seven and a half millimetres in breadth by eight in length. The scar marking the point of attachment of the peduncle connecting it with the dorsum is situated near the outer edge. The margin is entire, but there are some very small processes arranged in a row at fairly regular intervals close to the edge of the scale, there being three or four such rows near the scar. A few processes may occur on the edge itself. The whole scale is whitish, mem- branous and slightly iridescent ; this condition being due to the finely reticulate granulations on the upper surface. The fibrous layer connecting the two surfaces of the elytron can be distin- guished under the high power, the fibres crossing each other in such a way as to form an irregular network. The peduncle of the scale is broad, tabular, and short. It bears a number of small, almost conical capilke with a truncate cylindrical extremity. There is a depression in the centre of the tip (PI. xlix., figs. 5, 6). A strand of tissue is present in the stalk. The type specimen is a ripe female dredged in five fathoms in Nelson's Bay, Port Stephens, in 1882. It contained an enor- mous number of ova, situated mainly in the coelome at the bases of the parapodia. These ova are spherical, averaging 0 21 mm. in diameter and are crowded with yolk granules. Other specimens, all dredged in Port Jackson, were also examined. They varied in size from ninety mm. by twenty-nine mm. to twenty-five mm. by thirteen mm., but agree in all essen- tials with the above description. In one specimen the nerve cord could be seen through the epidermis. All the worms are too macerated for dissection. I propose to name the species Aphrodita hasioelli in honour of Professor W. A. Haswell, a Trustee of this .Museum, who has kindly assisted me with specimens and literature. The main characters of A. haswelli may be summed up thus: — Forty-two segments ; thirteen pairs of elytra ; very short median tentacle ; well developed palps and lateral tentacles ; four sessile eves ; ventral seta' all alike, with somewhat pointed and slightly ON A NEW SPKCIES OF APURODITA — JOHNSTON. 245 curved ends ; the dorsal seta? lying over the dorsum have hook- like extremities. Attached to the ventral surface of the type were a number of organisms, mainly Foraminifera. They were abundant on some specimens and absent on others. Mr. F. Cliapman, of Melbourne, kindly determined those I sent" to him as Miliolina subrotunda, Montagu, an organism characteristic of shore lines and shallow water. There was also another foraminifer present, the test of which resembles a Truncatxdina. At least one species of this genus6 may at times cover its test with par- ticles of sand loosely cemented together. This was observed on some of the worms. Mcintosh" mentions that an arenaceous foraminifer lives parasitical ly on the ventral surface of A. australis. Possibly the same organism is referred to, though in our specimens the test is not really arenaceous, but chitinous, the sand forming an extra covering. Other animal remains also occurred, and may as well be mentioned here. A small siliceous sponge was located between two parapodia. Entangled in the felt and seta? were Foraminifera (chiefly Textularia) ; siliceous and calcareous sponges ; a free living Nematode (1 Enoplida?) which was too macerated for determination ; Holothurian spicules; Echinoid spines ; and fragments of shells. 6, Chapman — Foiaminifera, 1902, p. 220. 7 Mcintosh— Chall. Rep., Zool., xiii., 1S85, p. 36. On a CESTODE from DACELO GIG AS, BODD. (Communication from the Government Bureau of Microbiology, Sydney.) By T. Barvby Johnston, M.A., B.Sc, Parasitologist, Bureau of Microbiology, Sydney; Hon. Zoologist, Australian Museum. (Plate Ixx.). My friend, Mr. S. J. Johnston, of the Biology Department, SydLey University, recently handed over to me a collection of Entozoa, mainly Cestoda, collected by himself and Professor J. P. Hill. The specimens now to be described were obtained from the stomach of a Liughing Jackass (Dacelo gigas, Bodd.) at Gloucester, New South Wales. Tapeworms do not commonly occur in the stomach, most of them preferring the alkaline conditions and abundant food supply present in the duodenum. The largest specimen is about one hundred and twenty milli- metres long and consists of approximately four hundred and twenty proglottids. Just behind the scolex, the breadth is 0-3 mm., gradually increasing to two mm. at about one third of the total length of the strobila, the remaining segments being prac- tically uniform (2*5 mm.) In flattened and mounted specimens the dimensions are increased. A neck is hardly recognisable, as constrictions appear margin- ally immediately behind the scolex and segmentation is distinctly seen in the strobila one millimetre from the head. There is no marked constriction between the scolex and the strobila. There is very little overlapping of the anterior edges of segments by the posterior parts of those in front of them, nor is there much lateral projection. Excepting in the anterior fifth or quarter of the chain, there is not much difference in the size of the segments, the ripe and the sexually mature proglottids measuring about two to two and a-half millimetres in width by 07 to 08 mi), in breadth. They are thus from three to four times as broad as long. Those near the scolex are 0'4 mm. long by 03 mm. broad, the succeeding segments gradually broadening. ON A CESTODK FHOM DACliLO GIGAS, liODD. — JOHNSTON. 247 There is no marked narrowing or lengthening at the posterior end of the chain, the last segments being only a little longer and slightly narrower than those further forward. The scolex is somewhat rounded, but its width is greater than its length, that is if the rostellum be not included as it may be retracted (PI. lxx., fig. 1.) Its size in this latter condition is about 0 45 mm. broad by 031 mm. long. It is thus only a little wider than the anterior segments. The retractile rostellum is 0T4 mm. long, its base being about O05 mm. in breadth, the whole structure being short and conical. Near its apex, there is borne a single circlet of from thirty to thirty-six hooks, all similar in shape and size, and measuring about O05 mm. in length. They are so closely arranged that there is difficulty in accurately determining their number, arrangement and structural details. Their curvature is slight. The apical attachment is long and apparently rather pointed, the posterior attachment being short and blunt and rounded. The free end is short and pointed. A cavity is present (PI. lxx , fig. 2). The apices of the hooks do not reach the summit of the rostellum. An apical muscle plug is absent. The scolex bears four typical suckers which are unarmed and possess fairly prominent rims. The cavity of each is nearly spherical, the internal diameter being almost Ol mm. The open- ings are directed more towards the front than towards the sides. Two suckers lie on each surface, i.e., two dorsal and two ventral. Their musculature is well developed (PI. lxx., tig. 1). The cuticle is well defined and smooth. A basement mem- brane is hardly distinguishable and sub-cuticular muscle fibres are not well developed. The medulla occupies the middle third of the thickness of the parenchyma. The cortex contains abun- dance of calcareous corpuscles, especially in the neck region. They are absent in the scolex. Their shape is rounded or elliptical, the size varying from 0*003 to 0-008 mm. in diameter. The musculature of the cortex is strongly developed. The longitudinal muscles are disposed in two concentric sets of bundles, numbering about seventy altogether. The inner set consists of smaller and fewer bundles than the outer. The inner masses are generally opposite the outer, rather than alternating with them. Laterally these muscles-bundles are very small and numerous, being separated by the fibres of the transverse muscles, which lie within the longitudinal but pass out laterally to the cuticle. These transverse fibres are poorly developed so that it is difficult to exactly define the limits of the cortex and 248 RECORDS OP THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. medulla. The dorsoventral fibres are more distinct and pass between the longitudinal bundles and through the medulla. The nervous system is not well marked. There appears to be only one longitudinal fasciculus, this being situated on the outer side of each main longitudinal excretory vessel. I cannot make out the various concomitant fasciculi described in some Taeniadse. The excretory system consists of the usual parts. The outer longitudinal vessel has a much wider lumen than the inner one, the former representing the dorsal and the latter the ventral vessel. Their relative position varies somewhat in the segments but the inner trunk is generally placed more ventrally. Con- necting the outer trunks, there is in the posterior part of each proglottis, a wide transverse commissural canal. There do not appear to be any valves present. Of the genital system, the earliest trace appears in about the sixtieth-segment, as a cord of cells representing the rudiments of the cirrus sac and vas deferens. The testes are well developed in the hundredth. Meanwhile, the vitelline gland, ovary and vagina have made their appearance. In the next eighty proglottids both sexes are mature. Beyond this the testes disappear rapidly, the segments becoming full of developing ova. The final prog- lottids are densely crowded with eggs containing hexacanth embryos (onchospheres). The genital apertures are marginal and unilateral, being on the right side. Very rarely there may be an opening on the left instead. There is no genital eminence, the position of the aper- ture only being visible in stained and mounted preparations unless the cirrus be more or less everted. It is situated near the junction of the anterior third and posterior border of the over- lapping portion of the preceding segment. The testes are situated in a single layer lying nearer the dorsal surface. They gradually iuci'ease in number, the more anterior segments possessing about fifty, later segments about sixty. They are thus fairly numerous. Their shape is subspherical, the average diameter being about thirty-seven micra. They are well within the medulla and occur more abundantly in the middle and posterior region of each proglottis, comparatively few being present in the anterior third. Arising from each testis is a rather strong vas efferens which joins with others to form the vas deferens at about the middle of the anterior part of the segment, in front of the ovary. This passes on laterally towards the right, becoming enlarged and coiled near the neighbourhood of the excretory vessels. It is here strongly muscular. After passing ON A CESTODE FROM DACELO GIGAS, BODD. — JOHNSTON. 249 ventrally to both excretory vessels and the longitudinal nerve, it enters the posterior end of the cirrus sac. This sac is thick-walled and muscular. It does not contain a vesicula seminalis, but that part of the vas deferens which lies within it, is again considerably coiled. In some segments the sac was parti)7 everted, resembling a short cylinder fifty-seven li long by fifty fx broad ; and in one case (PI. lxx., fig. 4) the cirrus seen projecting under compression at the end of the cylinder was as a delicate transparent tube twenty-eight fx long by eight /x in diameter. There was no trace of spines on it. There is a strong sphincter at the external opening of the cirrus sac. The vagina is a delicate tube lying immediately behind and below the vas deferens, the com se of the two ducts being generally parallel. It opens externally into the genital cloaca just behind the cirrus sac. in mature segments the vagina proceeds inwards for h short distance ventrally to both excretory canals, becoming gradually enlarged to form the elongated, thin-walled, pyriform receptaculum seminis. Masses of sperms were present in the structure. From its inner broad end there courses inwards and backwards a narrow somewhat coiled tube, the fertilisation duct, which possesses well-developed walls. The common oviduct enters this duct, the ova become fertilised here and are carried onwards to receive the secretions from the vitelline and shell glands before entering the uterus. The ovary is a small organ situated in the anterior part of the segment, at about its middle, though in young proglottids, it is nearer the edge bearing the genital pure. It is not distinctly bilobed, but consists of a number of short tubular glands slightly divided into two masses. The products are discharged ultimately into the short common oviduct. This joins the fertilising duct. I could not detect paired oviducts. The ovary, as a whole, is rather rounded, extending dorso-ventrally as well as posteriorly, the common duct being surrounded by it during most of its course. The vitelline gland is small, slightly bilobed and traverse])' elongated. Its duct joins the fertilising duct after the union of the oviduct with the latter. The shell gland is very small and not easily distinguishable. It appears to me to lie between the vitelline gland and the ovary. The whole female complex is so small and crowded that the details are not as satisfactorily followed out as I would wish, It seems as if the uterus arises as a tube, the continuation of the fertilising duct. This gives off very numerous, narrow, branching diverticula, which come to surround the testicular 250 RECORDS OF THIS AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. vesicles as in Dipyliclium caninum, Linn. These pouches become tilled with ova, and lose their connection with the rest of the female system by the abortion of the uterus. Thus the ova are seen in section in small groups lying in a small capsule in the parenchyma. The testes have become atrophied long before this, the cirrus sac being the only male structure still persisting. The segment becomes so full of eggs tliat not only is the medulla crammed with them, but the lateral fields becomes almost obliter- ated, ova being present laterally beyond the excretory canals close up to the cuticle. The longitudinal muscle bundles persist in ripe segments. The eggs are spherical, excepting where crowded, and then they become polygonal through mutual pressure. Two shells are present and are fairly widely separated. The diameter of the embryo is eighteen /x, that of the outer shell being twenty-six p. The arrangement of the booklets in the onchosphere is illustrated on PI. lxx., tig. 8. Each hooklet is 0*017 mm long and appears to possess a slightly swollen extremity. The Cestode belongs to the family of Dilepinidse and to the sub-family Dipylidiime (Prof. Fuhrmann's1 classification, 1908). Its characters are such that they may be regarded as belonging to a new generic type. I accordingly propose the name Similuncinus dacelonis, gen. et. sp. nov., the generic name referring to the possession of hooks all similar in shape. The characters of the proposed genus may he stated provision- ally, as follows : — Retractile rostellum bearing a single circlet of uniform hooks; four unarmed suckers; unilateral genital pores ; genital papilla not prominent; single genitalia; numerous testes mainly situated behind the ovary; ovary in the anterior part of the segment ; uterus a reticulum surrounding the testes at first, but afterwards becoming aborted so that the eggs lie in the masses surrounded by the parenchyma; the genital ducts pass ventrally to longitudinal nerve and excretory canals. This new genus would differ from Dipylidium, R. Lckt., in possessing only one row of uniform hooks and single genitalia ; from Monopylidium, Fuhrmann, in the structure of the rostellum and the position of the sex canals in regard to the excretory system ; from all genera in the sub family Dilepininse in the character of the uterus. Type presented to the Trustees of the Australian Museum. ■Fuhrmann— Die Cestoden der Viigel (Zool. Jahrb., x., Suppl. B<3., I, I "08, p. 27). AN AUSTRALIAN CH^ETOGNATH. By T. Harvey Johnston, M.A., B.Sc, Parasitologist, Bureau of Microbiology, Sydney ; Hon. Zoologist, Australian Museum. (Plate Ixxi.) The Chaetognatha of the South Pacific are very imperfectly known. Dr. G. H. Fowler1 in his Monograph mentions "the amazing fact that between I60Q E. and 80° W. we have not a single record of a Chaetognath . . . ." Dr. O. Steinhaus2 recorded the capture of Sagitta enflata, Grassi, in 28° S., 160° E., that is west of New Caledonia, and Prof. F. J. Parker'3 mentioned the finding of Krohnia hamata, Moebius, south of New Zealand. Mr. S. Kent's4 Sagitta tricuspidata from the South Pacific bears no definite locality and is now regarded as a variety of S. hexaptera, d'Orb. Excluding the important work of Mr. T. Aida5 on Japanese forms and of Dr. Fowler on specimens collected by the "Siboga'"; (East Indies), "Challenger"7 (Arctic and Sub- Antarctic waters), and " Discovery " 7 (Antarctic Ocean), I do not know of any other references to Pacific forms. There lias not been any record whatever of any Australian members, excepting the mention of Sagitta, sp., by Mr. T. Whitelegge, 8 as occurring in Port Jackson. This aberrant group appears to be well represented in New South Wales waters. In 1898 Mr. Whitelegge found some specimens washed up on Maroubra Beach, just south of Sydney. These were presented to the Sydney University (Biology Depart- ment), some of which were given to me by Dr. J. P. Hill. These are described in this paper. In 1906 Professor W. A. HaswHl 1 Fowler — Chaetognatha (Siboga Expel. Monogr., xxi., 1906, p. 67). r Steinhaus — Die Verbreitung der Chaetoguathen im Sudatlantischen und indischen Ozean, 1896. s Parker — Remarks on a Spadella fromN.Z. waters. (Trans. N.Z. Instit., xxviii., 1895. p. 758.) 4 Kent — On a New Species of Sagitta from the South Pacific. (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, (4), v., 1870, p. 268.) 5 Aida— Chaetognaths of Misaki Harbour. (Annot. Zool. Japon., i., Parts 1, 2, 1897, p. 13.) 6 Fowler — Loc. cit. \ Fowler — Chaetognatha (National Antarctic Expedtn., iii., 1908.) The "Challenger" forms are recorded along with those obtained by the " Discovery." 8 Whitelegge —List of Marine and Freshwater Invert. Fauna of Pt. Jackson. (Journ. Roy. Soc. N. S. Wales, xxiii., 18S9, p. 163.) OftO RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. collected some about fifty miles east of Sydney ; in 1907 Mr. J. H. Close secured a fair number of small forms in Port Jackson, and last year (1908) Mr. S. J. Johnston secured some more, also in Sydney Harbour. Besides Sagitta serroden- tata, Krohn, several other species are represented in the above collections, all of which have been handed over to me. Fowler9 and Michael10 state that the best preservative for these delicate organisms is weak formalin ; spirit producing considerable distortion and the disappearance of the corona ciliata. Whitelegge's specimens were preserved in alcohol, hence the contracted state of the worms. Many writers have mentioned the fact that insufficient descrip- tions have led to the establishment of many doubtful species. The limits of variation in this group being very considerable, the examination of a large number of specimens is necessary to firm]}' establish and accurately define a species. There were only a dozen at my disposal, all already mounted, and consequently I am giving as complete a description as possible, leaving authorities on this group to decide the validity of the proposed new species. The main results are tabulated along lines similar to those in Fowler's papers. The headings are (a) length of animal in milli- metres, (b) length of tail in mm , (c) length of tail as approxi- mate percentage of total length, (d) number of jaws, (e) number of anterior teeth, (f) number of posterior teeth. The tail fin is not included in the following measurements : — a b c d e f 12 21 17 5 9 6-7 9 ova present 135 2 5 18 9? 1 1 i) i> 14-2 2-5 17 9 6-7 S-9 15 0 2-7 18 9 8-12 7-9 >1 >! 150 2-4 l(i 9 10? 8-9 adult 17-.-. 29 16-5 9 7? 11 ova present 18-2 3 0 L6'5 9 7 7 f » i) 185 3 4 18 9 7 ? 8? » » s » 1110 31 16 9 12 7 adult 213 37 17 9 1 9 ? ) > 24 0 4 0 1C-5 9 6? 11 >> 9 Fowler — hoc. ci'., p. 2. 10 Michael — Notes on the Identification of Chaetognaths. .xv., 1908, No. 2. J (Biolog. Bull. AN AUSTRALIAN OHAETOGNATH — JOHNSTON. 253 The last specimen is the most typical and has been selected as the type, the description referring mainly to it. The head is fairly prominent, its breadth being about 1/8 mm. and its length one millimetre. The jaws are set fanwise, the animal being in a state of medium contraction. There is a neck constriction present, the breadth here being one mm. From the point the body widens rapidly to 1*2 mm. and then gradually to 2'7 mm. in the region of the ventral ganglion, finally reaching 32 mm. at about the middle of the body. The breadth is fairly well maintained almost to tail septum, where there is a sudden narrowing to 1*5 mm. The tail is four mm. long, thus being one-sixth of the total length of the animal (sixteen to eighteen per cent.). The extremity is rounded. There is no collarette present. The lateral fields are rather wide, and the longitudinal muscles moderately developed. Consequently the worm is trans- parent and flabby (Plate Ixxi., fig.l). There are two pairs of fins, the anterior being carried out of their normal position in most specimens, probably the result of preservation in alcohol. The relative position and size of the anterior and posterior fins have been determined by examining serial sections kindly lent by Professor Haswell. The two pairs are approximately equal in length. The anterior is perhaps slightly longer and extends from just in front of the ventral ganglion backwards for about five mm., its greatest width being at some distance behind the ganglion. It is not quite as wide as the posterior fin. Between the two tins on the same side there is a considerable interval amounting to about eight per cent, of the total length of the worm. The posterior fin is somewhat trian- gular, the apex being rounded. The greatest width is just behind the tail septum. The anterior end does not extend as far forwards as the front of the ovary in some specimens, while in others it reaches beyond it. The posterior extremity of this fin is 1*3 mm. distant from the vesicula seniinalis. The tail fin is bilobed and prominent. It does not extend as far forwards as the seminal vesicles. Rays are present in all fins. A characteristic feature of the Chaetognatha is the possession of jaws, the number varying within the species. If the table be referred to, it will be noticed that there are nine pairs in every specimen examined, though the animals vary in size from twelve to twenty-four millimetres. The presence of nine pairs may be specifically constant. They are rather strongly curved, the back of the " point" of the jaw being a little more bent than the back of the " shaft." The inner edges of point and shaft are evenly curved. The jaws of Sagitta furcata, Steinhaus, and S. enfiala, 19 254 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Grassi, possess certain characters noted by Dr. T. Krumbach,11 which are very similar to what occurs in this species. S. sibogce, Fowler, judging from a sketch of the tip of a jaw, seems to approach even more nearly. The base of the point is oval, and the pulp is situated nearer the back than the front edge, but not as closely as in S. furcata. The pulp reaches further towards the tip than is figured in other species. The shaft bears neither crest nor serrations. The outermost jaws are longest, being nearly a millimetre in length, and most curved. Their bases are relatively small. The youngest are only about 025 mm. long, and are least curved. They possess a large basal part (PI. lxxi., tigs. 2, 3, 4). There are two rows of teeth, the anterior containing from six to twelve, the posterior seven to eleven. These teeth are fairly long and strong, the points being small and sharp, especially in the case of those belonging to the posterior row. The inmost tooth of this row measured 079 mm. long, -013 mm. being the greatest breadth (PI. lxxi., tig. 2). The vestibular ridge is rather high and hears a number of low rounded papillae. It ends in a prominent lateral process. The whole structure does not extend as far outwards as the tooth row, two posterior teeth being situated quite externally to it (PI. lxxi., fig. 5). A satisfactory account of the nervous and sensory systems cannot be given here, on account of the imperfect preservation. Neither optic nerves nor eyes are recognisable with any degree of certainty. The position of the brain is outlined on PI. lxxi., fig. 2. The buccal nerves could be traced only a little distance. The ventral ganglion is rather long and broad. It lies between the epidermis and the muscle layer. The corona ciliata has disappeared from all specimens. One specimen shows a structure which may be a remnant of that organ. The body wall consists of the usual layers, (a) epidermis, (b) muscle layer, and, internally, (c) the coelomic epithelium. There is a very delicate basement membrane between (a) and (b). The muscles are arranged in four bundles, two dorso-lateral and two ventro-lateral, each pair being separated along the mid-dorsal and mid-ventral lines respectively by the mesentery. The indivi- dual muscle fibres are easily recognisable. The oblique and transverse muscles of the head, whose function is to move the jaws, are powerful. 11 Krumbach— Zoolog. Jahrb. Abth. Syst., xviii., 1903, p. 579. ANT AUSTRALIAN CHAKTOGNATH — JOHNSTON. 255 The ccelomic epithelium lines the inner surface of the muscle as a single celled layer. It is present on the mesentery and forms the ccelomic lining of the alimentary canal. This canal extends as a simple wide tube from the slit like longitudinal mouth to the anus situated just behind the junction of the body and tail. There are no diverticula in the neck region. The mouth and anus are both ventral. The wall of the digestive tube consists of a single laj'er of columnar cells, the enteric epithelium covered on the outer side by the coelomic epithelium. The intestine is suspended by the dorsal and ventral inesen- teiips. Thus the body codome is divided into two parts longi- tudinally. The tail ccelorne is similarly divided. The anterior septum, dividing the head ccelorne from that of the body, passes forwards laterally. Tlie tail septum is well marked and projects behind the anus into the tail, consequently it •appears in a trans- verse section of the anterior end of the tad (PI. lxxi., fig. 8). The gonads are well developed in the type, but are longer in one of the smaller specimens. The ovaries extend forwards about as far as the anteiior end of the posterior fin, a little beyond it in some cases. They are apparently not attached along the middle of the lateral border but just ventrally to it. This may be the result of some distortion, though I do not think so. The oviduct is on the outer edge of each ovary, and terminates later- ally at the junction of the body and tail. The mature ova are spherical, measuring 0"24 mm. in diameter. The testes are located in the anterior and lateral part of each tail ccelorne, their length being about 1 -5 millimetres. Sperm morula? averaging 0"(M mm. in diameter fill this ccelorne. The vasa deferentia are small, but each terminates in ripe animals in a large prominently projecting vesicula seininalis As mentioned before, neither the posterior tins nor the tail fin reach these structures, which are situated about IT mm. in front of the extremity of the tail. The detailed histological structure of some Chaetognaths is described frilly by Dr. O. Hertwig. 12 The main characters of this species, for which the name Sagitta austrdlis is proposed, may be summed up thus : — Head rather small; neck distinct ; no collarette; body transparent and flabby, thickest in the posterior third, tapering gradually for- 12 Hertwig — Die Chsetognathen. (Jenaische Zeitschr. Med. und Naturwiss., xiv., 1880, p. 196.) 256 RECORDS OF THE AUSTKALIAN MUSEUM. wards but very rapidly near the tail septum ; tail segment rather narrow, between sixteen and eighteen per cent, of total length of animal ; anterior fins long and narrow, extending to about the middle of the ventral ganglion ; posterior fin shorter and some- what broader than the anterior, being widest at about the plane of the tail septum, it does not reach vesicula seminalis ; tail fin very deeply bilobed and not extending forwards to reach vesicula; jaws nine, strong, most are well curved, youngest with very strong base but nearly straight; anterior teeth six to twelve; posterior seven to eleven ; vestibular ridge bearing short, rounded papilla? and ending in a prominent process laterally ; ridge shorter than posterior row of teeth. Its nearest allies appear to be S. bedoti, Beraneck,13 S. furcala, Steinhaus, 14 and S. sibogce, Fowler.15 It differs from S. bedoti in that the latter has a firm body, five to seven jaws, five to thirteen anterior teeth and from ten to thirty-two posterior teeth, a much longer tail segment (twenty-one to thirty-five per cent.), and posterior fins reach the vesicular S. furcata differs from it in the absence of a well marked neck ; in the position of the widest part of the posterior fin, and in its greater length ; in the distance between the two fins ; the number of jaws (six to nine) and anterior teeth (three to eight). In S. sibogce, there are large head ; short collarette ; firm, rather opaque body ; longer tail segment (twenty-one to thirty-three per cent.) ; tail fin reaching vesicula?; slender and comparatively straight jaws. In the above comparisons, only the points of difference from S. australis have been mentioned. I wish to express my indebtedness to Professor Haswell for the loan of literature and specimens, and to Dr. C. H. Fowler's Monograph of the Siboga Chaetognaths. Type presented to the Australian Museum. The sections are the property of the Biology Department, Sydney University. All drawings were made using a Zeiss camera lucida. II Beraueck — Rev. Suisse Zool., iii., 1895, p. 137. 14 Steinhaua — Loc. cit. « Fowler— " Siboga," loc. cit., p. 21. On a New H^E MO PROTOZOAN. By T. Harvey Johnston, M.A., B.Sc, Assistant Government Microbiologist; Hon. Zoologist, Australian Museum. Contribution from the Government Bureau of Microbiology, Sydney, New South Wales.) (Pi. lxxii.) The blood parasites of Australian animals have received very little attention as yet. Our only snake haemoprotozoan known is Hcemogreqarina shattocki,1 described by Messrs. L. W. Sambon and C. G. Seligmann. The host is the Diamond Snake, Python spilotes, Lacep. Blood tilms taken from a close ally, Python amethystimis, Schneider, captured dining a trip to Port Curtis, Queensland, revealed the presence of numerous parasites inhabiting the erythrocytes only. The percentage of infected cells was 1"8. A few corpuscles were infected by two sporozoans (PI. lxxii., fig. 25.) By using Giemsa's stain the organism becomes differentiated from the host and appears bluish whilst the latter stains pinkish. The nuclei of both become deeply stained. I have followed Sambon and Seligmann's terminology and their extended definition of the genus Hiemogregarina. The red corpuscles vary in size from twenty p long by 96 p broad to nineteen p by seven p, the variation being mainly due to alteration as a result of making the film. A typical specimen is shown in PI. lxxii ., 6e. 1, \T No merozoites were present either in the plasma or in the cells. There were plenty of young forms, long, thin, and more or less crescentic in shape, lying within the host. The concavity more usually faced the nucleus of the latter (PI. lxxii., fig. 2, 3). The opposite condition is seen in PI. lxxii., fig. 4, 7. The ends of the parasite are nearly alike, though, generally, one is slightly wider ami more rounded than the other. The former is regarded as the anterior end, and the nucleus is often 1 Sambon & Seligmann — Proc. Zool. Soc, 1907, p. 284. 258 RECOUPS OP I'll K AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. seen nearer this end as a dense deeplystaining body, having about the .same width as the animal. The size of the parasite at this staye is from nine ll by 18 ^ to thirteen ll by 2-4 ll, the nucleus being about two ll long. One or two specimens were only as long as the nucleus of the host (PI. lxxii., fig. 23). The corpuscles were not much affected at this stage, their nuclei remaining central. The yuung forms increase in bulk and become encapsuled as spoionts, the ultimate host being probably a tick since the->e ectoparasites are frequent on snakes. Tn the encapsuled parasite the posterior end becomes bent round so as to he close to the cell (P! lxxii., fig. 12, 14). This "tail" is very short and is not distin- guishable in most of the specimens. The nucleus is either median or approaches the anterior end, and is now relatively larger and less dense, vacuoles appearing to separate its chromatin fibres. The cytoplasm has a number of deeply-staining granules occurring at each end of the cell. The capsule is hard to make oUt unless the tail is well marked (PI. lxxii., fig. 14, 21). The sporonts vary from twelve ll by 3G ll to 105 ll by 2*4 ll, the average being 108 ll by three ll. They are thus very much smaller than //. shattocki. There are also large forms present. These resemble schizonts (i.e. , the stage which undergoes fission to produce merozoites) in most of their characters but do not possess the large refracting granules in the cytoplasm. These cells are reniform and broad, with a fairly distinct capsule. The nucleus is round, large and approximately medium. The size of the latter is from three to four fx long by 2 5 to three /t broad, the parasite varying from 13 5 ll bv 4-5 fi to eleven ll by four ll. Perhaps these are only large sporonts in which the "tail" is not visible (PI. lxxii., figs. 19,21). The host cell does not seem to be affected to any degree by the organism, though the nucleus is usually displaced, sometimes actually lying against the periphery (PI. lxxii, fig. 21). The only ones of both host and parasite are parallel in nearly every in- stance. Exceptions are sketched in PI. lxxii, tigs. 10, 16. The distortion of the host cell shown in some of the figures was, no doubt, artificially produced in making the film. I propose for this sporozoan the name, Ifmmogregarina amethystina, borrowing the specific name of the host. Its nearest ally seems to be //. pococki, Sambon and Seligmann, from the erythrocytes of the Indian python, Python molorus, I. inn. The range of Python aoiethysliua, Schn., is from the Moluccas and Timor, through New Guinea to New Britain and New Ireland and southerly to Northern Queensland. ON A NEW H^MOPROTOZOAN — JOHNSTON. 259 I liave recently taken a number of ticks from the specimen but have not yet examined them to ascertain whether the other stage in the life-cycle is present in them. I wish to express my thanks to the Director of the Bureau of Microbiology (Dr. F. Tidswell), for his assistance and for his courtesy in obtaining permission to publish this note of work, performed, mainly, in the State Laboratory ; also, to Mr. A. R. McCullocIi, of this Museum, for determining the snake. The figures were drawn using compensating ocular, one- eighteenth oil immersion objective and a Zeiss camera lucida. A type slide has been presented to the Trustees of the Australian Museum, Sydney. DESCRIPTIONS of NEW and NOTES on OTHER AUSTRALIAN POLYPLACOPHORA. P>y C. Hedlky, Conchologist, and A. F. Basset Hull. (Plates lxxiii.-lxxiv.) Lepidopleukus badius, sp. nov. (Plate lxxiii., tigs. 1-2.) Shell small, broad in proportion to length, rather low, rounded dorsally. Sculpture uniformly grain-striate. Colour entirely ochraceous, the valve margin sometimes rust. Anterior valve densely radially grained. Median valves narrow with a straight posterior edge, central and jugal areas confluent, lateral areas indistinctly indicated by a slight fold. About fifty grain-rows to a valve, medially about a dozen grains are close set in a row, but wider apart from row to row, the rows longitudinal in the middle, converging at the sides, and losing their regularity on the lateral areas. Posterior valve with ceutral elevated apex and concave posterior slope. Girdle beset with small chaffy scales, fringed with spicules. Interior white, sutural plates rounded, jugal sinus very broad and shallow. Insertion plates entirely absent. Length, 6 ; breadth, 3-5 mm. Station. — Under stones in sheltered pools at low water. Habitat. — Balmorai and Shark Island (Port Jackson) ; Long Reef near Narrabeen. Though a rare shell, fifteen specimens were found under one small stone at Long Reef. The body of the animal is of a deep red colour. Affinities. — Related to L. matthewsianus, Bednall, 1 from St. Vincent Gulf, South Australia, but distinguished by the darker colour, broader shape and coarser granules of L. badius, and especially by the direction of the grain-rows on the lateral areas. In L. matthewsianus the rows are oblique to those of the central area, but in L. badius they are confused. In L. mailhew- sianus the apex of the posterior valve is nearer the margin. A more distant relation is the New Zealand L. inquinatus, Reeve,2 in which the lateral areas are differentiated by small crowded grains set in rows oblique to those of the central area. i Bednall -Proc. Malacol. Soc, vii., 1906, p. 92, pi. ix., f. 1. - Sykes — Proe. Malacol. Soc, ii., 1896, p. S6., pi. vi., f. 4. AUSTRALIAN POLYPLACOPHORA — HEDLEY AND HULL. 261 Chiton vauclusensis, sj). nov. (Plate lxxiv., figs. 19-23.) Shell rather large, oblong, strongly elevated, caiinated, side slope slightly curved and steep. Colour an olive buff, flamed with sepia in the pleural areas, the jugal area with sepia dots, most ribs picked out with orange or chocolate. Anterior valve ornamented with irregular flattened pustules arranged in 20-28 radiating riblets multiplied by splitting of the fewer radii of the young shell. Posterior valve : niucro very prominent, slightly in front of the centre, posterior slope concave, rayed with tubercular ribs similar to the head valve, but the grains rounder and flatter. Median valves : lateral areas raised, carrying three to four prominent tuberculate ribs, the ribs tending to divide as growth proceeds. The central area furrowed by about thirty-three strong, raised, longitudinal ribs, of which the central crowns the valve, crowded medially and wider spaced distally, narrower than their deep, square cut interstices, traversing the whole jugal tract and leaving only the apex of the valve smooth. Girdle tessellated by alternate bands of buff and bottle-green, covered with large compactly imbricating polished convex scales, obsoletely striated. Interior pale bluish-green ; sinus deep, narrow, denticulate. Anterior valve having 8, median valve 1-1, and posterior valve 12 slits ; teeth finely pectinate on the edge. Eaves spongy. Length, 33; breadth, 20 mm. Station. — On the upper side of stones in 4-5 feet of water at dead low tide. Habitat. — Bottle and Glass Point, Vaucluse, Port Jackson ; two specimens. Affinities. — Related to Chiton limans, Sykes, but larger, more elaborately sculptured, and differing in the lateral areas and girdle scales. Chiton coxi, Pilsbry. (Plate lxxiii., figs. 3-5.) Chiton coxi, Pilsbry, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1894, p. 85. This species has not hitherto been figured. We therefore offer an illustration of a specimen 17 mm. long and 10 mm. broad from the Bottle and Glass Reef, Port Jackson. The considera- tion of it leads us to the next species. 262 RECORDS OF THE AUSTHALIAN MUSEUM. Chiton torri, sp. nov. (Plate lxxiii., figs. 6-11.) The individual figured is 15mm. long and 9 mm. broad. It was taken at Hog Bay, Kangaroo Island, S. Australia, by Dr. W. G. Torr and one of us during the Australian Association excur- sion of the " Governor Musgrave " in January, 1907. Hitherto it has been confused by local collectors with C. coxi,:i but we regard it as a distinct species which replaces and represents G. coxi in western waters. Instead of the usual diagnosis, it may be better defined by the following comparison with related forms. Differential character's of Chiton jugosus, Gould, C. coxi, Pilsbrv, and C. torri, H. & H. : — C. torri. C. jugosus. Central area — Ribs high, rounded, prominent, of the same width the whole length. Colour bright orange- brown. Lines 10-14 on large, 5-7 on small speci- mens. 5-9 on posterior valve. Sulci deep, wide, colour blue. Anterior valve — Concentrically lined, 12-14 lines. Posterior valve — Mucro blunt, in front of middle, posterior slope slightly concave. Girdle scales — Large, convex, obso letely striated, not smaller towards the outer edge. Small light coloured triangle on tail valve, extending broadly across girdle. Tegmentum — Minutely punctulate. Interior — 8-1-12. Ribs low, sloping downwards, not promi- nent. Colour: tine line of dark olive green. 4-6 on median valves, 3-4 on posterior. Sulci shallow, narrow, colour similar to main body of shell. Concentrically lined, 6-S lines. Similar to C. jugosus, but posterior slope even less concave. Similar to C. jugosus. Wry faint small tri- angle on tail valve, does not extend over girdle. Minutely punctulate. 8-1-12. G. coxi. Ribs low, sloping downwards, not promi- nent. Colour: tine line of dark olive-brown. 6-11 on median valves, 6 on posterior. Sulci very shallow and broad. Colour similar to main body of shell. Smooth, finely reti- culated. Colour of body of shell. Mucro acute, central, projecting, posterior slope deeply concave. Dense, small, stri- ated, slightly convex. Smaller towards edge of girdle. Light coloured tri- angle on tail valve not constant, and where present a light l>ar of even width crosses the girdle. Minutely reticulate. 8-l-(10-12). a Bednall— Proc. Malacol. Soc, ii., 1897, p. 151. AUSTRALIAN P0LYPLAC0PH0RA — HEDLBY AND HULL. 263 Chiton translucens, sp. nov. (Plate lxxiv., figs. 14-18.) Shell large, oblong, elevated, carinated, side slopes straight. Colour buff clouded with olive and sage-green and microscopi- cally freckled with rufous, in some specimens shaded with orange- red on the lateral areas. Under the lens the whole surface finely granulated in quincunx. The general smoothness of the valves is only interrupted by a few impressed growth lines. Posterior valve : mucro median, subprominent. Median valves : lateral areas raised, the remoter pleural areas crossed by half-a-dozen vestigial furrows, in and about which are a few scattered eyes. Girdle olive-green, alternately lighter and darker, narrowly edged with magenta, covered with small, finely striated, oval, polished, and densely subimbricate scales. Interior flesh tint passing into green, sinus narrow, deep, denticulate. Anterior valve having 8, median valves 1-1, pos- terior valve 10 slits ; teeth deeply irregularly pectinated on the edge and outside. Specimen figured ; 3S mm. long by 21 mm. broad. Station. — Under stones in 3-5 feet of water at dead low tide. Habitat. — Bottle and Glass Point, Vaucluse, Port Jackson ; Caloundra, Queensland. Remarks. — Two specimens of this shell were found by Mr. John Brazier at the Bottle and Glass Point in 1864, one of which was sent to the British Museum, and the other is now in the Australian Museum. It was not, so far as we can ascertain, previously described. Recently Dr. W. G. Torr, of Adelaide, forwarded a specimen for identification, labelled "Vaucluse," and several expeditions to that locality resulted in a fair number of specimens in all stages of growth being found. When alive, this shell is of a beautiful translucent green ; it is very clean, being apparently of a nomadic disposition, and therefore less exposed to the attacks of parasites, it prefers very smooth surfaces, and shows a marked partiality for the undersides of sunken glass bottles. Two young specimens have recently been taken by Mr. Tom Iredale at Caloundra, Queensland. 264 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. ISCIINOCHITON MAYI, Pihbry. (Plate lxxiv., tig. 28.) Ischnochiton (Haploplax) mayi, Pilsbry, Nautilus, 1895, viii. , No. 11, p. 128. Since this species has never been illustrated, we figui*e an example from Frederick Henry Bay, Tasmania, received from Mr. W. L. May. The description is iu a serial known to few- local workers, and we therefore reprint the following original description : — Shell, short-oval, moderately elevated, carinated, the side slopes slightly convex. Surface smooth to the naked eye, but finely granular. Color of valves and girdle uniform black above, or slightly brownish at the beaks when eroded. The intermediate valves have almost straight sutures, even a trifle concave in old specimens, the beaks projecting a trifle in young ones. Lateral areas distinctly raised (the diagonal distinct and rather wide), sculptured with several arcuate indistinct growth marks, sometimes showing very slight traces of coarse, low pustules, but these are hardly mentionable ; all over minutely granulose in diamond pattern. Central areas with faint growth- strice anteriorly, distinctly granulose at the sides, the granules arranged to form forward converging riblets, which, though slight, are apparent on the outer half of each valve ; central portion of central areas smoothish, with faint granulation only, beaks smooth. End valves sculptured like lateral areas. Valve viii. with mucro projecting, at about the anterior third ; the posterior slope concave below the mucro and then straight. Interior dull blue-green, greener behind the rather heavy valve-callus, the depth of the cavity rather lead colour. Sutural lamina? small, projecting less than half the length of a valve, sinus wide. Slits in valve i., 1 1, valves ii. to vii., 1-1 ; valve viii., 12-13. Teeth sharp, smooth and short. Girdle black, clothed with densely imbricating, coarse, convex, smooth scales. Length 8, breadth 6 mm. ; large " curled " examples would measure at least 10 mm. long. Divergence the same as in /. smaraydinus. AUSTRALIAN POLYPLACOPHORA — HEDLEY AND HULL. 265 LlOLOPHURA CURTISIANA, Smith. Chiton (Ischnochiton) curlisianus, Smith, Zool. Coll. Alert, 1884, p. 78, pi. vi., f. d. Lioloj)hura curtisiana, Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xiv., 1892, p. 2-42, pi. xxiv., f. 6. Enoplochiton torri, Bastow & Gatliff, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xx., 1907. p. 27, pi. iii , iv. This shell is common near Gladstone, where Dr. Torr, JMr. T. Iredale, and one of us have gathered it. Messrs. Bastow and Gatliff appear to have overlooked the original description and to have redescribed it as above. ACANTHOCHITES MAUGHANI, Torr

56 32 1 21 V 201 90 1 63 49 >> 63 47 1 2 h 221 50 2 70 16 50 13 70 2 11 14 k 221 48 51 G9 38 49 4 69 36 13 2 0 241 30 2 76 16 29 58 76 11 4 5 '■Skertehly — Loc. cit. p, 36. MINERALOGICAL NOTES — ANDERSON. 279 Girofla Mine, Chillagoe, Queensland. (Plate lxxx., figs. 4, 5.) This occurrence is represented in the Museum Collection by an exceedingly fine specimen of crystallised azurite associated with malachite and chalcocite. The azurite is of two generations, the earlier consisting of long prismatic crystals (to 10 x 2-5 x l-5cm.) of a deep velvety-blue colour and almost iridescent. The azurite is partly changed to malachite, which forms embedded patches of a vivid green ; the later generation of smaller, better developed crystals implanted on the older azurite and in cavities is unaltered and well adapted for goniometric determination. The whole forms an extremely beautiful object. Four crystals were measured ; they are tabular on /x (105) and elongated parallel to the b axis. The largest faces are those of a (100), m(110) and /x ; the base and the orthodome faces are strongly striated, as shown in the figures, and their signals over- lap slightly. The following combinations were observed (iv. is figured). Cryst. c a in V (T M 11 8 V h Q 0 e i. c a in l> I

P o / o i o ' o / / C 001 89 56 0 ■J 14 90 0 2 24 4 10 a 100 89 59 89 58 )! 90 0 1 2 1)1 110 49 26 89 58 49 39 > 13 2 V 021 L 19 60 24 1 22 60 25 3 1 25 28 9 1 6 101 90 1 44 51 > > 44 51 1 0 v 302 90 o 56 41 )> 56 32 2 9 h 221 49 58 69 57 50 13 70 2 15 5 Q 223 50 59 43 3 51 19 43 12 20' 9 0 241 29 53 76 17 29 58 76 11 5 6 e 245 27 50 38 34 27 53 38 33 3 1 280 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. PHOSGENITE. Broken Hill, N. S. Wales. (Plate lxxxi., figs. 1, 2.) The description is founded ou a hand specimen of 6 x 5| cm. almost entirely composed of stout prismatic crystals colourless and nearly transparent. The figured crystal is a fragment of 8x4x4 mm., terminated below by the basal cleavage. The largest faces are c(001), m(110) and a (100), but the develop- ment is very irregular. The faces are in general somewhat etched, but the reflections are good. The m prism is slightly striated in the vertical direction. MEAN ANGLES. Measured. Calculated. Difference. Forms. P P P o I o / o r 0 / / i C 001 a 100 0 6 90 0 0 0 90 0 6 0 VI 110 45 0 90 0 45 0 m 0 0 120 26 30 89 59 26 31 )> 4 1 , 0 201 0 8 65 23 0 0 65 20 8 3 'x 111 45 4 56 57 45 0 57 0 4 3 \w 221 45 3 72 2 )i 72 0 3 2 s 211 26 19 67 37 26 34 67 40 15 3 MONAZITE. Trundle, near Condobolin, N. S. Wales. (Plate lxxxi., figs. 3, 4.) We are indebted to Mr. Charles Bogenrieder for the loan of a collection of isolated crystals, the largest measuring approximately 3 cm. in greatest diameter. The colour is reddish-brown, the lustre good, but the faces in general are imperfect, being wavy and irregular In habit they are tabular on a (100) ; v (111) is a fairly large form. A probable new form, p (103) is present as a rather large face, which, however, is wavy and gives only an approximate measurement. The pinacoid a is slightly striated MINERALOGICAL NOTES — ANDERSON. 281 vertically. Three crystals were measured ; the figures show a typical, partly idealised crystal with all the recognised forms except g. MEAN ANGLES. Measured. Calculated. Difference. Forms. P 9 P 9 P o / o t o t o / / o / C 001 90 2 13 53 90 0 13 40 2 13 a 100 90 7 90 0 )> 90 0 7 0 hi 110 46 40 90 1 46 43 )j 3 1 11 120 28 9 90 3 27 58 )! 10 3 (J 012 28 1 27 54 27 43 27 36 18 18 e 011 14 28 43 40 14 43 43 44 15 14 u 021 7 21 61 41 7 29 61 49 8 8 X 101 90 3 36 14 90 0 36 29 3 15 * 103 3 36 n 4 50 — 1 14 V 111 38 44 49 35 38 37 49 50 7 15 d 1J2 28 43 27 40 28 12 27 42 31 2 California Creek, Mr. Garnet, Queensland. (Plate lxxxi., fig. 5.) This crystal, kindly lent by the Director of the National Museum, Melbourne, measures 1 x 3 x 2 5 cm. in the directions of the axes a, b, c respectively. It is brown in colour and is attached to a matrix of quartz and decomposed mica. In habit it is tabular on «(100) ; the faces are dull, and, for determination, pieces of cover-glass were attached ; thus the angles obtained are approximate only. The probable new forms, p (103) and o- (301) were determined by the following measurements with contact goniometer : — a'A P

0 0 X 012 0 0 19 50 0 0 19 52 0 2 k Oil 0 1 35 59 1 > 35 52 1 . 7 % 021 0 2 55 21 )) 55 20 • ) 1 V 031 0 3 65 11 )) 65 15 3 4 V 111 58 38 54 17 58 37 54 14 1 3 A REVISED CENSUS of the TERRESTRIAL MOLLUSCA of TASMANIA. By W. F. Petterd (Launceston) and C. Hedley, Conchologist. (Plates lxxxii.-lxxxvii, and fig. 16.) This paper is confined to the rehabilitation of species. We have endeavoured to supply illustrations of all Tasmanian land shells hitherto unfigured, to simplify the tangled synonorny and to arrange the species in genera and higher groups in harmony with modern classification. Our work has been facilitated by the loan of the collection of the Tasmanian Museum, for which we are indebted to the kind- ness of the late Mr. Alexander Morton, the then Curator. Examples of most of the species have been added to the Australian Museum Collection. Group ORTHURETHRA. Family PUPID.E. Genus Vertigo, Midler, 1774. Vkrtigo lincolnensis, Cox. Pupa lincolnensis, Cox, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1867, p. 39; Id., Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 80, pi. xiv., f. 16. Id., Pilsbry, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., 1900, p. 428. Id., (P. tasmanica) Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1882 (1883) p. 144, pi. i. Hab., Swansea. Obtained plentifully on the sand-dunes; extends to South Australia. Group HETERURETHRA. Family SUCCINE1D.E. Genus Sdccinea, Draparaaud, 1801. Succinea australis, Ferussac. Succinea australis, Fenussac, Tabl. Sj'st., ii., 1821, p. 27. Id., Gray, Ann. Phil., 1825, p. 415, pi. ix. Id., Ferussac and Deshaves, Hist. Nat. Moll. Terr, et Fluv., ii., pt. 2, n.d., p. 137, pi. xi., fig. 11. Id., Quoy et Gaim. Voy. Astrolabe, Zool, ii , 1832, p. 150, pi. xiii., f. 19-23. JS. legrandi, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 2. l'> I RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Var. queenboroughensis, Petterd, Mori. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 49. Hab. — Generally distributed and abundant in moist places. Obs. — We consider this to be the shell usually called Succinea strigata, Pfi., originally decribed from Port Clarence, Behring Strait. The localities for the types of S. australis are Kangaroo Island and the Isles of St. Peter and St. Francis in South Australia. Succinea tamarensis, Petterd. (Plate Ixxxii., fig. 1). Succinea australis, Fer., var. tamarensis, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 49. This was given as a variety of the generally distributed species of Succinea in the Monograph of Tasmanian Shells, but as pointed out in litteris by the late Professor Ralph Tate it is very distinct and resembles the European S. pfeifferi. The shell is acuminate, very thin, with a long attentuate spire. It is invariably thickly coated, with a layer of dark mud, and is then most difficult to recognise at its restricted habitat. It is well worthy of a specific appellation. Figured from a co-type, 9 mm. long, presented by Mr. W. F. Petterd to the Australian Museum. Hob. — In the tea-tree swamps on the western margin of the Tamar River, near Launceston. Group SIGM URETHRA. Subgroup HOLOPODA. Family ACAVID.E. Genus Anoglypta, Martens, I860. Anoglypta launcestonensis, Reeve. Helix launcestonensis, Reeve, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1852 (1853), p. 31, pi. xiii., f. 1 1, a-c. Anoglypta launcestonensis, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), vi., 1891, p. 22, pi. ii., f. 5, pi. hi., f. 2. JJab. — North-east Tasmania. About Scottsdale this fine shell may be collected in the dense myrtle scrub amid decaying vegetable matter and under logs. MOLLUSCA OF TASMANIA PETTERD AND HEDLEY. 2S5 Genus Caryodes, Albers, 1850. Caryodes dufresnii, Leach. Bulimus dufresnii, Leach, Zool. MiscelL, ii , 1815, p. 154, p. cxx. Id., Ferussac, Tabl. Syst., 1821, p. 48. Caryodes dufresnii, Semper, Reis. Phil., iii., 1870, p. 103, pl.xii., f. 23, 24, 25, pi. xvi., f. 7. Id., Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), vi., 1891, p. 19, pi. i., f. 1, pi. ii., f. 1. /,/., Pilsbry, Man. Conch., xiii., 1900, p. 125, pi. v., f. 85-93. Hob. — Generally distributed. It varies within certain limits, in both size and colouration, the largest being found in moist thick scrub. Noted localities are Mt. Wellington, Ringarooma, Magnet Range and Mt. Farrell. Genus Chloeitis, Beck, 1837. Chloritis brunonia, Johnston. (Plate lxxxii, figs. 2, 3, 4). Helix brunonia, Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1887, p. 7">. Obs. — In moist situations in tea-tree scrub. This species is very closely allied to, if not identical with Helix victorice, Cox, from the opposite mainland of Victoria. It belongs to a genus not known to occur in Tasmania ; so far it is only recorded from the locality stated. Figured from Johnston's type in the Tasmanian Museum. Hob. — The Springs, Cape Wickham, King Island. Family BULIMULID.E. Genus Bothriembryon, Pilsbry, 1894. Bothriembhyon gunnii, Sowerby. Bulinus gunnii, Sowerby in Strzelecki, Phy. Descrip. N.S.Wale.*, etc., 1845, p. 298, pi. xix., f. 6 (not 5 as quoted.) Bulimus tasmanicns, Pfeiffer, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1851 (1853), p. 260. Id., Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), vi., 1891, p. 21, pi. ii., f. 2, Bothriembyron gunni, Pilsbry, Man. Conch., (2), xiii., 1900, p. 18, pi. iii., f. 50, 51, 52. Var. brachysoma, Pilsbry, op. cit., p. 19. pi. iii., f. 53. 21 ' 286 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. JJab. — East Coast. Near the sea on trees and bushes. It is gregarious and very plentiful, but only known as from the east coast. Subgroup AGNATHOMORPHA. Family RHYTIDID.K. Genus Rhytida, Albers, 1860. Rhytida lampra, Reeve. Helix lampra, Reeve, Conch. Icon., vii., 1854, pi. clxxxvi., sp. 1295. Id., Pfeiffer, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1854 (1855), p. 53. Rhytida lampra, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), vi., 1893, p. 23, pi. ii., f. 8, 9, pi. iii., f, 3. Jf,ib. — Confined to the northern portion of Tasmania. Rhytida lamproides, Cox. Helix lamproides, Cox, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1867, p. 722. Id., Cox, Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 28, pi. x., f. 13. Id., (Patxda), Cox in Legrand, Col. Mon., 1871, sp. 7. Id., Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 3. Hah. — This species is very distinct from all others found in Tasmania ; it is strictly confined to the north-western scrubs where it is not uncommon. At the Montague River it reaches its maximum size, being but little inferior to H. launcesloneusis in this respect. The specimens that Dr. Cox had under review were but half-grown. The bluntly angular periphery is very characteristic. Rhytida ruga, Cox. Helix ruga, Cox in Legrand, Col. Mon., 1871, sp. 24, pi. i., fig. 5. Id., Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 7. Obs. — This is easily separable from the last and preceeding by its constant smaller size and sculpture. It is absolutely distinct and need not be confused with any of its congeners. Hah. — North, south and east coasts, always io dry positions in open forest, and usually under stones. It is not known from the western portion of the island. MOLLUSCA OF TASMANIA— PETTERD AND HEDLEY. 287 Rhytida sinclairi, Pfeiffer. Helix sinclairi, Pfr., Zeitsch. Mai., Hi., 1845, p. 154. Id., Reeve, Conch. Icon., vii., 1854, p. ccv , f. 1444 a. 1). Id., Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1882 (1883), p. 49. Rhytida sinclairi, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64. Helix bombycina, Pfr., Proc. Zool. Soc, 1854 (1855), p. 54. Helix dubitans, Cox in Legraud, Col. Mon., 1871, sp. 29, pi. ii., f. 7. ffeb'x vexanda, Cox, op. ciL, sp. 43. Helix margatensis, Cox, op. cit., sp. 54. Helix quaestiosa, Cox, op. cit., s. 59. /lab. — Generally distributed, but only in favourable positions in dense damp scrub. Genus P a r y p ii a n t a, Albert, 1850. Paryphanta milligani, Pfeiffer. Vitrina milligani, Pfr., Proc. Zool. Soc, 1852 (1854), p. 56. /(/., Reeve, Conch. Icon., xiii., 1862, pi. iii., f. 18 a.b. Hab. — Macquarie Harbour, in the thick pine and inyitle forests. Paryphanta 'fumosa, Tenison Woods. Helicarion fumosa, Ten. Woods, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, iii., 1879, p 124, pi. xii., f. 3, 3a. Paryphanta fumosa, Murdoch, Trans. N.Z. Inst., xxxv., 1904, pp. 156-160, pi. vi. Obs. — The specific distinction between this and the foregoing is slight. Hab. -Duck River, Mt. Montague, Mt, Bischoff. Paryphanta dyeri, Petterd. (Plate lxxxvi , tigs. 38, 39, 40). Helix dyeri, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 40; Journ. Conch., ii., 1879, p. 210. ^ 'Obs. — We figure a specimen in the Australian Museum collection from Distillery Creek, Launceston. Height, 1 -8 ; maj. diam., 3 ; min. diam., 2*2 \\\m. 288 RECORDS OF THE ATSTKALIAN MUSEUM. Hab. — North Tasmania. The type specimens were collected at Distillery Creek, near Launceston, where the species occurs in the scrub on the banks of the stream. Genus Delos, Hutton, 190b Delos nelsonensis, Brazier, //>-/;,>■ iflstmensis, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 187 0, p. 6G1. Rhenea nelsonensis, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (G), xiii., 1894, p. 64. Helix fulgetrum, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 31, pi, i, f. 11. Hab. — Generally distributed, but only in certain widely separate localities such as Mt. Nelson, Recherche Bay, Chudleigh, Surrey Hills, Mt. Bischoff, and in the vicinity of Launceston. Subgroup AULACOPODA. Family ENDODOXTIDJi. Genus Endodonta, Albers, 1 850. ENDODONTA ALBANENSIS, Cox. Helix albanensis, Cox, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1867 (1868), 'p. 723 ; Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 15, pi. iv., f. 2. Gharopa albanensis, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), vii., 1892, p. 163, pi. ii., f. 5, 6, 7, 8. Endodonta albanensis, Hedley, Austr. Mus. Rec, ii., 1896, p. 104. Helix officieri, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 57. //. macdonaldi, Cox, op. cit., sp. 32, pi. i., f. 14. //. kingstonensis, Cox, op. cit., sp. 40, pi. ii., f. 5. H. stanleyoisis, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 32. H. petterdiana, Taylor, Journ. Conch., ii., 1879, p. 287. Hub. — Generally distributed. Extends to Western Australia and N. S. Wales. One of the most abundant species which is extremely plentiful about the Nut at Circular Head. Endodonta antialba, Beddome. Helix antialba, Beddome, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1879, p. 23 Id., Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 41. Endodonta antialba, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), vii., 1892, p. 16G, pi. i., f. 5, 6, 7, 8. Hab. -.Mount Bischoff. Fairly plentiful under logs and ^in moist positions. Noted for the fact that half the specimens are milk-white and the balance brown colour. MOLLUSCA OF TASMANIA — PETTERD AND HEDLEY. 289 Endodonta architectonica, Brazier. (Plate Ixxxv., figs. 29, 30, 31.) Helix architectonica, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1S71, p. 696. //. assimilis, Brazier, op.cit., p. 697 (not //. assimilis, H. Adams). H. spectra, Cox in Legrand, Col. Mori., 1871, sp. 55. H.yunnii, Brazier, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1876 (1877), p. 168. Obs. — The original of our figure (Australian Museum) is from Hobart. Height, 4 ; maj. diam., 3*3 ; min. diain., 2"85 nun. Hah — Mount Wellington, Recherche Bay, Myrtle Bank, Mount Farrell, and Magnet Range. Endodonta barrenensis, Petterd. (Plate Ixxxvii., figs. 41, 42, 43). Helix barrenensis, Petterd, Mod. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 38 ; Journ. Conch., ii., 1879, p. 217. Obs. — Drawn from one of the type scries in the Tasmanian Museum. Height, 0'85 ; maj. diam., 2; min. diam., 1*75 mm. Hob. — Furneaux Group, Bass Strait. This species is appar- ently confined to the locality given where it clusters in depressions on the sand dunes. Endodonta bassi, Brazier. Fig. 16. Helix ammonitoides, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1870, p. 661 (not II. ammonitoides, Reeve). Helix bassi, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1871, p. 699. 290 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Helix vigens, Cox in Legrand, Col. Mori., 1871, sp. 30, pi. i., f. 12. Helix lottah, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, ]>. 37; Journ. Conch., ii., B^79, p. 216. Obs. — Our figure was drawn from a specimen in the Tasmanian Museum labelled " Mount Nelson." Height, OS ; maj. diam., 3 ; min. diam., 2-4 mm. //"A. — Launceston, Mount Nelson, and Domain, Hobait. Endodonta dispar, Brazier. (Plate Ixxxiv., figs. 17, 18, 19.) Helix dispar, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1870, p. 661 ; Op. cit., 1871, p. 699. Obs. — Figured from Brazier's type in tlie Australian Museum. Height, 2 ; maj. diam., 2'S5 ; min. diam., 2"45 mm. Huh. — Mount Wellington, Mount Bischoff, Cliudleigh, Middle- sex, Mount Farrell and Blue Tier. Endodonta hookeriana, Johnston. Helix hookeriana, Johnston in Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 38. Endodonta hookeriana, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, xxix., 1904, p. 182, pi. viii., f. 1-3. Hab. —Surrey Hills. On trunks of dead trees, under moss, and in damp scrub. Endodonta legrandi, Cox. Helix hgrandi, Cox, Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 23, pi. xii., f. 7. Helix kershawi, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1871', p. 2S. 0//.s. — The autl.or of this species appears to have distributed E. ricei, under this name. What passes in all collections as //. legrandi is a species at variance with the original figure and description. Hab. — Near Launceston, River Mersey, Circular Head, Table Cape, Mt. Bischoffand Mt. Farrell MOLLUSCA OF TASMANIA PKTTERD AND HEDLEY. 291 Endodonta ricei, Brazier. (Plate Ixxxiii., figs. 11, 12, 13.) Helix ricei, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1870 (1871). p. 660. Helix rotella, Brazier, op. cit. (colour variation). Helix onsloivi, Brazier in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 46. Id., Ancey, Journ. de Conch, xlix., 1901, p. 146, footnote. Obs. — This is usually known by the name of H. legrandi, Cox. Authors have compared it with //. iuloidea, Forbes, but it more nearly approaches H. funerea, Cox, from which it differs by narrower umbilicus, greater height in proportion to diameter and finer sculpture. We illustrate an example from Maria Island (in the Tasmauian Museum). Height, 25 ; maj. diam. 4-6 ; min. diam., 3'7 mm. Hab. — Generally distributed ; it is one of the most widely distributed species and very constant in character, but a white variety has been obtained. Endodonta mimosa. Petlerd. (Plate Ixxxvi., figs. 32, 33, 34.) Helix mimosa, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 33; Journ. Conch., ii., 1879, p. 211. Obs. —A specimen from the Tasmanian Museum, one of the type series, is here figured. Height, 0*85 : maj. diam., 1*65 ; min. diam., 1 35 mm. Hab. — Launceston. Among mosses on the branches of trees. Endodonta sericatula, Pfeijfer. Helix sericatula, Pfr., Proc. Zool. Soc, 1849 (1850), p. 127. Id., Reeve, Conch. Icon., vii., 1852, pi. cxxxii., f. 312. Id., Cox, Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 12, pi. xii., f. 6, 6a. Helix limula, Cox, in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 72. Hab.— North Tasmania. Extends to N. S. Wales. This has only been found in the scrubs about the northern portion of the island. Endodonta tamarensis, Petterd. Helix tamarensis, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 30. Endodonta tamarensis, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, xxvii., 1903, p. 605, pi. xxxi., f. 18, 19, 20; Austr. Mus. Rec, ii., 1896, p. 104. 292 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Helix rosacea, Petterd, Jouni. Couch., ii., 1879, p. 213 (not Helix rosacea, Muller, 1774). Hub. — North Tasmania. Extends through Victoria to .Mount Kosciusko, N. S. Wales. At the rifle butts near Launceston it is extremely abundant ; in fact it is the only locality hitherto discovered in this island. ENDODONTA TASMANIA, CoX. Helix tasmanice, Cox, Mod. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 22, pi. xii., f. 4. Endodonta tasmanice, Hedley, Aust. Mas. Kec, ii., 189G, p. 104. Hab. — Mount Wellington, George Bay, and Recherche Bay. Recurs on Mount Kosciusko, N. 8. Wales. So far this species has not been detected in the northern or western portions of the island. Endodonta subhugosa, Brazier. Helix subrugosa, Brazier in Legiand, Col. Mon., 1871, sp. 68. Id., Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1871, p. 697. /'/., I'etterd, .Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 35. Obs. — This is a really beautiful little shell, very boldly scul- ptured and differing from its nearest all)', //. dispar, by not possessing the bold chaiacteristic tooth inside the aperture. The general sculpture, riblets and finer lines, also differ from that species. The depression of the last, whotl near the aperture is extremely charateristic of the species. Hab. — Mount Wellington, Chudleigh, Lottah, Blue Tier, Myrtle Bank, Mt. Farrell. Genus Cys t o p e l t a, y Tate, 1881. Cystopelta petterdi, Tate. Cyslopelta petterdi, Tate, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1880 (1881), p. 17. Id., Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), v., L890, p. 44, pi. i. j Hedley, op. cit., vii., 1891, p. 24, pi. iii., f. 5. 1 This name, proposed by Tate (Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas. ISM) 1881)-), has escaped the compilers of the Zoological Record. MOLLUSCA OF TASMANIA — PETTERD >XD HEDLKY. 293 Obs. — This form is probably related to Ranfurlya coustancece, Suter.2 Hob. — Not tli Tasmania, and extends to Victoria and N.S.Wales. In the vicinity of Launceston this species is gregarious ; hiding under logs in somewhat exposed positions. It is not l>y any means abundant. Cystopelta bicolor, sj>. nov. Obs. — The most notable peculiarity of this undoubted new species of Cystopelta is the striking colouration ; the contrast of the rich brown upper surface with the bright green of the lower portions of the animal at once arrests attention. The preliminary description ma}' be stated as follows : — Mantle thick, does not nearly cover the whole animal, surface somewhat rough and rugosely wrinkled, colour a rich chocolate-brown, with minute specks of a darker shade ; foot, elongate, tapering, of a bright pale-green colour ; mucus distinctly green ; tentacles four in number, the upper smooth, black at apex ; lower part short. Length, 22 millimetres ; width, 7 mill. This slug is apparently conhned to the western portion of the island ; it is usually found singly in low trees. The specimens were obtained in the head of a fallen Melaluca tree that had smashed down on the scrub and let in the sun. The tree had been down some time, as told by the litter of rotting leaves and sticks. Other examples have been secured under logs, but it may be considered that the animal is usually arboreal in habit and thus, as well as in other respects, differing so essentially from C. petterdi. From its habits it is rare or rather difficult to obtain. All the specimens collected are exactly alike, except a slight variation in size. Hab. — Magnet Range and Upper Pieman River. Genus L a o M A, Gray, 1849. Laoma weldii, Tenison Woods. (Plate lxxxiii., tigs. 8, 9, 10.) Helix weldii, Ten. Woods, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas. (1876) 1877, p. 160. Laoma tveldii, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. Gl. Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 23. 2 Suter— Journ. Mai., x., 1903, p. 62, pi. iv. (from the Auckland Islands, N.Z.) 294 RECORDS OF THK AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Obs. — Figured from a specimen from Circular Head in the Australian Museum. Height, 12; maj. diam., L8T>; min. diam. 1*6 mm. Hab. — Circular Head. Plentiful around The Nut. Laoma mokti, Cox. Helix morti, Cox, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist , (3), xiv., 1864, p. 182; Cat. Austr. Land Shells, 1864, p. 22; Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 21, pi. xi., f. 13. J/r/i.r purculuxa, Cox, Cat. Austr. Land Shells, 1864: p. 21. Helix hobarti, Cox. Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 22 (not pi. xii. , f. 1 1, as quoted). Helix si?mlis, Cox, Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 23, pi. xii., f. 12 (not //. similis, C. B. Adams) Helix derelicta, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 1 1. Helix stellata, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1870, p. 662. Helix areuicola, Tate, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, ii., 1878, p. 291. Helix discors, Petterd, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 19C0 (1902), p. 2. Hab. — Generally distributed. Extends to S. Australia, Vic- toria and N. S. Wales. Always in dry positions nestling under stones. Laoma pictilis, Tate. (Plate lxxxvi., figs. 35, 36, 37.) Helix pictilis, Tate, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, ii., 1878, p. 290. Id., Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 17. Laoma jnctilis, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64. Obs. — Figured from a specimen in the Australian Mus< um from Duck Creek, Circular Head. Height, 3'75 ; maj. diam., 4 ; min. diam., 3"5 mm. Hub. — North-west Tasmania. Extends to S. Australia and Victoria. Quite recently this distinct form has been collected at the Alum Hocks, Brown's River road. Laoma ccesus, Cox. Helix ccesus, Cox, in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 21, pi. i., f. 4. Helix occultus, Cox, in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 23, pi. i., f. 6. Laoma ccesus, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64. MOLLUSCA OF TASM ANIA — PETTERD AND HEDLEY. 295 Hnb. — Widely distributed, but very local. At Recberche Bay, Southport, Circular Head, and islands in Bass Straits, it occurs literally in countless numbers, usually but a trifle above tide mark. Laoma minima, Cox. Helix minima, Cox, Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 10, pi. xii., f. 8. Helix collisi, Brazier, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1876 (1877), p. 168. Helix henry ana, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 21. Laoma henryana, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64. Helix furneauxensis, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 21; Journ. Conch., 1879, p. 2L5. Laoma fumeauxensis, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hisr., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64. Obs. - Dr. Cox's type of Helix minima, preserved in the Australian Museum, has served as a standard for the above synomony. Hob. — Generally distributed, but never abundant. It is apparently confined to dry positions, hiding under sim .11 stones and decaying leaves. Laoma halli, Cox. Helix halli, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 34, pi. ii.,f. 9. Id., Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 22. Laoma halli, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64. /lab. — Generally distributed and common. Laoma spiceri, Petterd. (Plate lxxxvii., tigs. 47, 48, 49, 50.) Helix spiceri, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 23 ; Journ. Conch., ii., 1879 p 212. Obs. — Drawn from a specimen in the Tasmanian Museum labelled New Norfolk. Height, 0-!>5 ; maj. diam., 15 ; min. diam., L3 mm. Hab. — Generally distributed. This has been collected at many widely separated localities, at all of which it is fairly plentiful. Laoma trucanini, Petterd. (Plate lxxxvii., figs. 44, 45, 46.) Helix trucanini, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 19. Laoma pipaensis, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64. 296 RKC0RDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. Obs. — Drawn fram a .specimen in the Australian Museum Height, 145 ; maj. diam., 2 2 ; min. diam., l-85 mm. Ilnb. — Launceston, near the First Basin ; among moss on the branches and trunks of trees ; also more sparingly on rocks overgrown by mosses. It is of gregarious habit being commonly found in huge numbers. It has also been collected at the Piper River under similar conditions. It is certainly distinct from all the other small Helices with which it associates. Laoma .iungekmannle, Petlerd. (Plate lxxxv., tigs. 2G, 27, 28.) Helix junyermannice, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 17; Journ. Conch., ii., 1879, p. 213. Flammulina junyermannice, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii.j 1894, p. 64. Obs. — Figured from an author's specimen in the Australian Museum. Height, 1*5; maj. diam., 2-5; min. diam, 20": mm. Ilab. — Launceston, found almost under the same conditions as the last but not nearly so plentiful. Laoma parvissima, Cox. Helix parvissima, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 39, pi. ii., f. 1. Endodonta parvissima, Hedlev, Austr. Mus. llec, ii., 1890, p. 104. Id., Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 22. Hid). — Generally distributed. Extends to Mount Kosciusko, N. S. Wales. This is a minute conical species that cannot well be mistaken for any other. It is remarkably abundant at Mount Bischoff, Mount Farrell, Brown River, and at the Middlesex Plains, nil widely separate localities. It would appear to prefer somewhat dry positions under stones and among decaying leaves. Laoma luckmanii, Brazier. (Plate lxxxii., tigs. 5, 6, 7.) Helix neglecta, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1870 (T871), p. 660 (not //. neylecta, Draparnaud). Id., Legrand, Coll. Mon., sp. 47. //. luckmanii, Brazier, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1876 (1877), p. 168. \Helix sitiens, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871. sp. 60. MOLLUSCA OF TASMANIA — PETTERD AND HEDLEY. 297 Obs. — Our figure is derived from an authentic specimen in the Australian Museum, labelled Mount Wellington. Height, 1*5 ; maj. diam., 2-95 ; min. diam., 235 mm. Hab. — Knock lofty, Mount Nelson, and foot of Mount Welling- ton in the south of the island, and the Cataract and Distillery Creek, near Launceston. Genus Flammulina, Martens, 1873. FLAMMULINA MARCHIANiE, Cox. Helix marchiance, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 25, pi. i., f. 7. Flammulina marchianoz, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64. Helix J'uscoradiata, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 61, pi. ii., f. 2. Hab. — Widely distributed, but confined to a few localities where it is numerous, notably Cora Linn, Springs, Mount Wellington, and near Ben Lomond. It is a very distinct form, having a remarkable glassy appearance. On Ben Lomond^it occurs associating with HeMx lampra and Helix ruga. Flammulina hamiltoni, Cox. Helix hamiltoni, Cox, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1867 (1868), p. 722; Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 32, pi. vii., f. 2, 2a. Flammulina hamiltoni, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64, Helix stephensi, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 26, pi. ii., f. 8. /(/., Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1879 (1880), p. 48. Helix plexus, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 28, pi. i., f. 10. Helix, ca^pta, Cox, op. cit., sp. 41, pi. ii., f. 13. Helix irvinae. Cox, op. cit., sp. 71. Helix pascoei, Brazier, op. cit., sp. 65. Helix scnqmlus. Cox, op. cit., sp. 76. Helix ducani, Cox, op. cit., sp. 56. Helix spoliata, Cox, op. cit., sp. 75. Helix floodi, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1871 (1872), p. 697. Helix milligani, Brazier, op. cit., p. 698. Helix laugleyana, Braz;er, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, i., 1875, p. 18. Helix kingi, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1870, p. 662. 293 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEl M. Hah. — This is perhaps the most abundant, most widely distri- buted, and at the same time most variable species as to size that occurs in the island. Examples from the Upper Leven River are about three times the size of those collected at Mount Wellington, although living apparently under like conditions. At Mount Farrell, and at the Mount Range they are also very fine, while at Scottsdale they are small and stunted. There is a remote possibility that they represent a group and not a single species. Flammulina wynyardensis, Petterd. Helix ivynyardensis, Petterd, Mon. 'Las. Land Shells, 1879, p. 8. Qhs. — This is a very distinct species and may be separated from all congeners by the prominent close-set riblets and by the very distinct colouration of the upper and lower surfaces. In the latter character it resembles Helix lampra, but not in any other manner. The sculpture is absolutely distinct from Helix hamiltoni. It is confined to the dense scrubs of the localities mentioned. Ilab. — Table Cape, Circular Head. Flammulina savesi, Petterd. Helix savesi, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 12. Qhs. — The coarse sculpture and thin texture distinguish this species which peculiarities are remarkably constant and separate it from the two preceeding species. //,,/,, — Table Cape and Rocky Cape. Found in the thick scrubs with the last. Flammulina fordei, Brazier. Helix fordei, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1870, p. 662. Id., Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1879 (1880), p. 50.; Flammulina fordei, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64. Helix trajectura, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 36, pi. ii., f. 6. Helix mixta, Cox, op. cit., sp. 38, pi. ii., f. 1 1. //. tra/iquilla, Cox, op. cit., sp. 37, pi. ii., f. 3. Helix tabescens, Cox, op. cit., sp. 77. Helix allporti, Legrand, op. cit., sp. 18, pi. i., f. 2. Helix austrinns, Cox, op. cit., sp. 22, pi. i., f. 3. Helix medianns, Cox, op. cit., sp. 19, pi. i, f. 1. Helix helice, C<>x, <>/>. cit., sp. 20. MOLLUSCA OF TASMANIA — PETTERD AND HEDLEY. 299 Hab. — Widely distributed. This is an abundant species only at Recherche Bay. At Mount Bischoff, Pieman River, and Mount Wellington it is comparatively rare. Flammulina diemenensis, Cox. Helix diemenensis, Cox, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1867 (1868), p. 723 ; Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 20, pi. \ii., f. 6, 6a. Id., Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1879 (1880), p. 49. Flammulina diemenensis, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6) xiii 1894, p. 64. Helix wellingtonensis, Cox, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1867 (1868), p. 723; Mon. Austr. Land Shells, 1868, p. 29, pi. vii., f. 5, 5a. Helix thompsoni, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 73. Helix daveyensis, Cox, op. cit., sp. 35, pi. ii., f. 4. Helix atkinsoni, sp. 62, Cox, op. cit., pi. ii., f. 12. Helix camillce, Cox, op. cii., sp. 74. Helix midsoni, Brazier in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1874, Addenda. Hab. — Generally distributed ; also islands in Bass Straits. It is common all over the island. Flammulina agnewi, Cox. Helix agnewi, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 27 pi i f. 8. Helix petterdi, Brazier in Legrand, sp. 67. Brazier, Proc Zool Soc, 1871, p. 696. Var., peroni, Brazier, op. cit. Hab. — So far this distinct species has only been found at the Huon Road, and the lower portion of Mount Wellington. It is evidently an uncommon shell. Subgenus Allodiscus, Pilsbry, 1892. Obs. — The following species are assigned to this subgenus by reason of their spirally striated nuclear whorls. Flammulina mathinn.e, Petterd. Helix mathinnce, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 26 ■ Journ. Conch., ii., 1879, p. 214. Flammulina mathinnce, Suter, Ann. Mag. Hist., (6), xiii 1894 p. 64. Endodonta mathinnce, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales xxix., 1904, p. 182, pi. viii., f. 4, 6. 300 RECORDS OP THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. //,,/,. — Near Launceston, at a locality a little beyond the First Basin. Tt has not, so far, been located anywhere else. Doubtless one of the most beautifully sculptured species known in the island. Flammulina roblini, Petterd. (Pates lxxxiv., figs. 20, 21, 22.) Helix roblini, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 38; Journ. Conch., ii., 1879, p. 210. Obs. —Figured from an authentic specimen in the Tasmanian Museum. Height, 1 ; maj. diam., 2*2 ; min. diam., 1*8 mm. Jlab. — Distillery Creek, near Launceston. Extremely difficult to find. Flammulina curaco;e, Brazier. (Plate lxxxiii., figs. 14, 15, 16.) Helix curacoce, Brazier, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1870, p. 659. Helix ramsgatensis, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 33, pi. i., f. 13. Obs. — The original of our figure is from Recherche Bay and is in the Tasmanian Museum. Height, 3; maj. diam., 5-85; min. diam., 4*75 mm. Jfub. — Mount Wellington, Recherche Bay, and doubtfully at Mount Nelson. A rare species that has only been obtained at the localities indicated. Flammulina otwayensis, Petterd. (Plate lxxxv., figs. 23, 24, 25). Helix otwayensis, Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 39; Journ. Conch., ii., 1879, p. 356. Id., Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas, 1879 (1880), p. 24. Endodonta otwayensis, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.Wales, xxvii, 1903, p. 605, pi. xxix., f. 10, 11, 12. Var. — alpina, Johnston, in Petterd, op. cit., p. 39. Jlab. — Surrey Hills. Qbs. — We figure a specimen of var. alpina from Surrey Hills, the property of the Tasmanian Museum. Height, 2*35 ; maj. diam, 3-9 ; min. diam, 3-25 mm. jfab. — North-west Tasmania. Extends to Victoria. Another rare species that is apparently confined to the portion of the island indicated. MOLLUSCA OF TASMANIA — PETTERD AND HEDLEY. 301 Flammulina bischoffensis, Beddome. Helix bischqfensis, Beddome, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1879 (1880), p. 23. Id., Petterd, Mon. Tas. Land Shells, 1879, p. 39. Charopa bischoffensis, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), viii., 1892, p. 167, pi. i. 1, f. 1, 2, 3, 4. Hab. — Mount Bischoff and Gad's Hill. At the first locality this is an abundant species, usually obtained in dense scrub under decaying timber. Flammulina gadensis, Beddomr. Helix gadensis, Beddome, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1879 (1880), p. 23. Id., Petterd, Mon. Tasm. Land Shells, 1879, p. 29. Charopa gadensis, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), viii., 1892, p. 168, pi. 1, 2, 3, 4. Flammulina gadensis, Suter, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (6), xiii., 1894, p. 64. Hab. -Mount Bischoff and Gad's Hill. Obtained in and under decaying timber. It is only known from the localities- stated, where it is apparently fairly abundant. Family ZONITID.E. Genus Helicarion, Ferussac (em.). 1879. Helicarion cuvieri, Ferussac. Helixarion cuvieri, Ferussac, Tabl. Syst., 1821, p. 20. Helicarion cuvieri, Semper, Reis in Philipp., iii., 1870, p. 31, pi. iii., f. 7a, b, pi. vi., f. 11. Vitrina nigra, Quoy & Gurnard, Voy. Astrolabe, Zool., ii., 1832, p. 135, pi. xi., f. 8, 9. Vitrina verreauxi, Pfeiffer, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1849(1850), p. 132. Id., Reeve, Conch. Icon., xiii., 1862, pi. iv. f. 21. Helicarion verreauxi, Hedley, Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, (2), vi., 1891, p. 24, pi. ii., f. 10-12, pi. iii., f. 4. Hab. —Throughout Tasmania. Extends to Victoria. Varies in size, the largest specimens coming from the extreme south of the islands. Helix vitrinaformis, Cox. Helix vitrinaformis, Cox in Legrand, Coll. Mon., 1871, sp. 58. /(/., Legrand, Hardwicke's Science Gossip, xv., 1879, p. 70. Obs. — In "Additions" to "Coll. Mon." Legrand observes that it is '• without doubt a Helicarion." Because the name was 22 302 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. preoccupied by Mousson, Petterd (Mon., p. 55) proposed to call it II . buttoni. The species has not been figured and we are not aware that either a type or an authentic specimen now exists. Under these circumstances it may be abandoned. Species erroneously accredited to Tasmania. Helix bisulcata, Pfeiffer. Obs. — Helix bisulcata was originally described by Pfeiffer,3 from Tasmania. Reeve1 further added that it was collected there by Gunn. An examination of the types of both species enabled Mr. E. R. Svkes5 to recognise II. bisulcata as the New Caledonian shell generally known by the later name of Helix beraudi. Helix subangulata, Pfeiffer. Obs. — This species was also described by Pfeiffer0, from Tasmania, and Reeve again added that Gunn was the collector. At the instance of one of us Messrs. E. A. Smith and J. Ponsonby examined the type ia the British Museum and identified it as Planispira zonalis, Eerussac, from Halmaheira. " Pupa varius, Bonnet. Obs. — This was originally described by Bonnet8 as from Tas- mania. It has been pointed out by Pilsbry9 that it is a variety of Cerion glans, Kuster, and is really a native of Nassau in the West Indies. Gunn misreported several marine West Indian shells as Tasmanian.10 Helix pkunum, Ferussac. Obs. — In the Paris Museum, we are told by Dr. H. Fischer11, two specimens of Helix prunum are labelled as having been collected b}' Peron and Leseur in the D'Entrecasteaux Channel. Several species from North-west Australia such as Area semitorta, s Pfeiffer— Proc. Zool. Soc ., 1S52, p. 135. 4 Reeve — Conch. Icon., viii., 1853, sp. 9G9. 1 Sykes — Journ. Malacol., i\\, 1895, p. 72. o Pfeiffer— Proc. Zool. Soc, 1854, p. 53. Eedley— Proc. Linn. Soc. X. S. Wales, xxvii., 1903, p. G04. - Bonnet— Rev. Mag. Zool., (2), xvi., 1864, p. 71, pi. vi., f. 3, 4. 9 Pilsl.ury— Man. Conch., (2), xiv., 1902, p. -J.-)-"). Hedley— Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1902(1903), p. 77. Fischer — Journ. de Conch., 1., 1902, p. 385. i MOLLUSCA OF TASMANIA — PETTERD AND HEDLEY. 303 . 521. STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN CRUSTACEA— McCULLOCH. 309 From L. natator, M. Edw., to which this species is closely allied, it is distinguished by the different proportions of the joints of the second pair of legs and in having a greater number of joints in the thickened antennular flagellum. Leamder intermedius, Stimpson. (Plate lxxxix., figs. 13-14.) Leander intermedius, Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., xii., 1861, p. 41. Id. Haswell, Cat. Austr. Crust, 1882, p. 19-3. Id, Ortmann, Zool. Jahrb. Syst., v., 1890, p. 523. Id. Grant in Sayce, Vict. Nat., xviii., 1902, p. 155. Carapace smooth and polished. Form of the rostrum variable, straight or bent upwards and extending nearly or quite as far forward as the scaphocerite. There are six to nine teeth above and four or five below, those near the apex placed so close together as to give the tip a hi- or trifid appearance. The posterior two or three teeth are placed over the anterior part of the carapace. The antennal and branchiostegal .spines are well developed, the latter being placed well behind the vertical of the other, and at some distance from the anterior margin of the carapace. The antennular peduncles are not so long as the rostrum, and the outer margin of their flattened portion is aimed with a terminal and median spine. The two external tiagella are united for rather more than one-third the length of the thickened flagellum, the outer margin of which may be obscurely serrated. The basal joint of the antennal peduncle lias a strong spine at its outer angle, and the flagellum is about as lung as the entire body. The external maxillipeds extend a little beyond the antennal peduncles, and their exopods are large and reach to the ends of the ante-penultimate joints. The first pair of legs are very slender and reach to, or a little beyond the tip of the scaphocerite. The second pair are more slender than those of L. serenus and are somewhat shorter, the end of the carpus in my largest specimen being but little in advance of the tip of the rostrum. The carpus is thickened distally and is much longer than the palm, being, in young speci- mens, equal to the length of the whole hand. The palm is swollen, and is only a little longer than the fingers. The three posterior pairs of legs are very slender, and the fifth pair is rather longer than the third. Except for a row of spinules 310 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM, on each propodua, they are unarmed, but there are short biushes of setae overhanging the bases of the dactyli, and scattered bristles on the carpus and propodus of each leg. The telson terminates in an acute spine, on either side of which is a long internal and short external one, both of which are movable. Two pairs of spinules are placed on the hinder half of the upper surface. Oba. — This species is readily distinguished from its allies by the position of the branchiostegal spine. From L. serenus it further differs by having the second pair of legs shorter, and t lie palm being much shorter than the carpus. The ambulatory legs are also more slender than in that species. Hab. — Common in Port Jackson, where it is found on weedy bottoms. It is also recorded by Miers4 from King George's Sound, S. W. Australia, and Tasmania. His specimens from Ovalau. Fiji Group, probably do not belong to this species, and those from Port Mode, Queensland, are possibly L. serenus. Grant records it from Port Phillip, Victoria. KlIYXCHOCINETES RUGULOSUS, StimpSOH. (Plate IxNxi.w, figs. 1-8.) Rhynchocinetes rugulosus, Stimpson, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., xii., I860, p.' 36. Id. Haswell, Cat. Austr. Crust., 1882, p. 180. The surface of the whole body is roughened by very fine and close-set lines which sometimes support a short but dense pubescence. In large specimens these lines are also present on the appendages, but in smaller ones they appear smooth. The carapace is armed with six large spines; one at the base of the rostrum and a second behind it, a pair of supraocular and a pair of antennal spines. The antero-lateral angle of the cara- pace is also armed with a minute spinule. The rostrum reaches a trifle beyond the scaphocerite and is inclined upwards towards the end, but its extreme tip is directed downwards. The upper margin bears two large teeth on the posterior half and five or six smaller ones distal ly, the last being the tip of the rostrum. There are eleven to thirteen teeth on the lower margin, which increase in length backwards to the eighth, those following being shorter and broader, and the last two recurved inwards. AMiers— Zool. Hep. "Alert," 1884, p. 295. STUDIES IN AUSTRALIAN CRUSTACEA— McCULLOCH. 311 The antennular peduncles reach to about the middle of the rostrum, and the shorter flagellum a little way beyond its tip. The flattened basal portion is armed on the outside with a long slender spine, and the joints of the peduncle are provided with brushes of short stiff setae. The basal antennal joint has a strong spine on its outer angle. The scaphocerite is long and narrow, the flattened portion being obliquely truncate from the tip. The flagellum is a little shorter than the whole body. The mandibles have a short cylindrical molar process and a large toothed cutting edge. The palp is three-jointed, the last joint and distal portion of the second being densely setose. The first maxillte are three-branched, the median branch being the longest and with a double row of teeth on its edge. The superior branch is curved and terminates in a short bristle, and the inferior is rounded with setose margins. &- Tiie second maxilla1 consist of Ave plates and a slender, twisted, median process. The two outer plates forming the branchial fan are the largest, and the hinder one terminates in extremely long setie. All the other plates have their inner margins setose. The first maxillipeds have also two outer fan-plates, which, however, are not setose. A long jointed lash extends from the inner angle of an oblong, setose plate. The median process is jointed to a thickened basal portion, both being setose. The basal joint of the second maxilliped supports a small leaf- like plate externally, and a long jointed lash springs from the second. The last joint is large and reflexed upon the others, its distal portion being thickened and set with two opposing clusters of bristles which are more numerous than those on the hinder part of the joint. The external maxillipeds are very large and setose, and reach beyond the scaphocerite. The merus has a spine at its distal end, and the last joint bears about six black thorns at its tip. The exopod reaches to the end of the merus. The first pair of legs are comparatively short and thick, and reach beyond the antennal peduncle. The upper margin of the merus ends in a strong spine. The fingers are tipped with three or four black points which interlock when closed. There is a patch of short hairs on the lower surface of the palm. The second legs are slender and reach beyond the first. Beyond the black thorns on the tips of the fingers they are unarmed. 312 RECORDS OF THE AUSTRALIAN MUSEUM. The ambulatory legs vary somewhat with age, being shorter and thicker in .smaller than in larger specimens. The first is the longest and reaches to or beyond the scaphocerite. The ischium is armed with a spinule, and there are three more on the lower exterior margin of the merus. The carpus lias two spinules, and the lower margin of the propodus bears a row of minute spiniform seta?. Thedactylus also has some teeth on its lower edge. There are scattered seta? on the end of the merus and on the following joints. All three pairs of ambulatory legs are similar, except in length. The telson has three pairs of spinules on its upper surface, and ends in an acute point, on either side of which are three spinules, the median being the longest. Obs. — Rhynchocinetes rugulosus is a common species around Sydney, inhabiting dark crevices between rocks and in weedy pools. It is very beautifully marked when alive with streaks and dots of a bright blue colour on a darker ground. There are also specimens in the Australian Museum collection from Lord Howe Island. According to Stimpson, the anterior part of the rostrum in the type specimens was tridentate. In all that I have seen there are five or six teeth at the tip of the rostrum. My specimens being from the same locailty as the types, however, places their identi- fication beyond doubt. Rhynchocinetes typus, M. Edw., is included in the Australian fauna on the authority of Miers,5 who wrote in the Catalogue of New Zealand Crustacea that it was found also on the coasts of Australia and Chili. I have not seen this species, and think that he probably confused it with R. rugulosus, Stimp., which, however, appears to be readily distinguished by having fewer teeth on the upper and lower margins of the rostrum. Having sent Miss M, J. Rathbun a tracing of my figure of R. rugulosus for comparison with specimens of R. typus, she has very kindly favoured me with the following notes. The rostrum has seven or eight spines above, near the tip, and they occupy a greater space than in R. rugulosus; there are nineteen spines below. Maxillipeds longer and more slender ; antennal scale not reaching the last segment of the maxilliped. Carpus of the first leg less than half as long as the propodus, and equal to the dactylus in length; margins of the palm not convex. Second leg very little longer than the first ; propodus about four- fifths as long as the carpus and not stouter than that joint. Miers— Cat. Crust. N. Zealand, 1876, p. 77. STUDIES INT AUSTRALIAN CRUSTACEA— McCULLOCH. 313 "C^t A lope australis, Baker. Alope palpalis, Haswell, Cat. Austr. Crust., 1882. p. 193 (nee. White). Alope australis, Baker, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxviii., 1904, p. 154, pi. xxx , tigs. 1-7. Obs. — Tliis is a very common species in rock-pools neur Sydney. Mr. \V. A. Baker has kindly compared specimens from here with his types, and confirms my identification. He adds that he has overlooked the division of the ischium and meius or the second pereiopoda into two joints each, they being obscure in his specimens. Mr. G. M. Thomson has also compared others with those used by him when writing upon A. p